Home

Impedance Analyzer - Agilent 4294A Manual

1. i 16047E Lead Component Test Fixture DUT capacitor 4294a0e006 30 Chapter 2 Figure 2 2 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Learning Operation Basics Preparing for a Measurement Preparing for a Measurement Prepare the Agilent 4294A for measurement by taking the following steps This procedure assumes that the Agilent 4294A has been correctly installed and set up as described in Chapter 1 Installation on page 17 Connect the Agilent 16047E Test Fixture Connect the Agilent 4294A to the Agilent 16047E Test Fixture for Lead Components Attach the 16047E test fixture to the test connectors on the front panel of the Agilent 4294A by gradually coupling the four BNC connectors and fastening screws of the fixture with the test connectors and accessory mounting holes of the instrument until they are in complete contact Fasten two of the four BNC connectors to the corresponding test connectors by gradually turning the BNC connectors rotation levers until each pair of connectors is securely connected Be sure to align the grooves on both sides Simultaneously turn the fixture s two fastening screws clockwise so that the fixture is secured to the instrument Finally secure the remaining two BNC connectors of the fixture by turning their rotation levers clock
2. Four Terminal Pair 2m Extension Device Connection aei Fixture Compensation Device 4294a0e080 This calibration procedure is applied to the following connections e The 16048H 2 m Cable is connected to the Agilent 4294A and the device is connected to the cable s end with a test fixture e The 16048H 2 m Cable is connected to the Agilent 4294A and the 16452A Liquid Test Fixture is connected to the end of the cable Step 1 Make sure that the adapter selection is set to Four terminal pair 2 meters 4TP 2M See Adapter Setting on page 67 for adapter selection Chapter 6 137 Calibration C Calibration for Four Terminal Pair 2 m Extension Step 2 Perform the fixture compensation in accordance with Fixture Compensation on page 151 NOTE When the measurement port is extended by 2 meters with the four terminal pair configuration neither user calibration nor port extension compensation is required for measurement they cannot be performed 138 Chapter 6 Figure 6 4 Step 1 Calibration D Calibration When an Exclusive Fixture is Connected to the 42942A D Calibration When an Exclusive Fixture is Connected to the 42942A When an exclusive test fixture supplied by Agilent Technologies is connected to the 7 mm port of the 42942A Terminal Adapter which is connected to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A and a device is connected to
3. Figure 8 20 Result of equivalent circuit parameter calculation using equivalent circuit B A IZI TOP 1 Me BOTTON 18 9 B ez SCALE 5G div REF ge VAC TAC a VFIBC START 4 Hz OSC 500 m olt STOP 118 MHz 4294a0j065 NOTE When the partial search range is set the equivalent circuit parameter is calculated based on the trace within that range For the partial search range setting procedure see Specify partial search range on page 267 The display of the equivalent circuit parameter on the measurement trace screen can be turned on and off with the PARAMETERS ON off key PARAMETERS on OFF When the equivalent circuit parameter has been calculated by pressing the CALCULATE PARAMETER key the parameter indication is turned on automatically Chapter 8 251 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Analysis and Processing of Result Calculate the equivalent circuit parameter and simulate the frequency characteristics When the equivalent circuit parameter has been calculated based on the result of sample measurement we recommend that frequency characteristics be simulated based on the equivalent circuit parameter by following the procedures to Simulate the frequency characteristics based on the equivalent circuit parameter below The adequacy of the selected equivalent circuit and validity of the parameter calculation result can be verified by
4. 0 000 271 Save the calibration data and trace data Data Save 0 0 ccc cece nee 273 Using files saved in the text ASCII format with the data save function 2 5 Save the display screen Graphic Save 0 0c ee eee eee eens 285 Overwrite on the file to be saved cece een eens 286 Create a file for automatic setting when power is ON 00 eee eee eee 288 Recall the saved tile srest Sw Se te eG chee BAe Ae ab ah eee Oe SE eee 288 Print the measurement results and internal data with a printer 0 0 0 0 000000 291 Set the print form color resolution and how to handle the paper 0000 291 Print the measurements in graphic representation 0 0 cece eee eee eee 293 Print the measurements and settings text 0 0 cece cece eee eee nee eee 293 9 Setting Using Control and Management Functions 14 Re displaying an Instrument Message 2 1 eee ee ee ee ee 2 298 Setting Checking the Internal Clock 2 2 ee ee ee 2 209 Setting Checking the Date 2 2 2 ee ee ee LOY Setting Checking the Time eine decd ae a dak in aM Bak Ge a ioe et OO Setting the Built in Speaker Beep Sound Sobers Ga ae a n Bae Aas a Zn abe Sine cdma ie in eal ee OD Turning On Off the Completion Beep 0 cece cee nee nes 302 Turning On Off the Warning Beep 0 0 eect een teen nes 302 Managing Files i i a e a3 arte ela a
5. Softkey Function GPIB command RUN TEST Refer to Service Manual N A INTERNAL TEST Refer to Service Manual N A Appendix B 411 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the System key Table B 93 System diagnosis Diagnosis menu Key operation System DIAGNOSTIC TEST Softkey Function GPIB command EXTERNAL TEST Refer to Service Manual N A DISPLAY TEST Refer to Service Manual N A MAC ADDRESS Displays the MAC address assigned to this Agilent 4294A on the screen A N A unique MAC address is assigned to each instrument The MAC address cannot be changed FIRMWARE REVISION Displays the version information on the firmware currently installed in this N A Agilent 4294A return Returns to Table B 74 System System menu on page 402 N A 412 Appendix B Table B 94 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Local key Softkeys displayed by pressing the Local key Local Local menu Local Softkey Function GPIB command SYSTEM Sets this instrument as the system controller when it is used in a GPIB system N A CONTROLLER This mode can only be selected by manual operation with the SYSTEM l CONTROLLER key Only one system controller can exist on each GPIB system Therefore if there is already a system controller you cannot set this instrument as the system controller
6. 25 Q nominal dc Bias Function dc voltage bias Range 0 to 40 V see Figure 10 1 Resolution 1 mV Accuracy 0 1 5 30 x onl mV at 23 5 C 0 2 10 30 X non mV beyond 23 5 C dc current bias Range 0 to 100 mA see Figure 10 1 Resolution 40 uA Accuracy 2 0 2 IV monl 20 mA at 23 5 C 4 0 4 IVmon 10 mA beyond 23 5 C dc voltage bias at constant voltage mode 326 Chapter 10 NOTE Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics Range 0 to 40 V see Figure 10 1 Resolution 1 mV Accuracy 0 5 5 Za X Unoy MV at 23 5 C typical 1 0 10 Za X non mV beyond 23 5 C typical dc current bias at constant current mode Range 0 to 100 mA see Figure 10 1 Resolution 40 uA Accuracy 1 0 5 IV mon 10000 mA at 23 5 C typical 2 1 0 IVinoyl 5000 mA beyond 23 5 C typical dc bias monitor dc voltage range same as the dc voltage bias setting range de voltage accuracy 0 2 5 Za X Won mV at 23 5 C 0 4 10 Z4 X Won mV beyond 23 5 C dc current range Same as the dc current bias setting range de current monitor 1 0 5 IV mon 10000 mA at 23 5 C accuracy 2 1 0 IVmonl 5000 mA beyond 23 5 C Outpu
7. Table B 31 Scale reference Scale Ref menu 4 Key operation Scale Ref Softkey Function GPIB command AUTO SCALE For the selected trace data trace memory trace of trace A B executes automatic AUTO scale adjustment based on the trace data when the key is pressed The trace is magnified and displayed so that the graph contains the data of all sweep points allowing you to easily grasp the overall characteristics You can select the data trace or the memory trace with the SCALE FOR key in this menu FULLSCALE VALUE Sets a scale value of the outermost circle in the polar coordinates display the REFV lt value gt distance between the origin and the outermost circle MKR REFERENCE For the selected trace data trace memory trace of trace A B substitutes the absolute value of the marker regardless of the A marker value into the full scale value of the outermost circle in the polar coordinates display As a result the marker moves to the full scale line position MKRREF SCALE FOR When both the data trace and the memory trace are displayed on the screen selects the kind of trace to which the scale configurations in this menu are applied as either data trace DATA or memory trace MEMO SCAF DATAIMEMO D amp M COUPLE ON off When both the data trace and the memory trace are displayed on the screen selects performing the scale setting in this menu for both the data trace and the memory trace t
8. Hardkeys The hardkeys are 46 physical keys located on the upper right part of the front panel they are divided into six functionally classified blocks 1 to 6 in Figure 3 1 Each hardkey is labeled with text that describes its function The eight keys laid out vertically along the right hand edge of the LCD display are called softkeys to distinguish them from the hardkeys Note that the term hardkey refers to all of the controls within each of the six key blocks including the circular shaped rotary knob O in the Entry block A hardkey either directly controls the functions of the Agilent 4294A provides access to softkey menus or both 44 Chapter 3 NOTE Front Rear Panel and LCD Display Front Panel As a typographic convention to distinguish between hardkeys and softkeys this manual uses a pair of brackets to enclose hardkey labels while showing softkey labels without enclosing them Hardkey key Indicates a hardkey labeled Hardkey Softkey key Indicates a softkey labeled Softkey Note that descriptive text in this manual sometimes only indicates key labels without following them by the word key When several keys are separated by a hyphen press them in the sequence indicated For example you should use the keystroke sequence Scale Ref AUTO SCALE to enable automatic scale adjustment As an exception numeric keys may appear without a hyphen in between for example the
9. Table 8 8 shows the contents of the saved calibration data Table 8 8 Contents of the calibration data Setup and data array Description Cal Point FIXED Setting of calibration and compensation data acquisition points Frequency Frequency points of calibration and compensation data Comp open Real OPEN calibration compensation data real part Comp open Imag OPEN calibration compensation data imaginary part Comp short Real SHORT calibration compensation data real part Comp short Imag SHORT calibration compensation data imaginary part Comp load Real LOAD calibration compensation data real part Comp load Imag LOAD calibration compensation data imaginary part Data contents of the trace data data array memory array data trace array and memory trace array If you specify saving one of the four data items of the trance data data array memory array data trace array and memory trace array on the data save contents selection menu the selected data is stored in the data part for each trace trace A and trace B The following example describes the contents of the data part when saving one of the four data items of the trace data one by one Chapter 8 279 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data Contents of the data part when saving the data array Table 8 9 is an example of the data part when specifying saving t
10. Hid WIDE SPAN 2 kHz Low Tac _ OSC 588 mVolt Low STOP Hz VAC CENTER 166 MHz NO START Hz EMPTY UPE UPF 4294a0j094 Press the ADD key and add a new segment to the limit line table This also displays the Segment Edit menu The initial value is input in advance to the segment added to the limit line table Press the START key The current start value of the segment is displayed in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the segment start value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 Jand and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set Chapter 8 257 NOTE Step 10 Step 11 NOTE Step 12 Step 13 Analysis and Processing of Result Set a limit to the trace and make pass fail evaluation e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value This setting allows a new start value to be written for the start value string START on the line of the segment being edited in the limit line table Instead of directly entering the start value of the segment according to Steps 8 and 9 you may also follow the procedure below 1 Press the Entry Off key 2 Move the main marker to the position of the segment start value using the rotary knob O or the step keys T V
11. at measurement BW 1 Chapter 10 337 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics frequency 50 kHz 0 4 frequency lt 50 kHz 0 8 Kgw at measurement BW 5 1 at measurement BW 4 1 at measurement BW 3 3 at measurement BW 2 4 at measurement BW 1 6 Yopc at dc bias range 1 mA o S at dc bias range 10 mA 1 uS at dc bias range 100 mA 10 uS NOTE f frequency in MHz Vinv oscillator level in mV Temperature Coefficient of the 42941A Impedance Probe SPC Proportional part at 50 Q measurement IZI deviation ppm C at frequency lt 1 MHz lt 5 at frequency gt 1 MHz ere 20 500 x 100 deviation urad C at frequency lt 1 MHz lt 5 at frequency gt 1 MHz Lig f lt 5 MHz 5 at frequency gt 5 MHz f at frequency gt 30 MHz 200 Residual part Residual impedance o 5x 100 mQ C 338 Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics Residual admittance joo uS C NOTE f frequency in MHz These characteristics apply when the temperature of the probe for a length of 30 cm from the tip is changed Parameters Y E and Z Figure 10 3 Parameters Y E and Z OSC Level 0 5Vrms 40Hz 100Hz 200kHz 1MHz 15MHz 110MHz sow om om
12. Appendix B 417 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Copy key Table B 104 Limit test segment copy start Copy Contents menu Key operation Copy SELECT CONTENTS LIMIT TEST SEGMENTS Softkey Function GPIB command START Prints the limit line table displayed on the screen with the printer connected to PRINALL the printer parallel port on the rear panel Note that the information is not displayed on the screen if you have not selected the ALL INSTUMENT key or the HALF INSTR HALF BASIC key in Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 ABORT Aborts the printing operation COPA TIME on OFF Toggles on and off the time stamp function used when outputting to a printer If COPT ONIOFF this is set to on the current time and date are printed first and then the specified screen information is printed This configuration is common to the TIME on OFF key in Table B 100 Copy configuration Copy Setup menu 2 2 on page 416 DISP MODE Selects upper limit and lower limit UPR LWR or center value and difference value VAL DLT as the display format of the limit value of the printed limit line table DISMAMP ULIMD NEXT PAGE Displays the next page of the list displayed on the screen NEXP PREV PAGE Displays the previous page of the list displayed on the screen PREP RESTORE DISPLAY gt Displays Table B 101 Copy data selection Copy Contents menu o
13. Chapter 7 201 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Configuring the Screen Assignments for HP Instrument BASIC Configuring the Screen Assignments for HP Instrument BASIC The Agilent 4294A can function as both an analyzer and an HP Instrument BASIC controller You can specify which area of the screen should display the information related to HP Instrument BASIC such as program and file lists or status data To do this follow these steps Step 1 Press the Display key to display the first page of the Display menu Step 2 Press the more 1 2 key to move to the second page of the Display menu Step 3 Press the ALLOCATION key to display the Screen Assignment menu Step 4 Specify the screen assignments for HP Instrument BASIC related information by pressing the appropriate key To Press Use the entire screen for analyzer functionality ALL INSTRUMENT hiding all HP Instrument BASIC related information Use the upper half of the screen for analyzer HALF INSTR HALF BASIC functionality and the lower half for HP Instrument BASIC Use the entire screen for HP Instrument ALL BASIC BASIC Display three status lines for HP Instrument BASIC STATUS BASIC beneath the analyzer screen NOTE Initializing the Agilent 4294A to its preset state Preset key does not affect the screen assignments for HP Instrument BASIC 202 Chapter 7 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Configuring the Screen Assig
14. Table 4 1 Guidelines for Selecting Accessories Type of Condition Accessory Features of Accessory Device Entire frequency range of 4294A 16034G Component size 0603 Entire frequency range of 4294A 16034H Can measure array type Component size 1608 components Entire frequency range of 4294A 42942A and 16191A Connected to the component s Component size 2012 bottom face Entire frequency range of 4294A 42942A and 16192A Connected to both sides of the Component size 1608 component Entire frequency range of 4294A 42942A and 16193A Connected to the component s Chip Component size 1608 bottom face component Entire frequency range of 4294A 42942A and 16092A For both chip and lead components Frequency lt 40 MHz Component 16034E size 1608 Frequency lt 15 MHz 16334A Tweezers type Cable length approx 1 m Frequency lt 10 MHz 16044A Connected to the device by four Component size gt 1608 terminals Low impedance device Circuit Entire frequency range of 4294A 42941A and probe adapter Probe type Solid Permittivity measurement 16451B Cable length approx 1 m material Permeability measurement 42942A and 16454A Ciaui 16048G and 16452A 16048G approx 1 m iquid Boks i ial Permittivity measurement matena 16048H and 16452A 16048H approx 2 m 16048G and test fixture 16048G approx 1 m 16048H and test fixture 16048H approx 2 m General Cable extension 42942A coaxial cable and test fixture 42941A
15. Chapter 7 171 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Manually Scaling the Active Trace for a COMPLEX Z Y Graph Manually Scaling the Active Trace for a COMPLEX Z Y Graph This section describes how to manually scale the active trace when the Agilent 4294A is configured to perform a COMPLEX Z Y measurement complex impedance for Trace A complex admittance for Trace B Scaling the Active Trace for a Complex Plane When your graph is a complex plane you can manually scale the active trace by specifying the reference values for the vertical and horizontal axes as well as the scale per division Activate the trace you want to manually scale To activate Press Trace A A Trace B B Press the Scale Ref key to display the Scale Reference menu Press the REFERENCE X VALUE key The Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen indicates the reference value currently in effect for the horizontal X axis this value is a real value The reference line for the horizontal axis in a complex plane is stationary in the center of the axis Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the reference value for the horizontal X axis e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e
16. Front Rear Panel and LCD Display ltems Displayed on the LCD Items Displayed on the LCD Figure 3 3 Items displayed on the LCD with split display mode off and full screen mode on 3 Marker 2 Scale Reference Measurement 1 Measurement Parameter Value 4 Menu Title Parameter 21 Title A Z Zea Label 20 Parameter Setting 7 Value Instrument 6 Marker Sweep Message Parameter Value 19 External Reference C 7 Marker Status Input Status 8 Marker Statistics Trace Bandwidth Analysis Results 18 Equivalent Circuit Parameters ya E F i 9 Limit Line 17 Instrument aed Test Result 10 HP Instrument 16 Sweep Start or BASIC Status Center Value 14 Oscillator Level or 12 Sweep Stopor 11 DC Voltage Current Bias CW Frequency Span Value Monitor Value 15 Test Signal Voltage Level Monitor Value 13 Test Signal Current Level Monitor Value 4294a0e085 1 Measurement Parameter Fields Each of these fields show the currently selected measurement parameters for either Trace AorB 2 Scale Reference Fields These fields show the current scale settings for Traces A and B 3 Marker Measurement Parameter Value Fields These fields show the measu
17. Key operation System PROGRAM MENU Save RE SAVE FILE Save FILE UTILITIES PURGE FILE CHANGE DIRECTORY COPY FILE Softkey Function GPIB command filename For the program menu System PROGRAM MENU this key immediately N A executes the program having the specified filename For file resolve Save RE SAVE FILE this key overwrites the old file having the specified filename with the present data using the same data items and format For file deletion Save FILE UTILITIES PURGE FILE this key displays Table B 112 File deletion confirmation Purge File menu on page 422 after the filename is selected For directory change Save FILE UTILITIES CHANGE DIRECTORY this key changes the current directory to the specified directory For file copy Save FILE UTILITIES COPY FILE this key displays Table B 114 Copy destination filename Dest File menu on page 423 after the filename is selected In any of the above cases if a softkey label is a directory name is located at the end of the name pressing the key changes the current directory to the label s directory and files or subdirectories under the directory are displayed as softkey labels Pressing the directory name moves the current directory to the higher level directory filename Has the same function as above N A filename Has the same function as above N A filename H
18. PHASE UNIT Toggles the phase display unit between degree DEG and radian RAD each time this key is pressed PHAU DEGIRAD EXP PHASE on OFF Toggles on and off the phase expansion display function each time this key is pressed ON off in the softkey label indicates ON state on OFF OFF state EXPP ONIOFF 1 When the measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y Key operation Meas more 1 3 more 2 3 COMPLEX Z Y Appendix B 363 Table B 13 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Display key Softkeys displayed by pressing the Display key Display Display menu 1 2 Display Softkey Function GPIB command SPLIT on OFF Toggles on and off the trace split display When the split display is on the scale is horizontally divided into two parts on the screen trace A is displayed in the upper half trace B in the lower half When the split display is off full screen display is invoked and trace A and trace B are displayed on a single scale Note that this function is valid only when the ALL INSTRUMENT key or the BASIC STATUS key has been selected in Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 SPLD ONIOFF HIDE INACT on OFF Toggles on and off the inactive trace display The inactive trace means trace B when trace A is active and trace A when trace B is active HIDI ONIOFF ACCUMULATE on OFF Toggles on
19. Structure of data saved in the text format Table 8 6 shows the structure of data saved in the text format The data is divided into 2 sections status block and data block The data block is further divided into 2 parts instrument setup part and data part Table 8 6 Data structure Contents Block name 4294A REV1 01 lt DATE Nov 1 1999 Status block MEASURE PARAMETER IMPEDANCE MAG PHASE DEG ADAPTER NONE SWEEP TYPE LIN FREQ NUMBER of POINTS 201 lt POINT DELAY TIME 0 Sec SWEEP DELAY TIME 0 Sec OSC LEVEL 500 mVolt DC BIAS OFF BW 1 lt SWEEP AVERAGING OFF amp POINT AVERAGING OFF lt Instrument setup part Data block Cal Point FIXED lt Frequency _ Comp open Real _ Comp open Imag _ Comp short Real _ Comp short Imag _ Comp load Real _ Comp load Imag 4 00000000000e 01_2 947073e 09_ 1 565653e 09_ 6 253917e 03_ 1 008368e 03_5 008568e 01_ 3 311127e 02 lt TRACE A FORMAT LOG amp lt Frequency _ Data Real _ Data Imag _ Data Trace Real _ Data Trace Imag 4 00000000000e 01_1 976390e 02_5 641327e 03_2 055326e 02 _0 000000e 00 lt TRACE B amp FORMAT LINEAR lt Frequency _ Data Real _ Data Imag _ Data Trace Real _ Data Trace Imag 4 00000000000e 01_1 976390e 02_5 641327e 03_1 593065e 01_ 0 000000e 00 4 Data part Symbols in the table Linefeed _ Tab Values
20. lower peak SEANPK NEXT PEAK LEFT For the peaks in the current active trace A or B that have been detected in the immediately previous search execution performs peak search toward the left and moves the main marker to the position of the first detected peak SEANPKL NEXT PEAK RIGHT For the peaks in the current active trace A or B that have been detected in the immediately previous search execution performs peak search toward the right and moves the main marker to the position of the first detected peak SEANPKR PEAK DEF MENU gt Displays Table B 67 Peak definition Peak Def menu on page 397 N A 396 Appendix B Key Definitions Softkeys displayed by pressing the Search key Table B 66 Peak Peak menu Key operation Search PEAK Softkey Function GPIB command SUB MKR gt Displays Table B 59 Sub marker configuration Set SMKR menu on page N A 390 return Displays Table B 64 Search Search menu on page 395 N A 1 If COMPLEX Z Y has been selected as the measurement parameter this is the primary measurement parameter value The primary measurement parameter value means if COMPLEX has been selected as the display format the value of the real part R or G of each complex parameter if POLAR the absolute value IZI or IYI of each complex parameter The amplitude of peaks means amplitude of crests parts that protrude
21. on page 124 to set the sweep type to the list sweep Follow the procedures described in Setting the Horizontal Axis of the Graph for the List Sweep on page 124 to set the horizontal axis of the graph To compare traces using the list sweep set the horizontal axis of the graph to the single span common frequency axis 186 Chapter 7 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Superimposing Multiple Traces Figure 7 23 Comparing traces using list sweep function single span mode 6 5 4 3 2 1 VAC IAC VIDE START 1 kHz OSC 666 mvolt STOP 16 kHz 4294a0j117 Figure 7 24 Displaying Figure 7 23 in segment span mode reference A Cs SCALE 568 pF diy REF 96 5 nF 96 1458 nF B D SCALE 16 Ufdiv REF 38 U i g 16 KHz EIE E role Gadd andar a ae ee a a ieee Cel CMP s SCALE 566 pF div REF 96 5 nF 96 1453 nF SCALE 18 Ufdiy REF 38 U Segment ita eae ac eee PNR Segment 52 P y Segment 4 elas agen E E E SOOM Sass ak ET eee erate Segment Z Segment 1 VAC TAC i WFIDE START 1 kHz OSC 10 molt STOP 1 kHz 4294a0j118 NOTE For all traces drawn by the list sweep function you can read their values by using the marker Also by specifying a certain segment as the partial search range you can execute Chapter 7 187 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Superimposing Multiple Traces search within the segment trace only For how to speci
22. 3 Key operations of more 1 3 more 2 3 MKR START allow the sweep parameter value at the position of the main marker to be substituted into the segment start value After setting in this order press the more 3 3 key to go back to the first page of the Segment Edit menu Press the UPPER LIMIT key or MIDDLE VALUE key This displays the upper value or middle value of the limit range at the start point in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Set the upper or middle value by one of the following methods using the keys inside the Entry block e Enter the value using the numeric keys 0 through 9 and and then press a unit key G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O to the right or left to set the value e Press the step keys T VJ to set the value This setting allows a new upper limit or middle value to be written for the upper value middle value string at the start point on the line of the segment being edited in the limit line table Instead of directly entering the upper or middle value of the segment according to steps 10 and 11 follow the procedure below 1 Press the Entry Off key 2 Move the main marker to the position of the segment start point using the rotary knob O or the step keys T 3 Key operations of more 1 3 more 2 3 MKR VALUE START allow the measurement parameter value at the start point of the trace to be substituted into the l
23. CAUTION CAN T CHANGE ANOTHOR CONTROLLER ON BUS is displayed ADDRESSABLE ONLY Sets this instrument in the addressable only mode in which an address can be N A set when it is used in a GPIB system You select this mode when there is already a system controller in the GPIB system Also when the controller passes the authority for GPIB control to this instrument this mode must be set ADDRESS HP IB Sets the GPIB address used to control this instrument from an external controller N A ADDRESS Sets the address of this instrument as a controller This address is used when a ADDRCONT lt value gt CONTROLLER controller passes the authority for GPIB control to this instrument IP ADDRESS gt Displays Table B 95 LAN address LAN Address menu on page 413 See Table B 95 GATEWAY ADDRESS Displays Table B 95 LAN address LAN Address menu on page 413 See Table B 96 gt SUBNET MASK gt Displays Table B 95 LAN address LAN Address menu on page 413 See Table B 97 Table B 95 LAN address LAN Address menu Key operation Local IP ADDRESS Local GATEWAY ADDRESS Local SUBNET MASK specified with the above keys and returns to Table B 94 Local Local menu on page 413 After performing the configuration turn the Agilent 4294A off and then on again so that the configuration takes effect Softkey Function GPIB command Ist Sets the 1st pa
24. If the limit line test function is turned on the pass fail result is indicated by the following four methods e PASS or FAIL is displayed in the Limit Line Test Result field on the right side of the screen e Ifthe fail beep setting is On BEEP FAIL ON off a beep sounds in the event of a failure e Ifyou execute the list display LIST VALUE key of the measurement parameter value measured value by following the procedures in Print the measurements and settings text on page 293 an asterisk indicating a failure is displayed next to measurement points that exceeds the limit Chapter 8 263 Figure 8 28 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Analysis and Processing of Result Set a limit to the trace and make pass fail evaluation e In the even of a failure the limit line test fail bit of the GP IB status byte is set to 1 For more information on the GP IB status byte refer to Programming Manual Limit line table editing with limit line test function B Bz SCALE 20 efdiv REF 4 69 6989 A laa MHz VRC TAG eT CENTER 180 MHz OSC 588 mVolt SPAN 28 KHz NO START Hz UPP Low STOP Hz UPF Low 1 99 99M 50 90 99 9961 50 90 2 99 996M 50 90 99 999M 90 50 3 99 999M 90 50 96 100 004M 90 50 4 100 004M 90 50 100 0071 50 90 5 gt 100 0071 50 90 100 011 50 30 4294a0j098 Move the limit line in vertical and horizontal directions on the scree
25. LINE on OFF For the current active trace A or B toggles on and off the line displayed on the screen corresponding to the target value SEATARGL ONIOFF SUB MKR gt Displays Table B 59 Sub marker configuration Set SMKR menu on page 390 N A return Returns to Table B 64 Search Search menu on page 395 N A 1 If COMPLEX Z Y has been selected as the measurement parameter this is the primary measurement parameter value The primary measurement parameter value means if COMPLEX has been selected as the display format the value of the real part R or G of each complex parameter if POLAR the absolute value IZI or IYI of each complex parameter Table B 66 Key operation Peak Peak menu Search PEAK Softkey Function GPIB command PEAK Searches for peaks pointed parts in the waveform of the measurement parameter values according to the peak definition specified with the PEAK DEF MENU key and moves the main marker on the current active trace A or B to the position of the highest peak If there is no measurement parameter value that can be a peak on the trace the marker is not moved and TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND is displayed in the upper left area of the screen SEAM PEAK NEXT PEAK For the peaks in the current active trace A or B that have been detected in the immediately previous search execution moves the main marker to the next
26. N A cancel Cancels deletion of the contents of the limit line table being edited from the edit screen The tables that have already been edited are kept in the edit area N A Table B 88 Key operation Limit line offset Limit Offset menu System LIMIT TEST LIMIT LINE OFFSETS Softkey Function GPIB command SWP PARAM OFFSET For the limit lines currently set in the limit line table sets the sweep parameter offset value By setting the sweep parameter offset value all of the set limit lines are moved in the sweep parameter direction by the offset value LIMIPRMO lt value gt AMPLITUDE OFFSET For the limit lines currently set in the limit line table sets the amplitude offset value By setting the amplitude offset value all of the set limit lines are moved in the measurement parameter direction by the offset value LIMIAMPO lt value gt MKR gt AMP OFST Substitutes the measurement parameter value at the main marker on the current active trace A or B into the amplitude offset value If you have set the limit center value in the limit line table to zero you can use this key to change the limit lines using the measurement parameter value at the main marker position as the limit center value Therefore you can use this key to maintain a constant limit line shape and difference value difference between the upper and lower limits in order to change only the center valu
27. Press the Copy key to display the Copy menu Press the START key to start printing To suspend printing press the ABORT key Print the measurements and settings text You can print out measurement data and settings in a list by following these steps Press the Copy key to display the Copy menu Press the SELECT CONTENTS key to display the Copy Contents Select menu Select the print contents Then the selected print contents are displayed on the screen and Chapter 8 293 Analysis and Processing of Result Print the measurement results and internal data with a printer the Copy Data menu is also indicated Print contents Key operation List of measurement parameter values measurement values List of measurement conditions Data definition list of user calibration kit Data definition list of fixture compensation kit LIST VALUE OPERATING PARAMETERS CAL KIT VALUE COMPEN KIT VALUE List sweep table LIST SWEEP SEGMENTS Limit line table LIMIT TEST SEGMENTS Figure 8 33 List of measurement parameter values measurement values STIMULUS Hz A lzZ 1 2 B amp z 39 99M 184 3 80 502 39 99011 183 46 80 409 39 990214 192 62 50 34 99 99031 181 75 80 261 29 99041 180 87 80 171 39 9905M 179 98 80 087 99 9906M 179 1 79 999 39 99071 178 18 79 907 99 9908M 177 26 79 822 99 9909M 176 32 79 72 39 991M 175 36 79 622 99 9911M 174 38 79 523 99 9912M 173 41 79 423 99 9913 172
28. Press the BRIGHTNESS key The Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen indicates the currently applied brightness factor relative to the maximum brightness 100 means the highest brightness Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the brightness factor relative to the maximum brightness e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value Press the COLOR key The Parameter Setting field in the upper left part of the screen indicates the currently applied saturation whiteness factor relative to the pure color 0 means white and 100 means pure color If you set the saturation to 0 the color becomes white and is not affected by any changes to the hue Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify Chapter 7 209 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Customizing Intensity and Color Settings for Screen Display the saturation factor relative to the pure color e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value To reset the color of an item to
29. SETCTIME lt hour gt lt minute gt lt seco nd gt MINUTE Sets the time minute SECOND Sets the time second done Finishes the time configuration and returns to Table B 89 Internal clock N A Clock menu on page 410 cancel Cancels the time configuration and returns to Table B 89 Internal clock Clock N A menu on page 410 Table B 91 Date configuration Set Date menu Key operation System CLOCK DATE Softkey Function GPIB command MONTH Sets the date month SETCDATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt DAY Sets the date day YEAR Sets the date year done Finishes the date configuration and returns to Table B 89 Internal clock N A Clock menu on page 410 cancel Cancels the date configuration and returns to Table B 89 Internal clock Clock N A menu on page 410 Table B 92 Built in speaker Beeper menu Key operation System BEEPER Softkey Function GPIB command BEEP DONE on OFF Toggles on and off the beep function that notifies the completion of storing calibration or instrument states BEEPDONE ONIOFF BEEP WARN on OFF Toggles on and off the beep function that sounds with warning messages BEEPWARN ONIOFF return Returns to Table B 74 System System menu on page 402 N A Table B 93 Key operation System diagnosis Diagnosis menu System DIAGNOSTIC TEST
30. at 7 mm Port of 42942A Z 1 S 1 E Ep S Yo Z x 100 Zxl Where Ep Eppwt Eposc Ep Yo Kew KYoscX Yopc Yo S Zs KgwX Kzosc X Zs Q Y Ep Zs See Figure 10 3 on page 339 Enosc at oscillator level gt 500 mV V f mV _ 1 100 500 at oscillator level gt 125 mV 0 lt 500 mV i r lt at oscillator level lt 125 mV 25 E 1 x 0 05 Epa mV KY osc at oscillator level gt 500 mV 1 at oscillator level lt 500 mV 500 Vinv Ko s at oscillator level gt 500 mV f ar eee 100 at oscillator level gt 250 mV 500 lt 500 mV V at oscillator level lt 250 mV 250 gt 125 mV Vin at oscillator level lt 125 mV 125 Vinv Epgw at measurement BW 5 0 at measurement BW 4 frequency 50 kHz 0 03 Chapter 10 335 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics frequency lt 50 kHz 0 06 at measurement BW 3 frequency 50 kHz 0 1 frequency lt 50 kHz 0 2 at measurement BW 2 frequency 2 50 kHz 0 2 frequency lt 50 kHz 0 4 at measurement BW 1 frequency 50 kHz 0 4 frequency lt 50 kHz 0 8 Kgw at measurement BW 5 1 at measurement BW 4 1 at measurement BW 3 3 at measurement BW 2 4 at measurement BW 1 6 Yopc at dc bias range 1 mA 0 S at dc bias range 10 mA 1 uS
31. at dc bias range 100 mA 10 uS NOTE f frequency in MHz V my oscillator level in mV Equation 10 3 Impedance Measurement Accuracy at 3 5 mm Port of the 42941A Equation 10 3 shows the impedance measurement accuracy at the 3 5 mm port of the 42941A Impedance Probe Impedance Measurement Accuracy at 3 5 mm Port of 42941A Zs E Ep Ha Yo Zl x 100 Zx Where Ep Epgw Eposct Ep Yo KgwX KYosc X Yopc Yo S Zs KgwX KzoscX Zs Q 336 Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics Y Ep Z see Figure 10 3 on page 339 Eposc at oscillator level gt 500 mV f EZ at oscillator level gt 125 mV 0 lt 500 mV i r lt at oscillator level lt 125 mV e 7 1 x 0 05 Epa mV Ky osc at oscillator level gt 500 mV 1 at oscillator level lt 500 mV 500 Vinv Kz OSC at oscillator level gt 500 mV 100 at oscillator level gt 250 mV 500 lt 500 mV Vinv at oscillator level lt 250 mV 250 gt 125 mV Vinv at oscillator level lt 125 mV 125 Vin V Epgw at measurement BW 5 0 at measurement BW 4 frequency 50 kHz 0 03 frequency lt 50 kHz 0 06 at measurement BW 3 frequency 50 kHz 0 1 frequency lt 50 kHz 0 2 at measurement BW 2 frequency 50 kHz 0 2 frequency lt 50 kHz 0 4
32. key to display the Mass Storage menu Before initializing a floppy disk disable its write protection feature if applied by moving the small tab in the corner slot of the disk to the write enabled position and then insert it into the floppy disk drive Select the storage device corresponding to the recording medium you want to initialize Storage device Key operation Floppy disk drive FLOPPY Volatile memory disk MEMORY Nonvolatile memory disk flash memory FLASH MEMORY If you have not pressed a key to select a storage device in Step 5 pressing the return key returns the display to the Save menu if you have pressed a key to select a storage device the display automatically returns to the Save menu In of the STORE DEV key s key label the selected storage device is displayed Table 9 20 Softkey label Selected storage device STORE DEV FLOPPY Floppy disk drive STORE DEV MEMORY Volatile memory disk STORE DEV FLASH Nonvolatile memory disk flash memory Press the FORMAT key to display the Format Confirmation menu Press the yes key to start the initialization of the medium of the specified storage device If you do not want to start the initialization of the medium press the cancel key The initialization function of the Agilent 4294A supports 3 5 inch 1 44 MB floppy disks only The initialization is performed according to the DOS format Chapter 9 311 Table 9 21 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Step
33. more 3 3 Displays Table B 48 Segment edit Edit Segment menu 1 3 on page 383 N A done Stores the edited list sweep segment and returns to Table B 47 List sweep List SDON Sweep menu on page 382 cancel Cancels the editing of the list sweep segment and returns to Table B 47 List SQUI 384 Appendix B Table B 51 Key operation DC bias mode DC Bias Mode menu Sweep EDIT LIST EDIT more 1 3 BIAS MODE Sweep EDIT LIST ADD more 1 3 BIAS MODE Source more 1 2 MODE Key Definitions Softkeys displayed by pressing the Sweep key Softkey Function GPIB command VOLT Selects the voltage source as the dc bias source configuration DCMOD VOLT CURRENT Selects the current source as the dc bias source configuration DCMOD CURR VOLT CONSTANT Sets the constant voltage source as the dc bias source configuration The output DCMOD CVOLT voltage is kept constant irrespective of the connected load Note that the maximum current is restricted CURRENT CONSTANT Sets the constant current source as the dc bias source configuration The output DCMOD CCURR current is kept constant irrespective of the connected load Note that the maximum voltage is restricted return Returns to the higher level menu Table B 49 Segment edit Edit Segment N A menu 2 3 on page 383 or Table B 54 DC bias Source Bias menu on page 386 Table B 52 List dele
34. on page 238 Define the cutoff point in trace bandwidth analysis When trace bandwidth analysis is performed the Agilent 4294A searches for the cutoff points on both sides with respect to the sweep parameter shaft starting from the main marker position The cutoff point used for this search is defined by the following steps Step 1 Activate the trace for which you want to analyze trace bandwidth Active Trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Step 2 Press the Search key to display the Search menu Step 3 Press the WIDTHS DEF MENU key to display the trace bandwidth analysis definition menu 238 Chapter 8 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Analysis and Processing of Result Analyze trace bandwidth Select the definition of the cutoff point in trace bandwidth analysis from the following Definition of cutoff point Key operation MKRVAL MKRVAL V2 J2 MKRVALx J2 MKRVAL V2 MKRVAL MKRVAL 2 2 Fixed value specified by numerical value FIXED VALUE 1 MKRVAL Indicates the measurement parameter value measurement at the position of the main marker marker 0 Fixed value Indicates the absolute value of the measurement parameter if there is no A marker it is a relative value with reference to the tracking A marker if tracking A marker that moves with the main marker is present and a relative value with reference to the fixed A marker if the fixed A marker is present When the fixe
35. 3 Sub marker 4 marker number 4 C Sub marker 5 marker number 5 Dis Sub marker 6 marker number 6 Gis Sub marker 7 marker number 7 Tisis For a sub marker that is on the sweep parameter value and measurement parameter value indicating the position of the sub marker are displayed to the right of the sub marker number of the softkey label in the above key operation column When you turn off the sub marker in the above key operation column changes to OFF Turning off the delta marker You can use the following procedure to turn off the delta marker on the screen regardless of whether the delta marker mode is delta marker mode fixed delta marker mode or tracking delta marker mode Activate the trace containing the delta marker you want to turn off Active Trace Key operation Trace A A Chapter 8 247 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Clearing turning off the marker from the screen Active Trace Key operation Trace B B Press the Marker key to display the Marker menu Press the AMODE MENU key to display the Delta Marker menu Press the AMKR OFF key to turn off the delta marker Turning off all main sub delta markers at one time You can use the following procedure to turn off any marker on the screen including the main marker marker numbered 0 the sub markers markers numbered 1 to 7 and the delta mark
36. 308 DIAGNOSTIC TEST key 320 dimensions 350 directory creating 304 deleting 309 display function 342 display allocation 202 Display key 45 display test 320 AMkr 56 down arrow 46 E EMC 350 ENTRY block 46 Entry Off key 46 environmental requirements 28 equiralent circuit parameter analysis 249 equivalent circuit analysis 344 EX1 58 EX2 58 external moniter terminal 52 external monitor output 349 external program RUN CONT input 349 external program run cont input 51 external reference input 348 external reference input connector 50 external test 320 external trigger input 51 348 F file 446 copy 306 deleting 309 how to manage 304 FIRMWARE REVISION key 319 firmware version how to check 319 fixture compensation 151 defining standard value 152 fixture compensation data data contents saved with the data save function 278 flexible disk drive 49 FORMAT key 310 Format key 45 formatting recording medium 310 frequency 324 front panel 44 furnished accessories 353 fuse 20 FxdA 56 G G n key 46 gateway address setting checking procedure 315 GATEWAY ADDRESS key 315 GP IB connector 52 H hardkey 44 hiding non active trace 199 high stability frequency reference 50 high stability frequency reference output 348 HOUR key 300 HP 42941A temperature coefficient 338 HP Instrument BASIC 345 HP IB 345 address setting checking procedure 3
37. 329 measurement accessory preparation 63 MEASUREMENT block 45 measurement parameter data contents saved in the trace data 283 measurement parameters 158 medium formatting 310 initialization 310 memory array data contents saved with the data save function 280 memory trace array data contents saved with the data save function 281 message instrument message how to display again 298 MESSAGE EMPTY 298 Min 55 mini DIN keyboard 25 port 51 MINUTE key 300 monitoring dc bias level 193 test signal level 189 MONTH key 299 N non operating conditions 350 NOP 97 number of points 97 numeric keys 46 o operating conditions 349 option 1CM rackmount kit 27 1CN handle kit 26 1CP rackmount amp handle kit 27 1D5 23 1D5 high stability frequency reference 50 oscillator level setting 105 unit 106 output impedance 326 P Peak 55 peak Index 447 Index definition 232 phase unit 197 point averaging 127 algorithm 128 POR 58 Por 58 port extension compensation 150 power cable 21 options 22 source requirements 20 switch 48 power requirement 350 PRB 58 Preset key 48 presetting 82 printer parallel port 344 port 52 printing 291 PURGE FILE key 309 Q quick start 29 R rackmount kit 26 rear panel 50 recall 270 Recall key 48 RECALL MESSAGE key 298 recording medium formatting 310 initialization 310 rotary knob 46 RUN T
38. 4294A and to return to the Local menu When you want to cancel the setting of the IP address press the cancel key instead of the done key The previous IP address setting remains without changes Reboot the Agilent 4294A This will put the entered IP address into effect When you set the LAN addresses IP address gateway address and subnet mask at one time you need to reboot only after the completion of all settings to put all of the LAN addresses into effect Setting Checking the Gateway Address Follow these steps to set or check the gateway address The gateway address is delimited into four parts by periods each part is independently set Press the Local key to display the Local menu Press the GATEWAY ADDRESS key to display the Gateway Address Setting menu Press the 1st key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the Ist part of the gateway address current set value is displayed Below it the entire currently set gateway address is displayed in a smaller size Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the Ist part of the gateway address e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TW to set the desired value The Ist part of the gateway address can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 255 Chapter 9
39. 48M 50M 52M 54M 56M 58M 60M 62M 64M 66M 68M 70M 72M 74M 76M 78M 79 9M 82M 84M 86M 88M 90M 92M 94M 96M 98M 100M 102M 104M 106M 108M 110M NOTE The same frequency points are shown in different positions in Table 6 3 because calibration compensation is performed at some frequency points depending on the different internal setups used with the Agilent 4294A 156 Chapter 6 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results This chapter describes how to configure the Agilent 4294A Precision Impedance Analyzer to display the measurement results in the way that best suits your needs 157 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Selecting the Measurement Parameters Selecting the Measurement Parameters Step 1 Press the Meas key to display the Measurement Parameter menu Step 2 Select the measurement parameter for each trace with a keystroke shown in Table 7 1 Table 7 1 Selecting the Measurement Parameters To select Press Trace A Trace B Absolute impedance value Impedance phase Z 0 Equivalent series resistance Equivalent series reactance R X Equivalent series inductance Equivalent series resistance Ls Rs Equivalent series inductance Q value Ls Q Equivalent series capacitance Equivalent series resistance Cs Rs Equivalent series capacitance Q value Cs Q Equivalent series capacitance Dissipation factor Cs D Absolute admittance Admittance
40. BASIC function It is different from the storage device selection using the STORE DEV key However the storage devices themselves are the same Press the return key to return to the Save menu The selected storage device is displayed in the box of the key label of the STORE DEV key Softkey label Selected storage device STORE DEV FLOPPY Floppy disk drive STORE DEV MEMORY Volatile memory disk STORE DEV FLASH Non volatile memory disk flash memory Press the GRAPHICS key to display the Data Save menu The file name input line for saving the display screen will appear in the upper left area of the screen At the same time the File Name Input menu will also appear Enter the file name in the character string input line by using a combination of the following keys Key Function Step keys MND Scrolls the input character list indicated below the character string line Rotary knob O Horizontally moves the cursor a located below the displayed character list Chapter 8 285 NOTE Step 7 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data Key Function SELECT LETTER or G n At the cursor _ of the character input line enters the character specified by the cursor A below the character list Numeric keys 0 through 9 and Enter the numerical value at the position cursor _ of the character string input line SPACE Enter
41. Cp Rp 1 Quality factor 158 Chapter 7 NOTE Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Selecting the Measurement Parameters The Agilent 4294A preserves the graph axis formats scale settings data and memory trace contents and trace definitions for each parameter for example Ls unless it is turned off or reset to its preset state This feature makes it easy to examine the DUT from various perspectives by switching among a number of measurement parameters For detailed information on configuring the settings that control how the Agilent 4294A displays measurement results refer to the following sections e Selecting the Graph Axis Format on page 160 e Auto scaling the Trace on page 164 e Manual Scale Setting for measurements other than COMPLEX Z Y on page 166 e Manually Scaling the Active Trace for a COMPLEX Z Y Graph on page 172 e Selecting the Target Trace Type Data or Memory on page 177 e Enabling or Disabling Coupled Scaling Mode on page 178 e Trace based Comparison and Calculation on page 179 You can set each measurement parameter without specifying the active trace or checking its current state Chapter 7 159 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Selecting the Graph Axis Format Selecting the Graph Axis Format When Using Cartesian Coordinates Unless the Agilent 4294A is configured to perform a COMPLEX Z Y measurement complex impedance for
42. GRAPHICS Save FILE UTILITIES CREATE DIRECTORY Softkey Function GPIB command cancel Cancels the storage or creation of a directory and returns to the higher level N A menu Table B 105 Save Save menu on page 419 Table B 107 Data save Save Data menu on page 420 or Table B 110 File utility File Utility menu on page 421 Table B 107 Data save Save Data menu Key operation Save DATA Filename entry File Name menu on page 419 Softkey Function GPIB command BINARY gt Selects storage of measured data in binary format and displays Table B 106 SAVDDAT lt string gt Filename entry File Name menu on page 419 ASCII gt Selects storage of measured data in ASCII format and displays Table B 106 SAVDASC lt string gt SELECT CONTENTS gt Displays Table B 108 Data save item selection Save Contents menu on page 420 N A STORE DEV gt Displays Table B 81 Mass storage Store Device menu on page 406 In of the softkey label the currently selected mass storage is displayed flexible disk drive FLOPPY volatile memory disk MEMORY or nonvolatile memory disk flash memory FLASH N A return Returns to Table B 105 Save Save menu on page 419 N A Table B 108 Data save item selection Save Contents menu Key operation Save DATA SELECT CONTENTS S
43. Monitoring signal source level voltage current with manual sweep enabled OTTOM 26 a fdiv REF G iF VAC 319 42 mvolt TAC 12 18 mA VIBE CENTER 168 MHz OSC 566 mvolt SPAN 20 kHz 4294a0j041 Using the Marker Feature to Determine the Test Signal Level You can use the main marker to determine the test signal level at your desired point on the trace Once you have turned on the test signal level monitor feature the Agilent 4294A preserves the test signal level value monitored for each measuring point on the trace during the sweep cycle This allows you to identify the signal level monitored for each measuring point even with the sweep cycle in the hold state You can place the marker at any measuring point on the trace to determine the signal level monitored at that point regardless of whether your sweep parameter is frequency signal source level or dc bias level Press the Display key to display the Display menu Press the OSC MON on OFF key to turn on the test signal level monitor feature pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey Labels Description OSC MON ON off Indicates that the test signal level monitor feature is enabled OSC MON on OFF Indicates that the test signal level monitor feature is disabled If the sweep cycle is currently in the hold state specify the number of sweep cycles see Specifying Sweep Times and Stopping Sweep on page 114 and then start testing the DUT
44. N A done Creates a new file using the string entered in the filename entry line as the copy destination filename Note that when the copy destination filename menu appears the copy source filename is already set in the filename entry line If the device and filename of the copy source and those of the copy destination are the same 257 Filename error occurs In this case before pressing done change the copy destination device with the DEST DEV key or change the copy destination filename with the SELECT SPACE and BACK SPACE keys N A cancel Cancels copying of the file and returns to Table B 110 File utility File Utility menu on page 421 N A Table B 115 Copy destination device Dest Device menu Key operation Save FILE UTILITIES COPY FILE filename DEST DEV mass storage Softkey Function GPIB command FLOPPY Selects the flexible disk drive as the file copy destination mass storage N A MEMORY Selects the volatile memory disk as the file copy destination mass storage N A FLASH MEMORY Selects the nonvolatile memory disk flash memory as the copy destination N A Appendix B 423 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Save key Table B 115 Copy destination device Dest Device menu Key operation Save FILE UTILITIES COPY FILE filename DEST DEV Softkey Function GPIB command retur
45. Numeric keys 0 through 9 I I Enters the numerical value at the position cursor _ of the character string input line 308 Chapter 9 NOTE Step 12 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Table 9 16 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Managing Files Table 9 15 Key Function SPACE Enters a space at the position cursor _ of the character string input line BACK SPACE or Back Space Moves the cursor _ of the character string input line one character to the left and erases the character in that position CLEAR NAME Erases everything entered in the character string input line You do not have to add an extension to the filename When you have finished entering the copy destination filename into the string input line press the done or x1 key to execute the save To cancel the save press the cancel key In either case the screen returns to the File Utilities menu You can perform Steps 11 and 12 with the external keyboard connected to the rear panel After entering the filename press the Enter key on the keyboard to execute the save The same extension as that of the copy source is automatically added to the filename of the copy destination file Deleting a File or Directory Follow these steps to delete a file or directory on a storage device of the Agilent 4294A To delete a file or directory on a floppy disk insert it into the floppy disk drive Press the Save key to displa
46. Selecting a Method to Start Measurement Trigger Source on page 111 the sweep specified in Specifying Sweep Times and Stopping Sweep on page 114 is performed regardless of which trigger event is selected Note that a sweep takes a longer time when measurement point is selected for the trigger event than when sweep is selected This is because the instrument requires an additional process to trigger measurement at each point 112 Chapter 5 Setting Measurement Conditions Selecting Polarity of External Trigger Input Signal Selecting Polarity of External Trigger Input Signal You can specify the polarity of the signal given to the external trigger input terminal on the rear panel by following the procedure below Step 1 Press the Trigger key to display the trigger menu Step 2 Press the SOURCE key to display the trigger source menu Step 3 Press the EXT POLRTY key to select the polarity of the external trigger input signal pressing the key toggles the selection Softkey label Selected polarity of external trigger signal EXT POLRTY POS Positive leading edge of TTL signal is detected for triggering EXT POLRTY NEG Negative trailing edge of TTL signal is detected for triggering NOTE See Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics on page 323 for characteristics of the signal required for the external trigger triggering with signal given to the external trigger te
47. Sofikeys displayed by pressing the System key Table B 76 HP Instrument BASIC IBASIC menu 2 3 Key operation System IBASIC more 1 3 Softkey Function GPIB command more 2 3 Displays Table B 77 HP Instrument BASIC IBASIC menu 3 3 on page 404 N A 1 Before displaying the result in the command line you must select the BASIC STATUS key HALF INSTR HALF BASIC key or ALL BASIC key in Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 2 Before displaying the result on the HP Instrument BASIC screen you must select the HALF INSTR HALF BASIC key or the ALL BASIC key in Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 Table B 77 HP Instrument BASIC IBASIC menu 3 3 Key operation System IBASIC more 2 3 Softkey Function GPIB command SCRATCH N A Enters SCRATCH in the HP Instrument BASIC command line From here use the external keyboard to enter required parameters and press the Enter key The contents of the specified memory space of HP Instrument BASIC are deleted For example if the SCRATCH command is executed without specifying parameters the program in the program workshops and variables in spaces except for the common COM space are deleted from the HP Instrument BASIC memory space RENUMBER Enters REN in the HP Instrument BASIC command line From here use the N A external keyboard to enter required pa
48. Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 NOTE Setting Using Control and Management Functions Seiting Checking the Internal Clock appears in the set parameter value field Therefore you do not need to press the HOUR key here You use the HOUR key when you want to change the hour setting after executing Steps 6 through 9 Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the hour e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value Hour can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 23 Press the MINUTE key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen a number indicating the currently set minute is displayed Below it the currently set time hour minute second is displayed in a smaller size as in Step 4 Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the minute e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value Minute can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 59 Press the SECOND key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen a number indicating the currently
49. This is one of the scale TOPV lt value gt configurations using TOP VALUE and BOTTOM VALUE BOTTOM VALUE Sets a value of the bottom line in the scale graph This is one of the scale BOTV lt value gt configurations using TOP VALUE and BOTTOM VALUE SCALE FOR When both the data trace and the memory trace are displayed on the screen SCAF DATAIMEMO selects the kind of trace to which the scale configurations in this menu are applied as either data trace DATA or memory trace MEMO D amp M COUPLE ON off When both the data trace and the memory trace are displayed on the screen SCAC ONIOFF selects performing the scale configurations in this menu for both the data trace and the memory trace together couple on or for each of them separately couple off 1 When the measurement parameter is not COMPLEX Z Y and the vertical axis is log display Key operation Format LOG Table B 30 Key operation Scale reference Scale Ref menu 3 Scale Ref selects the kind of trace to which the scale configurations in this menu are applied as either data trace DATA or memory trace MEMO Softkey Function GPIB command AUTO SCALE For the selected trace data trace memory trace of trace A B executes automatic AUTO scale adjustment based on the trace data when the key is pressed The trace is magnified and displayed so that the graph contains the data of all sweep points allowing you to easi
50. This will display the current setting for the number of points for the segment in the parameter settings area located in the upper left of the screen Use keys or the rotary knob of ENTRY block in one of the following way to specify a value for the number of points e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press the x1 key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value The above setting will add a new value for the number of points to the cell located in the segment row and the number of points column NOP of the list sweep table in editing mode The number of points that can be set for a single segment is an integer ranging from 2 to 201 Up to 801 points can be set to any segment Press the more 1 3 key to display the second page of the segment edit menu Press the OSC MODE key to select a signal source mode pressing the key toggles the mode Softkey label Selected signal source mode OSC MODE VOLT Voltage source mode OSC MODE CURR Current source mode The setting above will modify the unit according to the selected mode in the cell located in the segment row and the oscillator level column OSC of the list sweep table in editing mode Press the OSC LEVEL key This will display the current setting for the oscillator level for the segment in the parameter settings located in the upper left area of the screen
51. Trace A A Trace B B To set up marker based level monitoring press one of the following keys To Press Turn off marker based level monitoring OFF Monitor the dc bias voltage level DC V Monitor the dc bias current level DC I The setting you select for marker based monitoring must match the setting for dc bias level monitoring step 4 Move the main marker to your desired measuring point on the trace The Marker Statistics Trace Bandwidth Analysis field for the activate trace indicates the test signal level monitored at the marker position Marker based monitoring works using the same mechanism as but provides level values in higher resolution more digits than real time monitoring described in Monitoring the dc Bias Level on a Real time Basis on page 193 Although marker based level monitoring uses separate display fields for Traces A and B it does not depend on the active trace and provides the same level value regardless of which Chapter 7 195 Figure 7 28 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Monitoring the dc Bias Level trace is currently active Traces A and B are each associated with a field called Marker Statistics Trace Bandwidth Analysis Each of these fields can be used to display one of three types of marker based monitoring information the test signal voltage level the test signal current level and the dc bias level voltage or current For more information on marker based mo
52. a continuous sweep frequency range over the entire list sweep table would be obtained if you specify the range by modifying only the sweep stop frequency for each of the appended segments When editing of the list sweep table is done press the done key in the list sweep menu Press the cancel key to quit editing When you quit editing of a list sweep table by pressing the cancel key the table will revert to its original state before the edit mode was entered VAC IAC VFIDC START 99 99 MHz OSC 500 mvolt STOP 100 160516 MHz SEG START STOP NOP ose BIAS BW AVG 1 99 99MHz 100 01MHz 51 SOOm oF 1 1 Z 100 026MHz 100 038MHz 51 SOoOm 0Y 1 1 3 100 08MHz 100 09MHz 51 SoOm 0Y 1 1 gt 4 100 095MHz 100 105MHz 51 SOOm DY 1 1 4294a0j105 Selecting the list sweep as the sweep type You can execute the list sweep according to the completed list sweep table by selecting list sweep as the sweep type For how to select the sweep type refer to Selecting Linear Log or List Sweep on page 87 Press the Sweep key to display the Sweep menu Press the TYPE key to display the Sweep Type menu Press the LIST key to select the list sweep Setting the Horizontal Axis of the Graph for the List Sweep There are two types of list span modes that can be selected for the horizontal axis of the graph for the list sweep Press the Sweep key to display the Sweep menu Press the LIST SPAN key to select t
53. an instrument message such as an error message may appear in the upper part of this field For a list of common error messages Refer to Appendix C Error 60 Chapter 3 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display ltems Displayed on the LCD messages on page 427 21 Title Field This field provides a place to enter a title up to 64 alphanumeric characters that describes the current screen To enter the title use the keystroke sequence Display more 1 2 TITLE Chapter 3 61 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display items Displayed on the LCD 62 Chapter 3 Preparation of Measurement Accessories This chapter describes the required preparation of accessories after finishing installation of the Agilent 4294A and before starting measurements If you have not completed installation please refer to Chapter Installation on page 17 before proceeding to this chapter 63 Preparation of Measurement Accessories Selecting Accessories for Measurement Selecting Accessories for Measurement Select the appropriate accessories test fixture adapter probe cable etc for your measurement in accordance with Table 4 1 Detailed specifications are described in catalogs or in the operation manual of each accessory Table 4 1 Guidelines for Selecting Accessories Type of Condition Accessory Features of Accessory Device Entire frequency range of 4294A 16047E Equipped with screws
54. and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value Chapter 5 103 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting Fixed Frequency CW Frequency Setting Fixed Frequency CW Frequency Follow the steps below to specify a fixed frequency for the signal source when the sweep parameter is any item other than frequency i e oscillator level or dc bias Step 1 Press the Source key to display the signal source menu Step 2 Press the FREQUENCY key This will display the current setting for the fixed frequency for the segment in the parameter settings area in the upper left part of the screen Step 3 Use the keys or the rotary knob in the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the fixed frequency e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value 104 Chapter5 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting Oscillator Level Setting Oscillator Level Follow the steps below to specify a fixed oscillator level AC level when the sweep parameter is any item other than oscillator level i e frequency or dc bias Step 1 Press the Source key to display the signal source menu Step
55. coaxial cable and test fixture 42941A approx 1 5 m 1 Furnished with the 42941A Impedance Probe Kit NOTE The 16085B Terminal Adapter cannot be used in place of the 42942A Terminal Adapter The 16048A BNC 1 m Cable the 16048B SMC 1 m Cable the 16048D BNC 2 m Cable or the 16048E BNC 4 m Cable cannot be used in place of the 16048G or 16048H Chapter 4 65 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Preparation of Measurement Accessories Connecting the Accessories Connecting the Accessories Connect the measurement accessories to the Agilent 4294A Press the power switch on the front panel of the Agilent 4294A to turn it on For more information on connecting accessories to the Agilent 4294A for measurement refer to the operation manual furnished with each accessory Whenever you connect accessories to or disconnect accessories from the Agilent 4294A you must first turn off the dc bias Key strokes Source BIAS MENU BIAS ON off If this step is not taken the dc bias may destroy the device When you connect or disconnect accessories with the Agilent 4294A turned on error messages such as ADC OVERLOAD or BRIDGE UNBALANCED may be displayed on the LCD However this does not cause any special problem To turn off the message press Entry Off key The power on self test is executed at power on If an error is detected in the power on self test the message CAUTION POWER ON TEST FAILED is
56. constant voltage mode BIAS MODE C CURR Current source constant current mode The unit for the value in the cell located in the segment row and the dc bias level column BIAS is modified according to the selected mode Remember that you should verify whether the mode is constant non constant voltage current by using the key label of the BIAS MODE key When a voltage source non constant or constant voltage mode is selected for the dc bias mode press the DC BIAS VOLTAGE key This will display the current setting for the dc voltage bias level value for the segment in the parameter settings located in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the dc voltage bias level e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press the unit key G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TW to set the desired value The setting above will add a new value for the dc voltage bias level to the cell located in the segment row and the dc bias column BIAS of the list sweep table in editing mode When a current source non constant or constant current mode is selected for the dc bias mode press the DC BIAS CURRENT key This will display the current setting for the dc current bias level value for the segment in the parameter settings located in the upp
57. e EN 50082 1 1992 IEC 61000 4 4 1995 0 5 kV Signal Line 1 kV Power Line e EN 61000 3 2 1995 IEC 61000 3 2 1995 e EN 61000 3 3 1995 IEC 61000 3 3 1994 Safety EN 61010 1 1993 Amd2 1995 IEC61010 1 1990 Am1 1992 Am2 1995 e CSA C22 2 NO 1010 1 92 Power requirements 90 V to 132 V or 198 V to 264 V automatically switched 47 Hz to 63 Hz 300 VA max Weight 25 kg SPC Dimensions see Figure 10 10 through Figure 10 12 350 Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics General Characteristics Figure 10 10 Dimensions front view with Option 1CN 1D5 typical in millimeters JAOTIVE TARGE C 0 CEE ia Farmar m E og EJEJEC Oo vob 1 STALLS CUCL oon IM ARKERL IHSTAUHENT STATEC Orm HGAoBaag eJ eGo aoe S_ Figure 10 1
58. more 1 3 MASS STORE is applicable when using the storage devices of the Agilent 4294A through the HP Instrument BASIC function It is different from the storage device selection using the STORE DEV key However the storage devices themselves are the same Press the return key to return to the Save menu The selected storage device is displayed in the box of the key label of the STORE DEV key Softkey label Selected storage device STORE DEV FLOPPY Floppy disk drive STORE DEV MEMORY Volatile memory disk STORE DEV FLASH Non volatile memory disk flash memory Press the DATA key to display the Data Save menu Press the SELECT CONTENTS key to display the Data Contents Select menu Chapter 8 273 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data Type data saved Step 7 Select the save on off for the following data toggle keys Softkey label Calibration data user calibration and fixture compensation data Data array measurement data before measurement parameter conversion and data operation and transmission to data trace Memory array memory data before measurement parameter conversion and data operation and transmission to memory trace Data trace array data displayed on the screen as data trace Memory trace array data displayed on the screen as memory trace How to use the saved data CAL ON off ON save CAL on OFF OFF not save DATA ON of
59. the sweep group count NUMG lt value gt Selects the automatic continuous sweep mode The trace is updated for each sweep CONT SOURCE gt Displays Table B 57 Trigger source Trig source menu on page 388 In of the softkey label the currently selected trigger source is displayed internal trigger FREE RUN external trigger input terminal EXTERNAL GPIB LAN HP IB or manual MANUAL N A Table B 57 Key operation Trigger source Trig source menu Trigger SOURCE sweep ON SWEEP This configuration is valid for each trigger mode of EXTERNAL GPIB LAN and MANUAL described above For FREE RUN this key has no meaning Softkey Function GPIB command FREE RUN Selects the internal trigger mode free run in which triggers are automatically TRGS INT generated inside the 4294A EXTERNAL Selects triggers from the external trigger input terminal BNC f connector on TRGS EXT the rear panel HP IB LAN Selects triggers via GPIB or LAN If this mode is selected you can generate TRGS BUS triggers from the external controller using the TRG command MANUAL Selects manual triggering After the selection pressing the MANUAL key TRGS MAN generates a single trigger EVENT Selects applying a trigger to each measurement point ON POINT or to each TRGEVE SWEIPOIN EXT POLRTY Selects the polarity of the trigger signal supplied from th
60. to green to blue to black and back to red 2 The degree of whiteness of color from white to pure color 370 Appendix B Table B 27 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Scale Ref key Scale Ref Softkeys displayed by pressing the Scale Ref key Scale reference Scale Ref menu 1 1 2 Softkey Function GPIB command AUTO SCALE For the selected trace data trace memory trace of trace A B executes automatic scale adjustment based on the trace data when the key is pressed The trace is magnified and displayed so that the graph contains the entire data allowing you to easily grasp the overall characteristics You can select the data trace or the memory trace with the SCALE FOR key in Table B 28 Scale reference Scale Ref menu 1 2 2 on page 371 AUTO SCALE DIV For the selected trace data trace memory trace of trace A B sets a value for the scale per division in the axis for measured value This is one of the scale configurations using REFERENCE POSITION REFERENCE VALUE and SCALE DIV SCAL lt value gt REFERENCE POSITION For the selected trace data trace memory trace of trace A B sets the position of the scale reference line The position of the reference line is indicated by a value assuming that the lowest line of the graph is 0 and the highest line is 10 This is one of the scale configurations using REFERENCE POSITION REFERE
61. 16452A 1 meter 4TP 1M 4294A with a 1 meter long four terminal pair 16334A Four terminal pair V V z 1 meter 4TP 1M configuration and connect the device 16451B Four terminal pair y 1 meter 4TP 1M C Extend the four terminal 16048H and test fixture Four terminal pair y y pair port of the Agilent 16048H and 16452A 2 meters 4TP 2M 4294A with a 2 meter long four terminal pair configuration and connect the device D Connect the 42942A 42942A and 16092A 42942A Terminal V V V V directly to the four terminal 42942A and 16093A Adapter 7mm pair port of the Agilent 42942A and 16093B 42942A 4294A connect a dedicated 42942A and 16191A test fixture to the 7 mm port 42942A and 16192A and then connect the device 42942A and 16193A to the fixture contacts 42942A and 16454A Chapter 4 67 Preparation of Measurement Accessories Adapter Setting Table 4 2 Device Connections and Adapter Settings Adapter Setup data measurement i 7 Adapter V required blank not required Device Connection Accessory Selection Phase OPEN SHORT LOAD E Connect the 42942A 42942A coaxial cable and test 42942A Terminal V V V V directly to the four terminal fixture Adapter pair port of the Agilent 7mm 42942A 4294A connect a coaxial cable to the 7 mm port connect a test fixture and then connect the device to the fixture contacts F Connect the 42941A 42941A and probe adapter 42941A Impedance V V V V directly to the four termin
62. 2 Press the LEVEL key This will display the current setting for the fixed oscillator level for the segment in the parameter settings area in the upper left part of the screen Step 3 Use the keys or the rotary knob in the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the fixed oscillator level e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TW to set the desired value NOTE See Selecting Unit for Oscillator Level Voltage or Current on page 106 for selecting unit voltage or current of the fixed oscillator level Chapter 5 105 A Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Setting Measurement Conditions Selecting Unit for Oscillator Level Voltage or Current Selecting Unit for Oscillator Level Voltage or Current Press the Source key to display the signal source menu Press the OSC UNIT key to select the unit for setting and displaying the oscillator level pressing the key toggles the selection Softkey label Selected unit for oscillator level OSC UNIT VOLT Voltage OSC UNIT CURR Current The unit specified for oscillator level through the steps above will be applied to the unit for oscillator level sweep voltage level sweep or current level sweep and the unit for the fixed oscillator level when sweeping parameters
63. 315 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 NOTE Step 12 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Setting Checking the LAN Press the 2nd key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the 2nd part of the gateway address current set value is displayed Below it the entire currently set IP address is displayed in a smaller size Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the 2nd part of the gateway address e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value The 2nd part of the gateway address can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 255 Press the 3rd key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the 3rd part of the gateway address current set value is displayed Below it the entire currently set gateway address is displayed in a smaller size Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the 3rd part of the gateway address e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value The 3rd part of the gateway address can be
64. 35 Key operation Key Definitions Softkeys displayed by pressing the Cal key Adapter configuration Adapter menu Cal ADAPTER Softkey Function GPIB command SETUP gt Displays Table B 36 Adapter setup Adapter Setup menu on page 377 If you select an adapter configuration corresponding to a key other than the NONE key HP 16047E test fixture etc you have to enter this menu when you use the adapter 4TP 1M 4TP 2M 7mm 42942A PROBE 42941 A for the first time and measure the calibration standard The setup data of adapters once set up are stored in the internal non volatile memory of the 4294A and therefore re setup is not required under normal conditions If the NONE key is selected as the adapter configuration this SETUP key is invalid setup is not required N A return Returns to Table B 34 Calibration Calibration menu on page 376 N A Table B 36 Key operation Adapter setup Adapter Setup menu Cal ADAPTER SETUP Softkey Function GPIB command PHASE COMP Executes the measurement of the phase compensation data The content of is before the data acquisition and changes to DONE after the data acquisition If the 4TP IM key 4TP 2M key 7mm 42942A key or PROBE 42941A key has been selected in Table B 35 Adapter configuration Adapter menu on page 376 this phase compensation data must be measured
65. 353 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Furnished Accessories 354 Chapter 10 Manual Changes This appendix contains the information required to adapt this manual to versions or configurations of the Agilent 4294A earlier than the current printing date of this manual The information in this manual applies directly to an Agilent 4294A with a serial number prefix that is listed on the title page of this manual 355 Manual Changes Manual Changes To adapt this manual to your 4294A refer to Table A 1 and Table A 2 Table A 1 Manual Changes by Serial Number Serial Prefix or Number Make Manual Changes Table A 2 Manual Changes by Firmware Version Version Make Manual Changes Agilent Technologies uses a two part ten character serial number that is stamped on the serial number plate see Figure A 1 The first five characters are the serial prefix and the last five digits are the suffix Press System DIAGNOSTIC TEST FIRMWARE REVISION keys to display the firmware version of your Agilent 4294A Figure A 1 Serial Number Plate Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd SER NO JP1KG12345 AK MADE INJAPAN 33 4287 a0j048 356 A Key Definitions This chapter describes the functions of the front keys both hardkeys and softkeys of the Agilent 4294A 357 Key Definitions Functions of hardkeys Functions of har
66. 390 N A Table B 60 Sub marker deletion Clear SMKR menu Key operation Marker CLEAR SUB MKR Softkey Function GPIB command 1 OFF Turns off sub marker 1 in the on status If it is in the off status 1 OFF nothing SMKR1 OFF happens 2 OFF For sub marker 2 executes the same operation as the above key for sub marker 1 SMKR2 OFF 3 OFF For sub marker 3 executes the same operation as the above key for sub marker 1 SMKR3 OFF 4 OFF For sub marker 4 executes the same operation as the above key for sub marker 1 SMKR4 OFF 5 OFF For sub marker 5 executes the same operation as the above key for sub marker 1 SMKR5 OFF 6 OFF For sub marker 6 executes the same operation as the above key for sub marker 1 SMKR6 OFF 7 OFF For sub marker 7 executes the same operation as the above key for sub marker 1 SMKR7 OFF return Returns to Table B 58 Marker Marker menu on page 390 N A Table B 61 Delta marker Delta MKR menu Key operation Marker DMODE MENU Softkey Function GPIB command AMKR FIXED AMKR TRACKING AMKR l AMKR OFF Displays and moves the A marker to the current position of the main marker This A marker when the trace is updated and changed moves together with the trace so that it is always located on the trace only the sweep parameter value is fixed If this A marker is selected AMkr is displayed in the upper right ar
67. 42 79 318 99 9914M 171 41 79 215 99 9915M 170 38 79 098 39 9916M 169 34 78 985 99 9917M 168 27 78 861 29 99181 167 19 78 745 39 99191 166 1 78 621 39 9920 164 98 78 495 294 4294a0j091 Chapter 8 Figure 8 34 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Print the measurement results and internal data with a printer List of measurement conditions OPERATING PARAMETERS SWEEP PARAMETER SWEEP TYPE NUMBER of POINTS SWEEP DELAY TIME POINT DELAY TIME START STOP POINT AVG FACTOR 4294a0j074 display print form Scroll the screen to check print contents FREQ LIN 201 O Sec 99 99 MHz 100 01 MHz Step 4 While checking the print contents displayed on the screen select the time stamp and Key operation Display the next page Display the previous page Set the display print format NEXT PAGE PREV PAGE Softkey label Time stamp function during printing printing of time and date at the start of printing Display print mode in the sweep range of list sweep table segment Display print mode in the limit range of limit line table 7 1 Only during printing of list sweep table 2 Only during printing of limit line table Step 5 Press the START key to start printing To suspend printing press the ABORT key TIME ON off ON TIME on OFF OFF DISP MODE STRT STP Start stop DISP MODE CTR SPAN Center span DISP MODE UPR LWR Upper lower values DISP MO
68. 6 1 Device Connection and Corresponding Adapter Selection and Calibration Calibration V required blank not required Adapter Device Connecaon Accessory Selection User Port Extension Fixture Calibration Compensation Compensation E Connect the 42942A coaxial cable and 42942A V V V 42942A directly to the test fixture Terminal use Agilent s four terminal pair port Adapter calibration kit or of the 4294A connect 7mm user defined a coaxial cable to the 42942A calibration kit 7 mm port connect a test fixture and then connect the device to the fixture contacts F Connect the 42941A and dedicated probe 42941A V V 42941A directly to the adapter Impedance perform when four terminal pair port Probe user defined of the 4294A connect PROBE calibration kit is a dedicated probe 42941A used adapter to the 3 5 mm port and then connect the device to the adapter contacts G Connect the 42941A and coaxial cable and 42941A V V V 42941A directly to the test fixture Impedance use Agilent s four terminal pair port Probe calibration kit or of the 4294A connect PROBE user defined a coaxial cable to the 42941A calibration kit 3 5 mm port connect a test fixture and then connect the device to the fixture contacts 1 Although it has a cable it falls into the category of direct connection type test fixture for adapter setup Refer to the following sections for the calibration procedure of each device connec
69. 7 Calibration When the 3 5 mm Port of the 42941A is Extended 42941A Impedance Probe performed Cable Extension Port Extension Compensation When user Calibration is not lt nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn User Calibration Port Extension a Compensation Device Connection Cee Fixture Compensation 4294a0e084 Step 1 Make sure that the adapter selection is set to 42941A Impedance Probe PROBE 42941A See Adapter Setting on page 67 for adapter selection Chapter 6 145 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 4 NOTE Calibration G Calibration When the 3 5 mm Port of the 42941A is Extended Perform the user calibration at the other end of the extended 3 5 mm port of the 42941A Impedance Probe You can use either the calibration kit supplied by Agilent Technologies or a user defined calibration kit See User Calibration on page 147 for the user calibration procedure Set the port extension value in electrical length or delay time which is equivalent to the electrical length between the user calibration plane and the device contacts of the test fixture in accordance with Port Extension Compensation on page 150 In measurements using the Agilent 4294A the electrical length delay time of a 42942A dedicated test fixture such as 16092
70. Block i 25 isch obey a cAch ea bebe edt a a a E a aaen 47 6 INSTRUMENT STATE Block scce ce ee Seed Soe epee eg ee bee ap ee ees 47 TES OUKCYS pen ee e ora e Sh ee ees Say Ae a Bes eee 48 8 Color LED Displays eteis os sad phon hd Bical SR Ae Re FEA Rane SEERA ees Soe hse ees aes 48 9 Power S WICH lt i crt kk eh doe gec oe yd ean Sota Sd hh abe Sees dA Gl hed cused ded Add teeth ed 48 10 UNKNOWN Terminals osese e a SSAA GS See Se pe SE E eee ee Bh 49 11 Built in 3 5 Inch Floppy Disk Drive 1 0 2 0 00 00 ee cece ene ee 49 Rear Panel s uon aka a35 be Ene he seats a care AT ANE Abeta Giese Bod Aub big dames Bed E ig Rh ca hed eee 50 1 External Reference Input Connector 0 00 e ene ae 50 2 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Only 00 0 0 eee ee eee eee 50 3 External Trigger Input o ssev cc ve ee ce patina tees Se cae eae Be ee Geode 4 51 A LAN PO ce sc Sonat arson had eek Pee AERA RE ER DE RRR AE ERs EE E Tada By 51 5 Internal Reference Output 2 2 0 0 0 dA ie aA posea aan ae E D E E S 51 6 External Program RUN CONT Input 0 0 0 cee een eee 51 TE 8 Dit VO Port oon ire aen ersi A E SS PESE E ee A E Ae E E E nee ent et 51 8 Time Base Adjuster for Option 1D5 0 0 0 ec cee teens 51 9 Mini DIN Keyboard Port s cs oeeo teut otemiuti mieie cc a e E i E EE eens 51 10224 bit VO Ports 213 538 a pe a iA be A R Sia claw ie aah aga E 52 TI Printer Port amp ests sjsuces ey Sek Oe ee
71. Checking the LAN Setting Checking the Subnet Mask Follow these steps to set or check the subnet mask The subnet mask is delimited into four parts by periods each part is independently set Press the Local key to display the Local menu Press the SUBNET MASK key to display the Subnet Mask Setting menu Press the 1st key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the Ist part of the subnet mask current set value is displayed Below it the entire currently set subnet mask is displayed in a smaller size Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the 1st part of the subnet mask e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value The Ist part of the subnet mask can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 255 Press the 2nd key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the 2nd part of the subnet mask current set value is displayed Below it the entire currently set subnet mask is displayed in a smaller size Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the 2nd part of the subnet mask e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired valu
72. Cp Q R X Cp 3 R xX Q Cp D R x Cp 2 R x D 2 COMPLEX Z Y R X R X R X G B Z Ls R X Izi z R X Ls Z Cs R X IZI R x Cs Z Lp R X IZI R X Lp Z Cp R X Izi R X Cp IZ Rs R X Izi 2 R x Rs R IZ Q R x IZI R X Q z IZ D R X IZI R X D z Lp Rp R X Lp R x Rp Cp Rp R x Cp z R x Rp 284 Chapter 8 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data Save the display screen Graphic Save With the Agilent 4294A it is possible to save the display screen as a TIFF Tagged Image File Format file This function is convenient when you want to read the graphic representation of the measurement results with PC software Press the Save key to display the Save menu Press the STORE DEV key to display the Storage Device menu Select the Agilent 4294A storage device Storage device Key operation Floppy disk drive FLOPPY Volatile memory disk MEMORY Non volatile memory disk flash memory FLASH MEMORY When using the floppy disk drive make sure a disk is first inserted in the drive If the floppy disk is set to Write Protect the data cannot be saved Set the disk to Write Enable before using it The storage device selection using System IBASIC more 1 3 MASS STORE is applicable when using the storage devices of the Agilent 4294A through the HP Instrument
73. Deletes the entire string on the string entry line and moves the cursor _ to the N A leftmost position done Stores the string entered in the string entry line and displays it in the title area N A Also returns to Table B 13 Display Display menu 1 2 on page 364 cancel Cancels string entry in the title area In the title area the previously stored string N A is displayed Also returns to Table B 13 Display Display menu 1 2 on page 364 Table B 18 Equivalent circuit analysis Equiv Circuit menu Key operation Display more1 2 EQUIV CKT 367 Softkey Function GPIB command CIRCUIT on OFF Toggles on and off the display of the equivalent circuit diagram If this is set to DISECIRC ONIOFF on the equivalent circuit diagram is displayed instead of the trace display SELECT CIRCUIT gt Displays Table B 19 Equivalent circuit selection Select Circ menu on page N A PARAMETERS on OFF Toggles on and off the display of the equivalent circuit parameter values on the trace display screen DISECPARA ONIOFF DEFINE PARAMETERS gt Displays Table B 20 Equivalent circuit parameter definition Define Param menu on page 367 N A CALCULATE PARAMETERS Calculates and displays the equivalent circuit parameters based on the data stored in the data trace and the equivalent circuit selected using the SELECT CIRCUIT key If the display of the equivalent circuit param
74. Monitor Field 0 00 coe eee eee 57 16 Sweep Start Center Value Field 0 0 cece eee nee 57 17 Instrument Status Area sss seie ia a E A EE B RAR EE eb E bo E o Rees 57 18 Equivalent Circuit Parameters Field 20 0 0 0 eee ccc eae 60 19 External Reference Input Status Field 0 0 ec eens 60 20 Parameter Setting Instrument Message Field 0 0 0 e eee cc eee ee 60 21 Pte Field iria Pa ae oe AE eee ee ee 61 4 Preparation of Measurement Accessories 10 Contents Selecting Accessories for Measurement 0 0 ce eee eens 64 Connecting the ACCessOnes nssr cs ile si oe ee Si eke eb ee ho et Mle eee Gos 66 Adapter Sete f gi isos ori nee Ki Con aa ind ack esha E RS wlth alka Sade deel a Bes ae bee eh a BS ERs 67 Adapter SeleCtonc 2 55 5 ceagesseed eaves Set ante bed asthe eye beter dete ote det ndel 4 Reeth ee 68 Adapter Setup iiss ea gad ta aol Swe Saale Sol te ole Sk tas he 69 Adapter Setup Procedure for the 16048G and 16048H 0 0 00 eee eee eee eee 70 Adapter Setup Procedure for the 16334A 0 0 0 0 coe cece eee e eens 72 Adapter Setup Procedure for the 16451B 1 ccc eee ee 73 Adapter Setup Procedure for the 42942A 0 0 ccc eects 74 Adapter Setup Procedure for the 42941A 0 0 cece ee 78 5 Setting Measurement Conditions Putting the Agilent 4294A into the Preset State Presetting 00 0 ee ee eee 82 Selecting Trace Active Trace 2 5 c
75. OFF Sub marker 3 marker number 3 3 OFF Sub marker 4 marker number 4 4 OFF Sub marker 5 marker number 5 5 OFF Sub marker 6 marker number 6 6 OFF Sub marker 7 marker number 7 7 OFF When you press the softkey the sub marker appears at the current main marker position and the display of the softkey labels change from OFF to the sweep parameter value and measurement parameter value which indicate the position of the sub marker Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 to place sub markers at several points on the trace 214 Chapier 8 Figure 8 2 Step 1 Step 2 Analysis and Processing of Result Listing data at several points on the trace Displaying the marker positions using the softkey labels of the sub markers 26 086 2 cot Sub MKR 1 3 02485k 168 887 a Sub marker 100 433 Position Display CMP Z return VAC TAC v IDC CENTER 100 0405 MHz OSC 500 mwolt SPAN 100 kHz 4294a0j108 Listing the marker positions with the marker list function The marker position display provided by the softkey labels in the Sub Marker Setting menu may not be usable if you want to show the display at all times because the softkey display changes depending on the keys you operate In this case you can use the marker list function After performing the steps in Displaying several marker positions using softkey labels on page 214 follow these steps Press the Utility key to display the Ut
76. Press the step keys TID to set the desired value 172 Chapter 7 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Manually Scaling the Active Trace for a COMPLEX Z Y Graph Figure 7 12 Setting the X axis reference value for a complex plane for measuring complex impedance A Z SCALE 500 ofdiv B SCALE 5 mS div CHP REFERENCE X YALUE beat N EE EA 145 KQ i Hid ExtRe r andrei nies anatarnaee E fad einnsinale nieinediee a aniaasus bie E VAC IAC ma i VFIDE CENTER 166 MHz OSC 5668 mvolt SPAN 24 kHz 4294a0j031 Step 5 Press the REFERENCE Y VALUE key The Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen indicates the reference value currently in effect for the vertical Y axis this value is a complex value The reference line for the vertical axis in a complex plane is stationary in the center of the axis Step 6 Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the reference value for the vertical Y axis e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value Figure 7 13 Setting the Y axis reference value for a complex plane for measuring complex Chapter 7 173 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Manually Scaling the Acti
77. SCALE 20 div REF pe gs 100 005819429 MHZ WAC IAC VID CENTER 164 MHz OSC 584 molt SPAN 26 kHz 4294a0j058 NOTE To place the sub marker on the searched point press the SUB MKR key located on the same target menu to display the sub marker setting menu Then select the desired sub marker out of the seven sub markers Step 6 Read the value displayed in the marker sweep parameter value field on the screen NOTE When the MAX MIN TARGET or PEAK key is used for searching one search is carried out for the trace when the key is pressed If the search tracking function is on search is executed every time a sweep is completed Chapter 8 227 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 4 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Search the maximum minimum peak Search the maximum minimum peak The peak search function enables the main marker to be moved to the maximum or minimum point in automatic mode Activate the trace to be searched Active Trace Key operation Trace A Trace B A B Press the Search key to display the Search menu If the main marker is not on the active trace the main marker appears at the position of the sweep center value on the trace Press the PEAK to display the target menu If the peak is defined in advance by the PEAK DEF MENU key inside the target menu only this specified peak will be searched when the PEAK key is pressed If the pea
78. SDON command to finish the editing of a list sweep segment or LIMSDON command to finish the editing of a limit segment and then perform other settings D DATA AND MEMORY TRACE NOT DISPLAYED While the data trace and memory trace are not both displayed you attempt to change the setting of the data amp memory couple command SCAC ON or SCAC OFF To change the setting of the data amp memory couple first display both the data trace and the memory trace command DISP DATM Data corrupt or stale Appendix C 431 225 222 231 104 138 139 137 99 118 37 Error messages Data out of memory The data may be invalid Otherwise a newly initiated read operation may not have been completed since the latest access Data out of memory The Agilent 4294A does not have enough memory to perform the requested operation Data out of range A data element that did not violate the standard out of the range defined by the Agilent 4294A is received Data questionable Data may be questionable and so the accuracy of measurement data may be deteriorated Data type error The parser recognized impossible data elements For example numeric values or string data are expected but block data are sent DCBIAS CONSTANT OPERATION FAILED When the dc bias mode is constant voltage VOLT CONSTANT or constant current CURRRENT CONSTANT the actual dc bias output does not converge to the set dc voltage value or dc cur
79. Save menu The selected storage device is displayed in the box of the key label of the STORE DEV key Softkey label Selected storage device STORE DEV FLOPPY Floppy disk drive STORE DEV MEMORY Volatile memory disk STORE DEV FLASH Non volatile memory disk flash memory Press the STATE key The file name input line to save the setting state calibration data and memory array appears in the upper left area of the screen and the File Name Input menu is displayed Enter the file name in the character string input line by using a combination of the following keys Key Function Step keys ti Scrolls the input character list indicated below the character string line Rotary knob O Horizontally moves the cursor A located below the displayed character list SELECT LETTER or G n At the cursor _ of the character input line enters the character specified by the cursor T below the character list Numeric keys 0 through 9 and Enter the numerical value at the cursor _ of the character string input line SPACE Enters the space at the cursor _ of the character string input line BACK SPACE or Back Space Returns the cursor _ of the character string input line by one character to the left and erases the character in that position CLEAR NAME Erases all the character strings entered in the character string input line 272 Chapier 8 NOTE Step 7 NOTE Step 1 Step 2
80. Scale Ref key to display the Scale Reference menu Press the FULL SCALE VALUE key The Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen indicates the full scale value currently in effect Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the full scale value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TW to set the desired value Chapter 7 175 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Manually Scaling the Active Trace for a COMPLEX Z Y Graph Figure 7 15 Setting the full scale value for a polar chart for measuring complex impedance Ai z SCALE 5 ka FS B SCALE 5 m div VAC IAC VFIDO CENTER 1 MHz OSC 588 molt SPAN 26 kHz 4294a0j034 NOTE Alternatively when you have the main marker displayed on the trace you can press the MKR REFERENCE key to use the value at the marker position i e the distance from the origin as the full scale value Thus you can change the trace scale by placing the full scale circle at the position indicated by the main marker 176 Chapter 7 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Selecting the Target Trace Type Data or Memory Selecting the Target Trace Type Data or Memory Wh
81. Step 3 NOTE Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data There is no need to attach an extension to the file name After entering the file name in the character string input line press the done key or x1 key to save the file To suspend saving press the cancel key Steps 6 and 7 can be executed from the external keyboard connected to the rear panel After entering the file name press the Enter key of the keyboard to save the file An extension STA is automatically attached to the name of the file to be saved Save the calibration data and trace data Data Save Select the required data from the four data items data array memory array data trace array and memory trace array and calibration data user calibration data and fixture compensation data and save them into the storage device as one file Press the Save key to display the Save menu Press the STORE DEV key to display the Storage Device menu Select the Agilent 4294A storage device Storage device Key operation Floppy disk drive FLOPPY Volatile memory disk MEMORY Non volatile memory disk flash memory FLASH MEMORY When using the floppy disk drive make sure a disk is first inserted in the drive If the floppy disk is set to Write Protect the data cannot be saved Set the disk to Write Enable before using it The storage device selection using System IBASIC
82. Table B 34 Calibration Calibration menu on page 376 N A Table B 3 STIMULUS block Hardkey Function GPIB command Sweep Displays Table B 43 Sweep Sweep menu on page 381 N A Source Sets the fixed oscillator level value if the sweep parameter is frequency sets the N A fixed oscillator frequency CW frequency if the sweep parameter is oscillator level or de bias Also displays Table B 53 Source oscillator Source Osc menu on page 386 Trigger Displays Table B 56 Trigger Trigger menu on page 388 N A Start Sets the sweep start value STAR lt value gt Stop Sets the sweep stop value STOP lt value gt Center Sets the sweep center value CENT lt value gt Span Sets the sweep span value SPAN lt value gt 358 Appendix B Key Definitions Functions of hardkeys Table B 4 MARKER block Hardkey Function GPIB command Marker Displays the marker at the sweep center value position if it has not been MKR ON displayed and lets you enter a sweep parameter value that specifies a marker MKRPRM lt value gt position Also displays Table B 58 Marker Marker menu on page 390 Marker gt Displays the marker at the sweep center value position if it has not been MKR ON displayed and lets you enter a sweep parameter value that specifies a marker MKRPRM lt value gt position Also
83. Viewing Results Figure 2 8 Results of Auto scaling A IZI SCALE 1 afdiv REF 2 Q B Bz SCALE 20 div REF 0e VAC IAC YF IDE START 168 Hz OSC 566 molt STOP 100 MHz 4294a0e095 Chapter 2 41 _ gt SSSSSSSS aq Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Figure 2 9 Learning Operation Basics Results of Analysis Results of Analysis Determine the Self resonance Frequency and Resonant Impedance Press the A key to activate Trace A Press the Search key to display the Search menu The main marker a trace marker identified by number 0 appears in the center of the graph Press the SEARCH TRK on OFF key to turn on the search tracking function the key label should change to SEARCH TRK ON off When this function is enabled the instrument performs a search action upon completion of each sweep cycle Press the MIN key to move the main marker to the minimum IZ value Since the search tracking function is enabled the instrument detects and moves the main marker to the minimum IZI value each time it has completed one sweep cycle You can determine the self resonance frequency and resonant impedance by reading the sweep parameter frequency and measurement parameter values indicated by the main marker that appears in the upper left area of the graph for Trace A In the example shown in Figure 2 9 the DUT exhibits its self resonance frequency and resonant impedance at approximately 5 13 MHz and
84. ZOOMING APERTURE key In other words the sweep range is changed so that the marker position is the new sweep center value and the sweep span is magnified by the amount specified with the ZOOMING APERTURE key ZOOMING APERTURE Sets the zooming aperture ratio of the new sweep span value to the current ZMAPER lt value gt sweep span value used when the MKR ZOOM key is executed as a percentage Specify a value between 0 01 and 100 in resolution of 0 01 Note that the default value in power on or preset state is 10 more 2 2 Displays Table B 62 Marker Marker Zoom menu 1 2 on page 393 N A 1 The function to search for a peak is the same as the PEAK key in Table B 66 Peak Peak menu on page 396 394 Appendix B Table B 64 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Search key Search Softkeys displayed by pressing the Search key Search Search menu Softkey Function GPIB command MAX MIN TARGET gt PEAK gt Moves the main marker on the current active trace A or B to the maximum value of the measurement parameter value on the trace SEAM MAX Moves the main marker on the current active trace A or B to the minimum value of the measurement parameter value on the trace SEAM MIN Moves the main marker on the current active trace A or B to the position of the measurement parameter value specified wit
85. a Rackmount Kit Using a Rackmount Kit If you want to combine the Agilent 4294A with other instruments and a controller to assemble a comprehensive measuring system you can use one of the optional rackmount handle kits to install it in an efficient way Figure 1 6 shows how to install the rackmount kit Rackmount Handle Kits Option ID Description Agilent part number 1CN Handle Kit 5062 3991 1CM Rackmount Kit 5062 3979 1CP Rackmount amp Handle Kit 5062 3985 Installing the Rackmount Handle Kit Option 1CN Handle Kit A A JAAD RUE a Option 1CN includes a pair of handles and the parts necessary for attaching the handles to the Agilent 4294A Installing the Handles Remove the adhesive backed trim strips 1 from the left and right side faces of the front panel frame Figure 1 6 Attach the front handles 3 to the side faces with the supplied screws 26 Chapter 1 Step 3 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Installation Using a Rackmount Kit Attach the trim strips 4 to the handles Option 1CM Rackmount Kit Option 1CM includes a pair of flanges and the parts necessary for attaching them to the Agilent 4294A With this option you can mount the 4294A on an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inch horizontal spacing Mounting the Agilent 4294A on a Rack Remove the adhesive backed trim strips 1 from the left and righ
86. a ee ee ee ey 348 Internal Reference Output pe rehenes ded lees i Lob seb te taty Mead eh Reb ates pees bg 348 High Stability Frequency Reference Output Option 1D5 0 0 e eee eee eee 348 Extemal Tigger Inputic reirei sites Pik o RF BREE RR ORR OLE eR Ele SEAS REARS dee 348 External Program RUN CONT Input 2 0 0 0 cence eee 349 External Monitot Outputys css 35 5 oe ope os Reet Soes MOVE TL Gehtg nee Uh ese hae po See bets 349 Operating Conditions Pera foes PH eel he ee ah a a alee ay EE Sdada A 349 Non operating Conditions ics m2 sce Shee ashe BE ee Rh ees We R E lek we A A ee 350 Other Speciiications acs gine eee el awe wedi eebeced bee E E E E E 350 Furnished Accessories ao 1 ke ee ee ee ee B53 A Manual Changes Manual Changesie 0 nace pie bet Lea eae eee eee a Se bale Ae tee Cha S oe tes 356 B Key Definitions Functions of hardkeys 3 sche Gis ees eeees Hue es Sew bea Bie ea GMI be ays 358 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Meas key 0 0 0 eee eee ee eee 361 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Format key 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee eee 363 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Display key 00 0 0 eee ee cee ee eee 364 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Scale Ref key n 0 0 00 eee eee eee 371 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Bw Avg key 0 0 0 0 0 c eee cee eee eee 374 15 Contents Softkeys displayed by pressing the Cal key 0 00 00 ee
87. adapter selection for the 16451B in accordance with Adapter Selection on page 68 After performing Step 4 of Adapter Selection on page 68 press the SETUP key to display the Adapter Setup Menu Put the device contacts of the 16451B into the OPEN condition Refer to the operation manual of the 16451B for instructions on switching to the OPEN condition Press the PHASE COMP key to start the phase compensation data measurement The traces on the LCD display do not change during the phase compensation data measurement When the phase compensation data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to PHASE COMP DONE Press done key to start calculating the adapter setup data from the measured load data The adapter setup data is automatically saved to the EEPROM nonvolatile memory in the Agilent 4294A Press the cancel key to cancel the adapter setup process If the adapter setup process is canceled the previously obtained data is saved as the available adapter setup data Adapter Setup Procedure for the 42942A Perform the adapter setup for the 42942A Terminal Adapter in accordance with the following procedure operation manual of the 42942A also describes the adapter setup procedure Adapter setup should be performed at an ambient temperature as close as possible to the temperature in which the device measurement will actually be made If the ambient temperature for your measurement is outside the range of
88. and strings in a file are separated by the tab code In Table 8 6 the tab code is Chapter 8 277 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data expressed as an underscore _ Strings including instrument setups and data array names are enclosed with double quotation marks At the end of each line the linefeed code is inserted Table 8 6 uses the mark for the notation of a linefeed code Data contents of the status block The status block stores information related to the instrument and the date when the data was saved Contents Description 4294A REV1 01 COOCOCOOCOCOCOOCOCOOOOCOOOCOOOOCOOOCOOOOO0000000O ROM version of the 4294A DATE Nov 1 1999 POCCCC CSO SE OOOO LOCOCO SEOOOLOOCCOOOCE Date when the data was saved Data contents of the instrument setup part The instrument setup part stores the instrument setups when the data was stored Contents Description MEASURE PARAMETER IMPEDANCE MAG PHASE DEG eeceeeee ADAPTER NONE SWEEP TYPE LIN FREQ NUMBER of POINTS 201 POINT DELAY TIME 0 Sec SWEEP DELAY TIME 0 Sec OSC LEVEL 500 mVolt DC BIAS OFF BW 1 SWEEP AVERAGING OFF POINT AVERAGING OFF Measurement parameter Adapter setting Sweep type Number of measurement points Measurement point delay time Sweep delay time Signal source level DC bias application status Measurement bandwidth Between sweeps averaging Point
89. assign to it and then setting the scale for each division Activate the trace you want to manually scale To activate Press Trace A A Trace B B Press the Scale Ref key to display the Scale Reference menu Press the REFERENCE POSITION key The Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen displays a value that represents where the reference line is currently positioned in relation to the bottom of the graph This value ranges from 0 bottom and 10 top In the preset state the reference line position defaults to 5 which means that it is displayed at the center of the graph Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the position of the reference line e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value 166 Chapter 7 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Manual Scale Setting for measurements other than COMPLEX Z Y Figure 7 7 Positioning the reference line A L B cM a Hid VAC IAC START 48 Hz OSC 586 molt 4294a0j026 NOTE The reference line is a horizontal dotted line displayed in the same color as the corresponding trace At the left end of the reference line a symbol is displayed in the same color Ste
90. described here Errors with a negative error number are basically general errors for GPIB instruments defined by IEEE488 2 On the other hand errors with a positive error number are ones defined specifically for the Agilent 4294A The error message displayed on the LCD display due to the occurrence of an error will not disappear even if the cause of the error is removed To clear the error message display press the Entry Off key Also the error message disappears when you call new softkey labels using a hardkey or softkey or when you display a new parameter value in the Set Parameter Value field If a new error occurs the previously displayed error message is replaced with the new one Therefore even if several errors occur successively at short time intervals you can only read the last message To display and recheck a past message follow the steps in Re displaying an Instrument Message on page 298 This chapter explains the error messages in alphabetical order They are also described in the error number order in the Programming Manual Error Messages alphabetical order A ADC OVERLOAD Due to for example a sudden change in the connection of a DUT the internal circuit ADC is temporarily overloaded Measurement data when this error occurs is invalid If this error often occurs during normal measurements the instrument may fail In this case Contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office or the company you purc
91. display is displayed as follows Softkey label Selected marker X axis display MKR X AXIS STIM Sweep parameter MKR X AXIS TIME Time MKR X AXIS 1 21F ars 1 Relaxation time F Measurement 2TF frequency Chapter 8 245 Analysis and Processing of Result Selecting the sweep parameter value of the marker display as time from start or relaxation time Figure 8 18 Marker X axis display Time from start A IZ 5 ka BOTTOM 20 n 135 654 4 B Bz TOP SCALE 24 div REF B i a 339 Sec VAC IAC VIDE CENTER 186 MHz OSC 500 mvolt SPAN Hz 4294a0j111 246 Chapter 8 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Analysis and Processing of Result Clearing turning off the marker from the screen Clearing turning off the marker from the screen This section describes how to turn off each marker or all markers on the screen Turning off the sub markers Follow these steps to turn off each sub marker markers numbered 1 to 7 Activate the trace displaying the sub marker you want to turn off Active Trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Press the Marker key to display the Marker menu Press the CLEAR SUB MKR key to display the Sub Marker Clear menu Select the number of the sub marker you want to clear from the following Type of sub marker Key operation Sub marker 1 marker number 1 faz Sub marker 2 marker number 2 Deis Sub marker 3 marker number 3
92. displays Table B 62 Marker Marker Zoom menu 1 2 on page 393 Search Displays the marker at the sweep center value position if it has not been MKR ON displayed Also displays Table B 64 Search Search menu on page 395 Utility Displays the marker at the sweep center value position if it has not been MKR ON displayed Also displays Table B 71 Utility Utility menu on page 400 Table B 5 INSTRUMENT STATE block Hardkey Function GPIB command System Displays Table B 74 System System menu on page 402 N A Local Brings the 4294A from the remote state into the local state Also displays Table N A B 94 Local Local menu on page 413 Preset Sets the configurations of the 4294A to the initial values preset state PRES Copy Displays Table B 98 Copy Copy menu on page 415 Specify the N A configurations required to output the screen to the printer Save Displays Table B 105 Save Save menu on page 419 Specify the N A configurations required to store the configurations of the 4294A trace data and graphics into the internal memory or diskettes Recall Displays Table B 8 Measurement parameter Measurement menu 2 3 on RECD lt string gt page 361 In this menu the filenames of the state files in the currently selected mass storage are called and displayed Table B 6 ENTRY block Hardkey Function GPIB command O rotary knob By turning this knob you can adjust the
93. done key in Table B 84 Segment edit Edit Limit LIMSDON menu 1 3 on page 407 cancel Has the same function as the cancel key in Table B 84 Segment edit Edit LIMSQUI 1 Even if you have set the limits with the MIDDLE VALUE center value key and the DELTA LIMIT difference value key you can convert the table into the upper and lower limit format by pressing the UPPER LIMIT key or the LOWER LIMIT key On the other hand even if you have set the limits with the UPPER LIMIT upper limit key and the LOWER LIMIT lower limit key you can convert the table into the center and difference value format by pressing the MIDDLE VALUE key or the DELTA LIMIT key Table B 86 Key operation Segment edit Edit Limit menu 3 3 System LIMIT TEST EDIT LIMIT LINE EDIT more 1 3 more 2 3 System LIMIT TEST EDIT LIMIT LINE ADD more 1 3 more 2 3 Softkey Function GPIB command TEST ON off Toggles on and off the limit line test for the segment When the limit line test is off is displayed to the right of the segment number in the completed limit line table Note that is not displayed when the pointer gt is displayed to the right of the segment number LIMSTEST ONIOFF MKR gt START Substitutes the sweep parameter value at the main marker on the current active MKRLIMSTAR trace A or B into the sweep start value of the segment MKR gt STOOP Substitutes the
94. execute input output I O of data in the direction opposite from the preset input output direction The command is thus invalid For example if you use the CIN command to specify port C as an input port and then use the OUTCIO lt value gt command to output data from port C this error is displayed Appendix C 443 Error messages WRONG I O PORT DIRECTION 444 Appendix C Index Symbols 56 56 57 56 Numerics 0 9 keys 46 16034E 64 16034G 64 16034H 64 16044A 64 16047A 64 16047C 64 16047D 64 16047E 64 16048A 64 16048B 64 16048D 64 16048E 64 16048G 64 16048H 64 16065A 64 16085B 64 16089A 64 16089B 64 16089C 64 16089D 64 16089E 64 16092A 64 16093A 64 16093B 64 16191A 64 16192A 64 16193A 64 16314A 64 16334A 64 16451B 64 16452A 64 16454A 64 Ist key setting checking the IP address 314 315 317 24 bit I O port 52 345 2nd key setting checking the IP address 314 316 317 3rd key setting checking the IP address 314 316 317 42941A 64 42942A 64 4th key setting checking the IP address 315 316 317 7mm 58 8 bit I O port 51 345 A A key 45 active trace 83 ACTIVE TRACE block 45 adapter selection 68 setting 67 setup 69 330 ADDRESS HP IB key 312 addressable only mode 312 ADDRESSABLE ONLY MODE key 312 auto scaling 164 averaging 329 point 127 algorithm 128 sweep to sweep 12
95. fail beep Sounds when the result of a limit line test is fail Follow the steps below to turn on off the completion beep and warning beep For how to turn on off the limit line test fail beep refer to Step 4 in Conduct the limit line test on page 262 Turning On Off the Completion Beep Follow these steps to turn on and off the completion beep Press the System key to display the System menu Press the BEEPER key to display the Built In Speaker menu Press the BEEP DONE on OFF key BEEP DONE ON off key to turn on off the completion beep pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey label Setting of the completion beep BEEP DONE ON off On BEEP DONE on OFF Off Turning On Off the Warning Beep Follow these steps to turn on and off the warning beep Press the System key to display the System menu Press the BEEPER key to display the Built In Speaker menu Press the BEEP WARN on OFF key BEEP WARN ON off key to turn on off the warning beep pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey label Setting of the warning beep BEEP WARN ON off On 302 Chapter 9 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Seiting the Built in Speaker Beep Sound Table 9 4 Softkey label Setting of the warning beep BEEP WARN on OFF Off Chapter 9 303 Table 9 5 Table 9 6 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Managing Files Managi
96. field in the upper left area of the screen indicates the scale per deviation currently in effect Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the scale per division e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value 168 Chapter 7 Figure 7 9 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Manual Scale Setting for measurements other than COMPLEX Z Y Setting the scale per division a SCALE cent e Ss 5 mH VAC IAC START 48 Hz OSC 586 molt 4294a0j028 Scaling the Trace Based on the Top and Bottom Values Whether the vertical axis is linear or logarithmic you can scale the trace by specifying the highest top and lowest bottom values displayed within the graph Activate the trace you want to manually scale To activate Press Trace A A Trace B B Press the Scale Ref key to display the Scale Reference menu Press the TOP VALUE key The Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen indicates the top value currently in effect that is the value that corresponds to the line displayed at the top of the graph Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways
97. following procedure to select the graph axis formats Step 1 Activate the trace for which you want to set the axis format To activate Press Trace A A Trace B B Step 2 Press the Format key to display the Format menu Step 3 Select the desired graph axis format by pressing the appropriate key To select Press Complex plane where the horizontal and COMPLEX vertical axes use real and complex values respectively Polar chart POLAR Figure 7 3 Complex plane whose Y axis indicates complex admittance with only Trace B displayed VAC IAC VFIDO CENTER 188 MHz OSC 586 molt SPAN 26 kHz 4294a0j022 162 Chapter 7 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Selecting the Graph Axis Format Figure 7 4 Polar chart whose Y axis indicates complex admittance with only Trace B displayed A Z SCALE 5 ka FS B Y SCALE 56 mS FS CHP ng ExtRef VAC _ f CENTER 164 MHz OSC 566 molt SPAN 2 kHz 4294a0j023 Chapter 7 163 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Auto scaling the Trace Auto scaling the Trace Step 1 Activate the trace you want auto scaled To activate Press Trace A A Trace B B Step 2 Press the Scale Ref key to display the first page of the Scale Reference menu Step 3 Press the AUTO SCALE key to auto scale the trace based on the current trace data This adjusts the scale of the trace so that you can easily examine the overall characteristics whi
98. for firmly fixing the fixture to the 4294A Entire frequency range of 4294A 42942A and 16092A For both chip and lead components Entire frequency range of 4294A 42942A and 16093A Two binding post type electrodes set 7 mm apart Entire frequency range of 4294A 42942A and 16093B Three binding post type electrodes set 15 mm and 18 mm apart Frequency lt 40 MHz 16047C Frequency lt 40 MHz 16047D For axial and radial lead components Frequency lt 13 MHz 16047A For axial and radial lead components Lead component Frequency lt 10 MHz Balanced 16314A Three binding post type component and circuit measurement electrodes Frequency lt 2 MHz External dc bias 16065A For axial and radial lead up to 200 V components Equipped with safety cover Frequency lt 100 kHz Component 16089A Two Kelvin clips terminal diameter lt 15 mm Cable length approx 1 m Frequency lt 100 kHz Component 16089B Two Kelvin clips terminal diameter lt 7 9 mm Cable length approx 1 m Frequency lt 100 kHz Component 16089E Two Kelvin clips terminal diameter lt 6 mm Cable length approx 1 m Frequency lt 100 kHz IC pin 16089C Two Kelvin clips diameter lt 1 mm Cable length approx 1 m Frequency lt 100 kHz 16089D Four alligator clips Cable length approx 1 m 64 Chapter 4 Preparation of Measurement Accessories Selecting Accessories for Measurement
99. gt BRIGHTNESS Adjusts color brightness of the displayed items you have chosen from Table B 23 Item color modification Color Item menu 1 3 on page 368 Table B 24 Item color modification Color Item menu 2 3 on page 369 or Table B 25 Item color modification Color Item menu 3 3 on page 369 CBRI lt value gt COLOR Adjusts chromaticity of the displayed items you have chosen from Table B 23 Item color modification Color Item menu 1 3 on page 368 Table B 24 Ttem color modification Color Item menu 2 3 on page 369 or Table B 25 Ttem color modification Color Item menu 3 3 on page 369 COLOR lt value gt RESET COLOR Returns the above 3 parameters for the displayed items you have chosen from Table B 23 Item color modification Color Item menu 1 3 on page 368 Table B 24 Item color modification Color Item menu 2 3 on page 369 or Table B 25 Item color modification Color Item menu 3 3 on page 369 to the factory states RSCO return Returns to the higher level menu that called this menu Table B 23 Item color modification Color Item menu 1 3 on page 368 Table B 24 Item color modification Color Item menu 2 3 on page 369 or Table B 25 Item color modification Color Item menu 3 3 on page 369 N A 1 Color continuity of the tint circle in which color changes from red
100. in accordance with Fixture Compensation on page 151 NOTE When you use a direct connection type test fixture neither user calibration nor port extension compensation is required for measurement they cannot be performed 134 Chapter 6 Calibration B Calibration for Four Terminal Pair 1 m Extension SSS B Calibration for Four Terminal Pair 1 m Extension This section describes the calibration procedures to follow when the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A is extended with a 1 meter long four terminal pair configuration and the device is connected to the cable s end with a minimal connection Figure 6 2 Calibration for Four Terminal Pair 1 m Extension fm sil Ar Four Terminal Pair 1m Extension Device Connection MGpeeranesnanentans Fixture Compensation Device 4294a0e079 This calibration procedure is applied to the following connections e The 16048G 1 m Cable is connected to the Agilent 4294A and the device is connected to the cable s end with a test fixture e The 16048G 1 m Cable is connected to the Agilent 4294A and the 16452A Liquid Test Fixture is connected to the end of the cable e The 16334A Tweezer Type Test Fixture is connected to the Agilent 4294A e The 16451B Dielectric Test Fixture is connected to the A
101. in the waveform in the increasing direction of the measurement parameter value if the peak polarity is defined as positive amplitude of troughs parts that protrude in the waveform in the decreasing direction of the measurement parameter value if negative Table B 67 Peak definition Peak Def menu Key operation Search PEAK PEAK DEF MENU Softkey Function GPIB command PEAK PLRTY For the current active trace A or B selects positive POS or negative NEG to PKPOL POSINEG define the polarity of peaks for peak search If the peak polarity is set to positive POS peaks are parts crests that protrude in the waveform in the increasing direction of the measurement parameter value if negative NEG parts troughs that protrude in the waveform in the decreasing direction of the measurement parameter value PEAK DEF AX Sets AX of the peak slope AY AX one of the peak definition items for PKDLTX lt value gt executing peak search for the current active trace A or B If the peak slope AY AX is set in the peak definition peaks that have a slope greater than this slope are detected in peak search PEAK DEF AY Sets AY of the peak slope AY AX one of the peak definition items for executing PKDLTY lt value gt peak search for the current active trace A or B If the peak slope7AY AX is set in the peak definition peaks that have a slope greater than this slope are detected in peak search MKR gt P
102. influence as a lower value The limit range of each segment can be set either as a combination of upper and lower limit values or as a combination of middle and differential values If the middle and differential value setting keys are pressed for the limit range previously set in terms of upper and lower limit values or conversely if the upper and lower value setting keys are pressed for the limit range set in terms of middle and differential values then the format of the limit range of the entire limit test table will be modified according to the most recently pressed keys When a new segment is added after the selected segment it has the same value as that of the immediately preceding segment After completion of the limit line table editing press the done key of the Limit Line Edit menu To suspend editing press the cancel key In both cases you will return to the Limit Test menu If you press the cancel key to suspend editing of the limit line table you will return to the contents of the limit line table that existed before entering the edit mode Chapter 8 261 Figure 8 26 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Analysis and Processing of Result Set a limit to the trace and make pass fail evaluation Conduct the limit line test After completing the limit line table conduct the limit line test according to the following procedure Press the System key to display the system menu Press the LIMIT TEST key to display the Limit Test me
103. is currently in tracking A marker mode In this mode the A marker appears in the same position as and moves synchronously with the main marker 8 Marker Statistics Trace Bandwidth Analysis Fields These fields show the marker statistics average standard deviation and peak to peak values or the results of trace bandwidth analysis bandwidth center value Q peak AL and AR for Traces A and B When both features are enabled they display the marker statistics only 9 Limit Line Test Fields These fields show the results of limit line tests as either PASS or FAIL By performing a limit line test you can determine whether the trace of measurement results falls within your specified limit line 10 HP Instrument Basic Status Indicator Indicates the execution status of HP Instrument BASIC HP Instrument BASIC is currently executing a program or command You cannot execute an additional command HP Instrument BASIC has suspended the execution of a program You can resume the program using the CONTINUE command HP Instrument BASIC is waiting for a keystroke to continue the execution of a program You cannot execute an additional command blank HP Instrument BASIC is not executing a program or command You can use commands other than the CONTINUE command 11 de Voltage Current Bias Monitor Field This field shows the monitor value voltage or amperage for the dc bias conditions that are currently in effect
104. key TRC A MEM LIMIT Selects the trace A memory trace scale reference lines and limit lines as the COLO TRAM LINE display items that can be changed with the MODIFY COLOR key TRC B DATA Selects the trace B data trace as the display item that can be changed with the COLO TRBD 368 Appendix B Table B 23 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Display key Item color modification Color Item menu 1 3 Display more 1 2 MODIFY COLOR MODIFY ITEM COLOR Softkey Function GPIB command TRC B MEM LIMIT Selects the trace B memory trace scale reference lines and limit lines as the COLO TRBM LINE display items that can be changed with the MODIFY COLOR key GRATICULE Selects the graph grid as the display item that can be changed with the MODIFY COLO GRAT COLOR key more 1 3 Displays Table B 24 Item color modification Color Item menu 2 3 on N A page 369 return Returns to Table B 22 Display color modification Modify Color menu on N A page 368 Table B 24 Item color modification Color Item menu 2 3 Key operation Display more 1 2 MODIFY COLOR MODIFY ITEM COLOR more 1 3 Softkey Function GPIB command MODIFY COLOR gt Displays Table B 26 Item color entry Color Item menu on page 370 N A WARNING Selects warning messages as the display item that can be changed with the COLO WA
105. keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the month e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value Chapter 9 299 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Setting Using Control and Management Functions Seiting Checking the Internal Clock Month can be set by an integer ranging from 1 through 12 Press the DAY key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen a number indicating the currently set day is displayed Below it the currently set date year month and day is displayed in a smaller size as in Step 5 Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the day e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value Day can be set to an integer ranging from 1 through 31 Press the YEAR key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen a 4 digit number indicating the currently set year is displayed Below it the currently set date year month and day is displayed in a smaller size as in Ste
106. lt 50 kHz 0 06 at measurement BW 3 frequency 50 kHz 0 1 frequency lt 50 kHz 0 2 at measurement BW 2 frequency 50 kHz 0 2 frequency lt 50 kHz 0 4 at measurement BW 1 frequency 50 kHz 0 4 frequency lt 50 kHz 0 8 Kgw at measurement BW 5 1 at measurement BW 4 1 Chapter 10 333 NOTE Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics at measurement BW 3 frequency lt 1 MHz 3 frequency gt 1 MHz 4 at measurement BW 2 frequency lt 1 MHz 4 frequency gt 1 MHz 5 at measurement BW 1 frequency lt 1 MHz 6 frequency gt 1 MHz 10 Yopc at dc bias range 1 mA o S at dc bias range 10 mA 1 uS at dc bias range 100 mA 10 uS Ep when 16048G is used oe Ps 100 when 16048H is used aes f i 100 YoL when 16048G is used ia f nS 100 when 16048H is used i oa us 100 Zs when 16048G or 16048H is used frequency 500 Hz 2 mQ frequency lt 500 Hz 5 mQ SPC at frequency gt 10 MHz f frequency in MHz Vv oscillator level in mV 334 Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics Impedance Measurement Accuracy at 7 mm Port of the 42942A Equation 10 2 shows the impedance measurement accuracy at the 7 mm port of the 42942A Terminal Adapter Equation 10 2 Impedance Measurement Accuracy
107. marker position as the new sweep stop value MKRSTOP MKR gt CENTER Substitutes the sweep parameter value at the main marker on the current active trace A or B into the sweep center value In other words the sweep range is changed by using the marker position as the new sweep center value MKRCENT MKRA gt SPAN Substitutes the difference MKRA between the sweep parameter value at the main marker on the current active trace A or B and the sweep parameter value of the A marker into the sweep span value In other words the sweep range is changed by using the range between the main marker and the A marker as the new sweep span value Note that the sweep center value is not changed by this key MKRDSPAN MKR REFERENCE Substitutes the sweep parameter value at the main marker on the current active trace A or B into the reference value value of the reference line In other words the scale is changed by using the marker position as the new reference line position Note that this key has the same function as the MKR REFERENCE key in Table B 27 Scale reference Scale Ref menu 1 1 2 on page 371 MKRREF MKR gt MANUAL SWP Substitutes the sweep parameter value at the main marker on the current active trace A or B into the manual sweep point In other words the manual sweep point moves to the marker position Note that the manual sweep function should be turned on before pressing th
108. measurement accuracy decreases to half the value described Measurement terminal of the 16048G or 16048H Within 5 C from the adapter setup temperature Measurement accuracy applies when the adapter setup is performed at 23 5 C When the adapter setup is performed beyond 23 5 C the measurement accuracy decreases to half the value described Measurement bandwidths 5 Measurement Accuracy IZI IYI accuracy E see Equation 10 1 on page 332 Equation 10 2 on page 335 Equation 10 3 on page 336 O accuracy E 100 rad L C X B accuracy at D lt 0 1 E t D gt 0 1 ae Ex J1 D R accuracy at D lt 0 1 Q 2 10 E D F E 100 Rs tE D at 0 1 lt D lt 10 0 1 lt Q lt 10 Rp x D F T00 1 D I D Rs 4E x at D 10 Q lt 0 1 E D accuracy at D lt 0 1 E 100 at0 1 lt D lt 1 E xX 1 D 100 Q accuracy at Q x D lt 1 Chapter 10 331 NOTE Equation 10 1 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics at Qy lt 10 Dx 2 0 1 Q x E 1 D 100 IFO x E 1 D 100 at Q gt 10 D lt 0 1 OQ x E 100 14Q x E 100 G accuracy at D gt 0 1 2 1 D E x D at D lt 0 1 E D D measurement value of D Q measurement value of Q D measure
109. memory disk MEMORY Nonvolatile memory disk flash memory FLASH MEMORY Pressing one of the above keys returns the display to the File Utilities menu When a storage device is selected the current directory the current location in the hierarchical tree structure to store files at that time and the amount of available space on the storage device are displayed in the upper left area of the screen No name is assigned to 304 Chapter 9 Table 9 7 Table 9 8 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Managing Files the highest level directory called the root directory and only is displayed To create a new directory under the current directory proceed to Step 9 To create a new directory in a location other than the current directory press the CHANGE DIRECTORY key to display the Filename Select menu Use the following softkeys to move from the current directory to the directory under which you want to create a new directory Function Key operation Displays the previous page of the file directory list Displays the next page of the file directory list Moves to the specified directory and displays the names of the files and directories under it Moves to the parent directory and displays the names of the files and directories under it PREV FILES NEXT FILES Directory name Press the return key to return to the File Utilities menu Press the CRE
110. menu System IBASIC more 1 3 more 2 3 COMMAND ENTRY Softkey Function GPIB command CLEAR NAME Deletes all entered characters N A done Finishes the entry of characters and executes the entered command N A cancel Cancels the entry of characters and returns to Table B 77 HP Instrument N A BASIC IBASIC menu 3 3 on page 404 Table B 81 Mass storage Store Device menu Key operation System PROGRAM MENU STORE DEV Save STORE DEV Save STATE CREATE DIRECTORY CHANGE DIRECTORY COPY FILE FILE UTILITIES STORE DEV Softkey Function GPIB command FLOPPY Selects the flexible disk drive as the mass storage STOD DISK MEMORY Selects the volatile memory disk as the mass storage STOD MEMO FLASH MEMORY Selects the nonvolatile memory disk flash memory as the mass storage STOD FLASH return Returns to Table B 111 File selection Select File menu on page 422 N A 1 The selection of the mass storage device is set independently in each of the following menus this menu Table B 79 IBASIC mass storage Mass Storage menu on page 405 and Table B 115 Copy destination device Dest Device menu on page 423 However there is only a single set of mass storage devices for all menu selections Table B 82 Key operation Limit test Limit Test menu System LIMIT TEST failure FAIL Softkey Function G
111. mode that specifies the definition of each parameter in the trace bandwidth analysis Delta marker mode Key operation Fixed delta marker mode FIXED AMKR Tracking delta marker mode TRACING AMKR Delta marker off AMKR OFF When you have selected the delta marker mode the delta marker A appears at the main marker position on the trace Even after you have placed the delta marker A at a point on the screen by pressing the mode selection key described above you can move the delta marker to the main marker position The Delta Marker Mode menu provides a mode called the delta marker on the trace mode AMKR key This function is used only as described in Appendix Reading the difference from the reference point on the screen delta marker on page 217 Do not select it at this point If you select this mode and then turn on the trace bandwidth analysis function the mode is automatically changed to the tracking delta marker mode If you use the fixed delta marker mode move the delta marker to the desired position on the screen For how to move the delta marker refer toAppendix Moving the delta marker alone to place it at a reference point on page 218 Implement trace bandwidth analysis The following describes the steps to implement trace bandwidth analysis Activate the trace used to implement trace bandwidth analysis Active Trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Display the main marker and move it to t
112. monitor Chapter 10 343 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics Equivalent Circuit Analysis Circuit models 3 component model 4 models 4 component model 1 model Analysis types Equivalent circuit parameters calculation frequency characteristics simulation Limit Line Test Available setup parameters for each segment Sweep start value sweep stop value upper limit middle value and lower limit delta limit for sweep start upper limit middle value and lower limit delta limit for sweep stop Number of segments 1 to 18 Other functions Beep fail limit line offset Mass Storage Flexible disk drive Type 3 5 inch Built in Size 1 44 MB Format DOS Formatting Available Volatile memory disk Size 512 KB Nonvolatile memory disk flash memory Size 10 MB Stored data State binary data binary or ASCII display graphics TIFF Parallel Printer Port Interface standard IEEE 1284 Centronics Printer control language HP PCL3 printer control language Connector type 25 pin D SUB connector 344 Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics GPIB Basic Characteristics Standard conformity IEEE 448 1 1987 IEEE 488 2 1987 IEC 625 JIS C 1901 1987 Available functions function code SH1 AH
113. necessary disable the write protection of the floppy disk Memory error An error is detected in the memory of the Agilent 4294A MEMORY TRACE NOT ACTIVE Although no data is stored in the memory trace you attempt to execute a command DISP MEMO DMNM and so on that uses the memory trace Therefore the command is invalid First use the DATMEM command and store data in the memory trace Missing media You attempt to access a storage device but the media type does not exist or is not installed correctly This message is displayed for example when you specify the floppy disk drive as the storage device but no floppy disk is correctly inserted into the drive Missing parameter The number of parameters is less than that the command requires For example although the POIN command requires 1 parameter such as POIN 101 no parameter is added as POIN MUST BE MORE THAN 2 POINTS FOR ANALYSIS Although the calculation of equivalent circuit parameters CALCULATE PARAMETERS key CALC PARMS key or CALECPARA command is executed because the number of points NOP within the sweep range if the partial search function is on and within the specified search range is two they cannot be calculated Set the number of points within the sweep range if the partial search function is on within the specified search range to three or more N NO ACTIVE MARKER When the marker is not displayed you attempt to execute the mark
114. next page of the filename list displayed as softkey labels described N A above STORE DEV gt Displays Table B 81 Mass storage Store Device menu on page 406 In N A of the softkey label the currently selected mass storage is displayed flexible disk drive FLOPPY volatile memory disk MEMORY or nonvolatile memory disk flash memory FLASH Appendix B 425 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Recall key 426 Appendix B Error messages The Agilent 4294A provides error messages to indicate its operating status This appendix describes the error messages of the Agilent 4294A Error messages are outputted on the LCD or through the GPIB This section gives a description of each error message and how it should be handled 427 NOTE 135 Error messages ADC OVERLOAD If an error with a positive error number occurs only its error message is displayed on the LCD following the string of CAUTION in this case its error number is not displayed On the other hand if an error with a negative error number occurs CAUTION HP IB error occurred is always displayed on the LCD When error messages are outputted through GP IB their error number and error message are outputted for all errors CAUTION is not added Some messages displayed on the LCD do not have CAUTION these are not error messages Messages without CAUTION are not
115. not attempt Chapter 3 51 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display Rear Panel to use an unsupported keyboard 10 24 bit I O Port Provides a data communications interface with an external device such as a handler on a production line This port supports 8 bit data for input output and 16 bit data for output 11 Printer Port A parallel port that connects to a printer Connecting a supported printer allows you to print out such data as measurement graphs and lists of measured values or settings For a list of supported printers refer to Print the measurement results and internal data with a printer on page 291 12 External Monitor Terminal Connects to an external color monitor An external color monitor connected to this terminal can display the same information as the Agilent 4294A s built in LCD 13 GPIB Connector Allows you to connect the Agilent 4294A to any external controller or instrument that supports GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB is useful when you want to assemble an automatic measurement system by having the Agilent 4294A interact with a controller and other instruments For information on using GPIB to perform automatic measurement refer to Programming Guide 14 Inlet with a fuse box To use the Agilent 4294A you must connect this inlet with the three wire power cable that comes with the Agilent 4294A For more information refer to Chapter 1 Installation and Setup 52 Chapter 3
116. of Result Set the marker separately for either trace A or B Set the marker separately for either trace A or B In setting the preset time marker setting procedures are applied to both traces A and B for example movements of the main marker are common to traces A and B This is because the marker coupling function is turned on in the preset time setting To set the marker separately for either trace A or B the following steps must be taken Press the Marker key to display the marker menu Press the MKR COUPLE ON off key to turn off the marker coupling function The softkey label will change to MKR COUPLE on OFF Setting of the marker thereafter applies separately to either trace A or B Softkey label State of marker coupling function MKR COUPLE ON off ON marker setting applies to both traces A and B MKR COUPLE on OFF OFF marker setting applies separately to either trace A or B Marker coupling function off A IZI TOP 1 Mo BOTTOM 16 9 2 9272 ko ATE Hid f B z SCALE 36 div REF ge 68 597 2 VAC START 40 Hz IAC VIBE OSC 564 m olt STOP 114 MHz 4294a0j054 NOTE The marker couple function on off setting applies to both traces A and B You need not select the active trace or confirm your selection before setting Chapter 8 243 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Selecting target trace data or memory for marke
117. or center value for the sweep settings that are currently in effect Use the Start key to set the sweep start value and the Center key to set the sweep center value 17 Instrument Status Area This area shows the status of various functions of the instrument Trace validity After you have changed the measurement conditions this indicator is displayed until you update the measurement trace with the new settings To get a correct measurement trace you must update the trace so that this indicator disappears dc bias status DCB Indicates that the instrument is performing measurement under dc voltage bias conditions in variable voltage mode or dc current bias conditions in variable current mode VC Indicates that the instrument is performing measurement under dc voltage bias conditions in constant voltage mode IC Indicates that the instrument is performing measurement under dc current bias conditions in constant current mode Chapter 3 57 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display ltems Displayed on the LCD vd IL blank Indicates that because you specified dc voltage bias in constant voltage mode with a setting that exceeds the defined voltage limit the actual applied voltage differs from the intended setting Indicates that because you specified dc current bias in constant current mode with a setting that exceeds the defined current limit the actual applied current differs from the intended setting Ind
118. other than oscillator level The setting for the unit will not affect the setting for the signal source level monitoring function since the function displays both voltage and current levels Settings of the unit for oscillator level are commonly applied to traces A and B Accordingly you do not need to select and verify an active trace before setting 106 Chapter 5 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting and Applying dc Bias Setting and Applying dc Bias Follow the steps below to apply dc bias to DUT regardless of whether you plan to sweep by dc bias 1 Selecting dc bias mode Press the Source key to display the signal source menu Press the BIAS MENU key to display the dc bias menu Press the MODE key to display the dc bias mode menu Select the dc bias mode dc bias mode Key stroke Voltage source non constant voltage mode VOLT Current source non constant current mode CURRENT Voltage source constant voltage mode VOLT CONSTANT Current source constant current mode CURRENT CONSTANT Press the return key to return to the dc bias menu Note that the dc bias mode currently selected is displayed in the key label of the MODE key Softkey label Selected dc bias mode MODE VOLT Voltage source non constant voltage mode MODE CURR Current source non constant current mode MODE C VOLT Voltage source constant voltage mod
119. required Limit line table edit function Key operation Select the segment number SEGMENT use the ENTRY block key to the currently selected segment is indicated by enter lt indicated to the right of the segment number NO line Start the edit mode of the selected segment EDIT Delete the selected segment pressing the key DELETE causes deletion immediately 260 Chapier 8 Figure 8 25 NOTE Step 22 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Set a limit to the trace and make pass fail evaluation Limit line table edit function Key operation Add a new segment to the end of the selected ADD segment and start the edit mode of the segment Delete all of the segments in the list sweep CLEAR LIST yes cancel table being edited Completed limit line table B z SCALE 26 fdiv REF a 84 5917 vac O IAC o UT RR CENTER 1 MHz OSC 500 mvolt SPAN 24 kHz NO START Hz UPP Low STOP Hz UPP Low 1 99 99M 50 90 99 9961 50 90 2 99 9961 50 90 99 999M 90 50 3 99 999M 90 50 100 0041 90 50 4 100 004M 90 50 100 0076 50 90 5 gt 100 007M 50 90 100 01 50 90 4294a0j095 From 1 to 18 segments can be set in the limit line table To set the limit range of the segment when an upper value is not required set an extremely large value that has no influence as an upper value When a lower value is not required set an extremely small value that has no
120. set second is displayed Below it the currently set time hour minute second is displayed in a smaller size as in Step 4 Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the second e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TW to set the desired value Second can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 59 99 66 Press the done key to save the hour minute and second data set in Steps 4 through 9 in the Agilent 4294A and to return to the Internal Clock menu When you want to cancel the setting of the time press the cancel key instead of the done key The previous time setting remains without changes Chapter 9 301 D Table 9 2 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Table 9 3 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Table 9 4 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Setting the Built in Speaker Beep Sound Setting the Built in Speaker Beep Sound The Agilent 4294A has a built in speaker to output beep sounds The beep sound functions are classified into the following three groups You can set each of them on or off Beep functions of the Agilent 4294A Type Function Completion beep Sounds when storage of calibration or instrument states is completed Warning beep Sounds when a warning message occurs Limit line test
121. set to an integer ranging from 0 through 255 Press the 4th key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the 4th part of the gateway address current set value is displayed Below it the entire currently set gateway address is displayed in a smaller size Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the 4th part of the gateway address e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value The 4th part of the gateway address can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 255 Press the done key to store the gateway address data set in Steps 3 through 10 in the Agilent 4294A and to return to the Local menu When you want to cancel the setting of the gateway address press the cancel key instead of the done key The previous gateway address setting remains without changes Reboot the Agilent 4294A This will put the entered gateway address into effect When you set the LAN addresses IP address gateway address and subnet mask at one time you need to cycle power only after the completion of all settings to put all of the LAN addresses into effect 316 Chapter 9 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Setting
122. settings e The Mass Storage menu displayed by the STORE DEV key e The Copy Destination Device menu displayed by the DEST DEV key e The IBASIC Mass Storage menu displayed by the key operation System IBASIC more 1 3 MASS STORE Am The IBASIC Mass Storage menu manages the setting to be used for the storage devices of the Agilent 4294A through the HP Instrument Basic functions Pressing the key returns the display to the File Selection menu When a storage device is selected the current directory the current location in the hierarchical tree structure used to store files at that time and the amount of available space on the storage device are displayed on the upper left area of the screen No name is assigned to the highest level directory called the root directory and only is displayed The current directory shown here is that of the storage device previously specified If you do not change the copy destination filename to store proceed to Step 12 If you want to change the filename use the following keys to change it in the string input line Table 9 15 Key Function Step keys NHD Scrolls up or down the list of available characters displayed below the text entry line Rotary knob O Horizontally moves the cursor A located below the displayed character list SELECT LETTER or G n At the cursor _ of the string input line enters the character specified with the cursor A below the character list
123. setup process is canceled the previously obtained data is saved as the available adapter setup data 80 Chapter 4 NOTE Setting Measurement Conditions This chapter explains how to set up the measurement conditions for the Agilent 4294A Precision Impedance Analyzer including the measurement signal and sweep Be sure to perform the adapter setting before starting your measurement See Adapter Setting on page 67 for how to perform the adapter setting 81 Step 1 Setting Measurement Conditions Putting the Agilent 4294A into the Preset State Presetting Putting the Agilent 4294A into the Preset State Presetting Press the Preset key Executing presetting will put the Agilent 4294A into an initial state called the preset state When turning on the power to the Agilent 4294A a power on state file is loaded to restore the setting stored in the file if it has been saved in the mass storage of the Agilent 4294A We recommend that you to perform presetting by pressing the Preset key each time you put the Agilent 4294 A into a new setting regardless of whether it is done immediately after turning the power on Note that the adapter setting is not affected by initialization with the Preset key once it is set it cannot be modified by pressing the Preset key 82 Chapter5 Step 1 Setting Measurement Conditions Selecting Trace Active Trace Selecting Trace Active Trace The A
124. sweep parameter value at the main marker on the current active trace A or B into the partial search range lower limit In other words the sweep range is changed by using the current position of the main marker as the new partial search range lower limit MKRTRMIN 398 Appendix B Table B 69 Key operation Key Definitions Softkeys displayed by pressing the Search key Search range Search Rng menu 1 Search SEARCH RANGE MENU Softkey Function GPIB command MKR gt MAXIMUM Substitutes the sweep parameter value at the main marker on the current active MKRTRMAX trace A or B into the partial search range upper limit In other words the sweep range is changed using the current position of the main marker as the new partial search range upper limit MKRA SEARCH Uses the range between the main marker on the current active trace A or B and MKRTR RNG the A marker as the partial search range return Returns to Table B 64 Search Search menu on page 395 N A 1 When the sweep type is not list list sweep Table B 70 Key operation Search range Search Rng menu 2 Search SEARCH RANGE MENU number for partial search Softkey Function GPIB command FULL Selects the mode in which the partial search range is the entire list sweep table SEARNG FULL SEGMENT Selects the mode in which the partial search range is one specific segment in the SEARN
125. sweep parameter value at the main marker on the current active MKRLIMSTOP trace A or B into the sweep stop value of the segment MKR VALUE STAR Substitutes the sweep parameter value at the main marker on the current active MKRLIMVSTAR trace A or B into the limit center point at the sweep start point of the segment MKR gt VALUE STOP Substitutes the sweep parameter value at the main marker on the current active MKRLIMVSTOP trace A or B into the limit center point at the sweep stop point of the segment more 3 3 Displays Table B 84 Segment edit Edit Limit menu 1 3 on page 407 N A done Has the same function as the done key in Table B 84 Segment edit Edit Limit LIMSDON menu 1 3 on page 407 cancel Has the same function as the cancel key in Table B 84 Segment edit Edit LIMSQUI Limit menu 1 3 on page 407 Appendix B 409 Table B 87 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the System key List deletion Clear List menu System LIMIT TEST EDIT LIMIT LINE CLEAR LIST Softkey Function GPIB command Deletes the contents of the limit line table that is being edited from the edit area Even after using this key you can keep the table without deleting it by pressing the cancel key in Table B 83 Limit line edit Edit Limit menu on page 407 which is stored in original form before the limit line table edit mode is invoked
126. target value Chapter 8 225 Analysis and Processing of Result Search the point of target measurement Figure 8 8 Result of target value search Trace B A IZI TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 209 B z SCALE 20 e div REF G ae VAC VID CENTER 100 MHz OSC 500 molt SPAN 28 kHz 4294a0j057 NOTE If multiple target values are present on the trace the main marker moves to the target value Step 5 of the measuring points that were closest to the main marker immediately before the target value search was executed If the target value is not found the message TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND is displayed in the upper left area of the screen If multiple target measurements are present on the trace operate the following key to move from the first searched point to other points Search type Key operation Search in the left direction search from the current marker position in the direction of decreasing sweep parameter values and move the main marker to the first detected target value Search in the right direction search from the current marker position in the direction of increasing sweep parameter values and move the main marker to the first detected target value 226 SEARCH LEFT SEARCH RIGHT Chapter8 Analysis and Processing of Result Search the point of target measurement Figure 8 9 Right search after Figure 8 8 A IZI TOP 5 ko BOTTOM 20 Q B Bz
127. the active trace it appears at the position of the sweep center value on the trace Use the following keys to search the trace Search type Key operation Search of maximum parameter value MAX MAX Search of maximum parameter value MIN MIN Read the value displayed in the marker sweep parameter value field and marker measurement parameter value field on the screen Maximum search value by trace 5 ka BOTTOM 20 2 26 efdiv REF Be A Z 3 181 ke B dz TOP SCALE E 1 0 G865 MHz CMP Hid IA OSC 500 mvolt VAC VID CENTER 100 06025 MHz SPAN 26 kHz 4294a0j055 Chapter 8 223 Analysis and Processing of Result Search the maximum minimum measurements Figure 8 7 Minimum search value by trace A IZI TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 20 n 46 545 o B 8z SCALE 20 fdiv REF o 99 9988 MHz VAC IAC VFTOC CENTER 146 6025 MHz OSC 568 mVolt SPAM 26 kHz 4294a0j056 NOTE When the MAX MIN TARGET or PEAK key is used for searching one search is carried out for the trace when the key is pressed If the search tracking function is on search is executed every time a sweep is completed For details on the search tracking function refer to Automatically performing search for each sweep search tracking on page 235 224 Chapter 8 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 4 Analysis and Processing of Result Search the point of target measurement Search the point of ta
128. the desired location e Press the Search key to display the search menu Then use the search function with MAX MIN TARGET and PEAK keys to locate the main marker to the desired position Press the Marker key to display the marker menu Select one of the following methods to specify the sweep start value sweep stop value or sweep center value as the location of the current main marker Setting sweep range Key stroke Specify a new sweep start value as the current MKR START main marker location Specify a new sweep stop value as the current MKR STOP main marker location Specify a new sweep center value as the MKR CENTER current main marker location 90 Chapter 5 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting Sweep Range Setting sweep range Key stroke Set the difference in the sweep parameter value MKR A gt SPAN between the current main marker position and the delta marker position as the new sweep span value Search the trace for a peak and specify anew more 1 2 PEAK gt CENTER sweep center value as the location of the peak found The current main marker position is set as the more 1 2 ZOOMING APERTURE to set the new sweep center value and the new sweep zooming aperture and then MKR ZOOM span value is set depending on the specified zooming aperture As a result the trace will be magnified zoomed in by focusing on the main marker position 1 For how to use the main mar
129. the factory default setting display the Item Color menu for that item and then press the RESET COLOR key The factory setting the setting when the RESET COLOR key is pressed of the graphic drawing pens is pen 1 white pen 2 red pen 3 yellow pen 4 green pen 5 cyan and pen 6 blue The brightness of the softkey labels affects their readability thus the Agilent 4294A s operability Take care not to set the softkey labels to an excessively low brightness Resetting All Items to Factory Default Colors You cannot reset the colors of text and graphics by simply pressing the Preset key or turning the power off and back on To reset all screen items to the factory default colors follow these steps Press the Display key to display the first page of the Display menu Press the more 1 2 key the softkey displayed at the bottom to move to the second page of the Display menu Press the MODIFY COLOR key the 4th softkey from the top to display the Modify Color menu Press the DEFAULT COLORS key the 3rd softkey from the bottom to reset all screen items to their factory default colors Pressing the DEFAULT COLORS key does not reset the foreground and background intensity factors to the factory default settings To reset the foreground and background intensity factors to the factory default settings you must manually enter the default values 100 and 0 respectively by following the procedures described in Setting the Fore
130. the number of times specified This means that only specifying the number of sweeping times will allow you to repeat sweeping as many times as you specify The number of sweeping times can be set to an integer ranging from to 999 Specifying the number of sweeping times to 1 is equivalent to executing Single sweep on page 114 When you specify the number of sweeping times as that set by sweep to sweep averaging you can stop the sweeping after the repetitions reach the number indicated by sweep to sweep averaging Sweep with unlimited times continuous sweep Press the Trigger key to display the trigger menu Press the CONTINUOUS key to select continuous sweep When continuous sweep is selected sweeping can be repeated unlimited times after it is triggered Press the HOLD key to stop the sweeping No further sweeping can be triggered after it is stopped Stopping sweep Press the Trigger key to display the trigger menu Press the HOLD key to stop the sweep Pressing the HOLD key immediately stops sweeping regardless of which sweeping state single specified times or continuous is selected No further sweeping can be triggered after it is stopped Chapter 5 115 Setting Measurement Conditions Sweeping Multiple Sweep Ranges with Different Conditions in a Single Action List Sweep Sweeping Multiple Sweep Ranges with Different Conditions in a Single Action List Sweep If you select the linear sweep or log logar
131. the settings and measurement data stored in the state file 7 Softkeys The softkeys are eight keys located along the right hand edge of the LCD display Pressing a hardkey displays a menu of labels that define the functions of the softkeys For more information on softkey labels refer to 5 Softkey Label Area on page 54 8 Color LCD Display Displays nearly all information necessary for using the Agilent 4294A including measurement results trace data instrument status analysis results and softkey labels 9 Power Switch Turns on off the power to the instrument When you turn on the Agilent 4294A it is initialized to its power on defaults with no softkey menu shown on the screen From this state you can display a softkey menu by pressing a specific hardkey Note that if you turn on the instrument with a power on setting file AUTOREC STA residing on the flash memory nonvolatile memory disk or on a floppy disk inserted in the floppy disk drive the file is automatically loaded and the settings contained in the file are restored 48 Chapter 3 CAUTION A Front Rear Panel and LCD Display Front Panel 10 UNKNOWN Terminals These connectors let you connect the instrument with a device under test DUT via test accessories such as an adapter test fixture or cable These accessories adopt a four terminal pair design thereby enabling more accurate and wider range dynamic measurements Each test connector ha
132. the upper limit of a partial search range SEARMAX and as a result the command is ignored When the sweep type is the list sweep you cannot specify a partial search range by using the lower limit and the upper limit You must first specify a sweep type other than the list sweep command SWPT LIN or SWPT LOG CAN T CHANGE ON ZERO SPAN During the execution of the list sweep when the sweep span of each segment is zero you attempt to change the list sweep span integrated total span of individual segments specified as the horizontal axis of the graph for the list sweep to a single span specifying a linear frequency axis for the horizontal axis of a graph whose left edge and right edge are 430 Appendix C 114 140 148 144 100 75 74 91 230 Error messages CAN T SAVE GRAPHICS WHEN COPY IN PROGRESS the minimum frequency and the maximum frequency respectively within all segments with the LIST SPAN key or the LISPAN SINGLE command and as a result the command is ignored When executing the list sweep when the sweep span of each segment is set to zero the list sweep span is automatically set to the segment span and cannot be changed CAN T SAVE GRAPHICS WHEN COPY IN PROGRESS You want to execute a command to save the graphics screen during copying outputting to a printer but the graphics screen cannot be saved during printing Character data error An error not described by error numbers from 141 t
133. to Table B 98 Copy Copy menu on page 415 N A 416 Appendix B Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Copy key Table B 102 Copy data Copy Contents menu Key operation Copy SELECT CONTENTS LIST VALUE Copy SELECT CONTENTS OPERATING PARAMETERS Copy SELECT CONTENTS CAL KIT VALUE Copy SELECT CONTENTS COMPEN KIT VALUE Softkey Function GPIB command START Prints the information measured value list operating parameter or calibration PRINALL kit value displayed on the screen with the printer connected to the printer parallel port on the rear panel Note that the information is not displayed on the screen if you have not selected the ALL INSTUMENT key or the HALF INSTR HALF BASIC key in Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 ABORT Aborts the printing operation COPA TIME on OFF Toggles on and off the time stamp function used when outputting to a printer If COPT ONIOFF this is set to on the current time and date are printed first and then the specified screen information is printed This configuration is common to the TIME on OFF key in Table B 100 Copy configuration Copy Setup menu 2 2 on page 416 NEXT PAGE Displays the next page of the list displayed on the screen NEXP PREV PAGE Displays the previous page of the list displayed on the screen PREP RESTORE DISPLAY gt Displays Table B 101 Copy data select
134. to specify the top value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value Chapter 7 169 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Manual Scale Setting for measurements other than COMPLEX Z Y Figure 7 10 Setting the top value TTOM 25 mH div REF 34 U om Or VAC IAC START 44 Hz OSC 588 molt 4294a0j029 Step 5 Press the BOTTOM VALUE value The Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen indicates the bottom value currently in effect that is the value that corresponds to the line displayed at the bottom of the graph Step 6 Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the bottom value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value 170 Chapter 7 Figure 7 11 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Manual Scale Setting for measurements other than COMPLEX Z Y Setting the bottom value A Ls TOP 25 mH BOTTOM 25 mH Q SCALE i Ufsdiv REF 34 U VAC IAC START 46 Hz OSC 586 molt 570 4294a0j030
135. to the HP Instrument BASIC programming language provides some helpful hints on getting the most use from it and includes a general programming reference It is divided into three books HP Instrument BASIC Programming Techniques HP Instrument BASIC Interface Techniques and HP Instrument BASIC Language Reference e Service Manual Agilent P N 04294 90100 Option OBW only This manual explains how to adjust and repair the Agilent 4294A and how to carry out performance tests This manual is attached when Option OBW is ordered NOTE The number of x in the part number of each manual Agilent P N 0 for the first edition is incremented by 1 each time a revision is made Contents 1 Installation Incoming Inspection sos oe sha iio be SE Ses Ae eh Se a ee RE te area ete 18 Precautions to Take Before Setting Up the Power Supply 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee eee 20 Setting Up and Replacing the Fuse 0 ee cece eee eens 20 Power Source Requirements 2 0 0 peed a a cee e cette eee ees 20 Power Cable eeir coe Goer tse Pate Dace A Bests Aa te HO Ae Ee ie eee ee 21 Connecting the BNC Adapter for Option 1D5 Only 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 23 Using the LAN Port 3 2 2 44 sesh eed tape i dhe he sb et dee db a ieee E gt ated emda d 24 Connecting the Supplied Keyboard 2 0 0 renner rererere rererere errre 25 Usinig a Rackmount Kits ssi sam Ge cs Be Mee Wee A eee dhs ahead Wee AREA ees 26 Option 1CN Handle
136. using the main marker or using the delta marker alone Placing the delta marker on the reference point with the main marker Follow these steps to first move the main marker to a reference point and then place the delta marker at that point Activate the trace that you want to analyze Active trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Using an appropriate function such as the search function move the main marker to the point on the trace that you want to specify as the reference For how to move the main marker refer to related topics including e Specify the sweep parameter value and read the value on the trace on page 212 e Search the maximum minimum measurements on page 223 e Search the point of target measurement on page 225 e Search the maximum minimum peak on page 228 Press the Marker key to display the Marker menu Press the AMODE MENU key to display the Delta Marker menu Select the delta marker on the trace mode or the fixed delta marker mode Delta marker mode Key operation Delta marker on the trace mode A MKR when the trace changes the delta marker moves along with it you set its position with the sweep parameter value only Chapter 8 217 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Analysis and Processing of Result Reading the difference from the reference point on the screen delta marker Delta marker mode Key operation Fixed delta marker mode even ift
137. value and lower limit value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 Jand and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys NND to set the desired value This setting allows a new lower limit value or limit differential value to be written for the lower limit value differential value string LOWER or DELTA at the stop point on the line of the segment being edited in the limit line table If you need to turn off make invalid the limit line test of the segment temporarily press more 2 3 TEST ON off to change the softkey label to TEST on OFF When the limit line test of the segment is turned off the test will be regarded as having passed even if it exceeds the limit range set by the measurement trace and the limit line of the segment will not be displayed When the limit line test is off is displayed to the right of the segment number in the completed limit line table Note that is not displayed when the pointer gt is displayed to the right of the segment number When a new segment is added the limit line test is ON TEST ON off as default setting Press the done key to complete segment editing To suspend editing of the segment and to return to the state before editing started press the cancel key Repeat steps 7 to 21 to create the required number of segments Use the following edit function if
138. value field in the upper left area of the screen The power on self test automatically executed at power on is a partial execution of the internal tests You can also check the result of each test in the power on self test by entering its test number as described above Chapter 9 321 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Performing Self Diagnosis of the Agilent 4294A 322 Chapter 9 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics 323 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics Specifications describe the instrument s warranted performance over the temperature range of 0 C to 40 C except as noted Supplemental performance characteristics are intended to provide information that is useful for applying non warranted performance parameters to the instrument Such parameters are denoted as SPC supplemental performance characteristics typical or nominal Warm up time must at least 30 minutes after power on for all specifications Basic Characteristics Measurement Parameter Impedance Parameters IZI 6 R X Ls Rs Ls Q Cs Rs Cs Q Cs D IYI 9 G B Lp G Lp Q Cp G Cp Q Cp D Complex Z Y IZI Ls IZI Cs IZl Lp IZI Cp IZI Rs IZI Q IZI D Lp Rp Cp Rp Measurement Terminal Configuration Four terminal pair configuration Connector type Four BNC female connectors Can be converted to one port terminal usi
139. with the STORE DEV key for files other PURG lt string gt than program files and directories and displays Table B 111 File selection Select File menu on page 422 including the filename list CREATE DIRECTORY Displays Table B 106 Filename entry File Name menu on page 419 CRED lt string gt gt CHANGE DIRECTORY Searches the mass storage specified with the STORE DEV key for directories CHAD lt string gt gt and displays Table B 111 File selection Select File menu on page 422 including the filename list COPY FILE gt Searches the mass storage specified with the STORE DEV key for files other FILC than program files and directories and displays Table B 111 File selection lt srcFile gt lt srcDevType gt Select File menu on page 422 including the filename list lt dstFile gt lt dstDevType gt FORMAT gt Displays Table B 113 Format confirmation Format Media menu on page INID 423 STORE DEV gt Displays Table B 81 Mass storage Store Device menu on page 406 In N A of the softkey label the currently selected mass storage is displayed flexible disk drive FLOPPY volatile memory disk MEMORY or nonvolatile memory disk flash memory FLASH return Returns to Table B 105 Save Save menu on page 419 N A Appendix B 421 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Save key Table B 111 File selection Select File menu
140. you perform adapter setup again at the appropriate temperature It takes a few minutes to complete each setup data measurement During each data measurement the message WAIT MEASURING ADJUSTMENT KIT is displayed in the instrument state area in the LCD s upper left side Make sure that the 16048G or 16048H is correctly connected to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A Connecting the 16048G or 16048H LA orn nsx 4 ove ooo enema 16048ghoj0101 70 Chapter 4 NOTE Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Figure 4 2 Step 6 NOTE Step 7 Preparation of Measurement Accessories Adapter Setting The 16048G or 16048H cable must be directly connected to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A If another accessory like a cable or adapter is inserted between the 16048G or 16048H and the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A the correct adapter setup data cannot be obtained and correct device measurement cannot be performed after the adapter setup More than 30 minutes warm up time is required after turning on the Agilent 4294A Make the correct adapter selection for the 16048G or 16048H in accordance with Adapter Selection on page 68 After performing Step 4 of Adapter Selection on page 68 pres
141. 0 sec Resolution 1 msec 1 Frequency sweep only 328 Chapter 10 Figure 10 2 NOTE Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Measurement Time Measurement Time SPC Basic Characteristics Measurement time per point sec 40 100 1k Measurement bandwidth BW 5 BW 4 BW 3 BW 2 BW 1 10k 100k 1M 10M 110M Frequency Hz 4294a0e005 When the 42941A Impedance Probe or the 42942A Terminal Adapter is used measurement time is 1 5 times longer than the value shown in Figure 10 2 Trigger Function Trigger types Continuous single number of groups Trigger sources Internal free run external BNC connector input GP IB or LAN manual front key Trigger event types Point trigger sweep trigger Measurement Bandwidth Averaging Measurement bandwidth Range 1 Fast to 5 Precise 5 steps Averaging Types Sweep to sweep averaging point averaging Chapter 10 329 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics Averaging factor 1 to 256 integer Adapter Setup Adapter Selection NONE No adapter the 16047E or other direct connection type test fixture is connected ATP 1M Four terminal pair 1 m 16048G ATP 2M Four terminal pair 2 m 16048H 7 mm 42942A Terminal Adapter 42942A PROBE 42941A Impedance Probe 42941A Ca
142. 00 Printing cannot be carried out at a resolution higher than that of your printer Press the TOP MARGIN key Then the current top margin the length of the blank area on the top of the paper is displayed in inches in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the top margin in inches e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press the unit key x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value The top margin can be set in a range from 0 to 5 inches Press the LFT MARGIN key Then the current left margin the width of the white space on the left side of the paper is displayed in inches in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the left margin in inches e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press the unit key x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value The left margin can be set in a range from 0 to 5 inches Press the more 1 2 key to display the Copy Setup menu 292 Chapter 8 Step 11 Note NOTE Step 1 NOTE Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Step 1
143. 1 Step 2 Step 3 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Setting Checking the GPIB Setting Checking the GPIB This section describes how to set or check the interface necessary to use the Agilent 4294A s GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus For more information on automatic measurements using the GPIB refer to Programming Manual Switching between the System Controller Mode and Addressable only Mode When you use the Agilent 4294A in an GPIB system you have to specify whether to use it as the system controller system controller mode or in the state where addressing is always made from other devices addressable only mode Follow these steps to switch between the system controller mode and the addressable only mode Press the Local key to display the Local menu Select the system controller mode or addressable only mode with one of the following keys GPIB mode Key operation system controller mode SYSTEM CONTROLLER addressable only mode ADDRESSABLE ONLY MODE There should only be one system controller on a GPIB system If there is another system controller set this instrument to the addressable only mode If you try to set the Agilent 4294A as the system controller using the above key while there is another system controller the CAUTION CAN T CHANGE ANOTHOR CONROLLER ON BUS error message is displayed To pass the GPIB control from the controller to this instrument set this instrument to the addressa
144. 1 T6 TEO L4 LEO SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DT1 Cl C2 C3 C4 C11 E2 Numeric data transfer formats ASCII 32 or 64 bit IEEE 754 floating point format DOS PC format 32 bit IEEE reversed byte order 1 See the standard s documentation for a description of each code HP Instrument BASIC Keyboard Type PS 2 style 101 English Connector type Mini DIN connector 8 Bit I O Port Connector type 15 pin D SUB connector Signal level TTL Number of I O bits 4 bits for input 8 bits for output Pin assignment see Figure 10 7 Figure 10 7 8 Bit T O Port Pin Assignment 4294a0j004 24 bit I O Port Handler Interface Connector type 36 pin D SUB connector Signal level TTL Chapter 10 345 Figure 10 8 Table 10 1 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics Number of I O bits 8 bits for input or output 16s bit for output Pin Assignment see Figure 10 8 and Table 10 1 24 Bit I O Port Pin Assignment CO0E003 24 Bit I O Port Pin Assignment Pin No Signal Name Signal Standard 1 GND OV 2 INPUT1 TTL level pulse input pul
145. 1 Dimensions rear view with Option 1CN 1D5 typical in millimeters OPTION xxx Label 24 317 1 0 PORT 4294A0J002 Chapter 10 351 C a o le a t ters llime 1 m n sl l Ica typ 5 1D 1CN tion Op ith i iew w de vi SI S nsion e 1m D 12 ure 10 Fig e 209 Se eee a Q es ce 325 sa 23 305 Se 35 8 co 388 se a o o o o o o 388 a o fap a he SS 3 2868 Se Be a o o 358 ae ae a ee pees ee 830305 8989 SS 8089 Beare a o o o o ae oe ca 33 e888 sa 288 Secs 33S aoe OS 5 288 pace S Bees a Sat Q 68383 3 o o o o o o a 389 Q 333335 289 O Paa 3 o o 3 lt a O 06 E o o o o o o 3 Sees 98095 808 S o 208 o sees cos ce oo o o o o o o o o o a ts oan a 9988 i ae ae ee go 3 5 S OS oe oR a 98 eee ee ee oe S3393 93898 908 908 Bees ae ae oo ue o o o o o a oo oo o o ae Boe ce ee oe o o oe Eee
146. 12 addressable only mode 312 setting checking procedure 312 system controller mode 312 I I downarrow 57 IC 57 incoming inspection 18 initialization medium 310 recording medium 310 inlet with a fuse box 52 installation 17 keyboard 25 rackmount kit 26 Index Index instrument message displaying again 298 instrument setup part 277 data contents saved with the data save function 278 INSTRUMENT STATE block 47 internal clock setting checking 299 internal reference output 51 348 internal test 320 INTERNAL TEST key 320 IP address setting checking procedure 314 IP ADDRESS key 314 K k m key 46 key definitions 357 keyboard installation 25 L LAN gateway address setting checking procedure 315 installation 24 IP address setting checking procedure 314 MAC address check procedure 318 port 51 setting checking procedure 314 subnet mask setting checking procedure 317 LAN interface 347 limit line test 256 344 linear sweep 87 list sweep 87 116 Local key 48 log sweep 87 M M micro key 46 MAC address check procedure 318 MAC ADDRESS key 318 manual changes 355 manual sweep 100 marker 212 function 343 MARKER block 47 marker couple mode status display 55 Marker key 47 Marker to key 47 MASS STORE key 308 mass strage 344 Max 55 Meas key 45 measurement accuracy 330 bandwidth 126 329 parameter 324 terminal 324 time
147. 155 mQ respectively Result of Searching for the Self Resonance Frequency with the Search Tracking Function On A IZI SCALE 1 ofdiv REF 2 a 155 46 ma ae 912861384 HZ Pl B Bz SCALE 20 div REF Be 4 395 VAC IAC VIDE START 168 Hz OSC 566 molt STOP 168 MHz 4294a0e096 42 Chapter 2 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display This chapter covers the features of the front and rear panels of the Agilent 4294A It contains illustrations and descriptions of the front panel features the LCD display and its labels and the rear panel connectors 43 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display Front Panel Front Panel The front panel of the Agilent 4294A provides several blocks of hardkeys and an LCD display with a series of softkeys along its right hand edge Also there are a number of test connectors and a power switch beneath the LCD display Figure 3 1 shows the front panel of the Agilent 4294A Figure 3 1 Front Panel of the Agilent 4294A
148. 217 or Moving the delta marker alone to place it at a reference point on page 218 display the main marker or sub marker on the trace and move it to the desired location For how to move the main marker refer to related topics including Chapter 8 219 NOTE Figure 8 4 Analysis and Processing of Result Reading the difference from the reference point on the screen delta marker e Specify the sweep parameter value and read the value on the trace on page 212 e Search the maximum minimum measurements on page 223 e Search the point of target measurement on page 225 e Search the maximum minimum peak on page 228 The sweep parameter value or measurement parameter value you specify for moving the main marker should be a relative value from the delta marker The values displayed in the Marker Sweep Parameter Value field and Marker Measurement Parameter Value field in the upper right area of the screen are also relative values from the delta marker position In addition the softkey labels in the Sub Marker Setting menu and the marker value list displayed by the marker list function are also displayed as differences from the set delta marker For how to turn off the marker refer to Clearing turning off the marker from the screen on page 247 For how to display move the sub marker refer to Listing data at several points on the trace on page 214 Displayed difference from the reference po
149. 3 Calibration Fixture Compensation Press the SHORT key to start SHORT compensation data measurement During the compensation data measurement the message WAIT MEASURING STANDARD is displayed in the instrument state area of the LCD s upper left side When SHORT compensation data measurement is completed the softkey label SHORT on OFF if it is off changes to SHORT ON off Connect a LOAD device to the test fixture s device contacts Refer to the operation manual furnished with each test fixture for more information on the necessity or connection of LOAD compensation Press the LOAD key to start LOAD compensation data measurement During the compensation data measurement the message WAIT MEASURING STANDARD is displayed in the instrument state area of the LCD s upper left side When LOAD compensation data measurement is completed the softkey label LOAD on OFF if it is off changes to LOAD ON off Turning the fixture compensation on or off The fixture compensation function is automatically turned on after completing each compensation data measurement However you can turn the function on or off as required Press the Cal key to display the Calibration Menu Press the FIXTURE COMPEN key to bring up the Fixture Compensation Menu Press the OPEN on OFF OPEN ON off key SHORT on OFF SHORT ON off key and LOAD on OFF LOAD ON off key to make each fixture compensation valid on or invalid off for measure
150. 3 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Analysis and Processing of Result Listing data at several points on the trace Listing data at several points on the trace When the main marker marker numbered 0 is used data on the trace sweep parameter value and measured value are always displayed in the Marker Sweep Parameter Value and Marker Measurement Parameter Value fields in the right area of the screen To display data at several points on the trace at one time use the sub markers markers numbered to 7 and the marker list function Displaying several marker positions using softkey labels When you turn on the sub marker the softkey label of the sub marker in the Sub Marker Setting menu changes to the sweep parameter value and measurement parameter value at that point Activate the trace that you want to read to which the setting is applied Active trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Use the softkeys displayed by pressing the Marker key or the Search key the keys in the ENTRY block and so on to move the main marker to one of the points on the trace whose data you want to read Press the Marker key to display the Marker menu Press the SUB MKR key to display the Sub Marker Setting menu Select one of the following sub markers to place it at the current main marker position Type of sub marker Key operation Sub marker marker number 1 1 OFF Sub marker 2 marker number 2 2
151. 42941 A Impedance Probe PROBE 42941A Chapter 6 143 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Calibration F Calibration When a Probe Adapter is Connected to the 42941A See Adapter Setting on page 67 for adapter selection When performing calibration at the 3 5 mm port of the 42941A with a user defined calibration kit perform user calibration with the proper calibration kit Refer to User Calibration on page 147 for the user calibration procedure User calibration is not required when you do not use a user defined calibration kit Connect a probe adapter to the 3 5 mm port of the 42941A Impedance Probe See the operation manual of the 42941A for the appropriate connection setup Perform the fixture compensation at the device contacts electrodes of the probe adapter See Fixture Compensation on page 151 for the fixture compensation procedure When a probe adapter is connected to the 3 5 mm port of a 42941A that is also connected to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A port extension compensation is not required 144 Chapter 6 Calibration G Calibration When the 3 5 mm Port of the 42941A is Extended G Calibration When the 3 5 mm Port of the 42941A is Extended Perform the following calibration when the 3 5 mm port of a 42941A connected to the Agilent 4294A is extended with a one port configuration and the device is connected to the cable s end with a minimal connection Figure 6
152. 4A Internal Data Key Function BACK SPACE or Back Space Returns the cursor _ of the character string input line by one character to the left and erases the character in that position CLEAR NAME Erases the entire the character string entered in the character string input line There is no need to attach an extension to the file name After entering the file name into the character string input line press the done key or x1 key to save the file To suspend saving press the cancel key In both cases you will return to the Data Save menu Steps 10 and 11 can be executed from the external keyboard connected to the rear panel After entering the file name press the Enter key of the keyboard to save the file The extension DAT is automatically attached to the name of the file to be saved when saved in binary format and the extension TXT is automatically attached to it when saved in text ASCII format It is not possible to later recall the calibration data and trace data saved in text ASCII format for reuse by the Agilent 4294A The calibration data and trace data saved in binary format does not contain setting information such as the sweep range or number of sweep points Accordingly to recall the data and use it correctly on the Agilent 4294A save the setting state using the STATE saving function Using files saved in the text ASCID format with the data save function You can read data in files saved in the text
153. 5 C from the adapter setup temperature it is recommended that you perform adapter setup again at the appropriate temperature It takes a few minutes to complete each setup data measurement During each data measurement the message WAIT MEASURING ADJUSTMENT 74 Chapter 4 Step 1 Figure 4 4 NOTE Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Preparation of Measurement Accessories Adapter Setting KIT is displayed in the instrument state area in the LCD s upper left side Make sure that the 42942A is correctly connected to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A Connecting the 42942A 42942a0j0102 The 42942A must be directly connected to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A If another accessory such as a cable or adapter is inserted between the 42942A and the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A the correct adapter setup data cannot be obtained and correct device measurement cannot be performed after the adapter setup More than 30 minutes warm up time is required after turning on the Agilent 4294A Make the correct adapter selection for the 42942A in accordance with Adapter Selection on page 68 After performing Step 4 of Adapter Selection on page 68 press the SETUP key to display t
154. 55326e 02_0 000000e 00 Symbols in the table Linefeed _ Tab 282 Chapter 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data Data contents saved in the trace data Depending on the specified measurement parameter the contents saved in the trace data vary The data array Data Real and Data Imag are always used to save the R and X values data before the measurement parameter conversion or data operation The data trace array Data Trace Real and Data Trace Imag is used to save the data displayed on the screen after the measurement parameter conversion and data operation in other words the value of the specified measurement parameter Part with no data indicated with in the table contains 0 actually 0 000000e 00 Chapter 8 283 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data Table 8 18 Specified measurement parameter and saved data Measurement Trace A Trace B parameter Data Real Data Data Data Data Real Data Data Data Imag Trace Trace Imag Trace Trace Real Imag Real Imag 17 0 R X IZI R X 0 R X R X R R X X Ls Rs R X Ls z R xX Rs R l Ls Q R X Ls R X Q Cs Rs R X Cs 2 R x Rs R l Cs Q R X Cs R X Q Cs D R X Cs R X D IY1 9 R X IYI R X 0 G B R X G R X B Lp G R X Lp R x G Lp Q R X Lp 2 R x Q Cp G R X Cp R X G
155. 6 algorithm 126 B B key 45 Back Space key 46 BEEP DONE on OFF ON off key 302 BEEP WARN on OFF ON off key 302 BEEPER key 302 Bw Avg key 45 C CAL 58 Cal 58 Cal key 45 calibration 129 330 42941A and probe adapter 143 42941 A cable and test fixture 145 42942A and test fixture 139 42942A cable and test fixture 141 direct connection type test fixture 133 fixture compensation 151 four terminal pair 1 m 135 four terminal pair 2 m 137 port extension compenstion 150 user 147 calibration data data contents saved with the data save function 278 calibration compensationdata point 155 CAP 58 CaP 58 Center key 46 cleaning 28 clock Setting Checking the Internal Clock 299 CLOCK key 299 300 color LCD display 48 color settings 207 completion beep 302 contents 18 COPY FILE key 306 CREATE DIRECTORY key 304 current level monitor 326 current signal level 325 CW frequency 104 Index 445 Index D A marker mode 56 data array data contents saved with the data save function 280 data block 277 data part 277 data contents saved with the data save function 278 data save structure of files saved in the text format 275 data trace array data contents saved with the data save function 281 DATE key 299 DATE MODE key 299 DAY key 299 dc bias range 108 109 setting 107 dc bias function 326 DCB 57 deleting directory 309 file 309 DEST DEV key
156. A and 42941A s dedicated probe adapter can be regarded as 0 Perform fixture compensation at the device contacts of the test fixture See Fixture Compensation on page 151 for the fixture compensation procedure If user calibration in step 2 cannot be performed for some reason set the port extension value in electrical length or delay time which is equivalent to the electrical length between the 3 5 mm port of the 42941A and the device contacts of the test fixture in place of steps 2 and 3 in accordance with Port Extension Compensation on page 150 146 Chapter 6 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Calibration User Calibration User Calibration User calibration can be performed only when 42942A Terminal Adapter 7mm 42942A or 42941A Impedance Probe PROBE 42941A is selected in the adapter setting User Calibration Procedure Perform user calibration as follows User calibration consists of three calibration data acquisition procedures OPEN SHORT and LOAD and you must obtain all three types of calibration data when performing user calibration It is not possible to turn on or off each type of calibration data independently during your measurement Press the Cal key to display the Calibration Menu Select calibration compensation data acquisition points in accordance with Selecting Calibration Compensation D
157. AD standard is furnished with the 42942A Terminal Adapter Chapter 4 77 Figure 4 7 Step 11 NOTE Step 12 NOTE NOTE Preparation of Measurement Accessories Adapter Setting Connecting LOAD 50 Q to the 42942A 42942a0j0304 Press the LOAD key to start the load data measurement When the load data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to LOAD DONE Press the done key to start calculating the adapter setup data from the measured OPEN SHORT and LOAD data The adapter setup data is automatically saved to the EEPROM nonvolatile memory in the Agilent 4294A Press the cancel key to cancel the adapter setup process If the adapter setup process is canceled the previously obtained data is saved as the available adapter setup data Adapter Setup Procedure for the 42941A Perform the adapter setup for the 42941A Impedance Probe in accordance with the following procedure the operation manual for the 42941 A also describes the adapter setup procedure Adapter setup should be performed at an ambient temperature as close as possible to the temperature in which the device measurement will actually be made If the ambient temperature for your measurement is outside the range of 5 C from the adapter setup temperature it is recommended that you perform adapter setup again at the appropriate temperature It takes a few minutes to complete each setup data measurement During each data me
158. AK key to display the Peak menu Press the PEAK DEF MENU key to display the Peak Definition menu Press the MKR PEAK DELTA key to enter the peak sharpness at the main marker position into the peak definition of AX and AY When using the MKR gt PEK DELTA key to define the peak the sharpness of the left side where the sweep parameter value is smaller of the peak at the main marker position is used to define AX and AY With both the A marker and the main marker displayed on the screen if you press the MKR PEK DELTA the sweep parameter value absolute value of the difference between the main marker and the A marker is assigned to the definition of AX correspondingly the measurement parameter value absolute value of this difference is assigned to the definition of AY 234 Chapter 8 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Analysis and Processing of Result Automatically performing search for each sweep search tracking Automatically performing search for each sweep Search tracking In the preset setting the maximum value minimum value search target value search or peak search function is executed only once when the corresponding key MAX key MIN key and so on is pressed On the other hand you can set the search on the trace to perform automatically at the completion of each sweep search tracking function Activate the trace for which you want to execute search tracking to which the setting is applied
159. ASCII format as described in Save the calibration data and trace data Data Save on page 273 using software such as a text editor on your PC personal computer You can also import it into the spreadsheet software for further applications Table 8 5 shows an example of data saved in the text ASCID format Chapter 8 275 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data Table 8 5 Example of data saved in the text ASCII format 4294A REV1 01 DATE Nov 1 1999 MEASURE PARAMETER IMPEDANCE MAG PHASE DEG ADAPTER NONE SWEEP TYPE LIN FREQ NUMBER of POINTS 201 POINT DELAY TIME 0 Sec SWEEP DELAY TIME 0 Sec OSC LEVEL 500 mVolt DC BIAS OFF BW 1 SWEEP AVERAGING OFF POINT AVERAGING OFF Cal Point FIXED Frequency Comp open Real Comp open Imag Comp short Real Comp short Imag Comp load Real Comp load Imag 4 00000000000e 012 947073e 09 1 565653e 09 6 2539 1 7e 03 1 008368e 035 008568e 01 3 311127e 02 TRACE A FORMAT LOG Frequency Data Real Data Imag Data Trace Real Data Trace Imag 4 00000000000e 01 1 976390e 02 5 641327e 03 2 055326e 02 0 000000e 00 TRACE B FORMAT LINEAR Frequency Data Real Data Imag Data Trace Real Data Trace Imag 4 00000000000e 01 1 976390e 02 5 641327e 03 1 593065e 01 0 000000e 00 276 Chapier 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data
160. ATE DIRECTORY key to display the File Name menu Use the following keys to enter the new directory name you want to create in the string input line Key Function Step keys TID Scrolls up or down the list of available characters displayed below the text entry line Rotary knob Q Horizontally moves the cursor A located SELECT LETTER or G n Numeric keys 0 through 9 SPACE BACK SPACE or Back Space CLEAR NAME Chapter 9 below the displayed character list At the cursor _ of the string input line enters the character specified with the cursor A below the character list Enters a numerical value at the position cursor _ of the character string input line Enters a space at the position cursor _ of the character string input line Moves the cursor _ of the character string input line one character to the left and erases the character in that position Erases everything entered in the character string input line 305 NOTE Step 11 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Table 9 9 Step 6 Table 9 10 Step 7 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Managing Files You do not have to add a backslash to the end of a directory name When you are finished entering the directory name in the string input line press the done or the x1 key to execute creation of the directory To cancel creating the directory press the cancel key In eit
161. Active Trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Press the Search key to display the Search menu Press the SEARCH TRK on OFF key to turn on the search tracking function pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey label Search tracking function SEARCH TRK ON off On search is executed when you press a search execution key it is also executed automatically each time a single sweep is completed SEARCH TRK on OFF Off search is executed only when you press a search execution key Select the search function you want to perform in the search tracking Search function Key operation Maximum value search MAX Minimum value search MIN Target value search TARGET Peak search PEAK For details about each search function refer to e Search the maximum minimum measurements on page 223 e Search the point of target measurement on page 225 e Search the maximum minimum peak on page 228 and Define the Peak on page 232 Chapter 8 235 Analysis and Processing of Result Analyze trace bandwidth Analyze trace bandwidth The Agilent 4294A can automatically derive the parameters called bandwidth center value Q value peak AL and AR from the measurement trace At the instant when the trace bandwidth analysis function is turned on and at the completion of each subsequent sweep cutoff points are searched for on the sweep parameter value axis starting from the main marker position at that time and
162. Adapter Selection Status ADAPTER PROBE 42941A Impedance Probe Adapter selection status can also be confirmed through the display of the instrument status area on the LCD s left side Refer to Adapter type on page 58 Press ADAPTER key to display the Adapter Setting Menu Select the corresponding adapter selection from the following Adapter Selection Key Strokes No Adapter NONE Four terminal pair 1 meter 4TP 1M Four terminal pair 2 meters 4TP 2M 42942A Terminal Adapter 7mm 42942A 42941A Impedance Probe PROBE 42941A Adapter Setup The adapter setup is a process used to acquire the setup data of the adapter selected by the Adapter Selection on page 68 The adapter setup is normally performed in the following cases e When using the 16048G with the Agilent 4294A for the first time after it is delivered e When using the 16048H with the Agilent 4294A for the first time after it is delivered e When using the 16334A with the Agilent 4294A for the first time after it is delivered e When using the 16451B with the Agilent 4294A for the first time after it is delivered e When using the 42942A with the Agilent 4294A for the first time after it is delivered e When using the 42941A with the Agilent 4294A for the first time after it is delivered e When making a measurement in an ambient temperature that is outside the range of 5 C from the adapter setup temperature for the above accessories Generally the adapter s
163. Agilent 4294A Precision Impedance Analyzer Operation Manual Fourth Edition SERIAL NUMBERS This manual applies directly to instruments that have the serial number prefix JP1KG For additional important information about serial numbers see Appendix A ope Agilent Technologies Part No 04294 90030 January 2001 Printed in Japan Notices The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated into another language without the prior written consent of Agilent Technologies Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Kobe Instrument Division 1 3 2 Murotani Nishi Ku Kobe shi Hyogo 651 2241 Japan Copyright 1999 2001 Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Manual Printing History The manual s printing date and part number indicate its current edition The printing date changes when a new edition is printed Minor corrections and updates incorporated in reprints do not necessitate a new printing date The manual part number changes when extensive technical changes are incorporated April 1999 First Edition May 1999 Second Edition December 1999 Third Edition January 2001 Fourth Edition Safety Summary The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument Failur
164. Basic Characteristics Display Size Type 8 4 inch color LCD TFT Resolution pixels 640 x 480 VGA Scale types X axis scale Linear and log Y axis scale Linear and log depending on sweep type Number of traces Data trace 2 traces trace A and trace B Memory trace 2 traces trace A and trace B Split display Available trace A upper half trace B lower half Instrument IBASIC display selection All instrument Half instrument and half IBASIC All IBASIC or Instrument and IBASIC status Other display functions Inactive trace off trace accumulation phase expansion Data math functions Data memory data memory delta offset 1 Complex Z Y measurements only 2 Except for Complex Z Y measurements Marker Functions Marker type and number Main marker One for each trace A and B Sub marker Seven for each trace A and B A marker One for each trace A and B Marker search Search type Maximum minimum target peak trace bandwidth analysis Search track Performs search with each sweep Marker X axis display Sweep parameter value sweep elapsed time or relaxation time 1 27f Other functions Marker continuous mode A marker mode marker coupled mode marker value substitution marker marker zooming marker list marker statistics marker signal dc bias
165. CH OUT When the trace bandwidth analysis function is on searches for two left and right cutoff points on the trace outwardly relative to the currently displayed cutoff points and displays the parameters of the trace bandwidth analysis for the first detected cutoff points Executing this key does not change the peak values If two new cutoff points are not detected TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND is displayed in the upper left area of the screen WIDSOUT return Returns to Table B 64 Search Search menu on page 395 N A Table B 69 Key operation Search range Search Rng menu 1 Search SEARCH RANGE MENU Softkey Function GPIB command PART SRCH on OFF For the current active trace A or B toggles on and off the partial search function The partial search function executes search within the specified range on the trace If the partial search function is on both edges of the currently specified search range are indicated by two small As If no search range is specified the search range is the entire trace same as when partial search is off PARS ONIOFF MINIMUM For the current active trace A or B directly enters the lower limit of the partial search range SEARMIN lt value gt MAXIMUM For the current active trace A or B directly enters the upper limit of the partial search range SEARMAX lt value gt MKR gt MINIMUM Substitutes the
166. DE VAL DLT Middle and differential values Press the RESTORE DISPLAY key to restore the measurement setting list back to the normal screen Chapter 8 295 Analysis and Processing of Result Print the measurement results and internal data with a printer 296 Chapter 8 Setting Using Control and Management Functions This section describes how to set use the control and management functions of the Agilent 4294A Precision Impedance Analyzer that are not directly related to measurements or analysis 297 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Setting Using Control and Management Functions Re displaying an Instrument Message Re displaying an Instrument Message A message displayed in the instrument message area will be overwritten by the next message displayed Also the message currently displayed disappears when the Entry Off key is pressed Follow these steps to re display and check instrument messages previously displayed Press the System key to display the System menu Press the RECALL MESSAGE key to re display the last instrument message displayed The instrument messages are successively displayed in reverse chronological order when this key is pressed The instrument message re displayed by pressing the RECALL MESSAGE key is preceded by a number enclosed in which indicates the messages s position in reverse chronological order For example the last message displayed is preceded with 0 and the next o
167. DIT LIMIT LINE ADD Softkey Function GPIB command MIDDLE VALUE Sets the limit center value of the measured value at the sweep start point of the segment When setting the center value also set the difference value difference between upper and the lower limits with the DELTA LIMIT key This kind of limit configuration set by the center value and the difference value can be used as an alternative to a limit configuration set by the upper and lower limits LIMVSTAR lt value gt DELTA LIMIT Sets the limit difference value of the measured value at the sweep start point of the segment When setting the difference value also set the center value with the MIDDLE VALUE key This kind of limit configuration set by the center value and the difference value can be used as an alternative to a limit configuration set by the upper and lower limits LIMDSTAR lt value gt more 1 3 Displays Table B 85 Segment edit Edit Limit menu 2 3 on page 408 N A done Finishes the editing of the segment replaces the segment before the editing with the new segment and stores it Also returns to Table B 83 Limit line edit Edit Limit menu on page 407 LIMSDON cancel Cancels the editing of the segment and returns to Table B 83 Limit line edit Edit Limit menu on page 407 The segment before the editing remains unchanged LIMSQUI 1 Even if you have set the limits with t
168. E When the list sweep table is empty or insufficient you attempt to select LIST as the sweep type command SWPT LIST and as a result the command is ignored Before selecting the list sweep as the sweep type set the list sweep table correctly M MASS STORAGE ERROR A mass storage error other than 257 occurs MATH FUNCTION NOT VALID FOR PERCENT FORMAT When the percent format is selected as the display format you attempt to change the setting of data operations In the percent format data operations are fixed to delta command MATH DELP and thus you cannot change the data operation setting to DATA command MATH DATA DATA MEM command MATH DMNM or DATA MEM command MATH DDVM MEASUREMENT PARAMETER NOT FOR ANALYSIS When a measurement parameter other than IZI q is set you attempt to execute a waveform analysis command for example OUTPCERR and as a result the command is ignored Before executing a waveform analysis command set the measurement parameter to ZI 0 command MEAS IMPH Media protected You attempt to save delete data to from the storage device or initialize the media but the media is write protected and as a result the operation cannot be executed This message is displayed for example when you have specified the floppy disk drive as the storage device 436 Appendix C 311 34 252 109 36 98 100 113 Error messages Memory error and a floppy disk is write protected If
169. E a a ee ee ee ee BLA Measurement Terminal 1 ronen aoa A ee ee ee ee ee BA Source CHAaracterStCsis cee ae eed NG Ra ned OR eRe RRA RETRA A RNR RS BE R 324 de Bias Function s 6 ana ge ye oa a a ee ee es ce Sd se dds Se 320 Sweep Characteristics anie We Ge Se A Sed A Ge oe a oe ui cae BZB Measurement Time met easa r ta eis ete eet a a de T aieeaieine de ane allt 329 Trigger Function wh ky Th td ote ek Cae Jac cae Ue ett Gan Tel att et dae fee et 48929 Measurement Bandwidth Averseing Byes hy Se aide a Bask ane 3 aed Go Woe ak oe A BLO Adapter Set p acire eh anani go REM ak ithe a tae aie de Sa eee Ew BO Calibration De Mra fee SMI aaa a a ARS din e Gal ei whet Ons eae Measurement Accuracy EARE RIS EAER EAE EENE Flaine ce E E A nee aU ad REAREA 330 Display Functions 342 Marker Functions 343 Equivalent Circuit Angsi BAe aa a Bat Bo be wy ian Ee a eiia Wha baw at Be a BAA Lint bine Test sar shake oa cea fe Hoa ae we tt wee Od ae tk AA Mass Storage 344 Parallel Printer Port 344 HP Instrument BASIC ds oe acy awe inte at alist Ye oO hy ited Tarte ath Ach fee cals bier ee BAO 8 Bit I O Port Wan es Dae By a Ec ae Rote I GOR OMe Baek 23845 24 bit I O Port Handler Interface Des ape att as Bear ced Meat E E oh eae LAN Interface 2 2 1 6 ke ee ee ee ee SAT General Characteristics ccrrt ck co 6S 8G AE SSG Rg RRS PEER Re KN A ee Se eT 348 External Reference Inputiv c oc en etsy Gc ee ete eel Wied Sh
170. EAK DELTA Substitutes the peak slope at the position of the main marker on the current MKRPKD active trace A or B into the peak slope AY AX as the peak definition used for peak search In other words peaks that have a slope greater than the peak at the current marker position are detected in peak search return Returns to Table B 66 Peak Peak menu on page 396 N A 1 If COMPLEX Z Y has been selected as the measurement parameter this is the primary measurement parameter value The primary measurement parameter value means if COMPLEX has been selected as the display format the value of the real part R or G of each complex parameter if POLAR the absolute value IZI or IYI of each complex parameter The peak slope means on the plane whose vertical axis is the measurement parameter value and whose horizontal axis is the sweep parameter value the absolute value of the smaller slope a slope of the line connecting the peak measurement point and the next left measurement point or a slope of the line connecting the peak measurement point and the next right measurement point It indicates the sharpness of the peak Note that if COMPLEX Z Y has been selected as the measurement parameter this definition can be applied assuming a plane whose vertical axis is the primary measurement parameter value and whose horizontal axis is the sweep parameter value Appendix B 397 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressi
171. ECALP OPEN Executes the measurement of the OPEN data The content of is before the data acquisition and changes to DONE after the data acquisition If the 7mm 42942A key or PROBE 42941A key has been selected in Table B 35 Adapter configuration Adapter menu on page 376 this OPEN data must be measured Otherwise the measurement of the OPEN data is not required OPEN key is invalid ECALA SHORT Executes the measurement of the SHORT data The content of is before the data acquisition and changes to DONE after the data acquisition If the 7mm 42942A key or PROBE 42941A key has been selected in Table B 35 Adapter configuration Adapter menu on page 376 this SHORT data must be measured Otherwise the measurement of the SHORT data is not required SHORT key is invalid ECALB LOAD Executes the measurement of the LOAD data The contents of is before the data acquisition and changes to DONE after the data acquisition If the 4TP 1M key 4TP 2M key 7mm 42942A key or PROBE 42941A key has been selected in Table B 35 Adapter configuration Adapter menu on page 376 this LOAD data must be measured ECALC done Based on the above acquired data calculates the setup data for the selected adapter and stores it in the internal non volatile memory of the 4294A For adapters whose setup data is once acquired re setup is not required under normal conditions Exec
172. EN Executes the measurement of the OPEN data and stores the compensation coefficient After completion the OPEN correction function is automatically turned on COMA SHORT Executes the measurement of the SHORT data and stores the compensation coefficient After completion the SHORT correction function is automatically turned on COMB LOAD Executes the measurement of the LOAD data and stores the compensation coefficient After completion the LOAD correction function is automatically turned on COMC DEFINE VALUE gt Displays Table B 38 Calibration data definition Define Value menu on page 378 N A return Returns to Table B 34 Calibration Calibration menu on page 376 N A Table B 38 Key operation Calibration data definition Define Value menu Cal USER CAL DEFINE VALUE Cal FIXTURE COMPEN DEFINE VALUE Softkey Function GPIB command OPEN CONDUCT G Sets the conductance value G of the OPEN standard you use DCALOPENG lt value gt OPEN CAP C Sets the capacitance value C of the OPEN standard you use DCALOPENC lt value gt SHORT RESIST R Sets the resistance value R of the SHORT standard you use DCALSHORR lt value gt SHORT INDUCT L Sets the inductance value L of the SHORT standard you use DCALSHORL lt value gt LOAD RESIST R Sets the resistance value R of the LOAD standard you use DCALLOAD
173. EST key 320 S safety 350 save 270 Save key 48 Scale Ref key 45 search max 223 target value 225 Search key 47 search min 223 search range 267 SECOND key 300 self diagnosis 320 selftest 320 setting the beep sound 302 setting the built in speaker 302 Setting Using Control and Management Functions 297 softkey 48 448 Source key 46 Span key 46 speaker setting the built in speaker 302 specifications and supplemental performance characteristics 323 splitting graph 200 Start key 46 status block 277 data contents saved with the data save function 278 STIMULUS block 46 Stop key 46 STORE DEV key 308 subnet mask setting checking procedure 317 SUBNET MASK key 317 sweep characteristics 328 direction 99 list 116 manual 100 mode 114 parameter 84 range 89 time 102 type 87 Sweep key 46 sweep to sweep averaging 126 algorithm 126 SYSTEM CONTROLLER key 312 system controller mode 312 System key 48 T Targ 55 time delay 102 TIME key 300 title 205 trace bandwidth 236 trace data data contents saved with the data save function 279 trace math 179 trigger event 112 function 329 source 111 Trigger key 46 TrkA 56 U unit keys 46 UNKNOWN terminals 49 up arrow 46 user calibration 147 defining standard value 148 user calibration data data contents saved with the data save function 278 Index Index Utility key 47 v
174. F CHRST key in Table B 18 SIMFCHAR Equivalent circuit analysis Equiv Circuit menu on page 366 return Returns to Table B 18 Equivalent circuit analysis Equiv Circuit menu on N A page 366 Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu Key operation Display more 1 2 ALLOCATION Softkey Function GPIB command ALL INSTRUMENT Uses the entire screen as the instrument screen DISA ALLI Appendix B 367 Table B 21 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Display key Display allocation Disp Alloc menu Display more 1 2 ALLOCATION Softkey Function GPIB command HALF INSTR HALF Uses the upper half of the screen as the instrument screen and the lower half as DISA HIHB ID the HP Instrument BASIC screen ALL BASIC Uses the entire screen as the HP Instrument BASIC screen DISA ALLB BASIC STATUS Allocates status lines 3 lines for HP Instrument BASIC below the instrument DISA BASS screen return Returns to Table B 14 Display Display menu 2 2 on page 364 N A 1 The internal function of the 4294A can be divided into instrument and HP Instrument BASIC to control it The instrument screen means the screen used to display the information of instrument It is used to display scales and traces of measurement results the list sweep table the limit line table and so on 2 The int
175. For how to use the GP IB LAN and FTP function refer to the Programming Manual Overwrite on the file to be saved Using the STATE DATA and GRAPHICS save functions you can write new data over the saved data The contents to be saved by overwriting STATE DATA and GRAPHICS save are identified by the extension attached to the name of the overwritten the file The state of selection of the contents to be saved by the DATA saving function conform to that of the file to be overwritten Press the Save key to display the Save menu Press the STORE DEV key to display the Storage Device menu 286 Chapter 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data Step 3 Select the Agilent 4294A storage device Storage device Key operation Floppy disk drive FLOPPY Volatile memory disk MEMORY Non volatile memory disk flash memory FLASH MEMORY NOTE When using the floppy disk drive make sure a disk is first inserted in the drive If the floppy disk is set to Write Protect the data cannot be saved Set the disk to Write Enable before using it The storage device selection using System IBASIC more 1 3 MASS STORE is applicable when using the storage devices of the Agilent 4294A through the HP Instrument BASIC function It is different from the storage device selection using the STORE DEV key here However the storage devices themselves are the same Step 4 Press the retu
176. For this field to actually display the monitor value you must apply dc bias through the keystroke sequence Source BIAS MENU BIAS on OFF and then turn 56 Chapter 3 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display ltems Displayed on the LCD on the dc bias monitor feature through the keystroke sequence Display BIAS MON VOLT CURRENT 12 Sweep Stop Span Value Field This field shows the sweep stop or span value that is currently in effect Use the Stop key to set the sweep stop value and the Span key to set the sweep span value 13 Test Signal Current Level Monitor Field This field shows the AC current level monitor value for the test signal that is currently in effect For this field to actually display the monitor value you must turn on the test signal level monitor feature through the keystroke sequence Display OSC MON on OFF 14 Test Signal Level CW Frequency Setting Field This field shows the test signal level setting for frequency sweep or the CW frequency setting for test signal level sweep or dc bias sweep Use the Source key to change the current value 15 Test Signal Voltage Level Monitor Field This field shows the AC voltage level monitor value for the test signal that is currently in effect For this field to actually display the monitor value you must turn on the test signal level monitor feature through the keystroke sequence Display OSC MON on OFF 16 Sweep Start Center Value Field Shows the start
177. Function GPIB command OPEN Executes the measurement of the OPEN data The content of is before the CALA data acquisition and changes to DONE after the data acquisition SHORT Executes the measurement of the SHORT data The content of is before the CALB data acquisition and changes to DONE after the data acquisition LOAD Executes the measurement of the LOAD data The content of is before the CALC data acquisition and changes to DONE after the data acquisition done Calculates the error coefficient and stores it based on the three kinds of acquired CALDON calibration data OPEN SHORT and LOAD Executing this key returns to Table B 39 User calibration User Cal menu on page 379 and the user calibration function is automatically turned on The softkey label changes to CORRECTION ON off cancel Cancels the acquisition of the calibration data and returns to Table B 39 User CALQUI calibration User Cal menu on page 379 Table B 41 Calibration data definition for user calibration Define Value menu Key operation Cal USER CAL DEFINE VALUE Softkey Function GPIB command OPEN CONDUCT G Sets the conductance value G of the OPEN standard you use DCALOPENG lt value gt OPEN CAP C Sets the capacitance value C of the OPEN standard you use DCALOPENC lt value gt SHORT RESIST R Sets the resistance value R of the SHORT standard you use DCALSHORR lt value gt S
178. Function Key operation Goes to the next higher order directory and displays the file and directory name located at that position The directory name displayed as the softkey label is followed by W Use the softkey to select the file to be overwritten and start overwriting Create a file for automatic setting when power is on When power to the Agilent 4294A is turned on the system is set to a state normally called power on default setting which is one of the default settings If you save the setting using the STATE save function with the file name AUTOREC STA in the storage device flash memory or floppy disk then the file is automatically read when power is turned on and the previous setting is reproduced The power on default setting file AUTOREC STA can be created by the following steps Set the Agilent 4294A to the state that you want to have automatically set power on default setting when the power is turned on Press the Save key to display the Save menu Press the POWER ON CONFIG key to display the Power On Default Setting File Save menu Press the yes key to save it into the non volatile memory disk flash memory of the AUTOREC STA file To suspend saving press the cancel key In both cases the Save menu returns If the POWER ON CONFIG key is used the AUTOREC STA file is always stored in the nonvolatile memory disk flash memory regardless of the selection state of the storage device by th
179. G SEGMENT list sweep table SEGMENT NUMBER When a segment is selected as the partial search range specify a segment SEGMNUM lt value gt RNG LINE on OFF Toggles on and off the partial search range border line display to indicate the borders of the partial search range by two vertical lines on the graph If the measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y you cannot turn on the partial search range border line display SEARLINE ONIOFF return Returns to Table B 64 Search Search menu on page 395 N A 1 When the sweep type is list list sweep Appendix B 399 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Utility key Softkeys displayed by pressing the Utility key Table B 71 Key operation Utility Utility menu Utility Softkey Function GPIB command MKR LIST on OFF Toggles on and off the marker list function This function displays the list of the sweep parameter values and measurement parameter values of all markers main marker sub markers A marker If ALL INSTUMENT has been selected in Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 the upper half of the screen displays the graph and the lower half displays the list of the marker values If HALF INSTR HALF BASIC has been selected only the list of the marker values are displayed MKRL ONIOFF STATISTICS on OFF For the search range of the current active trace A or B calcu
180. GP IB or LAN for starting measurement Manual triggering generated by pressing MANUAL MANUAL key NOTE See Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics on page 323 for characteristics of the signal required for an external trigger triggering with a signal from the external trigger input terminal on the rear panel See the Programming Guide for details on how to use the GP IB LAN trigger The trigger source currently selected is displayed in the key label of the SOURCE key Softkey label Selected trigger source SOURCE FREE RUN Internal free run SOURCE EXTERNAL External SOURCE HP IB GP IB LAN SOURCE MANUAL Manual Chapter 5 111 Setting Measurement Conditions Selecting Sweep Trigger Measurement Point Trigger Selecting Sweep Trigger Measurement Point Trigger You can select whether the event to be triggered the trigger event is a single sweep or a measurement at a single point Step 1 Press the Trigger key to display the trigger menu Step 2 Press the SOURCE key to display the trigger source menu Step 3 Press the EVENT key to select the event to be triggered pressing the key toggles the selection Softkey label Selected trigger event EVENT ON SWEEP Sweep a single sweep for one time trigger EVENT ON POINT Measurement point a measurement at a single point for one time trigger NOTE If the internal trigger free run is selected in
181. HORT INDUCT L Sets the inductance value L of the SHORT standard you use DCALSHORL lt value gt LOAD RESIST R Sets the resistance value R of the LOAD standard you use DCALLOADR lt value gt LOAD INDUCT L 1 DCALLOADL lt value gt Sets the inductance value L of the LOAD standard you use return Returns to Table B 39 User calibration User Cal menu on page 379 N A Appendix B 379 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Cal key 1 Though the softkey labels are the same as those in Table B 38 Calibration data definition Define Value menu on page 378 the set values are saved separately Table B 42 Port extension Prt Extension menu Key operation Cal PORT EXTENSION Softkey Function GPIB command EXTENSION on OFF Toggles on and off the port extension compensation The port extension PORE ONIOFF compensation means compensation performed to extend the measurement terminal surface from the 7 mm port of the HP 42942A Terminal Adapter or the 3 5 mm port at the tip of the HP 42941A probe maintaining a 1 port configuration Enter a value in electrical length or delay time VALUE TIME Enters a value of the extended port in delay time seconds The electrical length PORTZ lt value gt corresponding to the entered delay time is displayed below the parameter entry line in smaller characters VALUE LENGTH Enters a value of the extended port in elect
182. HR RES Be ek MRA REA ON he A S 52 12 External Monitor Terminals 0 c cn ss ad Seige g URI as E Sn E oa Sis eg ba gee ges 52 13 GPIB Connector eia ei eset e A date etd ed A dicate a E obed ungated 52 14 Inlet with a fusebox ieni e n eee nent ene e ene eens 52 Items Displayed on the LCD 0 0 0 cece ence eee nee 53 1 Measurement Parameter Fields 0 0 ccc eee e E 53 2 Scale Reference Fields s cn roser tutun e niia r atte three eed ln ge aon ede eh eee ead 53 3 Marker Measurement Parameter Value Fields 0 0 0 eee ee ec eee 53 4 Menu Title Field o n28 62 200 tendan tga cue yok ceases Pe Se aoe Peet 53 S poltkey abel Areas cession wile soon a gs ate wok F A EA Ae S RARA Reshma OA 54 6 Sweep Parameter Reading Fields 0 0 erneer errereen 55 T Marker Status Fields wit sca k ka is eee SA eA aes ei Atlas eae See eh 55 8 Marker Statistics Trace Bandwidth Analysis Fields 00 0 eee eee 56 9 Limit Line Test Pields iis c cc os inaa eles hae leh S Nai slid aA ARS AE ER AE Ba babs a acess 56 10 HP Instrument Basic Status Indicator 0 00 eee eee nee 56 11 de Voltage Current Bias Monitor Field 0 0 00 cee ee cece een eee 56 12 Sweep Stop Span Value Field ossos ccs eorr nten e E A cence eens 57 13 Test Signal Current Level Monitor Field 00 eee cece eee 37 14 Test Signal Level CW Frequency Setting Field 0 0 eee eee 57 15 Test Signal Voltage Level
183. IC screen in the lower half of the screen For how to set the assignment of the HP Instrument BASIC screen refer to Configuring the Screen Assignments for HP Instrument BASIC on page 202 When the marker list function is on you cannot turn on off the split display of the measured graph For more information on splitting the display of the measured graph refer to Splitting the Graph on page 200 When the marker list function is on if you turn off all markers by following the procedure of Turning off all main sub delta markers at one time on page 248 the marker list function is also turned off automatically 216 Chapter 8 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Analysis and Processing of Result Reading the difference from the reference point on the screen delta marker Reading the difference from the reference point on the screen delta marker By placing the marker used as the reference at any point on the screen you can set and display the positions sweep parameter value and measurement parameter value of the markers main marker and sub marker based on relative values differences from the reference point This marker used as the reference is called the delta marker You can determine whether it will be placed on the trace delta marker on the trace mode or at any point on the screen fixed delta marker mode There are two ways to place move the delta marker at a reference point on the screen
184. Kiteecis csc e le bas pth a id bela SRR OLE SS bee bs oe ebook es 26 Option 1CM Rackmount Kit 2 2 s oiae a ccc eee eee e ene 27 Option 1CP Rackmount amp Handle Kit 2 0 cee eens 27 Environmental Requirements sssi e ie n r n e cc cece nent e nee eee 28 Ventilation Requirements sser eess ioe tale te Ae Rela cable ehh A EA E KAB ee eds 28 Instructions for Cleanings ecca segs eg shel aae oiri eed het a yietdep Wie ed ened bes 28 2 Learning Operation Basics Required Equipment ces fds ee eek deo os eaten dak amp Seah eee eee he Re ee a E 30 Preparing fora Measurement 0 0 0 cent een een enna 31 Connect the Agilent 16047E Test Fixture 00 0 eect eee 31 T rr ON the Powers on rr 2206 Satan eee ie ee a ak en EAA ta diab a ea Be 32 Set the Adapter Type to NONE ctscrd ee eee ew MES A BREE EE CRA LARS Hee TRAE LER 32 Specifying Measurement Conditions 0 0 00 0 cence eee ene 33 Initialize the Agilent 4294A to the Preset State eee eee 33 Select IZI 6 as the Measurement Parameter 0 00 cece ec eee tenes 33 Select Frequency as the Sweep Parameter 0 0 0 eee eee een eae 33 Select Logarithmic Sweep as the Sweep Type 0 0 0 eee eee eee eens 33 Set the Sweep Start Value to 100 Hz 0 eee ences 34 Set the Sweep Stop Value to 100 MHz 2 eects 34 Set the Measurement Bandwidth to2 0 cence eee ae 34 Fixture Compensation cai certs ta ie ee A Eee nae ep eA Se a
185. L dc bias DC BIAS When selecting the oscillator level as a sweep parameter follow the steps shown in Selecting Unit for Oscillator Level Voltage or Current on page 106 to select sweeping by voltage or current level When selecting the dc bias as a sweep parameter proceed to the setting shown in Setting and Applying dc Bias on page 107 The sweep parameter that is currently selected appears in the key label of the PARAMETER key Softkey label Selected sweep parameter PARAMETER FREQ Frequency PARAMETER OLEV Oscillator level voltage or current PARAMETER DCB dc bias See Using Time as Sweep Parameter Zero Span Sweep on page 94 for the measurement with time as a sweep parameter zero span measurement The sweep parameter can be set to trace A and trace B in common It is not necessary to select an active trace or to verify the current selection before setting the parameter 84 Chapter5 Figure 5 1 Sweep by Frequency 560 ka BOTTOM Setting Measurement Conditions Selecting Sweep Parameter 36 odiv REF YAG IAC VFIDC START 48 Hz OSC 500 molt STOP 116 MHz 4294a0j007 Figure 5 2 Sweep by signal source current level A IZI TOP 25 ka BOTTOM 5 ka B z SCALE 36 div REF a VAC IAC j VeIDC START z206 uA CH 1 MHz STOP 26 mA 4294a0j008 Chapter 5 85 Setting Measurement Conditions Selecting Sweep Parameter Figure 5 3 Sweep by dc current bi
186. M current main marker into the lower limit of the partial search range namely setting the current main marker position to the lower limit of the partial search range Substituting the sweep parameter value of the MKR MAXIMUM current main marker into the upper limit of the partial search range namely setting the current main marker position to the upper limit of the partial search range Setting the range between the current main MKRD SEARCH RNG marker and A marker to the partial search range where the main marker and A marker can be either the upper or lower limit 268 Chapter 8 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Specify partial search range When the sweep type is list sweep Activate the trace in which you want to specify a partial search range Active Trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Press the Search key to display the Search menu Press the SEARCH RANGE MENU key to display the Search Range menu Specify the partial search range by the following key operations Specify the partial search range Key operation Full range of list sweep table FULL One specific segment of list sweep table SEGMENT specify the segment by the following steps Press the SEGMENT NUMBER key if the partial search range was specified as one specific segment in the previous step The set number of the current partial search segment num
187. MP parameters If these parameters are selected the graph is displayed in the complex plane or polar coordinates selected using Table B 12 Format Format menu 2 on page 363 ZI Ls Selects impedance absolute value and series inductance as measurement MEAS IMLS parameters ZI Cs Selects impedance absolute value and series capacitance as measurement MEAS IMCS parameters Z Lp Selects impedance absolute value and parallel inductance as measurement MEAS IMLP parameters ZI Cp Selects impedance absolute value and parallel capacitance as measurement MEAS IMCP parameters other Displays Table B 10 Measurement parameter Measurement menu other N A on page 362 more 3 3 Displays Table B 7 Measurement parameter Measurement menu 1 3 on N A page 361 Table B 10 Measurement parameter Measurement menu other Key operation Meas more 1 3 more 2 3 other Softkey Function GPIB command IZI Rs Selects impedance absolute value and series resistance as measurement MEAS IMRS parameters IZI Q Selects impedance absolute value and Q factor quality factor as measurement MEAS IMQ parameters IZI D Selects impedance absolute value and dissipation factor as measurement MEAS IMD parameters Lp Rp Selects parallel inductance and parallel resistance as measurement parameters MEAS LPR Cp Rp Selects parallel capacitance and parallel resistance as measurement
188. NCE VALUE and SCALE DIV REFP lt value gt REFERENCE VALUE For the selected trace data trace memory trace of trace A B sets a reference value the value of the scale reference line This is one of the scale configurations using REFERENCE POSITION REFERENCE VALUE and SCALE DIV REFV lt value gt MKR REFERENCE For the selected trace data trace memory trace of trace A B substitutes the absolute value of the main marker into the reference value the value of the scale reference line regardless of the value of the A marker As a result the marker moves to the reference line position MKRREF TOP VALUE Sets a value of the top line in the scale graph This is one of the scale configurations using TOP VALUE and BOTTOM VALUE TOPV lt value gt BOTTOM VALUE Sets a value of the bottom line in the scale graph This is one of the scale configurations using TOP VALUE and BOTTOM VALUE BOTV lt value gt more 1 2 Displays Table B 28 Scale reference Scale Ref menu 1 2 2 on page 371 N A 1 When the measurement parameter is not COMPLEX Z Y and the vertical axis is in the linear or percentage format Table B 28 Key operation Scale reference Scale Ref menu 1 2 2 Scale Ref more1 2 Softkey Function GPIB command SCALE FOR When both the data trace and the memory trace are displayed on the screen selects the kind of trace to which t
189. NU key are searched for toward both sides of the measurement parameter axis using the current position of the main marker as the center If the cutoff points are detected the following are displayed on the screen bandwidth distance between the 2 cutoff point sweep parameter values center value midpoint of the 2 cutoff point sweep parameter values Q peak measurement parameter value of the peak between the cutoff points AL sweep parameter length from the sweep center value to the left cutoff point AR sweep parameter length from the sweep center value to the right cutoff point If correct parameters cannot be obtained due to the shape of the trace TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND is displayed in the upper left area of the screen If you turn on the trace bandwidth analysis function a horizontal line showing the cutoff value appears on the screen You can set the cutoff value with the softkeys in Table B 68 Trace bandwidth analysis definition Widths Def menu on page 398 WIDT ONIOFF WIDTHS DEF MENU gt Displays Table B 68 Trace bandwidth analysis definition Widths Def menu N A on page 398 SEARCH RANGE Displays Table B 69 Search range Search Rng menu 1 on page 398 N A MENU gt 1 If COMPLEX Z Y has been selected as the measurement parameter it is the primary measurement parameter value The primary measurement parameter value means if COMPLEX has been selected as the displ
190. O STATE DATA FILES ON MEMORY Although you attempt to display the list of files and directories on a volatile memory disk or nonvolatile memory disk flash memory on the softkey labels with the recall Recall key file re save RE SAVE FILE key file deletion PURGE FILE key directory change CHANGE DIRECTORY key file copy COPY FILE key and so on no file or directory corresponding to the execution of the key is on the volatile memory disk or nonvolatile memory disk flash memory NOT ENOUGH DATA When data is sent from the controller to the Agilent 4294A in the FORM2 FORM3 or FORMS data transfer format the amount of sent binary data is too small or data items do not reach the number of points NOP set in the 4294A Set the amount of data to be sent or the number of points correctly NOT VALID FOR COMPLEX MEASUREMENT When the COMPLEX Z Y measurement parameter that is complex parameter measurement is selected a command to execute one of the following is sent As a result the command is ignored e Setting or reading an offset value in the trace calculation function DATOVAL command e Assigning the main marker to the offset value in the trace calculation function MKROFS command e Selecting DELTA in the trace calculation function DISP DELP command When making the above settings first select a measurement parameter other than COMPLEX Z Y NOT VALID FOR SCALAR MEASUREMENT When a measurement parameter other t
191. OP Oscillator mode level DC bias mode level Measurement bandwidth Point averaging factor Trace color pen number 4294a0e103 Preparing list sweep table Set the list sweep with the list sweep table Step 1 Press the Sweep key to display the sweep menu Step 2 Press the EDIT LIST key to enter the list sweep table edit mode At the same time the list sweep menu appears 118 Chapter5 Figure 5 18 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Setting Measurement Conditions Sweeping Multiple Sweep Ranges with Different Conditions in a Single Action List Sweep VAC TAC V IDC START 99 99 MHz OSC 588 mVolt STOP 100 16516 MHz SEG START STOP NOP Osc BIAS BW AVG EMPTY 4294a0j104 Press the ADD key to add a new segment to the list sweep table This operation also displays the segment edit menu 1 3 The segment added to the list sweep table contains predefined initial values Press the START key or the CENTER key This will display the current setting for start frequency or sweep center frequency in the parameter settings located in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the sweep start frequency or sweep center frequency e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press the unit key G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until t
192. OR Sets the averaging count for the point averaging Specify an integer between 1 PAVERFACT lt value gt and 256 Refer to Equation 5 2 on page 128 for the algorithm of the point averaging Table B 33 Measurement bandwidth Bandwidth configuration menu Key operation Bw Avg BAND WIDTH Sweep EDIT LIST EDIT ADD more 1 3 more 2 3 BAND WIDTH measurement bandwidth of the segment to 2 Softkey Function GPIB command 1 FAST Selects 1 as the measurement bandwidth during list sweep segment edit sets the BWFACT 1 measurement bandwidth of the segment to 1 The measurement speed is fastest 2 Selects 2 as the measurement bandwidth during list sweep segment edit sets the BWFACT 2 374 Appendix B Table B 33 Key operation Key Definitions Softkeys displayed by pressing the Bw Avg key Measurement bandwidth Bandwidth configuration menu Bw Avg BAND WIDTH Sweep EDIT LIST EDIT ADD more 1 3 more 2 3 BAND WIDTH Softkey Function GPIB command 3 Selects 3 as the measurement bandwidth during list sweep segment edit sets the BWFACT 3 measurement bandwidth of the segment to 3 4 Selects 4 as the measurement bandwidth during list sweep segment edit sets the BWFACT 4 measurement bandwidth of the segment to 4 5 PRECISE Selects 5 as the measurement bandwidth during list sweep segment edit sets the BWFACT 5 measurement bandwidth of the se
193. Option 1D5 Only INT REF Cutput a SS OwKZ 84Bm REF OVEN EXT PROG Option 106 RUN CONT Lox DOMH Gam 4294A J001 Chapter 1 23 Installation Using the LAN Port Using the LAN Port You can connect the Agilent 4294A to a local area network by using the RJ 45J UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair LAN connector provided on the rear panel Step 1 To connect the 4294A to a LAN securely insert the LAN cable into the LAN port Step 2 For the 4294A to communicate over a LAN you must set up the network connection as described in the section Using LAN in the Programming Manual Figure 1 4 Using the LAN Port 4294AIJ006 24 Chapter 1 Installation Connecting the Supplied Keyboard Connecting the Supplied Keyboard Step 1 Insert the cable of the supplied Mini DIN keyboard into the keyboard connector on the rear panel Step 2 Set the keyboard in a comfortable position NOTE Do not put anything on the keyboard Doing so can cause an error during the power on self test Figure 1 5 Connecting the Supplied Keyboard 1 The Agilent 4294A does not come with a keyboard if it is purchased with Option 1A2 without keyboard Chapter 1 25 A Table 1 2 Figure 1 6 Step 1 Step 2 Installation Using
194. P address current set value is displayed Below it the entire currently set IP address is displayed in a smaller size Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the 3rd part of the IP address e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key 314 Chapter 9 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 NOTE Step 12 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Setting Checking the LAN e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value The 3rd part of the IP address can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 255 Press the 4th key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the 4th part of the IP address current set value is displayed Below it the entire currently set IP address is displayed in a smaller size Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the 4th part of the IP address e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value The 4th part of the IP address can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 255 Press the done key to store the IP address data set in Steps 3 through 10 in the Agilent
195. PIB command LIMIT TEST on OFF Toggles on and off the limit line test function If this is set to on according to the LIMITEST ONIOFF limit line table the limit lines are displayed on the screen and the limit test is executed BEEP FAIL on OFF Toggles on and off the beep that sounds each time the result of a limit line test is DEEPFAIL ONIOFF EDIT LIMIT LINE gt Displays Table B 83 Limit line edit Edit Limit menu on page 407 EDITLIML Regardless of the setting in Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 the upper half of the screen displays the measured graph and the lower half displays the limit line table LIMIT LINE Displays Table B 88 Limit line offset Limit Offset menu on page 410 N A OFFSETS gt return Returns to Table B 74 System System menu on page 402 N A 406 Appendix B Table B 83 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the System key Limit line edit Edit Limit menu System LIMIT TEST EDIT LIMIT LINE Softkey Function GPIB command SEGMENT From the limit line table specifies a segment number to be edited The currently specified segment is indicated by the pointer gt on the table You can change the specified segment number using the ENTRY block keys numeric key rotary knob N keys on the front panel If there is no segment in the limit line table EMPTY is dis
196. Press the Display key to display the Display menu Step 2 Press the ACCUMULATE on OFF or ACCUMULATE ON off key to turn on or off the trace superimpose feature pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey Labels Description ACCUMULATE ON off Indicates that the trace superimpose feature is enabled enabling this feature causes the 4294A to plot a new trace without erasing any existing traces ACCUMULATE on OFF Indicates that the trace superimpose feature is disabled disabling this feature erases all existing traces and causes the 4294A to plot a new trace while erasing the measuring points for the last sweep cycle Figure 7 21 IZl 6 frequency characteristics of a crystal resonator with a signal level of 0 1 to 1 V and ten measuring points VAC IAC wr IDC CENTER 168 MHz ose 1 Volt SPAN 16 kHz 4294a0j040 NOTE Existing traces superimposed by a new trace do not accept marker or scaling operations Changing the scale settings does not affect the existing traces they remain in their previous Chapter 7 185 Figure 7 22 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Superimposing Multiple Traces positions on the screen Once you have turned on or off the trace superimpose feature that setting is applied to both Traces A and B Comparing traces using the list sweep function The list sweep in the Agilent 4294A sweeps multiple frequency sweep ranges s
197. Prt Extension menu on page 380 This N A key is valid only when 7 mm 42942A or PROBE 4294 1A has been selected with the ADAPTER key Table B 35 Adapter configuration Adapter menu Key operation Cal ADAPTER Softkey Function GPIB command NONE 4TP 1M 4TP 2M 7mm 42942A PROBE 42941A You select this key when using no extension cable from the measurement terminal on the front panel to connect a DUT during four terminal pair measurement This is the proper configuration when using the HP 16047E test fixture direct coupled fixture for devices with leads and similar devices E4TP OFF You select this key when using a 1 m extension cable from the measurement terminal on the front panel to connect a DUT during four terminal pair measurement This is the proper configuration when using the HP 16048G test cable 4TP 1m cable E4TP M1 You select this key when using a 2 m extension cable from the measurement terminal on the front panel to connect a DUT during four terminal pair measurement This is the proper configuration when using the HP 16048H test cable 4TP 2m cable E4TP M2 You select this key when connecting the HP 42942A Terminal Adapter to the measurement terminal on the front panel E4TP APC7 You select this key when connecting the HP 42941A Impedance Probe to the measurement terminal on the front panel E4TP PROBE 376 Appendix B Table B
198. R lt value gt LOAD INDUCT L Sets the inductance value L of the LOAD standard you use DCALLOADL lt value gt return Returns to the higher level menu that called this menu Table B 39 User N A calibration User Cal menu on page 379 or Table B 37 Fixture compensation Fixture Comp menu on page 378 1 These set values are stored separately for user calibration or fixture compensation 378 Appendix B Table B 39 Key operation Key Definitions Softkeys displayed by pressing the Cal key User calibration User Cal menu Cal USER CAL Softkey Function GPIB command CORRECTION on OFF Toggles on and off applying the user calibration to measurements The user calibration is done by using a user s unique calibration kit OPEN SHORT LOAD whose values are defined by the user If you use the calibration kit attached to the 4294A or its accessories this user calibration function is not used CALST ONIOFF EXECUTE CAL gt Displays Table B 40 Calibration execution Execute Cal menu on page 379 N A DEFINE VALUE gt Displays Table B 38 Calibration data definition Define Value menu on page N A 378 return Returns to Table B 34 Calibration Calibration menu on page 376 N A Table B 40 Calibration execution Execute Cal menu Key operation Cal USER CAL EXECUTE CAL Softkey
199. RING STANDARD is displayed in the instrument state area of the LCD s upper left side Chapter 6 147 Step 12 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Figure 6 8 Step 1 Calibration User Calibration When LOAD calibration data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to LOAD DONE Press the done key to start calculating the calibration coefficient from the measured OPEN SHORT and LOAD standard data The coefficient is automatically saved to the internal memory When the calculation and storage of the coefficient are completed the Agilent 4294A returns to the User Calibration Menu If the user calibration function is off it is automatically turned on the key label CORRECTION on OFF changes to CORRECTION ON off Press the cancel key to cancel the user calibration process If the user calibration process is canceled the previously obtained data can be used as the available user calibration coefficient Turning User Calibration On Off The user calibration function is automatically turned on after completing user calibration data measurement However you can turn this function on or off as required Press the Cal key to display the Calibration Menu Press the USER CAL key to display the User Calibration Menu Press the CORRECTION on OFF CORRECTION ON off key to make the user calibration available on or not available off for measurement pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey Label User Ca
200. RN MODIFY COLOR key TEXT MARKER Selects text in display modes other than graph display equivalent circuit COLO TEXT diagram list sweep table softkey labels and markers themselves A V as the display items that can be changed with the MODIFY COLOR key IBASIC Selects text on the HP Instrument BASIC screen as the display item that can be COLO IBT changed with the MODIFY COLOR key PEN 1 Selects PEN 1 as the display item that can be changed with the MODIFY COLO PEN1 l COLOR key PEN 2 Selects PEN 2 as the display item that can be changed with the MODIFY COLO PEN2 COLOR key more 2 3 Displays Table B 25 Item color modification Color Item menu 3 3 on N A page 369 return Returns to Table B 22 Display color modification Modify Color menu on N A page 368 1 These pens can be used to draw graphics by specifying them in HP Instrument BASIC programs Table B 25 Key operation Item color modification Color Item menu 3 3 Display more 1 2 MODIFY COLOR MODIFY ITEM COLOR more 1 3 more 2 3 Softkey Function GPIB command MODIFY COLOR gt Displays Table B 26 Item color entry Color Item menu on page 370 N A PEN 3 Selects PEN 3 as the display item that can be changed with the MODIFY COLO PEN3 COLOR key Appendix B 369 Table B 25 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Display key Item color modifica
201. RT standard used for user calibration preset state 0 H Equivalent series resistance value R of LOAD RESIST R LOAD standard used for user calibration preset state 50 Q Equivalent series inductance value L of LOAD INDUCT L LOAD standard used for user calibration preset state 0 H The current value of the calibration data definition is displayed in the parameter setting area of the LCD s upper left side Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the calibration data definition e Enter the desired value with the numerical keys 0 through 9 and then press one of the unit keys G n M y k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys T D to set the desired value When the capacitance value of the calibration data definition is entered with the numerical keys and one of the unit keys the unit fF is automatically added to the entered value Repeat procedures 4 and 5 to set all of the required calibration data definitions Chapter 6 149 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Step 5 Calibration Port Extension Compensation Port Extension Compensation Port extension compensation is used to compensate an error caused by the electrical delay when the 7 mm port of the 42942A Terminal Adapter or 3 5 mm port of the 42941A Impedance Probe is extended with a one port configuration Port e
202. Range Figure 5 9 5 ka BOTTOM 20 a 335 991 9 26 diy REF a 29 2117 VAC IAC VIDE CENTER 100 60335 MHz OSC 500 mvolt SPAN 16 kHz 4294a0j115 Chapter 5 93 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 NOTE Setting Measurement Conditions Using Time as Sweep Parameter Zero Span Sweep Using Time as Sweep Parameter Zero Span Sweep Setting the sweep span to zero allows you to perform a measurement with time as a sweep parameter This kind of sweep is also called zero span sweep Press the Sweep key to display the sweep menu Press the PARAMETER key to display the sweep parameter menu Press the FREQ key to select frequency as a sweep parameter Press the Span key This will display the current setting for sweep span value in the parameter settings area in the upper left part of the screen Press 0 x1 to set the sweep span value to zero Press the Center key At this point the value displayed in the parameter settings area in the upper left part of the screen shows that the signal source used has a fixed not swept frequency Use the keys or the rotary knob in the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to set the fixed frequency displayed on the screen e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the ro
203. Regardless of the on off state of the equivalent circuit diagram display function the measurement trace is displayed on the screen The frequency characteristics of the equivalent circuit having the set equivalent circuit parameter are simulated and displayed on the screen Simulation of equivalent circuit frequency characteristics performed after the calculation in Figure 8 20 A 2 TOP 1 Mo BOTTOM 14 9 B dz SCALE 56 fdiv REF Be VAC IAC START 48 Hz O5C 566 mvolt 510 4294a0j066 The result of simulating frequency characteristics is automatically stored in the memory trace At the same time the DATA and MEMORY keys in the Trace Definition menu display of both measurement data and memory storage are selected For the Trace Definition menu see the description of Trace based Comparison and Calculation on page 179 Display of the equivalent circuit parameter on the measurement trace screen can be turned on or off by the PARAMETERS ON off key PARAMETERS on OFF key Chapter 8 253 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Analysis and Processing of Result Calculating the mean value standard deviation and peak to peak of the trace Calculating the mean value standard deviation and peak to peak of the trace A function is provided to automatically calculate the statistics mean value standard deviation and peak to peak value of the trace data and display them If the partial search function is on st
204. Selection of equivalent circuit Equivalent circuit model Typical frequency characteristics Sample example Ri AM aT Li 0 r I Inductor with greater core loss c1 o os eee AA VVV L1 R1 Inductor Resistor co ot G L1 LN R1 Resistor with greater value o AAA o U HAAA L1 C1 RI Capacitor 250 Chapter 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Calculate the equivalent circuit parameter and simulate the frequency characteristics Table 8 3 Selection of equivalent circuit Equivalent circuit model Typical frequency characteristics Sample example z co E To Resonator eon a 1 Measurement parameter Z 8 Sweep type log Vertical axis Z is log and 9 is linear 2 Measurement parameter Z 8 Sweep type linear or log Vertical axis Z is log and is linear Step 8 Press the CALCULATE PARAMETERS or CALC PARMS key to calculate the equivalent circuit parameter When the equivalent circuit parameter is on the calculated equivalent circuit parameter will be shown under the equivalent circuit diagram In the case of measurement trace display equivalent circuit diagram is off the calculated equivalent circuit parameter will be shown in the equivalent circuit parameter area on the left of the screen
205. Sets the 4th part of the gateway address separated by periods done Stores the gateway address setting specified with the above keys and returns to N A Table B 94 Local Local menu on page 413 To allow this setting to take effect after pressing this key turn the Agilent 4294A off and then on again cancel Cancels the gateway address setting specified with the above keys and returns to N A Table B 94 Local Local menu on page 413 Table B 97 Subnet mask setting LAN Address menu Key operation Local SUBNET MASK Softkey Function GPIB command Ist Sets the Ist part of the subnet mask separated by periods SUBNET lt lst addr gt lt 2nd addr gt lt 3rd addr gt lt 4th addr gt 2nd Sets the 2nd part of the subnet mask separated by periods 3rd Sets the 3rd part of the subnet mask separated by periods 4th Sets the 4th part of the subnet mask separated by periods done Stores the subnet mask setting specified with the above keys and returns to Table N A B 94 Local Local menu on page 413 To allow this setting to take effect after pressing this key turn the Agilent 4294A off and then on again cancel Cancels the subnet mask setting specified with the above keys and returns to N A Table B 94 Local Local menu on page 413 414 Appendix B Table B 98 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Copy key Soft
206. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting Time Delay for Measurement Setting Time Delay for Measurement Time delay can be set for the period before sweep or actual measurement starts after the measurement signal is applied to DUT This function is useful for example when a certain period is required before the characteristics of DUT become stable after the signal is applied Another application of this function is to observe changes in impedance of DUT in the time domain for a long span Setting with sweep time Setting the time period for an entire sweep sweep time makes it possible to set equal time delays time delay at a measurement point from applying the signal to starting measurement and then to each measurement point Press the Sweep key to display the sweep menu Press the TIME key to display the sweep time menu Press the SWEEP TIME key This will display the current setting for the sweep time value in the parameter settings area in the upper left part of the screen Use the keys or the rotary knob in the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the sweep time e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value Settin
207. Step 2 Step 3 Analysis and Processing of Result Print the measurement results and internal data with a printer Select the following Setup On Off keys toggle keys Print setup Softkey label Use paper in landscape orientation LANDSCAPE ON off ON print in landscape horizontal LANDSCAPE on OFF OFF print in portrait Form feed automatic feeding of another sheet FORM FEED ON off ON of paper after feeding one page 7 FORM FEED on OFF OFF Print softkey on the left side of the screen SOFTKEY ON off ON SOFTKEY on OFF OFF Time stamp function during printing prints TIME ON off ON time and date at the start of printing TIME on OFF OFF 1 This setting is invalid if your printer does not print in landscape 2 This cannot be set to ON if printing in landscape is set to ON To return the setup print format to the initial default value press the Copy DEFAULT SETTING key Print the measurements in graphic representation You can print the measurements in graphic representation by following these steps Before printing set up the print format according to Set the print form color resolution and how to handle the paper on page 291 Connect the printer to the printer board of the Agilent 4294A rear panel and make the printer ready for operation For information on how to make the printer ready for operation see the printer manual Display on the screen the measurement result to be printed by the printer
208. TICURR oscillator level sweeps BIAS MENU gt Displays Table B 54 DC bias Source Bias menu on page 386 N A Table B 54 DC bias Source Bias menu Key operation Source BIAS MENU Softkey Function GPIB command BIAS on OFF Toggles on and off the dc bias output DCO ONIOFF MEAS RANGE gt Displays Table B 55 DC bias range DC Bias Range menu on page 386 N A The currently selected dc bias range is displayed lt 1mA lt 10mA or lt 100mA in of the softkey label MODE gt Displays Table B 51 DC bias mode DC Bias Mode menu on page 385 The N A currently selected dc bias mode is displayed voltage source mode VOLT current source mode CURR constant voltage source mode C VOLT or constant current source mode C CURR in of the softkey label VOLTAGE LEVEL Sets the dc bias voltage level DCV lt value gt CURRENT LEVEL Sets the dc bias current level DCI lt value gt MAX LIMIT VOLTAGE Sets the voltage limit value upper limit when using the dc bias source in the MAXDCYV lt value gt constant current mode Within the range that does not exceed this upper limit voltage the constant current output of the dc bias operates MIN LIMIT VOLTAGE Sets the current limit value upper limit when using the dc bias source in the MINDCV lt value gt constant voltage mode Within the range that does not exceed this upper limit current the constan
209. Trace A complex admittance for Trace B it displays measurement results in a Cartesian coordinate graph whose horizontal and vertical axes indicate the sweep and measurement parameter values respectively Use the following procedure to select the vertical axis format for a Cartesian coordinate graph Step 1 Activate the trace for which you want to set the axis format To activate Press Trace A A Trace B B Step 2 Press the Format key to display the Format menu Step 3 Select the desired vertical axis format by pressing the appropriate key To select Press Linear LIN Logarithmic LOG NOTE The horizontal axis format is automatically determined based on the selected sweep type 160 Chapter 7 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Selecting the Graph Axis Format Figure 7 1 Vertical axis for IZI linear format CMP Hid k YC IAC VFIDE CENTER 164 MHz OSC 5668 mvolt SPAN 2 kHz 4294a0j020 Figure 7 2 Vertical axis for Z logarithmic format A IZI TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 26 2 B dz SCALE 36 div REF Be VAC IAC VFIDE CENTER 166 MHz OSC 566 mvolt SPAN 24 kHz 4294a0j021 Chapter 7 161 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Selecting the Graph Axis Format When Using Complex Parameters COMPLEX Z Y When the Agilent 4294A is configured to perform a COMPLEX Z Y measurement complex impedance for Trace A complex admittance for Trace B use the
210. Traces A and B are each displayed on a separate graph To split the display follow these steps Step 1 Press the Display key to display the first page of the Display menu Step 2 Press the SPLIT on OFF or SPLIT ON off key to turn on or off the split display feature pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey Labels Description SPLIT ON off Indicates that the split display feature is enabled SPLIT on OFF Indicates that the split display feature is disabled Figure 7 29 Traces A and B with split display disabled A ZI 5 ka BOTTOM 20 a TOP SCALE 24 div REF B VAC gt IAC wr IDC OFF CENTER 168 MHz OSC 500 mvolt SPAN 26 kHz 4294a0j045 200 Chapter 7 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Splitting the Graph Figure 7 30 Traces A and B with split display enabled B Bz SCALE 20 div REF ge w IDC OFF VAC i i TAC CENTER 100 MHz 05C 50 mvolt SPAN 20 kHz 4294a0j046 NOTE Before you can turn on or off the split display feature you must configure the screen assignments for HP Instrument BASIC by pressing the ALL INSTRUMENT or BASIC STATUS key For more information refer to Configuring the Screen Assignments for HP Instrument BASIC on page 202 Once you have turned on or off the split display feature that setting is applied to both Traces A and B You can specify this setting without activating one of the traces or checking the current state
211. UT and as a result the command is ignored Before executing the cutoff point search of the band width function turn on the band width function command WIDT ON Self test failed The result of the self test is failure Contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office or service center or refer to the service manual Setting conflict A program data element complying with the syntax standard is analyzed but the 4294A cannot execute it at present String data error An error not described by error numbers from 151 to 159 occurs during the syntax analysis of a string data element String data not allowed A string data element is received where the 4294A does not accept any string data element Suffix error Appendix C 441 138 134 102 310 87 124 64 77 54 223 Error messages Suffix not allowed A suffix error An error other than 131 to 139 occurs in the notation of a suffix Suffix not allowed A suffix is added to a numeric value element to which no suffix should be added Suffix too long The suffix is too long The suffix contains the notation of 12 characters or more Refer to TEEEF488 2 7 7 3 4 Syntax error There is a command or data type that cannot be recognized For example although the 4294A does not accept any strings a string is received System error One of the system errors defined for the 4294A occurred T THETA MEASUREMENT NOT SELECTED When th
212. Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the oscillator level e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press the unit key G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value The setting above will add a new value for the oscillator level to the cell located in the segment row and the oscillator level column OSC of the list sweep table in editing mode Press the BIAS MODE key to display the dc bias mode menu 120 Chapter5 Step 15 Step 16 NOTE Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Setting Measurement Conditions Sweeping Multiple Sweep Ranges with Different Conditions in a Single Action List Sweep Select the dc bias mode dc bias mode Key stroke Voltage source non constant voltage mode VOLT Current source non constant current mode CURRENT Voltage source constant voltage mode VOLT CONSTANT Current source constant current mode CURRENT CONSTANT Press the return key to return to the segment edit menu 2 3 Note that the dc bias mode currently selected is displayed in the key label of the BIAS MODE key Softkey label Selected dc bias mode BIAS MODE VOLT Voltage source non constant voltage mode BIAS MODE CURR Current source non constant current mode BIAS MODE C VOLT Voltage source
213. V downarrow 57 VC 57 ventilation requirements 28 voltage signal level 324 W warning beep 302 weight 350 X x1 key 46 Y YEAR key 299 Z zero span 94 Index 449
214. a eh ere S 35 Perform Fixture Compensation for the Open Circuit State 2 2 eee eee 35 Perform Fixture Compensation for the Short Circuit State 0 0 eee eee 35 Carrying Out Measurement and Viewing Results 0 0 00 cece eee eee 37 Connectthe DUT txncas accede tieeo A ei akg ba Sha A E EE AY 37 Apply the Logarithmic Format to the Vertical Axis for IZI 0 000000 c eee eee eee ee 38 Apply the Linear Format to the Vertical Axis for O 0 0 eects 38 Display the Measured IZI and O Values in Parallel 0 0 0 eee eee 39 Auto scale the IZ Trace once tocitameg oo ee ee eee ee le ba ate dee had be 40 Auto scale the 9 Traces 2 3 stgutsco gitie iepen MOR oh Ree Geb Loess bbe RED A ae Saree penta 40 Results of Analysis raci octane tun av eee Oe deena dap bce ed ail hae E day dea nants 42 Determine the Self resonance Frequency and Resonant Impedance 0000 42 3 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display Front Panel s 5 efccsc a e a ates tin al ancient oat atta ena aes Rue ante 44 Hard Ke yS etea oleae Sak e Rak bb tie eb Satie Rsk ae pA EEE oh Behe A ET bs EOS Heke plaee 44 1 ACTIVE TRACE block 2 04 04 fsa s beet be hd ae ad dh aie da eh ee ee Se eS 45 Contents 2 MEASUREMENT Block i2 3 5 20 penn s HSS kee Bs eee Ms eee sg es 45 3 STIMULUS BIOCK sci need See a eb AE es Seas i EE A ERO pee eet 46 4 ENTRY Block i205 is cds SAR ihe ee ad Soa ee AA TESA RAR AES Baka A 46 Ds MARKER
215. a g alka daha kgs nag SS ep tac dg wk Seg oe E p aoe ag ete ba A 200 Configuring the Screen Assignments for HP Instrument BASIC 0 000000 202 Adding a Title to the Measurement Screen 0 00 eee ec eee ene eee 205 Customizing Intensity and Color Settings for Screen Display 00 0 0 0s eee eee eee eee 207 Setting the Foreground Intensity 0 0 ee eee eee eee 207 Adjusting the Background Intensity 2 0 0 ec eee nee 207 Customizing the Color of Each Screen Item 1 2 eee 208 Resetting All Items to Factory Default Colors 0 00 eee ec eee 210 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Specify the sweep parameter value and read the value on the trace 000 000 0008 212 Listing data at several points on the trace 2 cee ereere 214 Displaying several marker positions using softkey labels 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 214 Listing the marker positions with the marker list function 00 0 0 eee e eee eee ee 215 Reading the difference from the reference point on the screen delta marker 217 Placing the delta marker on the reference point with the main marker 004 217 Moving the delta marker alone to place it at a reference point 0 000 000 ee ee eee 218 Displaying the main sub marker and reading the difference from the reference point 219 Reading actual measurement points only reading interpo
216. a space at the position cursor _ of the character string input line BACK SPACE or Back Space Returns the cursor _ of the character string input line by one character to the left and erases the character in that position CLEAR NAME Erases the entire the character string entered in the character string input line There is no need to attach an extension to the file name After entering the file name in the character string input line press the done key or 1 key to save the file To suspend saving press the cancel key In both cases the Save menu returns Steps 6 and 7 can be executed from the external keyboard connected to the rear panel After entering the file name press the Enter key of the keyboard to save the file The extension TIF is automatically attached to the name of the file to be saved When you are editing the list sweep table limit line table and so on using the Save key to perform the GRAPHICS save of the screen causes the edit mode to finish and the screen changes at the instant the Save key is pressed As a result you cannot save the desired displayed screen To avoid this do not use the Save key Instead send the GP IB s save command SAVDTIF via GP IB or LAN to the Agilent 4294A Alternatively you can use the get command of the FTP File Transfer Protocol function to capture the screen display file screen tif on the Agilent 4294A s dynamic data disk via LAN into an external computer
217. ach trace A and B if COMPLEX Z Y has been selected as the measurement parameter FIXED AMKR AUX If COMPLEX Z Y has been selected as the measurement parameter sets the DMKRAUV lt value gt VALUE position in the secondary measurement parameter value of the fixed A marker return Returns to Table B 58 Marker Marker menu on page 390 N A 1 If COMPLEX has been selected as the display format the value of the real part of each complex parameter R or G if POLAR the absolute value of each complex parameter IZI or IYI 2 If COMPLEX has been selected as the display format the value of the imaginary part of each complex parameter X or B if POLAR the value of the phase of each complex parameter 6 392 Appendix B Table B 62 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Marker key Marker Marker Zoom menu 1 2 Marker Softkeys displayed by pressing the Marker key Softkey Function GPIB command MKR gt START Substitutes the sweep parameter value at the main marker on the current active trace A or B into the sweep start value In other words the sweep range is changed by using the marker position as the new sweep start value MKRSTAR MKR gt STOP Substitutes the sweep parameter value at the main marker on the current active trace A or B into the sweep stop value In other words the sweep range is changed by using the
218. actually connected Check and correct the setting e The setup acquisition of calibration data for the setting of the four terminal pair extension may have failed If necessary perform the setup again e Some measured DUTs may cause this error due to their characteristics In this case the error may be avoided by changing the measurement conditions for example lowering the measurement signal level If this error often occurs in normal measurements the instrument may fail In this case Contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office or the company you purchased this instrument from C CALIBRATION ABORTED One of the following problems has occurred e Inthe middle of or after the completion of the setup for user calibration or fixture compensation measurement of required calibration data and calculation and storage of error coefficients the setting of calibration points FIXED or USER is changed The current setup and error coefficients previously stored become invalid e When the setting of calibration points is USER in the middle of or after the completion of the setup for user calibration or fixture compensation measurement of required calibration data and calculation and storage of error coefficients the sweep condition sweep range sweep parameter number of sweep points sweep type is changed The current setup and error coefficients previously stored become invalid e Inthe middle of the setup for user calibr
219. advancing in both directions When two cutoff points are detected six parameters bandwidth width center value center Q peak peak AL and AR are derived from the data at those points and displayed in the Marker Statistics Trace Bandwidth Analysis Result field on the right of the screen NOTE The peak peak one of the six parameters displayed on the screen as trace bandwidth analysis results is the first position of the main marker itself Therefore before executing the trace bandwidth analysis use the peak search function and so on to move the main marker to the peak on the trace as necessary The cutoff points are searched for according to the definition specified by the user For how to define the cutoff points refer to Appendix Define the cutoff point in trace bandwidth analysis on page 238 The definitions of the six parameters displayed on the screen as the final results also vary depending on the delta marker mode selected at the time For how to set the delta marker mode refer to Setting the delta marker in the trace bandwidth analysis on page 239 Table 8 2 Definitions of parameters in the trace bandwidth analysis Table 8 2 shows the definition of each parameter in the trace bandwidth analysis Definitions of parameters in trace bandwidth analysis Parameter Definition Cutoff point Two points having the predefined measurement parameter value that are searched for and detected fro
220. al at gt 5 MHz 10 0 3 x f 50 uA at 23 5 C typical at measurement port of the 42941A 16048G H at lt 5 MHz 10 50 WA 15 1 5 f7 50 uA at 23 5 C typical at gt 5 MHz 20 0 3 x f 50 uA at 23 5 C typical NOTE f frequency MHz These characteristics apply when a SHORT is connected to each port Test signal level should be lt 20 mArms when the measured impedance is lt 50 Q Chapter 10 325 NOTE Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics Signal Level Monitor Voltage range same as the voltage signal level setting range Voltage monitor accuracy the 42942A at four terminal pair port of the 4294A or 7 mm port of 10 0 05 x f 100 Z at 23 5 C typical at measurement port of the 42941A 16048G H 10 0 15 x f 100 Z at 23 5 C typical Current range same as the current signal level setting range Current monitor accuracy the 42942A at four terminal pair port of the 4294A or 7 mm port of 10 0 3 x f Z 100 at 23 5 C typical at measurement port of the 42941A 16048G H 10 0 4 x f Z 100 at 23 5 C typical f frequency MHz Z impedance measurement value Q Beyond 23 5 C the test signal level monitor accuracy decreases to half the value described Output Impedance Output impedance
221. al Probe pair port of the Agilent PROBE 42941A 4294A connect a dedicated probe adapter to the 3 5 mm port and then connect the device to the adapter contacts G Connect the 42941A 42941A coaxial cable and test 42941A Impedance V V V V directly to the four terminal fixture Probe PROBE pair port of the Agilent 42941A 4294A connect a coaxial cable to the 3 5 mm port connect a test fixture and then connect the device to the fixture contacts 1 Phase compensation 2 Although it has a cable it is considered a direct connection type test fixture Adapter Selection The adapter selection setting must be confirmed before measurement in accordance with the connection status of each accessory If necessary it must be changed to the correct setting The adapter selection of the Agilent 4294A can be confirmed and if necessary changed as follows Step 1 Press Cal key to display the Calibration Menu Step 2 The adapter selection status is displayed in the space of the ADAPTER key s softkey label Proceed to Step 3 if you need to change the selection Softkey Label Adapter Selection Status ADAPTER NONE ADAPTER 1M ADAPTER 2M ADAPTER 7mm 68 No Adapter Four terminal pair 1 meter Four terminal pair 2 meter 42942A Terminal Adapter Chapter 4 NOTE Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Preparation of Measurement Accessories Adapter Setting Softkey Label
222. ale settings for each of the data and memory traces For how to target the data or memory trace for scale and display settings refer to Selecting the Target Trace Type Data or Memory on page 177 178 Chapter 7 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Trace based Comparison and Calculation Trace based Comparison and Calculation Traces A and B each provide two different trace types data and memory The data trace keeps track of the DUT s characteristics as it is being tested while the memory trace captures the measurement data at a specific point in time and displays that data With the data trace you can perform a simple calculation on the measurement data and display the results For example you can display the differential between the measured data and the memory trace data or the result of subtracting your specified offset value from the measured data Table 7 1 lists the trace types and their functions Trace Types Functions Data trace yellow Displays measurement data calculations updated during measurement cycle Trace A Memory trace Stores and displays previously measured data captures green data when DATA gt MEMORY is pressed Data trace blue Displays measurement data calculations updated during measurement cycle Trace B Memory trace Stores and displays previously measured data captures brown data when DATA gt MEMORY is
223. ally followed by gt and pressing the softkey displays a softkey sub menu for selecting one of those settings more n m This softkey label indicates that the softkey menu consists of m pages and that the nth page of the menu is currently displayed You can use the more n m key to move to the next page of the softkey menu or to the first page if the current page is the last one return This softkey label is contained in a softkey sub menu that is displayed when you press a softkey followed by gt You can press the corresponding softkey to return to the main menu that is the original softkey menu that had been displayed before you accessed the current menu as long as the current menu is a sub menu done Select this softkey label to put your entry into effect and return to the main menu yes This softkey label appears when you are prompted to confirm your entry before applying it Pressing the corresponding softkey puts your entry into effect cancel Select this softkey label to cancel your entry and return to the main menu 54 Chapter 3 Table 3 1 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display Items Displayed on the LCD Types of softkey options and their functions Type of softkey option Function Softkey label for setting a Pressing the corresponding softkey displays the function s parameter current setting in the Parameter Setting field in the upper left part of the s
224. ameter settings located in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the point averaging e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press the unit key G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value The value of point averaging can be set to any natural number from 1 to 256 Setting the point averaging to 1 is equivalent to turning the averaging OFF Press the POINT AVG on OFF or POINT AVG ON off key to turn the point averaging ON or OFF pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey label Point averaging POINT AVG on OFF Off POINT AVG ON off On 128 Chapter5 Calibration This chapter describes calibration methods for the Agilent 4294A Precision Impedance Analyzer 129 Table 6 1 Calibration Selecting Appropriate Calibration Method Selecting Appropriate Calibration Method The Agilent 4294A has three calibration types user calibration port extension compensation and fixture compensation Table 6 1 shows each device connection and its corresponding adapter selection and calibration Calibration should be done according to the particular requirements of each device connection See Adapter Setting on page 67 for adapter selection Device Connection and Corresponding A
225. ameter value The value of the parameter is illegal Illegal program name The program name is illegal This message is displayed for example when you attempt to delete a program name that does not exist define an existing program name again or refer to a program that does not exist Illegal variable name 434 Appendix C 213 141 161 101 141 121 154 171 112 103 Error messages Init ignored The variable name is illegal This message is displayed when you attempt to refer to a variable that does not exist Init ignored Another measurement is being executed so the measurement start request is ignored INSUFFICIENT MEMORY Multiple processes are executed at the same time and the memory is exhausted which causes the last process to be aborted For example if you try to simultaneously execute an HP Instrument BASIC program print the screen and transfer the data array the memory of the system is depleted and this message may be displayed In this case terminate some of the processes and then perform the next operation Invalid block data Block data is expected but the given block data is invalid for some reason Refer to IEEE488 2 7 7 6 2 For example the END message is received before the length of the block data is reached Invalid character Invalid characters exist in the program message string For example for a correct program message MEAS IRIM an ampersand amp is inserte
226. ameters Cs D Selects series capacitance and dissipation factor as measurement parameters MEAS CSD more 1 3 Displays Table B 8 Measurement parameter Measurement menu 2 3 on N A page 361 Table B 8 Measurement parameter Measurement menu 2 3 Key operation Meas more 1 3 Softkey Function GPIB command IYl 6 Selects admittance absolute value and admittance phase as measurement MEAS AMPH parameters G B Selects conductance and susceptance as measurement parameters MEAS ARIM Lp G Selects parallel inductance and conductance as measurement parameters MEAS LPG Lp Q Selects parallel inductance and Q factor quality factor as measurement MEAS LPQ parameters Cp G Selects parallel capacitance and conductance as measurement parameters MEAS CPG Cp Q Selects parallel capacitance and Q factor quality factor as measurement MEAS CPQ parameters Cp D Selects parallel capacitance and dissipation factor as measurement parameters MEAS CPD more 2 3 Displays Table B 9 Measurement parameter Measurement menu 3 3 on N A page 362 Appendix B Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Meas key Table B 9 Measurement parameter Measurement menu 3 3 Key operation Meas more 1 3 more 2 3 Softkey Function GPIB command COMPLEX Z Y Selects complex impedance Z and complex admittance Y as measurement MEAS CO
227. ample the complex plane display format command FMT COMP and as a result the command is ignored When a measurement parameter other than COMPLEX Z Y is selected select a display format from the linear scale format command FMT LINY the log scale format command FMT LOGY or the percent format command FMT PERC FREQUENCY SWEEP ONLY When a sweep parameter other than frequency is specified you attempt to execute an equivalent circuit analysis command CALECPARA and so on You can execute the equivalent circuit analysis only when the sweep parameter is frequency G GET not allowed A group execution trigger GET was received in a program message Refer to IEEE488 2 7 7 H Hardware error The program command cannot be executed due to a hardware related error This indicates that an error other than 241 to 249 has occurred Hardware missing The received command or Query complies with the standard but cannot be executed due to hardware related reasons for example the option is not installed Header separator error The header separator is wrong This error is displayed when a character other than a defined header follows the header For example when SRE 4 is correct a character follows the header without a space as SRE4 Headers Suffix out of range The suffix of the header is out of range The suffix of a numeral parameter that follows the SCPI command makes the header invalid Illegal par
228. and off the accumulation of trace display on the screen If this is set to on traces once written on the screen are not deleted and the next trace is superimposed With accumulated traces you cannot read out data using markers or change the scale configuration When accumulation is turned off the trace accumulation is canceled and all accumulated traces until then are deleted ACCUD ONIOFF DEF TRACE gt Displays Table B 15 Trace definition Define Trace menu on page 365 The currently defined trace type is displayed in of the softkey label N A OFFSET Sets the offset value that is subtracted from the data trace of the traces defined using the above DEF TRACE key If an offset value other than zero is entered _Q is displayed at the left edge of the screen in the same color as the trace For the memory trace the offset value is not subtracted DATOVAL lt value gt OSC MON on OFF Toggles on and off the monitor display of the test signal level If this is set to on the test signal level is monitored and displayed at the bottom of the display during measurement OMON ONIOFF BIAS MON gt Displays Table B 16 Bias Monitor Bias Monitor menu on page 365 N A more 1 2 Displays Table B 14 Display Display menu 2 2 on page 364 N A Table B 14 Display Display menu 2 2 Key operation Display more 1 2 Sof
229. apter 7 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 NOTE Step 12 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Customizing Intensity and Color Settings for Screen Display To customize Press Pen 2 more 1 3 PEN 2 2 of the graphic drawing pen set 4 Pen 3 more 1 3 more 2 3 PEN 3 3 of the graphic drawing pen set 4 Pen 4 more 1 3 more 2 3 PEN 4 4 of the graphic drawing pen set 4 Pen 5 more 1 3 more 2 3 PEN 5 5 of the graphic drawing pen set 4 Pen 6 more 1 3 more 2 3 PEN 6 6 of the graphic drawing pen set 4 1 Graphic drawing pens specified in an HP Instrument BASIC program or trace plotting pens specified for each segment of a list sweep cycle Press the MODIFY COLOR to display the Item Color menu Press the TINT key The Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen indicates the currently applied hue as an integer between 0 and 100 This number is an index to a particular point on a hue ring that defines color transitions from red to blue to black and finally back to red If the current hue is pure red it is represented as zero Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the hue as an integer between 0 and 100 e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys NND to set the desired value
230. as Constant dc bias current mode DC BIAS ON VAC IAC VATDC START A CH 1 MHz OSC 500 m Yolt STOP 98 mA 4294a0j009 86 Chapter5 ee Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE NOTE Setting Measurement Conditions Selecting Linear Log or List Sweep Selecting Linear Log or List Sweep Press the Sweep key to display the sweep menu Press the TYPE key to display the sweep type menu Press one of the following keys to select the sweep type Sweep type Key stroke Linear sweep LINEAR Log logarithm sweep LOG List sweep LIST If the oscillator level or the dc bias is selected as the sweep parameter you cannot select the log sweep For how to select the sweep parameter refer to Appendix Selecting Sweep Parameter on page 84 List sweep cannot be selected unless a list sweep table is prepared Refer to Sweeping Multiple Sweep Ranges with Different Conditions in a Single Action List Sweep on page 116 to create the list sweep table The sweep type that is currently selected appears in the key label of the TYPE key Softkey label Selected sweep parameter TYPE FREQ Linear sweep TYPE LOG Log sweep TYPE LIST List sweep The sweep type can be set to trace A and trace B in common It is not necessary to select an active trace or to verify the current selection before setting the sweep type Chapter 5 87 Setting Measurement Conditions Selecting Linear L
231. as ON or OFF Press the BIAS on OFF or BIAS ON off key to make your selection pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey label Applied dc bias DC BIAS on OFF Off DC BIAS ON off On When the error message CAUTION DCBIAS OVERLOAD error number 137 appears in the instrument message area in the upper left part of the screen after turning dc bias ON follow the steps given in 6 Optimizing dc bias range to set the appropriate range for the dc bias Turning dc bias ON displays DC BIAS ON in the lower right area of the screen and also shows the application status of the dc bias indicating dc bias mode and whether dc voltage exceeds the limits See dc bias status on page 57 for details 6 Optimizing dc bias range When the error message CAUTION DCBIAS OVERLOAD error number 137 appears after applying dc bias increase the dc bias range by step until the message disappears Then select the narrowest possible range dc bias range Key stroke 1 mA 1mA 10 mA 10mA 100 mA 100mA Press the return key to return to the dc bias menu Note that the dc bias range currently Chapter 5 109 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting and Applying dc Bias selected is displayed in the key label of the MEAS RANGE key Softkey label Selected dc bias range MEAS RANGE 1mA 1 mA MEAS RANGE 10mA 10 mA MEAS RANGE 100mA 100 mA NOTE If the message CAUTION DCBIAS OVERLOAD error numb
232. as the same function as above N A PREV FILES Displays the previous page of the filename list displayed as the softkey labels N A NEXT FILES Displays the next page of the filename list displayed as the softkey labels N A STORE DEV gt Displays Table B 81 Mass storage Store Device menu on page 406 In N A of the softkey label the currently selected mass storage is displayed flexible disk drive FLOPPY volatile memory disk MEMORY or nonvolatile memory disk flash memory FLASH return Returns to the higher level menu that displayed this menu Table B 74 System N A System menu on page 402 Table B 105 Save Save menu on page 419 or Table B 110 File utility File Utility menu on page 421 Table B 112 File deletion confirmation Purge File menu Key operation Save FILE UTILITIES PURGE FILE filename Softkey Function GPIB command yes Executes the deletion of the specified file and returns to Table B 111 File N A selection Select File menu on page 422 cancel Cancels the deletion of the specified file and returns to Table B 111 File N A selection Select File menu on page 422 422 Appendix B Key Definitions Softkeys displayed by pressing the Save key Table B 113 Format confirmation Format Media menu Key operation Save FILE UTILITIES FORMAT Softkey Function GPIB comma
233. asurement the message WAIT MEASURING ADJUSTMENT KIT is displayed in the instrument state area in the LCD s upper left side 78 Chapter 4 Figure 4 8 Step 1 NOTE Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 NOTE Step 7 Preparation of Measurement Accessories Adapter Setting Make sure that the 42941A is correctly connected to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A Connecting the 42941A 42941a0j0101 The 42941A must be directly connected to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A If another accessory such as a cable or adapter is inserted between the 42941A and the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A the correct adapter setup data cannot be obtained and correct device measurement cannot be performed after the adapter setup More than 30 minutes warm up time is required after turning on the Agilent 4294A Make the correct adapter selection for the 42941A in accordance with the Adapter Selection on page 68 After performing Step 4 of the Adapter Selection on page 68 press the SETUP key to display the Adapter Setup Menu Leave the 3 5 mm port of the 42941A open no connection There is no OPEN standard for the 42941A Press the PHASE COMP key to start the phase compensation data measuremen
234. ata Points on page 155 Press the USER CAL key to display the User Calibration Menu If required set user defined standard values in accordance with Defining Standard Values for User Calibration on page 148 After you complete the setup of the user defined standard values press the return key to return to the User Calibration Menu Press the EXECUTE CAL key to display the Calibration Execution Menu Connect the OPEN standard to the port plane where you want to perform user calibration Press the OPEN key to start OPEN calibration data measurement During the calibration data measurement the message WAIT MEASURING STANDARD is displayed in the instrument state area of the LCD s upper left side When OPEN calibration data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to OPEN DONE Remove the OPEN standard from the port Then connect the SHORT standard to the port Press the SHORT key to start SHORT calibration data measurement During the calibration data measurement the message WAIT MEASURING STANDARD is displayed in the instrument state area of the LCD s upper left side When the SHORT calibration data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to SHORT DONE Remove the SHORT standard from the port Then connect the LOAD standard to the port Press the LOAD key to start LOAD calibration data measurement During the calibration data measurement the message WAIT MEASU
235. ation or four terminal pair extension measurement of required calibration data and calculation and storage of error coefficients the setup is canceled the cancel key CALQUI command or ECALQUI command is executed The setup is invalid but error coefficients previously stored are still available If necessary again perform the setup for user calibration fixture compensation or Appendix C 429 281 35 82 133 130 Error messages CALIBRATION NOT USABLE four terminal pair extension CALIBRATION NOT USABLE A command to execute data measurement for unnecessary not allowed calibration user calibration or fixture compensation for the current adapter selection is sent The command is invalid For example when NONE no adapter is selected as the adapter selection sending the CALA command which executes OPEN data measurement for the user calibration causes this error when the adapter selection is NONE you cannot execute the user calibration Execute the measurement of necessary allowed calibration data for the current adapter selection For more information on the appropriate adapter selection and calibration refer to Table 6 1 Device Connection and Corresponding Adapter Selection and Calibration on page 130 CALIBRATION REQUIRED In user calibration or fixture compensation although error coefficients based on the measurement of the required calibration standards OPEN SHORT or LOAD have not been acqu
236. atistics are calculated for the specified search range For more information about the partial search function refer to Specify partial search range on page 267 Activate the trace whose statistics you want to obtain Active Trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Press the Utility key to display the Utility menu Press the STATISTICS on OFF key to turn on the statistics display Softkey label State of the trace statistics display STATISTICS ON off On STATISTICS on OFF Off On the screen mean indicates the mean value s dev the standard deviation and p p the peak to peak difference between the maximum and the minimum of the measurement parameter value of the trace 254 Chapter 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Calculating the mean value standard deviation and peak to peak of the trace Figure 8 22 Statistics display of trace A IZI TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 20 a 152 519 9 B SCALE 20 div REF Be 99 99 MHz VAC hoa vibe CENTER 198 MHz OSC 508 mvolt SPAN 26 kHz 4294a0j110 NOTE Each time a single sweep is completed the statistics are calculated and the display is updated In Figure 8 22 on page 255 the trace statistics display function is used to obtain the peak to peak value difference between the minimum value and the maximum value On the other hand in Figure 8 4 on page 220 the delta marker function is used to obtain the same parameter Chap
237. averaging Data contents of the data part The data part stores calibration data user calibration data and fixture compensation data or trace data data array memory array data trace array and memory trace array that you select on the data save contents selection menu Contents of the data part when saving the calibration data If you specify saving the calibration data on the data save contents selection menu the calibration and compensation data obtained during the user calibration and fixture compensation are saved The calibration and compensation data is stored as a single piece of data calibration and compensation data as shown in Table 8 7 instead of separately saving as the user 278 Chapter 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data calibration data and the fixture compensation data Table 8 7 Example of calibration data saved in the data part Cal Point FIXED Frequency _ Comp open Real _ Comp open Imag _ Comp short Real _ Comp short Imag _ Comp load Real _ Comp load Imag lt 4 00000000000e 01_2 947073e 09_ 1 565653e 09_ 6 253917e 03_1 008368e 03_5 008568e 01_ 3 311127e 02 4 50000000000e 01_ 7 903406e 11_9 789698e 10_ 4 783846e 03_ 7 028686e 04_5 007061e 01_ 4 446183e 02 lt 5 50000038 147e 01_ 1 688141e_ 10 3 870845e 10_ 4 990600e 03_ 4 369987e 04_5 008877e 01_ 4 029654e 02 lt Symbols in the table Linefeed _ Tab
238. ay format the value of the real part in each complex parameter R or G if POLAR the absolute value IZI or IYI Appendix B 395 Table B 65 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Search key Target Target menu Search TARGET Softkey Function GPIB command TARGET VALUE Sets the destination where the main marker on the current active trace A or B will be moved as the measurement parameter value of the trace sets the target value After the value is entered the main marker moves to the position of the measurement parameter value If there is no measurement parameter value on the trace the marker is not moved and TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND is displayed in the upper left area of the screen SEATARG lt value gt SEARCH LEFT For the main marker on the current active trace A or B the target value is searched for from the current position toward the left If it is detected the main marker moves to the position If not the marker is not moved and TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND is displayed in the upper left area of the screen SEAL SEARCH RIGHT For the main marker on the current active trace A or B the target value is searched for from the current position toward the right If it is detected the main marker moves to the position If not the marker is not moved and TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND is displayed in the upper left area of the screen SEAR
239. ber is displayed in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the partial search segment number e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the unit key x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value There is no key to turn on or off the partial search range in list sweep Use the partial search function for the segment number specified by selecting the SEGMENT key Press the RNG LINE on OFF key located in the Search Range menu to change the soft label to RNG LINE ON off This will display the partial search range boundary line in the list sweep When the measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y however the boundary line is not displayed Chapter 8 269 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data The Agilent 4294A supports three types of data storage devices floppy disks volatile memory disks and nonvolatile memory disks flash memory This section describes how to save data obtained through a series of measurement processes within the Agilent 4294A into a storage device and how to recall data from the storage device For how to manage files copy delete and so on refer to Managing Files on page 304 Agilent 4294A int
240. ble disk drive FLOPPY volatile memory disk MEMORY or nonvolatile memory disk flash memory FLASH Table B 106 Filename entry File Name menu Key operation Save STATE Save DATA BINARY ASCII Save GRAPHICS Save FILE UTILITIES CREATE DIRECTORY Softkey Function GPIB command SELECT LETTER Enters a character indicated by 1 on the screen N A SPACE Enters a space N A BACK SPACE Deletes a character last entered N A CLEAR NAME Deletes all entered characters N A STORE DEV gt Displays Table B 81 Mass storage Store Device menu on page 406 In N A of the softkey label the currently selected mass storage is displayed flexible disk drive FLOPPY volatile memory disk MEMORY or nonvolatile memory disk flash memory FLASH done Using the entered string as the filename executes storing states data or N A graphics When creating a directory a directory having the entered string is created After execution returns to the higher level menu Table B 105 Save Save menu on page 419 Table B 107 Data save Save Data menu on page 420 or Table B 110 File utility File Utility menu on page 421 Appendix B 419 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Save key Table B 106 Filename entry File Name menu Key operation Save STATE Save DATA BINARY ASCII Save
241. ble only mode in advance Setting Checking the GPIB address Follow these steps to set or check the GPIB address of this instrument Press the Local key to display the Local menu Press the ADDRESS HP IB key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the currently set GPIB address is displayed Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the GPIB address e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set 312 Chapter 9 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Setting Checking the GPIB e Press the step keys TW to set the desired value The GPIB address can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 30 Chapter 9 313 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Setting Checking the LAN Setting Checking the LAN This section describes how to set or check the addresses necessary to use the Agilent 4294A s LAN Local Area Network functions For more information on the use of the LAN refer to the Programming Manual Setting Checking the IP Address Follow these steps to set or check the IP Internet Protocol address The IP address is delimited into four parts by periods each part is independently set Press the Local key to display the Local menu Pr
242. by specifying the trigger source see Selecting a Method to Start Measurement 190 Chapter 7 NOTE Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 NOTE Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Monitoring the Test Signal Level AC Trigger Source on page 111 Alternatively you can use the continuous sweep mode by implementing a free run trigger Marker based level monitoring takes effect when you start a new sweep cycle after turning on the test signal level monitor feature Press the Utility key to display the Utility menu The main marker appears on the trace if it is not already displayed Press the LEVEL MON key to display the Level Monitor menu Activate the trace for which you want to monitor the signal level at the marker position Traces A and B are each associated with a field called Marker Statistics Trace Bandwidth Analysis that is used to display the signal level monitored at the marker position when the corresponding trace is active To activate Press Trace A A Trace B B To set up marker based level monitoring press one of the following keys To Press Turn off marker based level monitoring OFF Monitor the test signal voltage level AC V Monitor the test signal current level AC I Move the main marker to your desired measuring point on the trace The Marker Statistics Trace Bandwidth Analysis field for the activate trace indicates the test signal level monitored at the
243. cating the position of the delta marker you want to change from the following Position parameter of delta marker Key operation Sweep parameter value AMKR STIMULUS Measurement parameter value when FIXED AMKR VALUE the measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y the primary measurement parameter value Secondary measurement parameter FIXED AMKR AUX VALUE value can be set only when the measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y 218 Chapter 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Reading the difference from the reference point on the screen delta marker When you press the key the current set value of the selected parameter indicating the delta marker position is displayed in the Setting Parameter Value field in the upper left area of the screen When the measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y there are two types of scalar measurement parameters primary measurement parameter and secondary measurement parameter for both trace A and trace B therefore you set the measurement parameter values of the delta marker with two keys FIXED AMKR VALUE key and FIXED AMKR AUX VALUE key The definition of the primary measurement parameter and secondary measurement parameter is shown in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Definitions of primary and secondary parameters when measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y Display format Primary measurement Secondary measurement parameter parameter Complex plane Real part R or G Imaginary pa
244. cc ce ccc eee cee te cen bebe eb bene bene bee A bee eens 83 Selecting Sweep Parameters siras eee bee eee PMPs BE BNR CURDS CaO R A SHR REAR RSS 84 Selecting Linear Log or List Sweep 0 ec rerne 87 Settings Sweep Ran Ge sre he ese sd le sales aE ee LAS SMR ek EE E SUES ee h ae gael sete N 89 Setting by start and stop values 0 keene cence eens 89 Setting by center and span values 1 0 keene nent eee nee 89 Setting sweep range with marker 0 2 ec een e ene e nen eae 90 Using Time as Sweep Parameter Zero Span Sweep 0 0 cee eects 94 Setting Number of Points NOP 20 ccc cc ene n eee beeen ene nee 97 Selecting Sweep Directions eae bee Eo RY MRS EA BRE WE REAR C4 SBR BO ERS 99 Manual Sweep Measurement at a Specified Point 00 eee eee eee 100 Setting Time Delay for Measurement 0 0 0 2 o ccc cent eens 102 petting withSweep time vi sod ieee die bee dle Sean le Rae sbadial ba eaten 102 Setting with time delay at measurement point 0 0 eee eee eee 102 Setting with sweep time delay 0 0 ccc eee eect teens 103 Setting Fixed Frequency CW Frequency 0 0 c cece cent e eee 104 Setting Oscillator Levels ic Sead ie td chee ibean phaeebe eget be de EE teen 105 Selecting Unit for Oscillator Level Voltage or Current 0 0 0 ee eee eee ee 106 Setting and Applying dc Bias 1 nce ee ence eens 107 k Selecting debilas modes 22 352 ose shelve nae pa
245. comparison between the frequency characteristics of the actual sample and the simulation result To calculate the equivalent circuit parameter for a resonator another possible method in addition to the method of equivalent circuit analysis used in the equivalent circuit E discussed above is to use the specifically designed GP IB command For details see Programming Manual Simulate the frequency characteristics based on the equivalent circuit parameter Simulate the frequency characteristics according to the following steps Start from Step 12 when you want to simulate the frequency characteristics on the basis of the equivalent circuit parameter calculated according to the procedure of Calculate the equivalent circuit parameter based on the measurement result on page 249 Press the Display key to display the Display menu Press the more 1 2 key to display the second page of the Display menu Press the EQUIV CKT key to display the Equivalent Circuit Analysis menu Press the CKT on OFF key to turn on the equivalent circuit diagram indication function The equivalent circuit diagram instead of the measurement trace is shown on the screen This will enable you to check the equivalent circuit to be selected in the next step It should be noted that equivalent circuit analysis is enabled without having to turn on this display Press the SELECT CIRCUIT key to display the Equivalent Circuit Select menu Select the equivalent circuit acc
246. creen Graphic Save on page 285 Save the setting state calibration data and memory array State Save The following steps are used to save the setting state calibration data user calibration data and graphic compensation data and memory array memory data before being sent to the memory trace through measurement parameter conversion except for the Agilent 4294A adapter setup data Step 1 Press the Save key to display the save menu Step 2 Press the STORE DEV key to display the storage device menu Step 3 Select the Agilent 4294A storage device Storage device Key operation Floppy disk drive FLOPPY Volatile memory disk MEMORY Chapter 8 271 NOTE Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data Storage device Key operation Non volatile memory disk flash memory FLASH MEMORY When using the floppy disk drive make sure a disk is first inserted in the drive If the floppy disk is set to Write Protect the data cannot be saved Set the disk to Write Enable before using it The storage device selection using System IBASIC more 1 3 MASS STORE is applicable when using the storage devices of the Agilent 4294A through the HP Instrument BASIC function It is different from the storage device selection using the STORE DEV key However the storage devices themselves are the same Press the return key to return to the
247. creen and allows you to change the current setting with the Entry block keys for example Bw Avg AVERATING FACTOR Softkey label for Pressing the corresponding softkey immediately executes executing a function the associated function for example Marker MKR START NOTE 1 These softkey labels are displayed without any special symbol Some softkey labels combine two or more of the functions shown in Table 3 1 For example the EDIT LIST key which can be accessed through the keystroke sequence Sweep EDIT LIST both turns on sweep list edit mode and displays a softkey sub menu for editing the list Some of the softkey labels currently displayed may not be available depending on the current context such softkey labels are dimmed by displaying them at a lower contrast than the other labels When you choose the appropriate context by using another key those softkey labels will revert to the normal contrast and become available 6 Sweep Parameter Reading Fields These fields show the sweep parameter values that correspond to the current marker position for Traces A and B 7 Marker Status Fields These fields provide textual representation of the current status of the marker facility Marker couple mode Cpl Indicates that the marker facility is currently in couple mode In this mode changes to Traces A and B are synchronized Marker search track mode Max Indicates that the marker facili
248. ction Incoming Inspection To avoid hazardous electrical shock do not turn on the Agilent 4294A if there are signs of shipping damage to any portion of the outer enclosure for example covers panel or display Check the shipping container for damage If the shipping container or cushioning material is damaged it should be kept until the contents of the shipment have been checked for completeness and the Agilent 4294A has been checked mechanically and electrically The contents of the shipment should be as listed in Table 1 1 If the contents are incomplete there is any mechanical damage or defect or the analyzer s power on self test fails contact the nearest Agilent Technologies office If the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of unusual stress notify the carrier as well as the Agilent Technologies office Save the shipping materials for the carrier s inspection Contents of the Agilent 4294A package Agilent product part Description Quantity number 4294A 4294A Precision Impedance Analyzer 1 04294 900x0 Operation Manual this guide 1 04294 900x 1 Programming Manual 1 E2083 90005 HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook 1 04294 901x0 Service Manual 1 04294 180x0 Sample Program Disk 3 5 inch floppy disk 1 04294 61001 100 Q resistor for adapter setup 1 C3757 60401 Mini DIN keyboard 1 8120 4753 Power Cable 1 1250 1859 BNC Adapter 1 5062 3991 Handle K
249. ctivate Trace B in the former case and the trace whose axis format is polar in the latter case Press the Format key to display the Format menu Press the PHASE UNIT key to select your desired phase unit pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey Labels Phase unit PHASE UNIT DEG Degrees PHASE UNIT RAD Radian Chapter 7 197 Step 1 NOTE Step 2 Step 3 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Displaying Phase Values without Wrapping at 180 Displaying Phase Values without Wrapping at 180 The Agilent 4294A provides a feature that allows you to display phase values without wrapping them at 180 or 180 This feature called expanded phase is useful when measured phase values are in a continuous increase or decrease and some of them exceed 180 or 180 To set up the expanded phase feature follow these steps Activate the trace for which you want to use the expanded phase feature To activate Press Trace A A Trace B B To expand the phase your parameter must be either IZl 0 IYI 0 or COMPLEX Z Y You should activate Trace B in the former case and the trace whose axis format is polar in the latter case Press the Format key to display the Format menu Press the EXP PHASE on OFF or EXP PHASE ON off key to turn on or off the expanded phase feature pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey Labels Description EXP PHASE ON off Indicates tha
250. current setting This method N A immediately updates the parameter value without requiring you to press a unit key When working with particular configuration items you can also use the rotary knob to move the cursor horizontally Wy step key This key allows you to decrementally change the current setting This method N A immediately updates the parameter value without requiring you to press a unit key A step key This key allows you to incrementally change the current setting This method N A immediately updates the parameter value without requiring you to press a unit key Entry Off Switches the instrument from entry mode to normal operation mode with the N A name and current setting of the parameter no longer shown in the upper left area of the LCD display An error message previously shown on the display also disappears Appendix B 359 Key Definitions Functions of hardkeys Table B 6 ENTRY block key keys to suffix the value with the specific unit The entered value does not take effect until you press a unit key Each unit key except the x1 key represents two different units identified by their respective initial letters Which unit to use is automatically determined based on the selected parameter Use the x1 key to enter a value that does not take a specific unit Hardkey Function GPIB command Back Space Moves the cursor one space back and deletes the character to th
251. d active trace A or B selects between placing the marker on the data trace and displaying its value DATA or placing the marker on the memory trace and displaying its value MEMORY MKRO DATAIMEMO MKR COUPLE ON off Toggles on and off the marker couple function If the marker couple function is on the movement of the marker on the inactive trace becomes interlocked with the movement of the marker on the selected active trace A or B If the marker couple function is off the marker on the inactive trace moves independently of the marker on the selected active trace A or B This configuration is commonly applied to traces A and B MKRCOUP ONIOFF MKR For the selected active trace A or B toggles the marker movement mode between the interpolation mode CONT and the non interpolation mode DISCRETE In the non interpolation mode the markers can read out the values of only actual measurement points on the trace On the other hand in the interpolation mode interpolation calculation between measurement points is performed so that markers can read out values of any position on the trace MKRMOV CONTIDISC AMODE MENU gt Displays Table B 61 Delta marker Delta MKR menu on page 391 N A Table B 59 Key operation Sub marker configuration Set SMKR menu Marker SUB MKR Softkey Function GPIB command 1 OFF Pressing this key in the off stat
252. d by mistake as MEAS amp IRIM Invalid character data There are invalid characters in a character data element or the received parameter is not valid For example although the correct program message is MEAS LSR a wrong program message MEAS LSD is received Invalid character in number An invalid character for the data type of the syntax analysis target is received For example alphabetical characters exist in a decimal value or 9 exits in octal data INVALID DATE You attempt to specify the date of the built in clock with the DATE key or the SETCDATE command but the date is out of range and as a result the setting you attempt to execute becomes invalid The available range is 1900 to 2099 for year 1 to 12 for month and 1 to 31 for day Also you cannot specify a date that does not actually exist Be sure to specify correct date data Invalid expression The equation data element is invalid Refer to IEEE488 2 7 7 7 2 For example parentheses are not paired or a character violates the standard INVALID FILE NAME When the recall command RECD lt string gt or the re save command RESAVD lt string gt is executed a string that indicates a file name is not followed by a necessary extension and as a result the command is ignored Add a required extension and then perform recall or re save This message occurs for example when you attempt to execute the recall or re save command without adding a
253. d in the Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen Upon completion of measurement the OPEN on OFF softkey label changes to OPEN ON off indicating that the OPEN compensation function is turned on Perform Fixture Compensation for the Short Circuit State Remove the short bar a metal plate for SHORT compensation from the upper part of the Agilent 16047E by loosing the screws and then fit the short bar between the HIGH and LOW terminals of the Agilent 16047E Secure the short bar with the two electrode fastening screws Figure 2 3 on page 36 Chapter 2 35 Learning Operation Basics Fixture Compensation Figure 2 3 Setting Up the Test Circuit for SHORT Compensation Shorting bar Guard terminal 16047e0e0301 Step 2 Press the SHORT key to measure the SHORT compensation data While the instrument is measuring the compensation data a message WAIT MEASURING STANDARD is displayed in the Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen Upon completion of measurement the SHORT on OFF softkey label changes to SHORT ON off indicating that the SHORT compensation function is turned on Step 3 Remove the short bar from the Agilent 16047E s test electrodes NOTE The Agilent 4294A provides three fixture compensation functions OPEN SHORT and LOAD You can turn on off each of these compensation functions individually and use them in any combination to perform the fixture compensation process In ty
254. d value is selected using the FIXED VALUE key in step 4 the fixed value measurement parameter value to define the current cutoff point is displayed in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the fixed value of the cutoff point e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 Jand and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value To return to the search menu after defining the cutoff point press the return key Setting the delta marker in the trace bandwidth analysis The definition of each parameter obtained in the trace bandwidth analysis varies depending on the delta marker mode selected at the time Before executing the trace bandwidth analysis select the delta marker mode If you use the fixed delta marker mode set the delta marker position also Activate the trace for which you want to perform the trace bandwidth analysis Active Trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Press the Marker key to display the Marker menu Press the AMODE MENU key to display the Delta Marker menu Chapter 8 239 Step 4 NOTE Step 5 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Analysis and Processing of Result Analyze trace bandwidth Select the delta marker
255. dapter Selection and Calibration Calibration V required blank not required Device Connection Accessory Adapter Selection User Port Extension Fixture Calibration Compensation Compensation A Connect a direct 16034E No adapter y connection type test 16034G NONE fixture to the 16034H four terminal pair port 16044A of the 4294A and 16047A connect the device to 16047C the fixture 16047D 16047E 16065A 16089A 16089B 16089C 16089D 16089E 16314A B Extend the 16048G and test fixture Four terminal V four terminal pair port 16048G and 16452A pair 1 meter of the 4294A with a 16334A 4TP 1M 1 meter long 16451B four terminal pair configuration and connect the device C Extend the 16048H and test fixture Four terminal V four terminal pair port 16048H and 16452A pair 2 meters of the 4294A with a 4TP 2M 2 meter long four terminal pair configuration and connect the device D Connect the 42942A and 16092A 42942A V V 42942A directly tothe 42942A and 16093A Terminal perform when four terminal pair port 42942A and 16093B Adapter user defined of the 4294A connect 42942A and 16191A 7mm calibration kit is a dedicated test fixture 42942A and 16192A 42942A used to the 7 mm port and then connect the device to the fixture contacts 42942A and 16193A 42942A and 16454A 130 Chapter 6 Calibration Selecting Appropriate Calibration Method Table
256. dard used for fixture compensation preset state 0 F Equivalent series resistance value R of SHORT standard used for fixture compensation preset state 0 Q Equivalent series inductance value L of SHORT standard used for fixture compensation preset state 0 H Equivalent series resistance value R of LOAD standard used for fixture compensation preset state 50 Q Equivalent series inductance value L of LOAD standard used for fixture compensation preset state 0 H OPEN CONDUCT G OPEN CAP C SHORT RESIST R SHORT INDUCT L LOAD RESIST R LOAD INDUCT L The current value of the compensation data definition is displayed in the setting parameter area of the LCD s upper left side Step 5 Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify Chapter 6 153 Calibration Fixture Compensation the compensation data definition e Enter the desired value with the numerical keys 0 through 9 and then press one of the unit keys G n M w k u or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys T VJ to set the desired value NOTE When entering the capacitance value in the compensation data definition the fF unit is automatically added at the end of the value you enter with the unit keys For example if you enter a value with the numeric keys and then press the x1 key the fF unit is added to
257. data cannot be obtained and correct device measurement cannot be performed after the adapter setup More than 30 minutes warm up time is required after turning on the Agilent 4294A Make the correct adapter selection for the 16334A in accordance with the Adapter Selection on page 68 After performing Step 4 of the Adapter Selection on page 68 press the SETUP key to display the Adapter Setup Menu Put the device contacts of the 16334A into the OPEN condition Refer to the operation manual of the 16334A for instructions on switching to the OPEN condition Press the PHASE COMP key to start the phase compensation data measurement The traces on the LCD display do not change during the phase compensation data measurement When the phase compensation data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to PHASE COMP DONE Connect a 100 Q LOAD device to the 16334A Press the LOAD key to start the load data measurement When the load data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to LOAD DONE Press the done key to start calculating the adapter setup data from the measured phase compensation and load data The adapter setup data is automatically saved to the EEPROM nonvolatile memory in the Agilent 4294A Press the cancel key to cancel the adapter setup process If the adapter setup process is canceled the previously obtained data is saved as the available adapter setup data Adapter Setup Proc
258. details of the error This code simply indicates the occurrence of a Query error that is defined in TEEF488 2 11 5 1 1 7 and 6 3 Query INTERRPUTED The current status causes an INTERRUPTED Query error Refer to IEEE488 1 6 3 2 3 This error occurs for example when after Query data byte DAB or GET is received before the response has been sent completely Query UNTERMINATED The current status causes an UNTERMINATED Query error Refer to TEEE488 2 6 3 2 This error occurs for example when the 4294A is specified as a talker and an incomplete program message is received Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response In a certain program message after a Query that requests an ambiguous response is executed another Query is received Refer to IEEE488 2 6 5 7 5 7 Queue overflow The queue contains a certain code instead of the code that caused this error This code indicates that an error has occurred due to insufficient space in the queue but it has not been recorded R RECALL ERROR INSTR STATE PRESET Because an error occurred while reading out a file the Agilent 4294A is being preset This 440 Appendix C 134 110 90 102 101 330 221 150 158 130 Error messages REDUCE OSC LEVEL error occurs for example when data in a file to be read out is destroyed or when an extension for a file name does not match with the contents of the file REDUCE OSC LEVEL The oscillator lev
259. device contacts of the test fixture in place of steps 2 and 3 in accordance with Port Extension Compensation on page 150 142 Chapter 6 Figure 6 6 Step 1 Calibration F Calibration When a Probe Adapter is Connected to the 42941A F Calibration When a Probe Adapter is Connected to the 42941A Perform the following calibration when a probe adapter supplied with the 42941A Impedance Probe is directly connected to the 3 5 mm port of the 42941A which is connected to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A and a device is connected to the probe adapter Calibration When a Probe Adapter is Connected to the 42941A Pee nnan oom ooon mmoga acina TA SOOO Bao Sos s5e 42941A Impedance Probe Epi User Calibration When user defined Calibration Kit is used Probe Adapter Fixture Compensation Device 4294a0e083 This calibration procedure is applied when the following probe adapters are connected to the 3 5 mm port of the 42941A see the operation manual of the 42941A for details of probe adapters e Pin Probe with ground electrode or ground lead e BNC m Adapter e BNC m Adapter with alligator clip leads Make sure that the adapter selection is set to
260. directory and displays the names of the files and directories under it is attached to the end of the directory name displayed as a softkey label Press the softkey corresponding to the copy source file The Copy Destination Filename menu is displayed At this time the filename input line contains the same filename as the copy source file as the temporary copy destination filename In of the DEST DEV key s softkey label the currently selected copy destination storage device is displayed Softkey label Selected storage device DEST DEV FLOPPY Floppy disk drive DEST DEV MEMORY Volatile memory disk DEST DEV FLASH Nonvolatile memory disk flash memory To save the copy destination file on the currently selected storage device proceed to Step 11 Chapter 9 307 Table 9 14 Step 10 NOTE Step 11 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Managing Files To change the currently selected copy destination storage device press the DEST DEV key to display the Copy Destination Device menu Select the storage device in which you want to save the copy destination file Storage device Key operation Floppy disk drive FLOPPY Volatile memory disk MEMORY Nonvolatile memory disk flash memory FLASH MEMORY Each of the following menus allows you to independently select a storage device However for each type of device there is only a single device used commonly for all of the menu
261. displayed in the upper left area of the screen In this case contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office or the company from which you purchased this instrument For more information on the self test self diagnostic function refer to Performing Self Diagnosis of the Agilent 4294A on page 320 66 Chapter 4 Adapter Setting Preparation of Measurement Accessories Adapter Setting You must ensure that the adapter setting is properly set after you finish connecting accessories to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A and before you start measurement If required change it to the correct adapter setting The adapter setting includes adapter selection and the data acquisition process which is called adapter setup Table 4 2 lists the device connections and corresponding adapter settings Table 4 2 Device Connections and Adapter Settings Adapter Setup data measurement i Adapter v required blank not required Device Connection Accessory Selection Phase OPEN SHORT LOAD A Connect a direct 16034E No Adapter NONE connection type test fixture 16034G to the four terminal pair port 16034H of the Agilent 4294A and 16044A connect the device to the 16047A fixture contacts 16047C 16047D 16047E 16065A 16089A 16089B 16089C 16089D 16089E 16314A B Extend the four terminal 16048G and test fixture Four terminal pair V V pair port of the Agilent 16048G and
262. dkeys This section describes the function and corresponding GPIB command for each hardkey Table B 1 ACTIVE TRACE key Hardkey Function GPIB command A Trace A is selected as the active trace Changes the configurations to trace A for TRAC A example when IZI are selected as measurement parameters the trace of IZ is selected This selection is available only for functions where trace A and trace B can be set independently When trace A is selected the LED to the left of the key is lit B Trace B is selected as the active trace Changes the configurations to trace B for TRAC B example when IZI are selected as measurement parameters the trace of 0 is selected This selection is available only for functions where trace A and trace B can be set independently When trace B is selected the LED to the right of the key is lit Table B 2 MEASUREMENT block Hardkey Function GPIB command Meas Displays Table B 7 Measurement parameter Measurement menu 1 3 on N A page 361 Format Displays Table B 11 Format Format menu 1 on page 363 N A Display Displays Table B 13 Display Display menu 1 2 on page 364 N A Scale Ref Displays Table B 27 Scale reference Scale Ref menu 1 1 2 on page 371 N A Bw Avg Displays Table B 32 Measurement bandwidth averaging Bw Average menu N A on page 374 Cal Displays
263. e MODE C CURR Current source constant current mode 2 Setting fixed dc bias level When the sweep parameter is not dc bias select the dc bias mode and then follow the steps below to set dc bias level Follow the steps shown in Setting Sweep Range on page 89 to set the sweep range when the sweep parameter is dc bias Press the VOLTAGE LEVEL key if voltage source is selected for dc bias mode or the CURRENT LEVEL key if current source is selected This will display the current setting for the dc voltage or the current bias level for the segment in the parameter settings located in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the dc voltage or current bias level Chapter 5 107 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Setting Measurement Conditions Setting and Applying dc Bias e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press the unit key G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value 3 Setting limits for dc voltage When constant voltage or current is selected for the dc bias mode follow the steps below to set limit values for the voltage upper and lower limits in order to protect the DUT being measured Press the MAX LIMIT VOLTAGE key This will display the current setting for
264. e LOW output mode HIGH 30 Port D status TTL level input mode LOW output mode HIGH 31 Write strobe signal TTL level active low pulse output width 10s typical 32 5V pullup 33 SWEEP END signal TTL level active low pulse output width 20s typical 34 5V 5V 100mA MAX 35 PASS FAIL signal TTL level PASS HIGH FAIL LOW latch output 36 PASS FAIL write strobe signal TTL level active low pulse output width 10s typical LAN Interface Standard conformity 10 Base T Ethertwist RJ45 connector Protocol TCP IP Supported applications Telnet FTP FTP with automatic execution Chapter 10 347 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics General Characteristics General Characteristics External Reference Input Frequency 10 MHz 10 ppm typical Level 5 dBm to 5 dBm typical Input impedance 50 Q nominal Connector type BNC female Internal Reference Output Frequency 10 MHz nominal Level 0 dBm typical Output impedance 50 Q nominal Connector type BNC female High Stability Frequency Reference Output Option 1D5 Frequency 10 MHz nominal Level 0 dBm typical Output impedance 50 Q nominal Connector type BNC female External Trigger Input Level TTL Pulse width Tp 2 2 Us typical see Figure 10 9 for t
265. e B 78 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the System key IBASIC edit Editor menu System IBASIC Edit Softkey Function GPIB command OUTPUT Hp4294 Inserts OUTPUT Hp4294 TO 800 at the current cursor position N A ENTER Hp4294 Inserts ASSIGN Hp4294 TO 800 at the current cursor position N A END Inserts END at the current cursor position N A GOTO LINE Enters ENTER LINE NUMBER LABEL in the HP Instrument BASIC command N A line From here use the external keyboard to enter a line number or its defined label name and press the Enter key The cursor moves to the specified line RECALL LINE Restores the line last deleted N A done Exits the program edit mode and returns to Table B 75 HP Instrument BASIC N A IBASIC menu 1 3 on page 402 The display mode specified in Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 is restored on the screen Table B 79 IBASIC mass storage Mass Storage menu Key operation System IBASIC more 1 3 MASS STORE 403 Softkey Function GPIB command FLOPPY Selects the flexible disk drive as the HP Instrument BASIC mass storage N A MEMORY Selects the volatile memory disk as the HP Instrument BASIC mass storage N A FLASH MEMORY Selects the nonvolatile memory disk flash memory as the HP Instrument N A BASIC mass storage CHANGE DIRECTORY E
266. e LCD and labeled V IDC VDC or IDC This field is updated each time a measuring point is reached during the dc bias sweep If your sweep parameter is the frequency or signal source level rather than the dc bias level the de Voltage Current Bias Monitor field only indicates the monitored dc bias level voltage or amperage for the first measuring point In this case therefore the field is updated each time a new sweep cycle is started Start applying dc bias For more information refer to Setting and Applying dc Bias on page 107 Press the Display key to display the Display menu Press the BIAS MON key to display the Bias Monitor menu To set up dc bias level monitoring press one of the following keys To Press Turn off dc bias level monitoring OFF Monitor the dc bias voltage level VOLT Monitor the dc bias current level CURRENT Using the test dc bias level monitor feature in conjunction with manual sweep allows you to both determine the characteristic value and monitor the dc bias level at your desired measuring point In manual sweep mode you can monitor on a real time basis the dc bias level at any measuring point on the trace whether or not your sweep parameter is the dc bias level because the Agilent 4294A finishes a sweep cycle when the specified measuring point is reached For more information on manual sweep refer to Manual Sweep Measurement at a Specified Point on page 100 Once y
267. e Memes Reese lhdu pie hese eae sary eel sonny 107 2 Settings fixed de pias level I naran tee eating angel redone aa pedalek eesbon 107 3 Setting limits for dc voltages seega a rnanan E NEEE ERRE EER A E EAERI Na 108 4 Setting de bias range to I MA senie tere ee EE E bee ee beer ERRERA 108 5 Toming debras ON or OFF eee aea eha see e eee ene ae hee he hese bs Rees ee bes 109 6 Optimizing de bias ranges ose dees ee ede ede eee eel bot pawnd patna E T 109 Selecting a Method to Start Measurement Trigger Source 0 0 0 eee eee eee 111 Selecting Sweep Trigger Measurement Point Trigger 0 0 0 eee eee eee 112 Selecting Polarity of External Trigger Input Signal 0 eee ee eee 113 Specifying Sweep Times and Stopping Sweep 1 0 0 0 eee cence eee 114 SINELE SWEEPER EEE te Fath tet ae eh Lee Ne ek Oe he OE ERG bee Beek a apts Boden dod wie BE 114 Sweep by specified times e ccdtqeca tue pe ee sda eeu wee ENA EA EEE E iE we ed 114 Sweep with unlimited times continuous sweep 2 0 2 0 cece cee eee 115 SLOPPINE SWEEP sss tbe ai See el hawt dolar debe ao wee rede edits iodine ba eee 115 Sweeping Multiple Sweep Ranges with Different Conditions in a Single Action List Sweep 116 Preparing list sweep table s ccc ocd pho ee hea bee ale E a eta hae Behar 118 Selecting the list sweep as the sweep type 0 0 eee eect eee tenes 124 11 Contents Setting the Horizontal Axis of the Graph for the Li
268. e STORE DEV key To store the power as a default setting file on a floppy disk store the file in the nonvolatile memory flash memory once Then copy it onto the floppy disk by using the file utility menu displayed by Save FILE UTILITIES and key operations If the AUTOREC STA file is present on both the floppy disk and the nonvolatile memory disk when the power is turned on only the AUTOREC STA file of the floppy disk is read If you only store the AUTOREC STA file on the nonvolatile memory disk the file will not be read when the power is turned on Recall the saved file You can use the following steps to recall the data stored in the Agilent 4294A storage device according to Save the setting state calibration data and memory array State Save on page 271 and Save the calibration data and trace data Data Save on page 273 Press the Recall key This reads the pre selected contents of the storage device and 288 Chapier 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data displays the Recall menu Step 2 Press the STORE DEV key to display the Storage Device menu Step 3 Select the storage device that contains the file to be recalled Storage device Key operation Floppy disk drive FLOPPY Volatile memory disk MEMORY Non volatile memory disk flash memory FLASH MEMORY NOTE When using the floppy disk drive make sure the disk is first inserted in the drive The st
269. e and current levels A 27 049 2 B B S PMP ll e E E E E E E Naveen euess Hid tirer essu EE E bee Op 3 mon AC I 11497225 mA VAC 615 609 mvolt IAC 687 35 uA VIBE CENTER 168 MHz OSC 566 m volt SPAN 26 kHz 4294a0j042 192 Chapter 7 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Monitoring the dc Bias Level Monitoring the dc Bias Level You can set a constant dc bias level through the keystroke sequence Source BIAS MENU VOLTAGE LEVEL or CURRENT LEVEL and also set the dc bias level for each measuring point within the range of the dc bias level sweep by pressing the Start Stop Center and Span keys All these settings are related to the output level of the Agilent 4294A s internal dc bias power source In most cases however the dc bias level actually applied to a DUT differs from the setting applied to the dc bias source because some electrical loss occurs between each test terminal and the DUT The Agilent 4294A provides a feature that allows you to monitor either the voltage or amperage value of the dc bias actually applied to the DUT This feature is called the dc bias level monitor Monitoring the dc Bias Level on a Real time Basis You can monitor the dc bias level either voltage or amperage on a real time basis through the de Voltage Current Bias Monitor field which is located in the lower part of th
270. e current setting for the segment s point averaging in the parameter settings located in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the point averaging e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press the x1 key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value The setting above will add a new value for the point averaging in the cell located in the segment row and the point averaging column AVG of the list sweep table in editing mode When editing of the segment is finished press the done key to save the edited segment Pressing this key also returns you to the list sweep menu If you want to abort editing of the segment and restore the original state before entering the edit mode press the cancel key With the segment number for the edited segment selected gt is displayed to the left of the segment number of the SEG line in the list sweep table press the PEN key The number of the pen selected to draw the trace of the segment is displayed in the Setting Parameter 122 Chapter5 Step 29 Step 30 NOTE Setting Measurement Conditions Sweeping Multiple Sweep Ranges with Different Conditions in a Single Action List Sweep Value area in the upper left part of the screen Use one of the following methods with the keys in
271. e eee 247 Turing off the sub markers nerse Sake eee bee feed Ree bp hea Res DEEE Rede Ge 247 Turning off the delta marker 1 2 eee een nee beeen 247 Turning off all main sub delta markers at one time 6 0 0 cece eee eee 248 Calculate the equivalent circuit parameter and simulate the frequency characteristics 249 Calculate the equivalent circuit parameter based on the measurement result 249 Contents Simulate the frequency characteristics based on the equivalent circuit parameter 252 Calculating the mean value standard deviation and peak to peak of the trace 254 Set a limit to the trace and make pass fail evaluation 0 0 0 c cece eee eee eee 256 set the Limit les i 8 sec th irie i erie bey suse edd beg iaa bbe ste tot e ai td dey 256 Conduct the limit line test i454 epa ni eos aoe eae Ra Ae ag hha ee es 262 Move the limit line in vertical and horizontal directions on the screen 0 000 264 Specify partial search range iis scese ce eae Ra E GASES SEE eee ee nee eee 267 When sweep type is other than list sweep 2 2 ee eee een eee 267 When the sweep type is list sweep 2 0 ccc eee enn eee 269 Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data 0 0 eee eee ee 270 Agilent 4294A internal data flow 0 0 eee eect eee eee 270 Save the setting state calibration data and memory array State Save
272. e eee eee ee eee 376 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Sweep key 0 0 00 eee eee eee eee 381 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Source key 0 0 00 eee eee eee eee ee 386 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Trigger key 0 0 0 eee eee eee 388 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Marker key 2 0 0 cece eee eee ee eee 390 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Marker key 20 0 0 eee eee eee 393 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Search key 0 0 00 eee eee eee eee 395 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Utility key 0 ee eee eee 400 Softkeys displayed by pressing the System key 0 0 0 eee 402 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Local key 0 00 cee eee eee 413 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Copy key 0 0 eee eee 415 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Save key 0 0 eee eee ee eee 419 Softkeys displayed by pressing the Recall key 0 0 0 cee eee ee eee 425 C Error messages 16 Error Messages alphabetical order 0 0 ee eet e eens 428 Installation This chapter contains installation and setup instructions for the Agilent 4294A Precision Impedance Analyzer For information on connecting test accessories such as a test fixture adapter probe or measurement cable refer to Chapter 4 Preparation of Measurement Accessories 17 WARNING Table 1 1 Installation Incoming Inspe
273. e external trigger input terminal on the rear panel POS means positive polarity and triggers are generated by detecting the rise of the TTL signal NEG means negative polarity and triggers are generated by detecting the fall of the TTL signal TRGP POSIMEG 388 Appendix B Table B 57 Key operation Trigger source Trig source menu Trigger SOURCE Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Trigger key Softkey Function GPIB command return Returns to Table B 56 Trigger Trigger menu on page 388 N A Appendix B 389 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Marker key Softkeys displayed by pressing the Marker key Table B 58 Key operation Marker Marker menu Marker Softkey Function GPIB command MKR ON off Toggles on and off all the markers displayed on the screen The markers include MKR ONIOFF main marker marker number 0 sub markers marker number 1 7 and delta marker A Even if you turn off the markers using this key their states at the on status are stored Therefore when you turn them on again their states at the previous on status are restored SUB MKR gt Displays Table B 59 Sub marker configuration Set SMKR menu on page N A 390 CLEAR SUB MKR gt Displays Table B 60 Sub marker deletion Clear SMKR menu on page 391 N A MKR ON For the selecte
274. e for each DUT that is to define limit lines immediately suitable for the DUT MKRAMPO return Returns to Table B 82 Limit test Limit Test menu on page 406 N A Table B 89 Key operation Internal clock Clock menu System CLOCK Softkey Function GPIB command TIME gt Displays Table B 90 Time configuration Set Time menu on page 411 SETCTIME lt hour gt lt minute gt lt seco nd gt DATE gt Displays Table B 91 Date configuration Set Date menu on page 411 SETCDATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt DATE MODE Toggles the date display format between 2 digit number representing month 2 digit number representing day 2 digit number representing year MM DD YY and 2 digit number representing day 2 digit number representing month 2 digit number representing year DD MM Y Y This display format is applied only to time stamps when outputting to a printer TIME on OFF key in Table B 100 Copy configuration Copy Setup menu 2 2 on page 416 DMODE MDYIDMY return Returns to Table B 74 System System menu on page 402 N A 410 Appendix B Table B 90 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the System key Time configuration Set Time menu System CLOCK TIME Softkey Function GPIB command HOUR Sets the time hour
275. e from the measurement data blank Indicates that the currently displayed data trace shows the exact measurement data If 0 appears below D M or D M the data trace represents the result of performing both operations on the measurement data Chapter 3 59 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display items Displayed on the LCD Service mode status Svc Indicates that the instrument is in service mode which is intended for servicing use only The accuracy of data measured in this mode is not guaranteed For more information refer to the Service Manual blank Indicates that the instrument is ready for normal measurement use Sweep trigger status Hld Indicates that the sweep function is in Hold status i e not enabled To enable the sweep function you must select one of the available sweep modes single cycle sweep group sweep or continuous sweep Indicates that the instrument is performing a sweep cycle This indicator appears at the measurement point on the trace 1 5 seconds after the start of a sweep cycle ext Indicates that the instrument is waiting for an external signal that triggers the start of measurement This indicator appears after you have used the keystroke sequence Trigger SOURCE EXTERNAL to specify that the trigger signal be input from an external trigger source via the external trigger input man Indicates that the instrument is in manual trigger mode in which you can manuall
276. e is adequate clearance of at least 180 mm behind the unit and 60 mm at each side Instructions for Cleaning To prevent electrical shock disconnect the Agilent 4294A s power cable from the power outlet before cleaning To clean the exterior of the Agilent 4294A gently wipe the surfaces with a dry cloth or a soft cloth that is soaked with water and wrung tightly Do not attempt to clean the 4294A internally 28 Chapter 1 Learning Operation Basics This chapter guides you through a tour of the basic measurement functions of the Agilent 4294A Precision Impedance Analyzer If you are new to the Agilent 4294A this tutorial should help you get familiar with the instrument 29 Learning Operation Basics Required Equipment ESSE Required Equipment To perform all of the steps in this tour you must have the following equipment e Agilent 4294A Precision Impedance Analyzer 1 unit e 16047E Text Fixture for Lead Components 1 piece e DUT Capacitor with lead wires having self resonance frequency of 100 MHz or lower such as a 0 1 UF ceramic capacitor 1 piece Figure 2 1 Required Equipment oe ngam PJ SC ua Honan Py P E JE HINO BOO g poagn
277. e is constant voltage or current The setting for these values is disabled when the dc bias mode is set to non constant voltage or current mode 4 Setting dc bias range to 1 mA Set the dc bias range before turning the dc bias ON The dc bias range is set to optimize the dc current given to the impedance measurement circuit This setting affects the accuracy of impedance measurement regardless of which dc bias mode is selected or whether dc bias is turned ON or OFF Normally maximum accuracy can be obtained by setting the dc bias 108 Chapter5 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 1 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting and Applying dc Bias range as narrow as possible without causing the error message DCBIAS OVERLOAD error number 137 to appear An initial dc bias range of 1 mA is recommended for the first measurement when dc bias is applied When you do not apply dc bias always set the dc bias range to 1 mA which is the preset setting Keeping this setting is especially important when you run through the sequence of applying dc bias turning off dc bias and then performing a measurement Press the MEAS RANGE key to display the dc bias range menu Press the 1mA key to select 1 mA as the dc bias range preset state is 1 mA Press the return key to return to the dc bias menu Always set the dc bias range to 1 mA when you measure without applying dc bias 5 Turning dc bi
278. e is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value The 2nd part of the subnet mask can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 255 Press the 3rd key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the 3rd part of the subnet mask current set value is displayed Below it the entire currently set subnet mask is displayed in a smaller size Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the 3rd part of the subnet mask e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value The 3rd part of the subnet mask can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 255 Press the 4th key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the 4th part of the subnet mask current set value is displayed Below it the entire currently set subnet mask is displayed in a smaller size Chapter 9 317 Step 10 Step 11 NOTE Step 12 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Setting Using Control and Management Functions Setting Checking the LAN Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the 4th part of the subnet mask e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O unt
279. e left of the N A cursor If you make a mistake in entering a value through the numeric keys you can use this key to correct your entry 0 to 9 numeric Use these keys to enter each numeral that makes up your entry Press a unit key N A key to put your entered value into effect G n M u k m x1 unit After entering your desired value through numeric keys press one of these unit N A 360 Appendix B Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Meas key Softkeys displayed by pressing the Meas key Table B 7 Measurement parameter Measurement menu 1 3 Key operation Meas Softkey Function GPIB command IZI Selects impedance absolute value and impedance phase as measurement MEAS IMPH l parameters The 1st parameter on the softkey label in this case IZI is assigned to trace A the 2nd parameter in this case 0 to trace B This system of trace assignent is applicable to other measurement parameters R X Selects series resistance and reactance as measurement parameters MEAS IRIM Ls Rs Selects series inductance and series resistance as measurement parameters MEAS LSR Ls Q Selects series inductance and Q factor quality factor as measurement MEAS LSQ parameters Cs Rs Selects series capacitance and series resistance as measurement parameters MEAS CSR Cs Q Selects series capacitance and Q factor quality factor as measurement MEAS CSQ par
280. e screen Use keys or the rotary knob in the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the number of points e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value The number of sweep points can be set to any integer from 2 to 801 When list is selected as a sweep type list sweep use a list sweep table to set the number of points Setting the number of points is applied commonly to traces A and B Number of points 51 A IZ B z TOP SCALE 1 Mo BOTTOM Za 36 div REF a Hid WAC IAC VFIBC START 48 Hz OSC S66 mVolt STOP 110 MHz 4294a0j016 Chapter 5 97 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting Number of Points NOP Figure 5 13 Number of points 801 A Z TOP 1 Ma BOTTOM 2a B Gz SCALE 36 fdiv REF 8 VAC IAC VDL START 48 Hz OSC S66 mvolt STOP 118 MHz 4294a0j017 98 Chapter 5 ee Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Setting Measurement Conditions Selecting Sweep Direction Selecting Sweep Direction DUT can be measured in the desired sweep direction when its characteristics has hysteresis with the sweep parameter Press the Sweep key to display the sweep menu Press the DIRECTION key to select the desired sweep direction pressing the key toggles the directio
281. e setting of the phase q is not active as a measurement parameter you attempt to execute a command to set the phase unit PHAU DEG or PHAU RAD or a command to set the phase expansion display EXPP ON or EXPP OFF and as a result the command is ignored The active status of the phase 0 setting means IZI 8 or IYI O is selected as a measurement parameter and trace B is active e COMPLEX Z Y is selected as a measurement parameter and the display format is POLAR polar coordinates display format for the selected active trace Before executing a command to set the phase unit or a command to set the phase expansion display perform one of the above settings Too many digits The number of digits of the mantissa of the decimal value data element exceeds 255 except when there are preceding Os Refer to IEEE 488 27 7 2 4 1 TOO MANY SEGMENTS You attempt to add segments to the limit line table at a quantity that exceeds the maximum number 18 The number of segments you can set in the limit line table is up to 18 TOO MANY SEGMENTS OR POINTS During the editing of the list sweep table you attempt to set a value that exceed the maximum number of segments 18 the maximum number of points per segment 201 or the maximum number of total points in all segments 801 Set the number of segments or the number of points to a value that does not exceed the maximum value TOO MUCH DATA When data is sent from the controller to the Agi
282. e settings Chapter 3 45 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display Front Panel Bw Avg key Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you configure the bandwidth and averaging settings Cal key Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you set up the calibration feature 3 STIMULUS Block This block provides keys for configuring the test signal parameters Sweep key Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you configure the sweep settings for the test signals Source key Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you configure the frequency CW frequency test signal level and dc bias conditions When you are setting a sweep parameter you can use the Start Stop Center and Span keys to set the sweep range Trigger key Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you set up the trigger system Start key Lets you specify the value at which to start the sweep Stop key Lets you specify the value at which to stop finish the sweep Center key Lets you specify the sweep center value Span key Lets you specify the sweep span value 4 ENTRY Block Provides keys for entering numeric values and text strings To configure a parameter first press the hardkey or softkey associated with the parameter to put the instrument into entry mode in which it can accept your entry with the name and current value of the parameter shown in the upper left area of the LCD display and then use these keys to enter the de
283. e to comply with these precautions or with specific WARNINGS elsewhere in this manual may impair the protection provided by the equipment Such noncompliance would also violate safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument The Agilent Technologies assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements NOTE NOTE WARNING The Agilent 4294A complies with INSTALLATION CATEGORY II and POLLUTION DEGREE 2 in IEC61010 1 The Agilent 4294A is an INDOOR USE product LEDs in the Agilent 4294A are Class 1 in accordance with IEC60825 1 CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT e Ground the Instrument To avoid electric shock the instrument chassis and cabinet must be grounded with the supplied power cable s grounding prong e DO NOT Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of inflammable gasses or fumes Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment clearly constitutes a safety hazard e Keep Away from Live Circuits Operators must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made by qualified maintenance personnel Do not replace components with the power cable connected Under certain conditions dangerous voltage levels may exist even with the power cable removed To avoid injuries always disconnect the power and discharge circuits before touching them e DO NOT Service or Adjust Alone Do not a
284. ea of the screen DMKR ON Displays and moves the fixed A marker to the current position of the main marker This fixed A marker is fixed on the screen and does not move even when the trace is updated and changed If this fixed A marker mode is selected FxdA is displayed in the upper right area of the screen DMKR FIX Displays the tracking A marker at the current position of the main marker This tracking A marker always moves together with the main marker Moving the main marker causes the tracking A marker to move also On the other hand moving the tracking A marker using the AMKR STIMULUS key causes the main marker to also move If the tracking A marker is selected TrkA is displayed in the upper right area of the screen DMKR TRAC Turns off the selected A marker A marker fixed A marker or tracking A marker and deletes it from the screen DMKR OFF Appendix B 391 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Marker key Table B 61 Delta marker Delta MKR menu Key operation Marker DMODE MENU Softkey Function GPIB command AMKR STIMULUS For the selected A marker A marker fixed A marker or tracking A marker sets DMKRPRM lt value gt the position in a stimulus value sweep parameter value FIXED AMKR VALUE If the fixed A marker is selected sets the position in the measurement parameter DMKRVAL lt value gt value primary measurement parameter value of e
285. ecessary to avoid this error If you do not apply dc bias be sure to set the range to 1 mA Appendix B 387 Table B 56 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Trigger key Softkeys displayed by pressing the Trigger key Trigger Trigger menu Trigger Softkey Function GPIB command HOLD SINGLE NUMBER OF GROUPS CONTINUOUS Selects the sweep stop The status indication area at the left side of the screen shows Hld After the stop of the sweep if is displayed at the top of the status indication area it indicates that the sweep was stopped before completion and therefore the data trace has not been updated completely To update the data trace completely press the SINGLE key to execute a new single sweep HOLD Performs a single sweep to update the data trace and then goes into the sweep stop status SING Sets the sweep group count the number of sweeps specified by users When the user finishes entry of the sweep group count with the numeric keys the sweeps are started After the sweeps of the specified count the sweep stop status occurs If the sweep to sweep averaging function is on specify a sweep group count equal to or larger than the averaging factor count to execute averaging completely When the group count is entered the averaging counter is reset to 0 and the sweeps are started Specify an integer between 0 no sweep and 999 for
286. ect forms at FORMFEED ONIOFF the completion of printing one screen If the form orientation is landscape if landscape is on this key cannot be pressed is not displayed SOFTKEY on OFF Toggles on and off softkey label print PRSOFT ONIOFF TIME on OFF Toggles on and off the time stamp function used when outputting to a printer If COPT ONIOFF this is set to on the time and date at the time is printed first and then the specified screen information is printed more 2 2 Displays Table B 99 Copy configuration Copy Setup menu 1 2 on page N A 415 return Returns to Table B 98 Copy Copy menu on page 415 N A Table B 101 Copy data selection Copy Contents menu Key operation Copy SELECT CONTENTS Softkey Function GPIB command LIST VALUE gt Displays Table B 102 Copy data Copy Contents menu on page 417 LISV OPERATING Displays Table B 102 Copy data Copy Contents menu on page 417 OPEP PARAMETERS gt CAL KIT VALUE gt Displays Table B 102 Copy data Copy Contents menu on page 417 CALS COMPEN KIT VALUE Displays Table B 102 Copy data Copy Contents menu on page 417 COMS gt LIST SWEEP Displays Table B 103 List sweep segment copy start Copy Contents menu DISL SEGMENTS gt on page 417 LIMIT TEST Displays Table B 104 Limit test segment copy start Copy Contents menu DISLLIST SEGMENTS gt on page 418 return Returns
287. ecting the sweep parameter value of the marker display as time from start or relaxation time You can use the following procedure to select how the sweep parameter value is displayed in the Marker Sweep Parameter Value field time relative to the sweep start or relaxation time This function allows you to read the sweep parameter value in a unit of time at each point on the trace in the zero span sweep Press the Utility key to display the Utility menu Press the MKR X ASIX key to display the Marker X Axis menu Select the display method of the marker sweep parameter value Display in the Marker Sweep Parameter Value field Key operation marker X axis display NOTE Value of the parameter selected as the sweep parameter STIMULUS frequency oscillator level or dc bias level Time between the sweep start and the completion of the TIME measurement at the marker position i 1 1 21F Relaxation time F measurement 2nF frequency You can select relaxation time as the method to display the marker sweep parameter value marker X axis only when the frequency is selected as the sweep parameter When you use the A marker the relative value from the A marker position is displayed in the Marker Sweep Parameter Value area regardless of the selection of the marker sweep parameter value marker X axis display Note that in the of the key label of the MKR X AXIS key the currently selected marker X axis
288. ed to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and firmware designated by Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instruction when properly installed on that instrument Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance No other warranty is expressed or implied Agilent Technologies specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Exclusive Remedies The remedies provided herein are Buyer s sole and exclusive remedies Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory Assistance Product mai
289. edure for the 16451B Perform the adapter setup for the 16451B Dielectric Test Fixture in accordance with the following procedure Adapter setup should be performed at an ambient temperature as close as possible to the temperature in which the device measurement will actually be made If the ambient temperature for your measurement is outside the range of 5 C from the adapter setup temperature it is recommended that you perform adapter setup again at the appropriate temperature It takes a few minutes to complete each setup data measurement Chapter 4 73 Step 1 NOTE Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 NOTE Step 7 NOTE NOTE Preparation of Measurement Accessories Adapter Setting During each data measurement the message WAIT MEASURING ADJUSTMENT KIT is displayed in the instrument state area in the LCD s upper left side Make sure that the 16451B is correctly connected to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A The 16451B Dielectric Test Fixture must be directly connected to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A If another accessory such as a cable or adapter is inserted between the 16451B and the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A the correct adapter setup data cannot be obtained and correct device measurement cannot be performed after the adapter setup More than 30 minutes warm up time is required after turning on the Agilent 4294A Make the correct
290. ee S3299 o ae a oe o ee o o o o o oe oe Sees a8 3 gaa 3 03 JOI AO 94 42 10 ter ap Ch 352 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Furnished Accessories Furnished Accessories Agilent Part Description Qty Number 04294 900x0 Operation Manual 1 04294 900x 1 Programming Manual 1 E2083 90005 HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook 1 04294 901x0 Service Manual l 04294 180x0 Sample Program Disk 3 5 inch 1 04294 61001 100 Q Resistor 1 C3757 60401 Mini DIN Keyboard 1 Power Cable i 1250 1859 BNC Adapter i 5062 3991 Handle Kit 5062 3979 Rackmount Kit l 5062 3985 Rackmount amp Handle Kit 1 The number of x in the part number of each manual or sample program disk 0 for the first edition is incremented by 1 each time revision is made The latest edition comes with the product SOROS ON Su Re NS Chapter 10 Not furnished if Option OBO Without Manual is designated Option OBW With Service Manual only Not furnished if Option 1A2 Without Keyboard is designated The power cable depends on which country the instrument is used in Option 1D5 High Stability Frequency Reference only Option 1CN Handle Kit only Option 1CM Rackmount Kit only Option 1CP Rackmount amp Handle Kit only
291. egments under different conditions at one time In the list sweep by specifying the same sweep range for each segment to be set and setting the horizontal axis of the graph to a single span common frequency axis you can compare the measurement results under different measurement conditions specified for each segment oscillator level dc bias level and so on on the screen For the list sweep you can specify the pen number used to draw the trace for each segment in order to color code traces for easy comparison Follow the procedures described in Preparing list sweep table on page 118 to create the list sweep table specifying each trace you want to compare as one segment For this operation you should e Specify the same sweep range for all segments e Specify the same values for all parameters except for the parameter you want to vary for comparison e Assign a different pen number to each segment to vary the colors of the traces Example of creating a list sweep table to compare traces A Cs SCALE S500 pF div REF 96 5 nF 96 6229 nF VAC 0 CtiSTAR ee a START 1 KHz OSC 500 mvolt STOP 16 kHz SEG START STOP NOP Osc BIAS BW AVG 1 1kHz 10kHz 101 100m 0Y 3 1 a 1kHz 10kHz 101 200m oY 3 1 3 1kHz 1OkHz 101 300m oy 3 1 4 1kHz 10kHz 101 400m 0Y 3 1 5 1kHz 10kHz 101 SOOm oF 3 1 gt 6 1kHz 10kHz 101 600m oy 3 1 4294a0j116 Follow the procedures described in Selecting the list sweep as the sweep type
292. el is considerably higher than the measured IZI absolute value of impedance of the DUT causing increased nonlinear measurement error that cannot be ignored This message is displayed when the oscillator level is set to greater than 0 5 V while IZI of the DUT is smaller than 48 Q To avoid this error set the oscillator level below 0 5 V S SAVE ERROR When saving a file anomalies in the storage media are detected For example if you attempt to save a file on a floppy disk it may be damaged Check that there is no problem with the storage media SCALE PARAMETER NOT VALID You attempt to set a display scale not available for the selected display format and as a result the command is ignored For example when the log scale command FMT LOGY is selected as the display format you attempt to perform the SCALE DIV setting command SCAL lt value gt SEARCH RANGE TYPE IS NOT SEGMENT Although in the list sweep all segments entire sweep range are specified as the search range command SEARNG FULL you attempt to execute a command to specify a certain segment as a search target SEGMNUM lt value gt and as a result the command is ignored Before executing the search function by specifying a certain list sweep segment set the search range to a single segment command SEARNG SEGMENT SEARCH WIDTH OFF When the band width function is off you attempt to execute a command to search the cutoff point on the trace WIDSIN or WIDSO
293. elow Avg in the status indication field in the upper left area of the screen indicates the number of past sweeps to be used for averaging the current trace The number becomes effective when the current sweep is completed Immediately after the averaging function is turned on there is no past sweep data and so the count starts from 0 If you restart the averaging with the AVERAGING RESTART key or you change instrument states that affect measured data the averaging sweep count is reset to 0 After that data is averaged over the available data at that time and the displayed trace is updated each time a new sweep is performed until the count reaches the averaging count specified with the AVERAGING FACTOR key When the count reaches the specified averaging count averaging is performed over the past trace data measured as many times as the specified averaging factor including the new measured data and the resulting data are displayed Refer to Equation 5 1 on page 126 for the algorithm of the sweep to sweep averaging AVER ONIOFF AVERAGING FACTOR Sets the averaging count for the sweep to sweep averaging Specify an integer between 1 and 256 AVERFACT lt value gt POINT AVG on OFF For both the A and B traces toggles on and off the averaging point averaging function that executes averaging of the data of the specified count at each measurement point and displays the result PAVER ONIOFF POINT AVG FACT
294. en changing the scale and display settings through the Scale Reference menu with both the data and memory traces displayed you can specify whether to apply the new settings to the data or memory trace Activate the trace you want to manually scale To activate Press Trace A A Trace B B Press the Scale Ref key to display the Scale Reference menu Press the more 1 2 key to move to the second page of the Scale Reference menu if the vertical axis of the graph is not logarithmic or the measurement parameter is not COMPLEX Z Y Press the SCALE FOR key to select the target trace type either data or memory Softkey Labels Target Trace Type SCALE FOR DATA Data trace SCALE FOR MEMO Memory trace The Agilent 4294A provides a feature called coupled scaling mode that synchronizes the scale settings of the data and memory traces When coupled scaling mode is on changes made to the scale of the target trace type are also applied to the non target trace type For more information on coupled scaling mode refer to Enabling or Disabling Coupled Scaling Mode on page 178 When either the data or memory trace is displayed that trace type is automatically selected as the target trace type and you cannot change the target to the other trace type Chapter 7 177 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 4 NOTE Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Enabling or Disabling Coupled Scaling Mode Enab
295. ension T Compensation Device Connection P o Fixture Compensation Device 4294a0e082 Make sure that the adapter selection is set to 42942A Terminal Adapter 7mm 42942A See Adapter Setting on page 67 for adapter selection Perform the user calibration at the other end of the extended 7 mm port of the 42942A Terminal Adapter You can use either the calibration kit supplied by Agilent Technologies or a user defined calibration kit See User Calibration on page 147 for the user calibration procedure Set the port extension value in electrical length or delay time which is equivalent to the electrical length between the user calibration plane and the device contacts of the test fixture in accordance with Port Extension Compensation on page 150 Chapter 6 141 Calibration E Calibration When the 7 mm Port of the 42942A is Extended NOTE In measurements using the 4294A the electrical length delay time of a 42942A dedicated test fixture such as 16092A and 42941A s dedicated probe adapter can be regarded as 0 Step 4 Perform fixture compensation at the device contacts of the test fixture See Fixture Compensation on page 151 for the fixture compensation procedure NOTE If user calibration in step 2 cannot be performed for some reason set the port extension value in electrical length or delay time which is equivalent to the electrical length between the 7 mm port of the 42942A and the
296. enu which is accessible from the Trigger key Doing so ensures that you can create an exact snapshot of the measurement data when you later store the data into the memory trace Press the Display key to display the Display menu Press the DEF TRACE key to display the Trace Definition menu Press the DATA gt MEMORY key to store the measurement data into the memory trace Storing measurement data into memory trace with constant frequency of 1 MHz A Cp SCALE 166 pFyediv REF 460 pF BE G SCALE 166 mS diyv REF Sea m5 WE CMP PVH VES N nouns ONS od neues A E E E A DC_ BIAS ON VAC m Wr IDC START 14 Volt CH 1 MHz OSC 56 molt STOP Volt 4294a0j035 When you press the DATA gt MEMORY key the memory trace captures the measurement data exactly as it is displayed on screen The memory trace always stores measurement data even when the data trace is displaying the results of a calculation Note that while the subtraction of the offset value is being executed described in Subtracting an Offset Value on page 184 the resulting subtraction is stored in the memory trace The DATA gt MEMORY key affects both Traces A and B This means that the measurement data for the non active trace is also stored into the memory trace The Agilent 4294A provides a number of options that allow you to control how each trace is displayed Select one of the following display options by pressing the appropriate
297. ep 2 Step 3 NOTE Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Trace based Comparison and Calculation on the measurement screen indicates a simplified expression of the calculation For more information refer to 17 Instrument Status Area on page 57 You can use the scaling and marker features with the memory trace in the same ways as you can with the data trace To specify whether to apply the scaling feature to the data or memory trace press the Scale more 1 2 key to display the Scale Reference menu and then press the SCALE FOR key to select the target trace type Similarly to specify whether to apply the marker feature to the data or memory trace press the Marker key and then press the MKR ON key to select the target trace type When you want to compare three or more traces you can use the trace superimpose feature For more information refer to Superimposing Multiple Traces on page 185 Subtracting an Offset Value You can specify an offset value to be subtracted from the measurement data and the result of this operation is displayed by the data trace Press the Display key to display the Display menu Press the OFFSET key The Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen indicates the offset value currently in effect the offset value defaults to zero in the preset state Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the offse
298. epresents two different units identifying them with their respective initial letters Which unit to use is automatically determined based on the selected parameter Use the x1 key to enter a value that does not take a specific unit The MARKER block provides keys for configuring marker settings A marker is an inverted triangle V that appears on the measurement trace waveform The marker allows you to read the value of a parameter at a specific point on the trace Marker key Marker key Search key Utility key Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you configure the basic marker settings such as turning on off the marker facility Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you assign the currently marked value to another parameter From the softkey menu for example you can select the MKR START key to use the sweep parameter value at the current marker position as the value at which to start the sweep this way you can start a new sweep cycle from the current marker position Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you activate the marker search function The marker search function automatically moves the marker to a specific position such as the maximum value on the trace so you can check the value of the parameter at that position Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you activate other marker functions in addition to the marker value assignment Marker and marker search Search functi
299. er 137 still appears even when the dc bias range is set to 100 mA the connected DUT requires a dc bias with a current that exceeds the maximum dc bias current 100 mA provided by the Agilent 4294A In this case decrease the dc bias voltage level to avoid the error Figure 5 15 Characteristics of Capacitance of Varactor Diode versus dc Bias Voltage A Cp SCALE i pFediv REF 460 pF B G SCALE i mS div REF 566 mS We tek a A A Ne Ree on Oe hin i dat a CMP MUON cits hee eens eee wales Gan aa ae eae H a E Tere rere er A E A E L eee ee AT SETT l DC BIAS ON VAC IAC VFIDC START 20 Volt CH 1 MHz OSC 56 molt STOP Volt 4294a0j019 110 Chapter5 Setting Measurement Conditions Selecting a Method to Start Measurement Trigger Source Selecting a Method to Start Measurement Trigger Source Follow the steps below to select a trigger source the cue generator for starting your measurement Step 1 Press the Trigger key to display the trigger menu Step 2 Press the SOURCE key to display the trigger source menu Step 3 Use the following keys to select the trigger source Trigger source Key stroke Internal continuous triggering automatically FREE RUN generated in the 4294A also called free run External triggering with a signal from the EXTERNAL external trigger input terminal on the rear panel GP IB LAN triggering generated with a HP IB LAN trigger command transferred via
300. er regardless of the delta marker mode at one time Activate the trace on which you want to turn off all the markers Active Trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Press the Marker key to display the Marker menu Press the MKR ON off key to turn off all the markers Softkey label Status of all markers MKR ON off ON displayed MKR on OFF OFF not displayed While markers are turned off their positions and other marker related settings reside in the Agilent 4294A unless you preset using the Preset key or turn off the power Thus turning on the markers using the MKR on OFF key will restore previous marker settings 248 Chapter 8 NOTE Step 1 NOTE Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Analysis and Processing of Result Calculate the equivalent circuit parameter and simulate the frequency characteristics Calculate the equivalent circuit parameter and simulate the frequency characteristics The Agilent 4294A is provided with four types of 3 element equivalent circuits and one type of 4 element equivalent circuits It is possible to calculate the equivalent circuit parameter based on the sample measurement results as well as to display the frequency characteristics on the screen based on the input equivalent circuit parameter Equivalent circuit parameter analysis is always provided for both traces A and B Calculate the equivalent circuit parameter based on the measurement result Calculate the e
301. er terminal adapter cable or probe To do so you must specify the appropriate adapter type and then perform a calibration procedure called Adapter Setup in which you calibrate the Agilent 4294A for the connected adapter by measuring a specific calibration standard However because this example uses the Agilent 16047E which is a direct coupling fixture that does not require an adapter you need not perform the Adapter Setup procedure in this tour For the Agilent 4294A to perform measurement you must select the appropriate adapter type option Whenever you start a new measurement session you should check the indicator EX1 EX2 7mm PRB or blank shown in the Instrument Status area to confirm that the correct adapter type is selected Do not forget to check the adapter type particularly if you frequently reconnect the Agilent 4294A to a number of alternative adapters including a 7 mm conversion adapter probe cable test fixture and so on 32 Chapter 2 NOTE NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Step 1 Learning Operation Basics Specifying Measurement Conditions Specifying Measurement Conditions Next you need to specify how your Agilent 4294A should perform measurement Through this procedure you will configure parameters that apply to both Traces A and B You can set each parameter without specifying the active trace or checking its current setting Initial
302. er left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the dc current bias level e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press the Chapter 5 121 Step 21 Step 22 Step 23 Step 24 Step 25 Step 26 Step 27 NOTE Step 28 Setting Measurement Conditions Sweeping Multiple Sweep Ranges with Different Conditions in a Single Action List Sweep unit key G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value The setting above will add a new value for the dc current bias level to the cell located in the segment row and the dc bias column BIAS of the list sweep table in editing mode Press the more 2 3 key to display the segment edit menu 3 3 Press the BANDWIDTH key to display the measurement bandwidth setting menu Select the measurement bandwidth for the segment Measurement bandwidth Key stroke 1 measurement speed maximized 1 FAST 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 measurement accuracy maximized 5 PRECISE The setting above will add a new value for the measurement bandwidth to the cell located in the segment row and the measurement bandwidth column BW of the list sweep table in editing mode Press the return key to return to the segment edit menu 3 3 Press the POINT AVG FACTOR key This will display th
303. er moving Marker function and as a result the command is ignored For example when the marker is not displayed a command corresponding to the MKR START key MKRSTAR is sent Before executing the marker moving function display the marker command MKR ON No error No error has occurred This message is not displayed on the LCD 0 is returned as the error number if no error occurs in the instrument when the OUTPERRO command is sent through GP IB NO FIXED DELTA MARKER When the fixed A marker FIXED DMKR is not displayed you attempt to execute a command of a function that needs the display of the fixed A marker and as a result the command is ignored For example when the fixed A marker is not displayed a command corresponding to the FIXED DMKR VALUE FIXED DMKR AUX VALUEN key DMKRVAL lt value gt DMRRAUV lt value gt is sent Before executing a function using the fixed A marker first display the fixed A marker command DMKR FIX NO STATE DATA FILES ON DISK Although you attempt to display the list of files and directories on a floppy disk on the Appendix C 437 116 55 83 84 120 128 Error messages NO STATE DATA FILES ON MEMORY softkey labels with the recall Recall key file re save RE SAVE FILE key file deletion PURGE FILE key directory change CHANGE DIRECTORY key or file copy COPY FILE key no file or directory corresponding to the execution of the key is on the floppy disk N
304. ernal data flow Figure 8 32 4294A internal data flow Measurement Port S Block CoR m gt Extension canter a Feni Compensation Parameter K K Conversion User Fixture pues Calibration Compensation Coefficient Coefficient A A User Fixture Sweep Calibration Compensation Parameter Data Array Data Array Array Remarks Process 4294a0e091 Table 8 4 shows the types of internal data provided by the Agilent 4294A and the methods used to save these data Table 8 4 Agilent 4294A internal data and saving methods Agilent Saving method and saved contents 4294A internal data State save Data save Graphics save Setting state Settings other than those for adapter N setup data Calibration data User calibration data array V on off Fixture compensation data array y 270 Chapter 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data Table 8 4 Agilent 4294A internal data and saving methods Agilent Saving method and saved contents 1 4294A internal data State save Data save Graphics save Trace data Data array measurement data before on off data trace storage Memory array measurement data al on off before data trace storage Data trace a
305. ernal function of the 4294A can be divided into instrument and HP Instrument BASIC to control it The HP Instrument BASIC screen means the screen used to display the information of HP Instrument BASIC It is used to display program lists file lists statuses and so on Table B 22 Key operation Display color modification Modify Color menu Display more 1 2 MODIFY COLOR Softkey Function GPIB command INTENSITY Sets the intensity of information displayed on the screen text graphics in a INTE lt value gt percentage of the maximum value BACKGROUND Sets the background intensity on the screen in a percentage of white balance BACI lt value gt INTENSITY MODIFY ITEM COLOR Displays Table B 23 Item color modification Color Item menu 1 3 on N A gt page 368 DEFAULT COLORS Returns all color configurations of items displayed on the screen to the factory DEFC default states return Returns to Table B 14 Display Display menu 2 2 on page 364 N A Table B 23 Item color modification Color Item menu 1 3 Key operation Display more 1 2 MODIFY COLOR MODIFY ITEM COLOR MODIFY COLOR key Softkey Function GPIB command MODIFY COLOR gt Displays Table B 26 Item color entry Color Item menu on page 370 N A TRC A DATA Selects the trace A data trace as the display item that can be changed with the COLO TRAD MODIFY COLOR
306. ess the IP ADDRESS key to display the IP Address Setting menu Press the 1st key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the Ist part of the IP address current set value is displayed Below it the entire currently set IP address is displayed in a smaller size Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the Ist part of the IP address e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value The Ist part of the IP address can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 255 Press the 2nd key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the 2nd part of the IP address current set value is displayed Below it the entire currently set IP address is displayed in a smaller size Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the 2nd part of the IP address e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value The 2nd part of the IP address can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 255 Press the 3rd key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the 3rd part of the I
307. eter values is off PARAMETERS on OFF it is automatically turned on CALECPARA SIMULATE F CHRST Simulates the frequency characteristics of the selected equivalent circuit and stores the result in the memory trace based on the equivalent circuit parameter values entered using the DEFINE PARAMETERS key or calculated from the trace using the CALCULATE PARAMETERS key Executing this key automatically selects DATA and MEMORY displaying both the data trace and the memory trace in Table B 15 Trace definition Define Trace menu on page 365 SIMFCHAR return Returns to Table B 14 Display Display menu 2 2 on page 364 N A 366 Appendix B Table B 19 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Display key Equivalent circuit selection Select Circ menu Display more 1 2 EQUIV CKT SELECT CIRCUIT Softkey Function GPIB command A Selects equivalent circuit A Equivalent circuit A is generally suitable for the EQUC CIRA equivalent circuit analysis of inductors with high core loss B Selects equivalent circuit B Equivalent circuit B is generally suitable for the EQUC CIRB equivalent circuit analysis of inductors with high winding resistance or resistors with low resistance value C Selects equivalent circuit C Equivalent circuit C is generally suitable for the EQUC CIRC l equivalent circuit analysi
308. etup does not need to be performed except for the above cases For each adapter setup procedure refer to e Adapter Setup Procedure for the 16048G and 16048H on page 70 e Adapter Setup Procedure for the 16334A on page 72 e Adapter Setup Procedure for the 16451B on page 73 e Adapter Setup Procedure for the 42942A on page 74 e Adapter Setup Procedure for the 42941A on page 78 Chapter 4 69 NOTE NOTE Figure 4 1 Step 1 Preparation of Measurement Accessories Adapter Setting When you select No Adapter NONE key in adapter selection adapter setup cannot be performed Adapter setup data can be obtained and saved for each adapter selection Adapter setting adapter selection and adapter setup data is not affected by turning on off the Agilent 4294A or by pressing the Preset key to initialize the instrument settings Adapter Setup Procedure for the 16048G and 16048H When you use the 16048G 1 m cable or 16048H 2 m cable with another accessory only perform the adapter setup for the 16048G or 16048H The operation manuals of the 16048G and 16048H also describe the adapter setup procedure Adapter setup should be performed at an ambient temperature as close as possible to the temperature in which the device measurement will actually be made If the ambient temperature for your measurement is outside the range of 5 C from the adapter setup temperature it is recommended that
309. f ON save DATA on OFF OFF not save MEMORY ON off ON save MEMORY on OFF OFF not save TRACE DATA ON off ON save TRACE DATA on OFF OFF not save TRACE MEM ON off ON save TRACE MEM on OFF OFF not save Step 8 Press the return key to return to the Data Save menu Step 9 Select the key according to how you use the saved data Key operation Recall on Agilent 4294A later for reuse saved in binary format Read it later as text file on PC etc saved in ASCII format BINARY ASCII When you have selected the key the file name input line will appear on the screen At the same time the File Name Input menu will also appear Step 10 Enter the file name in the character string input line by using a combination of the following keys Key Function Step keys MND Scrolls the input character list indicated below the character string line Rotary knob O Horizontally moves the cursor 1 located SELECT LETTER or G n Numeric keys 0 through 9 and SPACE 274 below the displayed character list At cursor _ of the character input line enters the character specified by the cursor T below the character list Enter a numerical value at cursor _ of the character string input line Enters a space at the cursor _ of the character string input line Chapter 8 NOTE Step 11 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 429
310. ference signal When the reference signal stops the Agilent 4294A will automatically revert to its internal frequency reference signal 2 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Only This connector is intended for Option 1D5 High Stability Frequency Reference to output the reference signal If Option 1D5 is installed connect the supplied BNC m BNC m adapter between this connector and Aul External Reference Input ConnectorAv 50 Chapter 3 NOTE NOTE Front Rear Panel and LCD Display Rear Panel 3 External Trigger Input Allows you to input a TTL compatible signal to trigger the execution of measurement When the signal shows a rising or falling edge between the LOW and HIGH states a measurement cycle is triggered Before you can trigger measurement by inputting a signal through this connector you have to specify that the trigger signal be input from an external trigger source via the external trigger input To do so use the keystrokes Trigger SOURCE EXTERNAL For more information on the input signal conditions specific to this connector refer to Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics on page 323 4 LAN Port Allows you to connect the Agilent 4294A with a local area network LAN The Tx transmit LED located on the right hand side of the LAN port is lit while the Agilent 4294A is outputting data over the local area network For more information on w
311. ffset 1 kHz A IZI TOP 5 ke BOTTOM 24 9 IDE VAC IAC vi CENTER i MHz OSC 568 mvolt SPAN 26 kHz 4294a0j099 Step 6 Press the AMPLITUDE OFFSET key to display the current measurement parameter offset for the limit line in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Step 7 Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the measurement parameter offset value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 Jand and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value Chapter 8 265 Analysis and Processing of Result Set a limit to the trace and make pass fail evaluation Figure 8 30 Limit line movement by offset 10 degrees A IZI TOP 5 ke BOTTOM 24 9 IAC OSC 500 mvolt SPAN 20 kHz IDC WAC CENTER 1 MHz 4294a0j100 NOTE Pressing the MKR AMP OFST key allows the measurement parameter value at the main marker position to be substituted into the measurement parameter offset value of the limit line 266 Chapter 8 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Specify partial search range Specify partial search range Under the presetting conditions the max
312. following ways to specify the stop value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 Jand and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys Canina to set the desired value This setting allows a new stop value to be written for the stop value string STOP on the line of the segment being edited in the limit line table Instead of directly entering the stop value of the segment according to steps 14 and 15 follow the procedure below 1 Press the Entry Off key 2 Move the main marker to the position of the segment stop value using the rotary knob O or the step keys ND 3 Key operations of more 2 3 MKR STOP allow the measurement parameter value at the position of the main marker to be substituted into the segment stop over After setting in this order press the more 3 3 more 3 1 keys to go back to the Segment Edit menu 2 3 Press the UPPER LIMIT key or MIDDLE VALUE key The upper limit value or middle value of the limit range at the stop point is displayed in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the upper or middle value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 Jand and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the r
313. fy a partial search range in the list sweep refer to When the sweep type is list sweep on page 269 188 Chapter 7 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Monitoring the Test Signal Level AC Monitoring the Test Signal Level AC You can set a constant signal level through the keystroke sequence Source LEVEL and also set the signal level for each measuring point within the range of the signal source level sweep by pressing the Start Stop Center and Span keys All these settings are related to the output signal level of the Agilent 4294A s internal oscillator In most cases however the signal level actually applied to a DUT differs from the setting applied to the signal source because some electrical loss occurs between each test terminal and the DUT The Agilent 4294A provides a feature that allows you to monitor both the voltage and amperage values of the test signal level actually applied to the DUT whether you measure the signal source level by voltage or current This feature is called test signal level monitor Monitoring the Test Signal Level on a Real time Basis For real time monitoring the Agilent 4294A provides two fields in the lower area of the LCD the Test Signal Voltage Level Monitor field labeled VAC and the Test Signal Current Level Monitor field labeled IAC These fields are updated each time a measuring point is reached dur
314. g with time delay at measurement point Time delay for each measurement point time delay at a measurement point can be directly set Press the Sweep key to display the sweep menu Press the TIME key to display the sweep time menu Press the POINT DELAY key This will display the current setting for the time delay at a point in the parameter settings area in the upper left part of the screen Use the keys or the rotary knob in the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the time delay at a measurement point e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value 102 Chapter5 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting Time Delay for Measurement Setting with sweep time delay Time delay can be set at the point before sweep starts Step 1 Press the Sweep key to display the sweep menu Step 2 Press the TIME key to display the sweep time menu Step 3 Press the SWEEP DELAY key This will display the current setting for the sweep time delay in the parameter settings area in the upper left part of the screen Step 4 Use the keys or the rotary knob in the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the sweep time delay e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and
315. gilent 4294A Step 1 Make sure that the adapter selection is set to Four terminal pair 1 meter 4TP 1M See Adapter Setting on page 67 for adapter selection Step 2 Perform the fixture compensation in accordance with Fixture Compensation on page Chapter 6 135 NOTE Calibration B Calibration for Four Terminal Pair 1 m Extension 151 When the measurement port is extended by meter with the four terminal pair configuration neither user calibration nor port extension compensation is required for measurement they cannot be performed Fixture Compensation When the 16451B is Used When you perform only the fixture OPEN compensation and fixture SHORT compensation follow the normal fixture compensation procedures described in Fixture Compensation on page 151 If you perform the LOAD compensation in addition to the OPEN and SHORT compensations set the standard values as described below in accordance with the procedures in Defining the standard values for fixture compensation on page 152 Furthermore when you perform the fixture OPEN compensation measurement use the LOAD key for the OPEN data measurement and when you perform the fixture LOAD compensation measurement use the OPEN key for the LOAD data measurement Softkey for Compensation Data Definition Setting Value OPEN CONDUCT G Definition of equivalent parallel conductance value for LOAD standard OPEN CAP C Definition of equ
316. gilent 4294A can display the measurement results of one sweep measurement in two traces waveforms on the screen These traces are called trace A and trace B Various conditions or analyses can be applied to these traces independently while others can be applied to them in common such as the sweep range Press one of the following keys to select a trace for setting conditions or for analysis Active trace Key stroke Trace A A Trace B B The settings using the following keys key operations can be specified for trace A and trace B independently Before making settings with these keys key operations be sure to check and select the active trace Format Display DEF TRACE except for DATA MEMORY e Display OFFSET Display more 1 2 TITLE Scale Ref e Keys in the MARKER block The settings using keys other than those above can be commonly applied to trace A and trace B Therefore you do not have to select the active trace or check its state before making those settings However there are some exceptions Refer to the operational procedure of each function for details Chapter 5 83 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE NOTE Setting Measurement Conditions Selecting Sweep Parameter Selecting Sweep Parameter Press the Sweep key Press the PARAMETER key Select the desired sweep parameter Sweep parameter Key stroke Frequency FREQ Oscillator level voltage or current OSC LEVE
317. gment to 5 The measurement accuracy is highest return Returns to the higher level menu Table B 32 Measurement N A bandwidth averaging Bw Average menu on page 374 or Table B 50 Segment edit Edit Segment menu 3 3 on page 384 Appendix B 375 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Cal key Softkeys displayed by pressing the Cal key Table B 34 Key operation Calibration Calibration menu Cal 378 Softkey Function GPIB command ADAPTER gt Displays Table B 35 Adapter configuration Adapter menu on page 376 In N A of the softkey label the currently selected adapter configuration is displayed FIXTURE COMPEN gt Displays Table B 37 Fixture compensation Fixture Comp menu on page N A CAL POINT For fixture compensation FIXTURE COMPEN and user calibration USER CAL selects a preset single fixed frequency point FIXED which does not change regardless of conditions or a frequency point determined by the user specified sweep range USER This configuration is commonly applied to both user calibration and fixture compensation CALP FIXEDIUSER USER CAL gt Displays Table B 39 User calibration User Cal menu on page 379 This key N A is valid only when 7 mm 42942A or PROBE 42941 A has been selected with the ADAPTER key PORT EXTENSION gt Displays Table B 42 Port extension
318. ground Intensity on page 207 and Adjusting the Background Intensity on page 207 210 Chapter 7 Analysis and Processing of Result This chapter describes how to analyze the result of measurements by the Agilent 4294A Precision Impedance Analyzer and how to process the output result to the printer 211 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Analysis and Processing of Result Specify the sweep parameter value and read the value on the trace Specify the sweep parameter value and read the value on the trace The value at each point of the trace can be read using the marker 0 which is called the main marker Setting the sweep parameter value allows the main marker position to be moved as desired Activate the trace that you want to read Active trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Press the Marker key If the main marker is not located on the active trace it appears at the position of the sweep center value on the trace and the sweep parameter value indicating the current marker position is displayed in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a new marker position for the sweep parameter value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is se
319. h limits are set to the newly entered value automatically LIMLSTOP lt value gt MIDDLE VALUE Sets the limit center value of the measured value at the sweep stop point of the segment When setting the center value also set the difference value difference between the upper and lower limits with the DELTA LIMIT key This kind of limit configuration set by the center value and the difference value can be used as an alternative to the limit configuration set by the upper and lower limits LIMVSTOP lt value gt 408 Appendix B Table B 85 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the System key Segment edit Edit Limit menu 2 3 System LIMIT TEST EDIT LIMIT LINE EDIT more 1 3 System LIMIT TEST EDIT LIMIT LINE ADD more 1 3 Limit menu 1 3 on page 407 Softkey Function GPIB command DELTA LIMIT Sets the limit center value of the measured value at the sweep stop point of the LIMDSTOP lt value gt segment When setting the center value also set the difference value difference between the upper and lower limits with the DELTA LIMIT key This kind of limit configuration set by the center value and the difference value can be used as an alternative to the limit configuration set by the upper and lower limits more 2 3 Displays Table B 86 Segment edit Edit Limit menu 3 3 on page 409 N A done Has the same function as the
320. h range e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 Jand and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value Press the PART SRCH on OFF key to turn on the partial search range Then the softkey label changes to PART SRCH ON off If the partial search range is turned on two vertical lines are displayed as boundary lines on each side of the specified search range in the graph When the measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y the boundary lines are not shown Chapter 8 267 Figure 8 31 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Specify partial search range Minimum value search by turning on partial search range B 82 SCALE 20 div REF ae VAC 1A f CENTER 106 618175 MHZ OSC 568 mvolt SPAN 56 kHz 4294a0j067 The partial search range cannot be set in excess of the preset sweep range If you turn on the partial search function using the PART SRCH on OFF key before entering the partial search range you can set the partial search range while checking the boundary line position Note that you can use the marker to enter the partial search range In this case use the softkey displayed by Search SEARCH RANGE MENU How to enter the partial search range Key operation Substituting the sweep parameter value of the MKR MINIMU
321. h the TARGET VALUE key and displays Table B 65 Target Target menu on page 396 The TARGET VALUE key is in this newly displayed menu If the specified measurement parameter value is not on the trace the marker is not moved and TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND is displayed in the upper left area of the screen SEAM TARG Moves the main marker on the current active trace A or B to the peak position of the measurement parameter value depending on the peak definition specified with the PEAK DEF MENU key and displays Table B 66 Peak Peak menu on page 396 The PEAK DEF MENU key is in this newly displayed menu If no measurement parameter value can be a peak on the trace the marker is not moved and TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND is displayed in the upper left area of the screen SEAM PEAK SEARCH TRK on OFF For the current active trace A or B toggles on and off the function to execute search each time a sweep is performed search tracking function If you turn on this function and select a marker search function with one of the above keys MAX MIN TARGET PEAK the search is executed each time the trace is updated by a sweep if off the search is executed only when the marker search function key is pressed TRACK ONIOFF WIDTHS on OFF For the current active trace A or B toggles on and off the trace bandwidth analysis function If you turn on this function the cutoff points defined with the WIDTHS DEF ME
322. han COMPLEX Z Y that is scalar parameter measurement is selected a command to execute one of the following is sent As a result the command is ignored e Setting the secondary measurement parameter value of the fixed A marker DMKRAUV command e Selecting DATA MEM in the trace calculation function DISP DDVM command When making the above settings first select the COMPLEX Z Y measurement parameter Numeric data error Numeric data including numeric data without a decimal point is causing an error A numeric value error other than 121 to 129 has occurred Numeric data not allowed A numeric value data element that did not violate the standard is received where the Agilent 4294A does not accept any numeric value data elements 438 Appendix C 140 220 108 89 48 193 26 284 280 Error messages OSC LEVEL MONITOR NOT VALID O OSC LEVEL MONITOR NOT VALID When the oscillator level monitor is not on you attempt to execute a command to turn on the marker s ac voltage level monitor or the marker s ac current level monitor MKRMON ACV or MKRMON ACT and as a result the command is ignored Before turning on the marker s ac voltage level monitor or the marker s ac current level monitor turn on the ac bias level monitor command OMON ON P Parameter error An error not described by error numbers from 221 to 229 occurs during the analysis of a program data element This error occurs for e
323. hased this instrument from ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED Before completing measurement of all calibration standards OPEN SHORT LOAD required for user calibration or four terminal pair extension setting a GPIB command CALDON or ECALDON to calculate error coefficients is sent The command is invalid Finish measuring any remaining calibration standard B BACKUP DATA LOST This error check sum error occurs after losing the contents of the battery powered backup 428 Appendix C 160 168 136 13 Error messages Block data error memory SRAM which stores user calibration data fixture compensation data GP IB address IP address and so on This is caused by the battery used for backup being drained To again enable the battery powered backup memory turn on the power and keep the device on for approximately 10 minutes to charge the battery completely Block data error An error not described by error numbers from 161 to 169 occurs during the syntax analysis of block data Block data not allowed A block data element is received where the Agilent 4294A does not accept any block data element BRIDGE UNBALANCED Because the connection of a DUT or the setting for it is incorrect the internal circuit BRIDGE temporarily cannot perform measurements UNBALANCED e The setting of the four terminal pair extension NONE 4TP 1M 4TP 2M 7mm 42942A PROBE 42941A may not match the fixture cable adapter or probe
324. he AVERAGING RESTART key When the averaging starts 0 is displayed for the averaging count because the number of traces sweep data to be swept is always set to 0 at the initial state Then the count increases by 1 as each sweeping ends After the count reaches the number specified by the AVERAGING FACTOR key it stays constant while sweeping continues Averaging for each measurement point point averaging Point averaging averages each data point by a user specified averaging factor The Agilent 4294A repeatedly measures the same point until the averaging factor is reached It then divides the vector summation of the measurement value by the averaging factor and starts measuring the next point The sweep time increases in proportion to the averaging factor The algorithm used for point averaging is shown in Equation 5 2 Chapter 5 127 Equation 5 2 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 4 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting Measurement Accuracy Stability and Time Point Averaging Algorithm tr 1 F Sh n 1 where M Point averaging result vector value at the measurement point S Current measurement value vector value F Point averaging factor entered with POINT AVG FACTOR key Perform the averaging factor setup as follows Press the Bw Avg key to display the measurement bandwidth averaging menu Press the POINT AVG FACTOR key to display the current setting for the point averaging in the par
325. he Adapter Setup Menu Connect OPEN 0 S to the 7 mm port of the 42942A the OPEN standard is furnished with the 42942A Terminal Adapter Chapter 4 75 Figure 4 5 Step 6 NOTE Step 7 NOTE Step 8 Preparation of Measurement Accessories Adapter Setting Connecting OPEN 0 S to the 42942A 42942a0j0302 Press the PHASE COMP key to start the phase compensation data measurement The traces on the LCD display do not change during the phase compensation data measurement When the phase compensation data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to PHASE COMP DONE With the OPEN 0 S standard connected to the 7 mm port press the OPEN key to start the open data measurement When the load data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to OPEN DONE Remove the OPEN 0 S standard from the 7 mm port of the 42942A Then connect the SHORT 0 Q standard to the 7 mm port the SHORT standard is furnished with the 42942A Terminal Adapter 76 Chapter 4 Preparation of Measurement Accessories Adapter Setting Figure 4 6 Connecting SHORT 0 Q to the 42942A 42942a0j0303 Step 9 Press the SHORT key to start the short data measurement NOTE When the short data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to SHORT DONE Step 10 Remove the SHORT 0 Q standard from the 7 mm port of the 42942A Then connect the LOAD 50 Q standard to the 7 mm port the LO
326. he FIXED AMKR trace changes the delta marker is always fixed to a certain point on the graph you set its position with both the sweep parameter value and measurement parameter value When you select the delta marker mode the delta marker A appears at the main marker position on the trace Even if the fixed delta marker mode is selected when you perform scale adjustment to change the scales of the graph the delta marker moves to the point having the same value on the graph Even after you have placed the delta marker A at a point on the screen you can move the delta marker to the main marker position by pressing the mode selection key described above The Delta Marker Mode menu provides a mode in which the delta marker and the main marker move together this is called the tracking delta marker mode TRACKING AMKR key This function must be used only during Analyze trace bandwidth on page 236 Do not select it at this point Moving the delta marker alone to place it at a reference point Follow these steps to move only the delta marker itself to a reference point By following Placing the delta marker on the reference point with the main marker on page 217 display the delta marker on the screen Note that you do not have to specify the main marker position in Step 2 this time Press the Marker key to display the Marker menu Press the AMODE MENU key to display the Delta Marker menu Select the parameter indi
327. he MIDDLE VALUE center value key and the DELTA LIMIT difference value key you can convert the table into the upper and lower limit format by pressing the UPPER LIMIT key or the LOWER LIMIT key On the other hand even if you have set the limits with the UPPER LIMIT upper limit key and the LOWER LIMIT lower limit key you can convert the table into the center and difference value format by pressing the MIDDLE VALUE key or the DELTA LIMIT key Table B 85 Key operation Segment edit Edit Limit menu 2 3 System LIMIT TEST EDIT LIMIT LINE EDIT more 1 3 System LIMIT TEST EDIT LIMIT LINE ADD more 1 3 Softkey Function GPIB command STOP Sets the sweep stop value of the segment LIMSTOP lt value gt UPPER LIMIT Sets the upper limit of the measured value at the sweep stop point of the segment Be sure to set both the upper and lower limits If an upper limit is not required set an extremely large value for example 1G as the upper limit If you set the upper limit smaller than the lower limit both limits are set to the newly entered value automatically LIMUSTOP lt value gt LOWER LIMIT Sets the lower limit of the measured value at the sweep stop point of the segment Be sure to set both the upper and lower limits If a lower limit is not required set an extremely small value for example 1G as the lower limit If you set the lower limit greater than the upper limit bot
328. he PEAK key to display the Peak menu Press the PEAK DEF MENU key to display the Peak Definition menu Press the PEAK PLRTY key to select the peak polarity pressing the key toggles the peak polarity Softkey label Selected peak polarity PEAK PLRTY POS Positive if the measurement at this point is greater than the measurement of the adjacent measuring points it is regarded as a peak 232 Chapter 8 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Define the Peak Softkey label Selected peak polarity PEAK PLRTY NEG Negative if the measurement at that point is smaller than the measurement of the adjacent measuring points it is regarded as a peak Define peak sharpness The following steps are used to define the peak sharpness Press the Search key to display the Search menu Press the PEAK key to display the Peak menu Press the PEAK DEF MENU key to display the Peak Definition menu Press the PEAK DEF AX key The set value of the current peak AX is displayed in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a new peak DX value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is se
329. he Sweep menu Check the PARAMETER softkey label to confirm that FREQ frequency sweep is shown between the brackets this setting is selected by default in the preset state The Sweep Parameter menu which is not used in this tour allows you to change the sweep parameter You can access this menu by pressing the PARAMETER key Select Logarithmic Sweep as the Sweep Type From the Sweep menu select TYPE to display the Sweep Type menu Chapter 2 33 Step 2 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Learning Operation Basics Specifying Measurement Conditions Press the LOG key to select Log logarithmic sweep Set the Sweep Start Value to 100 Hz Press the Start key The current setting of the sweep start value appears in the Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen Type 100 into the Parameter Setting field using these ENTRY block keys 1 0 0 Specify that the value does not take any unit by pressing the x1 key in the ENTRY block This puts your entry into effect Set the Sweep Stop Value to 100 MHz Press the Stop key The current setting of the sweep stop value appears in the Measurement Parameter field in the upper left area of the screen Type 100 into the Parameter Setting field using these ENTRY block keys 1 0 0 Suffix your entry with M mega by pressing the M m key in the ENTRY block This put
330. he data array Table 8 9 Example of the data array data saved in the data part part of trace A TRACE A FORMAT LOG amp lt Frequency _ Data Real _ Data Imag lt 4 00000000000e 01_1 976390e 02_5 641327e 03 lt 2 244937 14300e 06_8 738007e 00_2 715469e 02 lt 4 48983428600e 06_2 407099e 01_5 634623e 02 lt Symbols in the table Linefeed _ Tab Table 8 10 shows the contents of the saved data array Table 8 10 Contents of the trace data Setup and data name Description TRACE A Type of trace FORMAT LOG Setup of display format Frequency Measurement frequency points Data Real Data array real part Data Imag Data array imaginary part Contents of the data part when saving the memory array Table 8 11 is an example of the data part when specifying saving the memory array Table 8 11 280 Example of the memory array data saved in the data part part of trace A TRACE A lt FORMAT LOG amp lt Frequency _ Memory Real _ Memory Imag 4 00000000000e 01_1 976390e 02_5 641327e 03 lt 2 24493714300e 406_8 738007e400_2 715469e402 4 48983428600e 06_2 407099e 401_5 634623e 02 Symbols in the table Linefeed _ Tab Chapter 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data Table 8 12 shows the contents of the saved memory array Table 8 12 Co
331. he definition of Tp Polarity Positive or Negative selectable Connector type BNC female 348 Chapter 10 Figure 10 9 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics General Characteristics Required Pulse Width Tp for External Trigger Input Positive Trigger Signal Negative Trigger Signal C5010014e External Program RUN CONT Input Level TTL Connector type BNC female External Monitor Output Connector type D SUB 15 pin HD Display resolution pixels 640 x 480 VGA Operating Conditions Temperature Disk drive 0 C to 40 C non operating condition Disk drive 10 C to 40 C operating condition Humidity at wet bulb temperature lt 29 C without condensation Disk drive 15 to 95 RH non operating condition Disk drive 15 to 80 RH operating condition Altitude 0 m to 2 000 m Warm up time 30 minutes Chapier 10 349 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics General Characteristics Non operating Conditions Temperature 20 C to 60 C Humidity at wet bulb 15 to 95 RH temperature lt 45 C without condensation Altitude 0 m to 4 572 m Other Specifications EMC e EN 55011 1991 CISPR 11 1990 Group 1 Class A e EN 50082 1 1992 IEC 61000 4 2 1995 4 kV CD 8kV AD e EN 50082 1 1992 IEC 61000 4 3 1995 3 V m 27 MHz 1 GHz
332. he desired position on the trace to analyze trace bandwidth To move the main marker to the peak of the trace see Search the maximum minimum peak on page 228 Press the Search key to display the Search menu Press the WIDTH on OFF key to turn on the trace bandwidth analysis function Softkey label State of trace bandwidth analysis function WIDTH ON off ON WIDTH on OFF OFF If the trace bandwidth analysis function is turned on the bandwidth width center value 240 Chapter 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Analyze trace bandwidth center Q peak peak AL and AR are displayed in the Marker Statistics Trace Bandwidth Analysis Result area on the right of the screen Figure 8 16 Trace bandwidth analysis result A IZI TOP 5 koa BOTTOM B 82 SCALE i 26H a 3 1121 k o CMP sarei US migheenecs ETEA Sadaka Hid ExtRef 20 fdiv REF a 100 00645 MHz 108 0609 MHz 45932102413 YAD IAC VIDE CENTER 186 6865 MHz OSC 506 mvolt SPAN 16 kHz 4294a0j063 NOTE If the trace bandwidth analysis function is turned on the straight line showing the cutoff line is displayed parallel to the sweep parameter axis Step 5 When the cutoff point searched is not the target press the WIDTH DEF MENU key to display the trace bandwidth analysis definition menu and use the following functions Cutoff point re search function Key operation Inner search two different c
333. he desired value is set e Press the step keys TW to set the desired value The above setting will add a new value for the sweep start or center frequency to the cell in the segment row and the sweep start center frequency column START or CENTER of the list sweep table in editing mode Press the STOP key if the sweep start frequency is initially set or the SPAN key if the sweep center frequency is initially set This will display the current setting for the sweep stop frequency or sweep span frequency for the segment in the parameter settings located in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the sweep stop frequency or sweep span frequency e Enter a desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the unit key G n M 1 k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until a desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set a desired value Chapter 5 119 Step 8 Step 9 NOTE Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Setting Measurement Conditions Sweeping Multiple Sweep Ranges with Different Conditions in a Single Action List Sweep The above setting will add a new value for the sweep stop or span frequency to the cell located in the segment raw and the sweep stop span frequency column START or CENTER of the list sweep table in editing mode Press NUMBER OF POINTS key
334. he scale configurations in Table B 27 Scale reference Scale Ref menu 1 1 2 on page 371 are applied from the data trace DATA or the memory trace MEMO SCAF DATAIMEMO D amp M COUPLE ON off When both the data trace and the memory trace are displayed on the screen selects performing the scale configurations in Table B 27 Scale reference Scale Ref menu 1 1 2 on page 371 for both the data trace and the memory trace together couple on or for each of them separately couple off SCAC ONIOFF Appendix B 371 Table B 28 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Scale Ref key Scale reference Scale Ref menu 1 2 2 Scale Ref more1 2 Softkey Function GPIB command more 2 2 Displays Table B 27 Scale reference Scale Ref menu 1 1 2 on page 371 N A Table B 29 Scale reference Scale Ref menu 2 Key operation Scale Ref Softkey Function GPIB command AUTO SCALE For the selected trace data trace memory trace of trace A B executes automatic AUTO scale adjustment based on the trace data when the key is pressed The trace is magnified and displayed so that the graph contains the data of all sweep points allowing you to easily grasp the overall characteristics You can select the data trace or the memory trace with the SCALE FOR key in this menu TOP VALUE Sets a value of the top line in the scale graph
335. he setting for the horizontal axis for the list sweep 124 Chapter5 Setting Measurement Conditions Sweeping Multiple Sweep Ranges with Different Conditions in a Single Action List Sweep pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey label Selected list span mode LIST SPAN SINGLE Single span linear scaled frequency is used for the horizontal axis with the left end specified as the minimum frequency in the list sweep table and the right end as the maximum LIST SPAN SEGMENT Segment span measurement numbers are used for the horizontal axis the points indicate the order of measurement points in the table and are equally spaced along the full length of the axis NOTE The setting in this procedure does not take effect when COMPLEX Z Y is selected for the measurement parameter because no axis for the sweep parameter exists in the graticule of display Figure 5 20 A IZI TOP 5 ke BOTTOM 28 a B SCALE 20 div REF ae WAC lt VAIDE START 99 99 MHz OSC 500 molt STOP 100 10516 MHz 4294a0j106 Chapter 5 125 NOTE Equation 5 1 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting Measurement Accuracy Stability and Time Setting Measurement Accuracy Stability and Time Setting measurement bandwidth Step 1 Press the Bw Avg key to display the measurement bandwidth averaging menu Step 2 Press the BANDWIDTH key to display the measurement bandwidth setting menu Step 3 Se
336. he sweep range specified by start and stop or center and span LOG Selects the log logarithmic sweep as the sweep type The log sweep SWPT LOG logarithmically allocates sweep points measurement points and performs sweeps within the sweep range specified by start and stop or center and span LIST Selects the list sweep as the sweep type Before selecting the list sweep you SWPT LIST must create a list sweep table with the EDIT LIST key in Table B 47 List sweep List Sweep menu on page 382 return Returns to Table B 43 Sweep Sweep menu on page 381 N A Table B 47 List sweep List Sweep menu Key operation Sweep EDIT LIST Softkey Function GPIB command SEGMENT If there is a list sweep table specify the segment number you want to edit The SEGM lt value gt currently specified segment is indicated by the pointer gt in the SEG column at the leftmost area of the list sweep table EDIT gt Displays Table B 48 Segment edit Edit Segment menu 1 3 on page 383 SEDI DELETE Executes the deletion of the segment specified by the pointer gt SDEL ADD gt Displays Table B 48 Segment edit Edit Segment menu 1 3 on page 383 SADD 382 Appendix B Table B 47 Key operation Key Definitions Softkeys displayed by pressing the Sweep key List sweep List Sweep menu Sweep EDIT LIST Softkey Function GPIB comma
337. he sweep stop value in the parameter settings area in the upper left part of the screen Use the keys or the rotary knob in the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the sweep stop e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TW to set the desired value When the sweep parameter is set to frequency the sweep start value cannot be greater than the sweep stop value Sweep with decreasing frequency can be possible by setting a sweep range with increasing frequency and then specifying a downward sweep direction Refer to Selecting Sweep Direction on page 99 to specify the sweep direction Setting by center and span values Press the Center key This will display the current setting for the sweep center value in the parameter settings area located in the upper left part of the screen Use the keys or the rotary knob in the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the sweep center e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set Chapter 5 89 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting Sweep Ra
338. her case the screen returns to the File Utilities menu You can perform Steps 10 and 11 with the external keyboard connected to the rear panel After entering a directory name press the Enter key on the keyboard to execute creation of the directory Copying a File Follow these steps to copy duplicate a file stored in any storage device of the Agilent 4294A If a copy source file is on a floppy disk or if you create a copy destination file on a floppy disk insert this floppy disk into the floppy disk drive Press the Save key to display the Save menu Press the FILE UTILITIES key to display the File Utilities menu Press the COPY FILE key to display the File Selection menu In of the STORE DEV key s softkey label the currently selected storage device is displayed Softkey label Selected storage device STORE DEV FLOPPY Floppy disk drive STORE DEV MEMORY Volatile memory disk STORE DEV FLASH Nonvolatile memory disk flash memory If the copy source file is on the currently selected storage device proceed to Step 7 If the copy source file is not on the currently selected storage device press the STORE DEV key to display the Mass Storage menu Select the storage device where the copy source file is stored Storage device Key operation Floppy disk drive FLOPPY Volatile memory disk MEMORY Nonvolatile memory disk flash memory FLASH MEMORY Pressing the key returns the display to the File Select
339. icates that dc bias conditions are not applied Note that when dc bias conditions are applied the DC BIAS ON indicator appears in the lower right corner of the screen regardless of which bias mode DCB VC IC V d or I J is selected Adapter type EX1 EX2 7mm PRB blank Indicates that the instrument is configured to use a 1 meter four terminal pair cable Indicates that the instrument is configured to use a 2 meter four terminal pair cable Indicates that the instrument is configured to use the Agilent 42942A Terminal Adapter four terminal pair to 7 mm conversion adapter Indicates that the instrument is configured to use the 42941A Impedance Probe Indicates that the instrument is configured to operate without an adapter User calibration port extension status User calibration Port extension Correction point feature feature setting CAL ON Fixed Cal ON User defined POR ON Fixed Por ON User defined CAP ON ON Fixed CaP ON ON User defined blank Unknown Blank cells in the table indicate that the feature is off 58 Chapter 3 NOTE NOTE Front Rear Panel and LCD Display ltems Displayed on the LCD Fixture compensation status Fixture Compensation Correction point setting feature CMP ON Fixed Cmp ON User defined blank Unknown Blank cells in the table indicate that the feature is off The user c
340. igure 1 1 To dismount the fuse holder first disconnect the power cable then use a flat blade screwdriver or similar tool to push the portion marked a in Figure 1 1 upward so that the holder surface rises up a little and finally pull off the holder Fuse holder and power inlet LINE Fuse Pea Fuse holder T 5A 250 V 115V 230V j J5 50 60Hz 300VA Max A gt Power cable J receptacle Ay 42680101 Power Source Requirements The Agilent 4294A requires a power source that meets the following specifications Voltage 90 to 132 Vac or 198 to 264 Vac auto select Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Power consumption 300 VA max 20 Chapter 1 WARNING Installation Power Cable Power Cable In accordance with international safety standards the Agilent 4294A uses a three wire power cable When connected to an appropriate ac power outlet this cable grounds the instrument frame through one of the three wires The type of power cable shipped with each instrument depends on the country of destination Refer to Figure 1 2 for the part numbers of the power cables available For protection against electrical shock the power cable grounding prong must not be removed The power plug must be plugged into an outlet that provides an appropriate receptacle for the ground connection Chapter 1 21 Installation Power Cable Figure 1 2 Alternative Power Cab
341. il the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value The 4th part of the subnet mask can be set to an integer ranging from 0 through 255 Press the done key to store the IP address data set in Steps 3 through 10 in the Agilent 4294A and to return to the Local menu When you want to cancel the setting of the subnet mask press the cancel key instead of the done key The previous subnet mask setting remains without changes Reboot the Agilent 4294A This will put the entered subnet mask into effect When you set the LAN addresses IP address gateway address and subnet mask at one time you need to reboot only after the completion of all settings to put all of the LAN addresses into effect Checking the MAC Address Follow these steps to check the MAC address Press the System key to display the System menu Press the DIAGNOSTIC TEST key to display the Self Diagnosis menu Press the MAC ADDRESS key At the top of the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the MAC address delimited by colons is displayed The MAC address is a unique address assigned to each instrument You cannot change the MAC address You can check the MAC address with the sticker above the LAN port on the Agilent 4294A s rear panel For the location of the LAN port on the rear panel refer to 4 LAN Port on page 51 318 Chapter 9 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 Setting Using Control and Ma
342. ile name not found The specified filename is not found and as a result the command is not executed correctly This message is displayed for example when you attempt to read write a file that does not exist on the disk FLOATING POINT ERROR OCCURRED Due to the execution of an application inside the instrument for inappropriate data sent from outside the instrument an error for floating point operations occurs inside the instrument The result of the operation may be incorrect Contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office or the company you purchased this instrument from FORMAT NOT VALID FOR COMPLEX MEASUREMENT When COMPLEX Z Y i e complex parameter measurement is selected as a measurement parameter you attempt to select a display format not available for the measurement parameter for example the linear scale format FMT LINY command and as a result the command is ignored When COMPLEX Z Y is selected as a measurement parameter set the display format to the complex plane display format command FMT COMP or the polar coordinates display format command FMT POLA FORMAT NOT VALID FOR SCALAR MEASUREMENT Appendix C 433 131 105 240 241 111 114 224 282 283 Error messages FREQUENCY SWEEP ONLY When a measurement parameter other than COMPLEX Z Y i e scalar parameter measurement is selected you attempt to select a display format not available for the measurement parameter for ex
343. ilename and so on and press the Enter key The GET command is executed for the specified file The GET command loads the ASCII file having the specified filename into the program workspace If a file with the specified filename does not exist on the disk the 256 File not found error occurs N A PURGE Enters PURGE in the HP Instrument BASIC command line The character entry cursor is located below the second From here use the keyboard to enter required parameters filename and so on and press the Enter key The PURGE command is executed for the specified file The PURGE command deletes the file having the specified filename from the disk If a file with the specified filename does not exist on the disk the 256 File not found error occurs N A INITIALIZE Enters INITIALIZE in the HP Instrument BASIC command line From here use the external keyboard to enter required parameters and press the Enter key The specified disk is initialized After the disk is initialized all of the files on the specified disk are deleted N A MASS STORE gt Displays Table B 79 IBASIC mass storage Mass Storage menu on page 405 In of the softkey label the currently selected IBASIC mass storage is displayed flexible disk drive FLOPPY volatile memory disk MEMORY or nonvolatile memory disk flash memory FLASH N A Appendix B 403 Key Definitions
344. ility menu Press the MKR LIST on OFF key to turn on the marker list function When the marker list function is turned on the measured graph is displayed in the upper half of the screen and the positions of all the markers on the trace are listed in the lower half of the screen Softkey label State of marker list function MKR LIST ON off On the positions of the markers on the trace are listed in the lower half of the screen MKR LIST on OFF Off Chapter 8 215 Figure 8 3 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Listing data at several points on the trace Listing marker positions with the marker list function A IZI TOP 5 ke BOTTOM 20 n 26 086 o Set Sub MKR 1 3 62465k 100 067 2 237 80804 100 033 3 19 16 100 035 4 320 029 VAC TAC Wtbe 1908A CENTER 100 0405 MHz OSC 546 mvolt SPAM 186 kHz STIMULUS YAL 5 393 076 99 9975 MHz 26 086 2 108 86M 100 0065 MHz 3 02485 ka 100 033 MHz 237 984 Q 5 OFF 100 0345 MHz 719 16 R 100 084 MHz 320 029 f 100 0855 MHz 393 076 Q 7 OFF return List of Marker Positions 4294a0j109 If Use the upper and lower halves of the screen for analyzer functionality and HP Instrument BASIC respectively has been selected as the setting of the assignment of the HP Instrument BASIC screen turning on the marker list function does not display the measured graph but instead the marker list in the upper half of the screen and the HP Instrument BAS
345. imit range center value After setting in this order press the more 3 3 to go back to the Segment Edit menu 1 3 Press the LOWER LIMIT key if the limit range was first set by the upper limit value Press the DELTA LIMIT key if it was first set by the center value The lower limit of the limit range at the start point or the differential value limit ranges of upper limit value and lower limit value is displayed in the set parameter value area on the upper left of the screen Set the lower limit value or limit differential value by one of the following methods using the keys inside the Entry block 258 Chapter 8 Step 14 Step 15 NOTE Step 16 Step 17 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Set a limit to the trace and make pass fail evaluation e Enter the value using the numeric keys 0 through 9 and and then press a unit key G n M 1 k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O to the right or left to set the value e Press the step keys T J to set the value This setting allows a new lower limit or limit differential value to be written for the lower limit differential value string LOWER or DELTA of the start point on the line of the segment being edited in the limit line table Operate the more 1 3 STOP keys The current stop value of the segment is displayed in the set parameter value area on the upper left of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the
346. imum value search Search MAX the minimum value search Search MIN target value search Search TARGET peak search Search PEAK and equivalent circuit analysis Display more 1 2 EQUIV CKT CALCULATE PARAMETERS are executed over the entire sweep range The range to be searched can be specified by following these steps When sweep type is other than list sweep Activate the trace in which you want to specify a partial search range Active Trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Press the Search key to display the Search menu Press the SEARCH RANGE MENU key to display the Search Range menu Press the MINIMUM key to display the lower limit of the current partial search range in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the lower limit of the partial search range e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 Jand and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TW to set the desired value Press the MAXIMUM key to display the upper limit of the current partial search range in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the upper limit of the partial searc
347. ing the sweep cycle Press the Display key to display the Display menu Press the OSC MON on OFF key to turn on the test signal level monitor feature pressing this key toggles your selection Softkey Labels Description OSC MON ON off Indicates that the test signal level monitor feature is enabled OSC MON on OFF Indicates that the test signal level monitor feature is disabled If the sweep cycle is currently in the hold state specify the number of sweep cycles see Specifying Sweep Times and Stopping Sweep on page 114 and then start testing the DUT by specifying the trigger source see Selecting a Method to Start Measurement Trigger Source on page 111 Alternatively you can use the continuous sweep mode by implementing a free run trigger The Agilent 4294A does not monitor the test signal level until you start testing the DUT Using the test signal level monitor feature in conjunction with a manual sweep allows you to both determine the characteristic value and monitor the test signal level at your desired measuring point For more information on manual sweep refer to Manual Sweep Measurement at a Specified Point on page 100 Once you have turned on or off the test signal level monitor feature that setting is applied to both Traces A and B Chapter 7 189 Figure 7 25 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Monitoring the Test Signal Level AC
348. ining Standard Values for User Calibration 0 0 cece cee eee ee 148 Port Extension Compensation s sprees siae eRe aE a eect e eee ene n eens 150 Fixture Compensation se Je heite a dd ada ia eda ed dashed aie data dst 151 Fixture compensation procedure 1 0 0 ec p E EEE E EASRA E 151 Turning the fixture compensation on or off 0 2 eee cee eens 152 Defining the standard values for fixture compensation 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 152 Selecting Calibration Compensation Data Points 0 0 cee eee eee 155 List of fixed calibration compensation frequency points 0 0 0 eee eee ee eee 156 7 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Selecting the Measurement Parameters 00 0 ec eee rr 158 Selecting the Graph Axis Format 1 0 0 ec saeti een iae ences 160 When Using Cartesian Coordinates 0 0 0 cee eee nes 160 When Using Complex Parameters COMPLEX Z Y 0 0 cece eee eee 162 Autozscaling the Traces cea y eaten wt el alg ee Beedle we tte hie MS dak ath ce Mc 164 Manual Scale Setting for measurements other than COMPLEX Z Y 0 0 cece eee eee 166 Scaling the Trace Based on the Reference Line and Resolution per Division 166 Scaling the Trace Based on the Top and Bottom Values 0 0 0 ce eee cece eee eee 169 Manually Scaling the Active Trace fora COMPLEX Z Y Graph 0 000 000 eee eee 172 Scaling the Active Trace fora C
349. int in the delta marker on the trace mode TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 20 n 3 02058 ka SCALE 26 div REF Ge So eee ea EEE EEE 5 kHz T hacen torenens cere FOE ee ere eee Af Aike Cel VAC IAC w IDC CENTER 166 MHz OSC 500 mvolt SPAN 26 kHz 4294a0j112 220 Chapter 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Reading the difference from the reference point on the screen delta marker Figure 8 5 Displayed difference from the reference point in the fixed delta marker mode A 2 TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 1 ke 1 14498 ka 45 Hz sessing i Beta Cel VAC TAC WFIbe CENTER 100 0065 MHz OSC 500 mvolt SPAN 5 kHz Marker STIMULUS FAL A 100 006 MHz 2 kg D 450 Hz 1 14488 k 4294a0j113 Chapter 8 221 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Reading actual measurement points only reading interpolated values between measurement points Reading actual measurement points only reading interpolated values between measurement points The preset setting allows you to read in addition to actual measurement points on the trace any point between measurement points by an interpolation calculation using the marker for example you can directly enter the sweep parameter value of the desired destination with the numeric keys to move the marker to that point This can be done because the marker interpolation mode is selected as the preset setting Follow the step
350. ion Copy Contents menu on page RESD 416 Table B 103 List sweep segment copy start Copy Contents menu Key operation Copy SELECT CONTENTS LIST SWEEP SEGMENTS this is set to on the current time and date are printed first and then the specified screen information is printed This configuration is common to the TIME on OFF key in Table B 100 Copy configuration Copy Setup menu 2 2 on page 416 Softkey Function GPIB command START Prints the list sweep table displayed on the screen with the printer connected to PRINALL the printer parallel port on the rear panel Note that the information is not displayed on the screen if you have not selected the ALL INSTUMENT key or the HALF INSTR HALF BASIC key in Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 ABORT Aborts the printing operation COPA TIME on OFF Toggles on and off the time stamp function used when outputting to a printer If COPT ONIOFF 416 DISP MODE Selects start value and stop value STRT STP or center value and span value DISMPRM CTR SPAN as the display format of the sweep range of the printed list sweep STSPICTSP table NEXT PAGE Displays the next page of the list displayed on the screen NEXP PREV PAGE Displays the previous page of the list displayed on the screen PREP RESTORE DISPLAY gt Displays Table B 101 Copy data selection Copy Contents menu on page RESD
351. ion menu When a storage device is selected the current directory the current location in the 306 Chapter 9 NOTE Table 9 13 Step 8 Step 9 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Managing Files hierarchical tree structure used to store files at that time and the amount of available space on the storage device are displayed in the upper left area of the screen No name is assigned to the highest level directory called the root directory and only is displayed The four softkey labels at the top of the File Selection menu show the list of files and directories other than program files under the current directory on the storage device selected with the STORE DEV key This list is made in alphabetical order If there are more than four files or directories the first four are displayed If the copy source file is not displayed as a softkey label follow these steps to display the target file as a softkey label e You can scroll the softkey label file directory list by using the softkeys on the File Selection menu Table 9 11 Function Key operation Displays the previous page of the list PREV FILES Displays the next page of the list NEXT FILES e To move to another directory press the softkey of the desired directory name Table 9 12 Function Key operation Moves to the specified directory and displays Directory name the names of the files and directories under it Moves to the parent
352. ired a GP IB command CALST ON COMCA ON COMCB ON or COMCC ON to turn on the user calibration function or fixture compensation function is sent Valid error coefficients are not detected and the command is invalid For user calibration it is necessary to measure all calibration standards OPEN SHORT LOAD and acquire error coefficients based on the measurement On the other hand for fixture compensation it is necessary to measure a calibration standard OPEN SHORT or LOAD corresponding to the fixture compensation function OPEN compensation function SHORT compensation function or LOAD compensation function you select and obtain error coefficients based on the measurement Cannot create program Programs cannot be created Insufficient memory is suspected CAN T CALCULATE EQUIVALENT PARAMETERS Because measurement data does not match the selected equivalent circuit equivalent circuit parameters cannot be calculated Acquire data again or select another equivalent circuit CAN T CHANGE ANOTHER CONTROLLER ON BUS When an active controller is on the same GP IB bus you attempt to set the Agilent 4294A as a system controller Unless another active controller is removed from the same GP IB bus you cannot set the 4294A as a system controller CAN T CHANGE ON LIST SWEEP When the sweep type is set to the list sweep you attempt to execute a command to specify the lower limit of a partial search range SEARMIN or a command to specify
353. is a total of 801 more 1 3 Displays Table B 49 Segment edit Edit Segment menu 2 3 on page 383 N A done Stores the edited list sweep segment and returns to Table B 47 List sweep List SDON Sweep menu on page 382 cancel Cancels the editing of the list sweep segment and returns to Table B 47 List SQUI 1 The frequency range specified for each segment may overlap the frequency ranges of other segments Table B 49 Key operation Segment edit Edit Segment menu 2 3 Sweep EDIT LIST EDIT more 1 3 Sweep EDIT LIST ADD more 1 3 Softkey Function GPIB command OSC MODE Switches the oscillator level of the list sweep segment between the voltage POWMOD source mode VOLT and the current source mode CURR VOLTICURR OSC LEVEL Sets the oscillator level of the list sweep segment POWE lt value gt Appendix B 383 Table B 49 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Sweep key Segment edit Edit Segment menu 2 3 Sweep EDIT LIST EDIT more 1 3 Sweep EDIT LIST ADD more 1 3 Softkey Function GPIB command BIAS MODE gt Displays Table B 51 DC bias mode DC Bias Mode menu on page 385 In of the softkey label the currently selected dc bias mode voltage mode VOLT or current mode CURR is displayed N A DC BIAS VOLTAGE Sets the de bias voltage of
354. is key Refer to Table B 43 Sweep Sweep menu on page 381 for the MANUAL SWP on OFF key MKRMAMP MKR OFFSET Substitutes the sweep parameter value at the main marker on the current active trace A or B into the offset value Refer to Table B 43 Sweep Sweep menu on page 381 for the OFFSET key MKROFS more 1 2 Displays Table B 63 Marker Marker gt Zoom menu 2 2 on page 393 N A Table B 63 Key operation Marker Marker Zoom menu 2 2 Marker more 1 2 Softkey Function GPIB command PEAK CENTER Searches for a peak on the current active trace A or B and substitutes the sweep parameter value at the point into the sweep center value In other words the sweep range is changed by using the peak in the trace as the new sweep center value If no peak was detected due to the shape of the trace PEAK NOT FOUND is displayed at the upper left of the screen PEAKCENT Appendix B 393 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Marker key Table B 63 Marker Marker Zoom menu 2 2 Key operation Marker gt more 1 2 Softkey Function GPIB command MKR ZOOM Substitutes the sweep parameter value at the main marker on the current active MKRZM trace A or B into the sweep center value and simultaneously changes the current sweep span value to the sweep span value specified with the
355. it 1 5062 3979 Rack Mount Kit 1 5062 3985 Rack Mount amp Handle Kit 1 1 The number of x in the part number of each manual or sample program disk 0 for the first edition is incremented by 1 each time a revision is made The lat est edition comes with the product 2 Not supplied unless the product is purchased with Option OBW 3 Not supplied if the product is purchased with Option 1A2 without keyboard 18 Chapter 1 Installation Incoming Inspection Not supplied unless the product is purchased with option ID5 High Stability Frequency Reference Not supplied unless the product is purchased with Option ICN Not supplied unless the product is purchased with option 1CM 7 Not supplied unless the product is purchased with Option ICP nN Chapter 1 19 Figure 1 1 Installation Precautions to Take Before Setting Up the Power Supply Precautions to Take Before Setting Up the Power Supply Before supplying electrical power to the Agilent 4294A make sure that the correct fuse is selected Be sure to use a power source that meets the specifications listed later in this section AN Setting Up and Replacing the Fuse The Agilent 4294A requires the following fuse UL CSA type time delay 5 A 250 Vac Agilent part number 2110 0030 Spare fuses are available from your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office You can check and replace the fuse by dismounting the fuse folder shown in F
356. it test Limit Test menu on page 406 The limit line table before the editing remains unchanged N A Table B 84 Key operation Segment edit Edit Limit menu 1 3 System LIMIT TEST EDIT LIMIT LINE EDIT System LIMIT TEST EDIT LIMIT LINE ADD Softkey Function GPIB command START Sets the sweep start value of the segment LIMSTAR lt value gt UPPER LIMIT Sets the upper limit of the measured value at the sweep start point of the segment Be sure to set both the upper limit and the lower limit If an upper limit is not required set an extremely large value for example 1G as the upper limit If you set the upper limit smaller than the lower limit both limits are set to the newly entered value automatically LIMUSTAR lt value gt LOWER LIMIT Sets the lower limit of the measured value at the sweep start point of the segment Be sure to set both the upper limit and the lower limit If a lower limit is not required set an extremely small value for example 1G as the lower limit If you set the lower limit greater than the upper limit both limits are set to the newly entered value automatically LIMLSTAR lt value gt Appendix B 407 Table B 84 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the System key Segment edit Edit Limit menu 1 3 System LIMIT TEST EDIT LIMIT LINE EDIT System LIMIT TEST E
357. ithmic sweep as the sweep type setting the actual measurement points are automatically determined depending on the settings of the sweep range and the number of measurement points For a list sweep on the other hand the user sets the number of measurement points oscillator level dc bias level measurement bandwidth and point averaging count for individual frequency sweep range units called segments and then all of the segments are swept in a single sweep in the specified order The advantage of a list sweep is that by setting efficient and optimum measurement conditions for each specified frequency range segment the efficiency speed of measurement for a single sweep can be improved Furthermore a list sweep permits the following strategies e You can perform sweep measurement for the range of your interest skipping frequency ranges you do not need to measure e You can set optimum measurement conditions for each specified frequency range segment For example for segments you want to measure with higher stability higher accuracy and higher finer frequency resolution you can increase the averaging count the measurement bandwidth and the number of measurement points while for other segments specifying conditions to speed up the measurement e You can use the list sweep to compare traces under different measurement conditions For example by setting all segments to the same frequency range and changing conditions such as o
358. ivalent parallel capacitance value for LOAD standard SHORT RESIST R Definition of equivalent series resistance value for SHORT standard usual definition SHORT INDUCT L Definition of equivalent series inductance value for SHORT standard usual definition LOAD RESIST R Definition of equivalent series resistance value for OPEN standard set to maximum setting value 100 GQ LOAD INDUCT L Definition of equivalent series inductance value for OPEN standard set to 0 H These irregular settings are required because the standard value of the Agilent 4294A is defined as a series circuit model of resistance R and inductance L as shown in Figure 6 9 on page 153 while the 16451B usually requires a parallel circuit of capacitance C and conductance G for LOAD compensation 136 Chapter 6 Calibration C Calibration for Four Terminal Pair 2 m Extension C Calibration for Four Terminal Pair 2 m Extension This section describes the calibration procedures to follow when the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A is extended with a 2 meter long four terminal pair configuration and the device is connected to the cable s end with a minimal connection Figure 6 3 Calibration for Four terminal Pair 2 m Extension H anog gang m amp Ee ane EXE annm m fam Soo SS T
359. ivalent to the SUB MKR key on the Marker menu displayed by pressing the Marker key For how to use the sub marker refer to Listing data at several points on the trace on page 214 Figure 8 10 Search the maximum peak of IZI using the PEAK key ot Iz 5 ka BOTTOM 20 4 2 8312 ka TOP SCALE 24 div REF B 100 ADAS MHz VAC TAC w IDC CENTER 100 04805 MHz OSC 500 mvolt SPAH 200 kHz 4294a0j059 Chapter 8 229 Analysis and Processing of Result Search the maximum minimum peak Figure 8 11 Search the next peak after Figure 8 10 using the NEXT PEAK key A IZI TOP 5 ka BOTTOM z 648 47 n B 0z SCALE 26 fdiv REF 100 B3805 MHz WAC IAC i i VFIDC aoe CENTER 106 048505 MHz OSC 5 m olt SPAN 268 kHz 4294a0j060 Figure 8 12 Search the right hand peak after Figure 8 11 using the NEXT PEAK RIGHT key A Z TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 20 9 387 25 9 E z SCALE 26 fdiv REF Be E ee i eee E Poe ee T 100 A8 05 MHz VAC TAC FIDE CENTER 100 04605 MHz OSC 568 m olt SPAN 266 kHz 4294a0j061 230 Chapter 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Search the maximum minimum peak Figure 8 13 Search the left hand peak after Figure 8 11 using the NEXT PEAK LEFT key A IZI TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 24 a 442 59 Q B SCALE i 26 cfdiv REF Ge Lashewes tates cbent nage Taa TER T A A EA La 100 B2405 MHZ CMP feee VAC IAC VFIDC CENTER 106 045605 Mhz OSC 500 m vo
360. ize the Agilent 4294A to the Preset State Press the Preset key to initialize the Agilent 4294A This puts the Agilent 4294A into its preset state If you turn on the Agilent 4294A with a power on setting file residing on the flash memory nonvolatile memory disk or on a floppy disk inserted in the floppy disk drive the file is automatically loaded and the settings contained in the file are restored Initializing the Agilent 4294A to its preset state ensures that no specific settings are inherited from the last measurement session Therefore you should initialize the Agilent 4294A by pressing the Preset key whenever you are configuring it for a new measurement session regardless of whether you turned the instrument off and back on after the previous session Note that initializing the Agilent 4294A with the Preset key does not affect which type of adapter the instrument is configured to use Once you have set the adapter type the setting is retained until you select another adapter type Select IZl 0 as the Measurement Parameter To select the measurement parameter follow these steps Press the Meas key to display the Measurement Parameter menu Make sure that the Z 6 key is selected this key is selected by default in the preset state With the Z 6 key selected Trace A reflects the absolute impedance value while Trace B reflects the impedance phase Select Frequency as the Sweep Parameter Press the Sweep key to display t
361. k is not defined in advance search will be done according to the definition of the peak at initialization When multiple peaks are present the main marker will go to the peak where the measurement parameter value is maximum if the peak polarity is defined as positive The main marker will go to the peak where the measurement parameter value is minimum if the peak polarity is defined as negative For details on the peak definition see the description Define the Peak on page 232 In the presence of multiple peaks use the softkey of the target menu to move the main marker to a peak as shown below Peak search type Key operation Search the maximum peak the same function as that of Step 3 Search the maximum peak out of the peaks smaller than the measurement parameter of the current main marker Search peaks in the left direction direction of decreasing sweep parameter values from the current marker and move the main marker to the first detected peak Search peaks in the right direction direction of increasing sweep parameter values from the current marker and move the main marker to the first detected peak PEAK NEXT PEAK NEXT PEAK LEFT NEXT PEAK RIGHT After moving the main marker to each peak you can use the SUB MKR key in the same 228 Chapter 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Search the maximum minimum peak Peak menu to also place the sub marker at that peak This SUB MKR key is equ
362. ker and the delta marker refer to Chapter 8 Analysis and Processing of Result on page 211 2 Refer to Search the maximum minimum peak on page 228 and Define the Peak on page 232 for information on the peak search function 3 For the ratio of the new sweep span value to the current sweep span value you can set a value between 0 01 and 100 in steps of 0 01 The power on and preset set tings are both 10 NOTE After you change the sweep range the trace for the new sweep range will not be displayed unless you perform a new sweep measurement Figure 5 6 Before MKR gt CENTER A Z TOF 5 ka BOTTOM 56 a 296 71 2 B 6z SCALE 36 div REF Be 67 565 g g 1ga 0024636 MHz VAC TAC VFIDC CENTER 168 8339836 MHz OSC 566 mvolt SPAN 188 kHz 4294a0j012 Chapter 5 91 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting Sweep Range Figure 5 7 After MKR CENTER A Z TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 56 a 297 19 4 B z SCALE 36 div REF Be 67 457 CMP re er ere E a E E eer bl WAC IAC VFIBC CENTER 166 0024636 MHz OSC 500 mVolt SPAM 1 kHz 4294a0j013 Figure 5 8 A IZI TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 26 4 247 296 4 B Bz SCALE 26 div REF B 26 5832 Erke 100 8335 MHz Chi feei Sepsis es ATD eee hain VAC TAC YZ IDC CENTER 100 MHz OSC 566 m olt SPAN 166 kHz 4294a0j114 92 Chapter 5 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting Sweep
363. key Data trace Memory trace Press DATA Hidden DATA 180 Chapter 7 Step 10 NOTE Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Trace based Comparison and Calculation Data trace Memory trace Press Hidden MEM MEMORY DATA MEM DATA and MEMORY DATA MEM Hidden DATA MEMORY DATA MEM 106 Hidden DELTA MEM DATA MEM Hidden DATA MEM In the table above DATA represents the current measurement data while MEM represents the data captured by pressing the DATA gt MEMORY key Start testing the DUT to obtain the measurement data for comparison or calculation with the reference measurement data you stored into the memory trace in step 5 if the sweep cycle is in the hold state you can restart the measurement by pressing the Trigger key If the number of measuring points you specify in step 10 is different than the measurement data stored in the memory trace then the memory trace is cleared and the data trace will display only the measurement data this is equivalent to pressing the DATA key The DELTA key is not available when your measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y Conversely the DATA MEM key is available only when your measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y If you specify an offset value the data trace displays the result of subtracting the offset value from the specific type of data that corresponds to the display option you selected in step 9 For more information on setting an offset value refer
364. keys displayed by pressing the Copy key Copy Copy menu Copy Softkey Function GPIB command START Starts printing the measurement graph displayed on the screen with the printer PRINALL connected to the printer parallel port on the rear panel Note that the measurement graph is not displayed on the screen if you have not selected the ALL INSTUMENT key or the HALF INSTR HALF BASIC key in Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 ABORT Aborts the printing operation COPA SETUP gt Displays Table B 99 Copy configuration Copy Setup menu 1 2 on page N A 415 DEFAULT SETTING Resets the configurations changed with the above SETUP key to the initial DFLT values print resolution 75 dpi form feed ON form orientation portrait softkey label print OFF top margin 1 0 inch left margin 1 0 inch SELECT CONTENTS gt Displays Table B 101 Copy data selection Copy Contents menu on page N A 416 Table B 99 Key operation Copy configuration Copy Setup menu 1 2 Copy SETUP Softkey Function GPIB command B amp W Selects black and white printing PRIC STAN FIXED COLOR Selects the print mode in which information on the screen is printed using preset PRIC FIXE colors IMAGE COLOR Selects the print mode in which colors as close as possible to those on the screen PRIC VARI are used You can change the colors
365. keystroke sequence to enter a value of 100 may be expressed as 1 0 0 1 ACTIVE TRACE block With the Agilent 4294A you can view two traces waveforms for each sweep cycle Trace A and Trace B Some parameters such as the sweep range apply to both traces while other parameters can be separately configured for each trace You can use the A or B key in the Active Trace block to choose between Traces A and B Once you have activated either trace you can configure measurement conditions and perform analysis on that active trace When you set measurement conditions be aware of which trace is currently active A key Activates Trace A so you can set conditions and perform analysis on Trace A B key Activates Trace B so you can set conditions and perform analysis on Trace B 2 MEASUREMENT Block This block provides keys for configuring all measurement conditions except the test signal settings Meas key Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you select measurement parameters Format key Provides access to softkey menus that let you select the data display format graph axis format and set up the phase display unit and phase expansion feature Display key Provides access to softkey menus that let you configure general display options except the display format and scale setting and perform equivalent circuit analysis Scale Ref key Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you configure graph scal
366. lated values between measurement points 222 Search the maximum minimum measurements s uss suuren ur rrr ereere reee eee 223 Search the point of target measurement 0 0 eee eee e eee 225 Search the maximum minimum peak 2 0 0 00 ee eee tence eee 228 Dehine the Peaki yee roerien tad a aie ee eee Ae Pak BERRA urn Ra Sa ae hd eee 232 Definition of peak polarity 2 0 cc nee eee ee een eae 232 Define peak sharpness sre apni ee give stele heS ae an a MOREL a a a Suede ghee boy des Sonn 233 Define peak sharpness using a peak on the trace 2 eee ee 233 Automatically performing search for each sweep search tracking 00 0 0 0 2 eee eee 235 Analyze trac e bandwidth sieer asnan Wane Gl ne Pea ea a ea ewe bee bee eboney 236 Definitions of parameters in the trace bandwidth analysis 00 0 0 eee ee eee eee 236 Define the cutoff point in trace bandwidth analysis 00 0 eee eee eee 238 Setting the delta marker in the trace bandwidth analysis 00 0 0 cece eee eee 239 Implement trace bandwidth analysis 0 0 e ene ae 240 Set the marker separately for either trace Aor B cece ee 243 Selecting target trace data or memory for marker analysis 0 0 0 0 cee ee eee eee eee 244 Selecting the sweep parameter value of the marker display as time from start or relaxation time 245 Clearing turning off the marker from the screen 0 0 eee eee ee
367. lates statistics mean value standard deviation peak to peak value and displays them If the partial search function is off statistics are calculated for the entire trace MEASTAT ONIOFF MKR X AXIS gt Displays Table B 72 Marker X axis MKR X Axis menu on page 400 In N A of the softkey label the currently selected marker s X axis is displayed sweep parameter STIM sweep lapse time TIME or relief time 1 27F LEVEL MON gt Displays Table B 73 Level monitor Level Mon menu on page 401 N A Table B 72 Key operation Marker X axis MKR X Axis menu Utility MKR X AXIS Softkey Function GPIB command STIMULUS TIME 1 QnE For the marker on the current active trace A or B selects the sweep parameter value as the value displayed in the X axis If A marker is used the value of the sweep parameter value relative to the position of the A marker is displayed MKRXUNIT STIM For the marker on the current active trace A or B selects time as the value displayed in the X axis Time means the elapsed time between the start of the sweep and the marker position In this configuration the sweep start position is zero and the sweep stop position is the sweep time This function is useful when setting the sweep span to zero zero span measurement and evaluating the change in a DUT with respect to time at a fixed frequency If the A marker i
368. lder message with 1 After re displaying a needed instrument message the most recent instrument message can be displayed again by pressing the Entry Off key once to clear the instrument message You can then use the above procedure to re display any other stored message you need When the oldest message stored is displayed by repeatedly pressing the RECALL MESSAGE key another pressing of the key returns to the first message displayed Up to 32 messages can be stored However if you turn on the power again after shutting down the device or execute presetting with the Preset key they are deleted If no instrument message is stored pressing the RECALL MESSAGE key displays 0 MESSAGE EMPTY You cannot save accumulated instrument messages by using the procedures described in Save the setting state calibration data and memory array State Save on page 271 298 Chapter 9 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Table 9 1 NOTE Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Step 6 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Seitting Checking the Internal Clock Setting Checking the Internal Clock The Agilent 4294A has a built in clock that maintains the current date and time This internal clock is used for time stamps when outputting to a printer printing the date and time for recording the date and time when saving internal data or HP Instrument BASIC programs to a file and for other functions requiring date time recording Follow
369. le making all of the data visible within the graph Figure 7 5 Before auto scaling A IZI TOP 1 Ma yee la M B z SCALE 36 div REF ge CMP Hid EKEREF i pekini VAC IAC START 48 Hz OSC 586 molt 570 4294a0j024 164 Chapter 7 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Figure 7 6 After auto scaling A IZI TOP 564 Ma BOTTOM 26 a B z SCALE 36 odiv REF ge CMP e Hid VAC IAC START 48 Hz OSC 588 mVolt 4294a0j025 Auto scaling the Trace NOTE When you have both the data and memory traces displayed you can specify which trace type you want auto scaled For more information refer to Selecting the Target Trace Type Data or Memory on page 177 Chapter 7 165 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Manual Scale Setting for measurements other than COMPLEX Z Y Manual Scale Setting for measurements other than COMPLEX Z Y This section describes how to manually scale the active trace for a Cartesian coordinate graph Note that these procedures do not apply when the Agilent 4294A is configured to perform a COMPLEX Z Y measurement complex impedance for Trace A complex admittance for Trace B Scaling the Trace Based on the Reference Line and Resolution per Division When the vertical axis is linear you can scale the trace by first specifying where to position the reference line and what value to
370. le Options OPTION 900 7 OPTION 901 Australia New Zealand Plug BS 1363 A 250V 10A Plug AS 3112 250V 10A Cable 8120 1351 Cable 8120 1369 OPTION 902 Continental Europe OPTION 903 U S Canada Plug CEE 7 Standard Sheet VII 250V 10A Plug NEMA 5 15P 125V 10A Cable 8120 1689 Cable 8120 1378 OPTION 904 U S Canada OPTION 906 Switzerland Plug NEMA 6 15P 250V 6A Plug SEV Type 12 250V 10A Cable 8120 0698 Cable 8120 2104 OPTION 912 Denmark OPTION 917 India Republic of S Africa Plug SR 107 2 D 250V 10A q Plug IEC 83 B1 250V 10A Cable 8120 2956 Cable 8120 4211 OPTION 918 OPTION 920 Argentina Plug JIS C 8303 125V 12A Plug Argentine Resolution 63 Annex IV 250V 10A Cable 8120 4753 Cable 8120 6870 OPTION 921 OPTION 922 Plug CEI 23 16 250V 10A Plug GB 1002 250V 10A Cable 8120 6978 Cable 8120 8376 If you want to use a power cable other than the supplied one contact your nearest Agilent sales office for information 4287a0j005 22 Chapter 1 Installation Connecting the BNC Adapter for Option 1D5 Only Connecting the BNC Adapter for Option 1D5 Only When Option 1D5 is installed connect the BNC cable that comes with this option between the REF OVEN and EXT REF INPUT connectors on the rear panel of the Agilent 4294A Option 1D5 makes the frequency of the Agilent 4294A s test signal both more stable and more accurate Figure 1 3 Connecting the BNC Adapter for
371. le span SINGLE or segment span SEGMENT Single SINGLEISEGMENT Table B 44 Key operation Sweep parameter Sweep Param menu Sweep PARAMETER Softkey Function GPIB command FREQ Selects frequency as the sweep parameter SWPP FREQ OSC LEVEL Selects oscillator level as the sweep parameter SWPP OLEV DC BIAS Selects dc bias as the sweep parameter SWPP DCB Appendix B 381 Table B 44 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Sweep key Sweep parameter Sweep Param menu Sweep PARAMETER Softkey Function GPIB command return Returns to Table B 43 Sweep Sweep menu on page 381 N A Table B 45 Key operation Sweep time Sweep Time menu Sweep TIME Softkey Function GPIB command SWEEP TIME Sets sweep time SWET lt value gt POINT DELAY Sets the measurement start delay time for each measurement point PDELT lt value gt SWEEP DELAY Sets the sweep start delay time for each sweep SDELT lt value gt return Returns to Table B 43 Sweep Sweep menu on page 381 N A Table B 46 Sweep type Sweep Type menu Key operation Sweep TYPE Softkey Function GPIB command LINEAR Selects the linear sweep as the sweep type The linear sweep linearly allocates SWPT LIN sweep points measurement points and performs sweeps within t
372. lect File menu on page 422 to show the list of them N A LIMIT TEST gt Displays Table B 82 Limit test Limit Test menu on page 406 N A RECALL MESSAGE Displays messages that were displayed in the message area on the screen one by one in reverse chronological order each time this key is pressed Pressing this key with the oldest stored message displayed returns to the first displayed message Up to 32 messages can be stored Pressing the Preset key to execute preset deletes all of them N A CLOCK gt Displays Table B 89 Internal clock Clock menu on page 410 The internal clock is used for time stamps TIME on OFF key in Table B 100 Copy configuration Copy Setup menu 2 2 on page 416 when outputting to a printer or for a date record when storing files N A BEEPER gt Displays Table B 92 Built in speaker Beeper menu on page 411 N A DIAGNOSTIC TEST gt Displays Table B 93 System diagnosis Diagnosis menu on page 411 N A Table B 75 HP Instrument BASIC IBASIC menu 1 3 Key operation System IBASIC BASIC program as softkeys Pressing one of other hardkeys that call softkeys causes ON KEY labels to disappear and original softkeys to be displayed again Softkey Function GPIB command Step Executes a program line by line This is useful for debugging N A Continue Resu
373. lect the measurement bandwidth Measurement bandwidth Key stroke 1 measurement speed maximized 1 FAST 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 measurement accuracy maximized 5 PRECISE Step 4 Press the return key to return to the measurement bandwidth averaging menu Note that the measurement bandwidth currently selected is displayed in the key label of the BANDWIDTH key Softkey label Selected measurement bandwidth BANDWIDTH 1 1 measurement speed maximized BANDWIDTH 2 2 BANDWIDTH 3 3 BANDWIDTH 4 4 BANDWIDTH 5 5 measurement accuracy maximized Setting a greater measurement bandwidth will improve measurement accuracy but keep in mind that this requires a longer measurement time Averaging between sweeps sweep to sweep averaging Sweep to sweep averaging computes each data point vector value based on an exponential average of consecutive sweeps weighted by a user specified averaging factor The sweep to sweep uses the algorithm shown in Equation 5 1 S Sweep To Sweep Averaging AlgorithmA T 1 1 KA 14 where 126 Chapter5 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 4 NOTE Setting Measurement Conditions Setting Measurement Accuracy Stability and Time A Sweep to sweep averaging result vector value at the measurement point when the sweep count is n S Current measurement value vector value at the measurement point when the c n 29 sweep count is n F Sweep to
374. lent 4294A in the FORM2 FORM3 or FORMS data transfer format the amount of the sent binary data is too large or data items exceed the number of points NOP set Be sure to correctly set the data to be sent or the number of points of the Agilent 4294A Too much data 442 Appendix C 210 211 113 19 142 Error messages Trigger error The received block equation or string type program data comply with the standard but the amount of data exceeds the limit that the 4294A can deal with due to memory or device specific conditions related to memory Trigger error A trigger error An error other than 211 to 219 has occurred Trigger ignored A trigger command or trigger signal is received and recognized by the 4294A but it was ignored due to the timing relationship with the 4294A for example when the 4294A was not ready to respond U Undefined header A header not defied for the Agilent 4294Ais received For example the header XYZ which is not defined for the 4294A is received UNEXPECTED DATA DETECTED During the measurement of calibration data OPEN SHORT LOAD for user calibration fixture compensation and four terminal pair extension setting abnormal data are detected and the acquisition of the calibration data is aborted Check that there is no problem in standards or setup you use W WRONG I O PORT DIRECTION For a 24 bit input output I O shared port port C and port D you attempt to
375. libration CORRECTION on OFF Off CORRECTION ON off On Defining Standard Values for User Calibration You can define standard values of OPEN SHORT and LOAD for user calibration Figure 6 8 shows the circuit models of the user calibration kit for the Agilent 4294A Circuit Models of User Calibration Kit D V r mLAN o E a5 c O OPEN SHORT e gt i C6005047 Each calibration s standard value can be confirmed and changed as follows Press the Cal key to display the Calibration Menu 148 Chapter 6 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Step 6 Calibration User Calibration Press the USER CAL key to display the User Calibration Menu Press the DEFINE VALUE key to display the Calibration Data Definition Menu Select one of the calibration data definition keys OPEN CONDUCT G OPEN CAP C SHORT RESIST R SHORT INDUCT L LOAD RESIST R or LOAD INDUCT L to confirm or set the calibration data definition Calibration Data Definition Key Stroke Equivalent parallel conductance value G of OPEN CONDUCT G OPEN standard used for user calibration preset state 0 S Equivalent parallel capacitance value C of OPEN CAP C OPEN standard used for user calibration preset state 0 F Equivalent series resistance value R of SHORT RESIST R SHORT standard used for user calibration preset state 0 Q Equivalent series inductance value L of SHORT INDUCT L SHO
376. libration Calibration User calibration Calibration performed with user defined calibration kit OPEN SHORT LOAD Port extension Compensation performed when the measurement terminal is expanded from the 7 mm connector of the 42942A Terminal Adapter or the 3 5 mm connector of the 42941 A Impedance Probe Enter electrical length or delay time for the extension Fixture compensation Compensation performed at the device contacts of the test fixture using OPEN SHORT LOAD Calibration points Fixed points or user points determined by sweep setups Measurement Accuracy Accuracy Specifications Temperature Four terminal pair port of the 4294A s front panel 23 5 C Beyond 23 5 C the measurement accuracy decreases to half the value described 7 mm port of the Within 5 C from the adapter setup temperature 42942A Terminal Measurement accuracy applies when the adapter Adapter setup is performed at 23 5 C When the adapter setup is performed beyond 23 5 C the measurement accuracy decreases to half the value described 330 Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics 3 5 mm port of the 42941A Impedance Probe Within 5 C from the adapter setup temperature Measurement accuracy applies when the adapter setup is performed at 23 5 C When the adapter setup is performed beyond 23 5 C the
377. linear format with the LIN key selected this setting is selected by default in the preset state 38 Chapter 2 Learning Operation Basics Carrying Out Measurement and Viewing Results Figure 2 6 Result of Applying the Logarithmic Format to the Graph VAC IAC VAIDC START 168 Hz OSC 560 molt STOP 100 MHz 4294a0e093 Display the Measured IZI and 0 Values in Parallel Step 1 Press the Display key to display the Display menu Step 2 Press the SPLIT on OFF key to split the screen into upper and lower halves the key label should change to SPLIT ON off Chapter 2 39 Learning Operation Basics Carrying Out Measurement and Viewing Results Figure 2 7 Displaying Traces A and B in Parallel A IZI TOP 1 M BOTTOM 14 B Bz SCALE 36 div REF Be VAC IAC VIDE START 168 Hz OSC 500 molt STOP 168 MHz 4294a0e094 NOTE You do not need to check which trace is active when you split the screen because this setting is applied to both Traces A and B Auto scale the IZI Trace Step 1 Press the A key to activate Trace A Step 2 Press the Scale Ref key to display the Scale Reference menu Step 3 Press the AUTO SCALE key to auto scale the trace for IZI Auto scale the 8 Trace Step 1 Press the B key to activate Trace B Step 2 Press the AUTO SCALE key to auto scale the trace for 0 40 Chapter 2 Learning Operation Basics Carrying Out Measurement and
378. ling or Disabling Coupled Scaling Mode When both the data and memory traces are displayed the Agilent 4294A synchronizes the scale settings between them so that changes made to the scale of either trace are automatically applied to the other This feature which is called coupled scaling mode is enabled by default when the Agilent 4294A is in its preset state However there will be times when you want to apply different scale settings to each of the data and memory traces To do so you need to disable coupled scaling mode Use the following procedure to turn on or off this feature Activate the trace for which you want to turn on or off coupled scaling mode To activate Press Trace A A Trace B B Press the Scale Ref key to display the Scale Reference menu Press the more 1 2 key to move to the second page of the Scale Reference menu This step is not applicable when the vertical axis of the graph is logarithmic or the measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y Press the D amp M COPULE on OFF or D amp M COPULE ON off key to turn on or off coupled scaling mode pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey Labels Description D amp M COPULE ON off Indicates that scaling mode is enabled enabling this mode causes the 4294A to synchronize the scale settings between the data and memory traces D amp M COPULE on OFF Indicates that coupled scaling mode is disabled disabling this mode allows you to set different sc
379. lt SPAN 264 kHz 4294a0j062 Step 5 Read the value displayed in the marker sweep parameter value area on the screen NOTE When the MAX MIN TARGET or PEAK key is used for searching one search is carried out for the trace when the key is pressed If the search tracking function is on search is executed every time a sweep is completed For details about the search tracking function refer to Automatically performing search for each sweep search tracking on page 235 Chapter 8 231 Figure 8 14 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Analysis and Processing of Result Define the Peak Define the Peak When peaks are defined unwanted peaks can be excluded so that only the peaks matching the definition are detected In Figure 8 14 the Agilent 4294A peaks are defined Defining the Peak Polarity POS Positive Peak L Left measurement point adjacent to positive negative peak R Right measurement point adjacent to positive negative peak Definition of detected peaks ox and fal Ex Xl POS NEG Defined using PEAK PLRTY key AX Defined using PEAK DEFAX key AY Defined using PEAK DEF AY key Negative Peak 4294a0e090 Definition of peak polarity Define the peak polarity according to the following steps Activate the trace for which the peak polarity is defined Active Trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Press the Search key to display the Search menu Press t
380. ly grasp the overall characteristics You can select the data trace or the memory trace with the SCALE FOR key in this menu SCALE DIV For the selected trace data trace memory trace of trace A B sets the amount of SCAL lt value gt each scale tick This configuration is applied commonly to the vertical Y axis scale and the horizontal X axis scale REFERENCE X VALUE Sets a value of the reference line of the horizontal X axis always located at the REFX lt value gt center of the horizontal axis REFERENCE Y VALUE Sets a value of the reference line of the vertical Y axis always located at the REFY lt value gt center of the vertical axis SCALE FOR When both the data trace and the memory trace are displayed on the screen SCAF DATAIMEMO 372 Appendix B Table B 30 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Scale Ref key Scale reference Scale Ref menu 3 Scale Ref A Softkey Function GPIB command D amp M COUPLE ON OFF When both the data trace and the memory trace are displayed on the screen selects performing the scale configurations in this menu for both the data trace and the memory trace together couple on or for each of them separately couple off SCAC ONIOFF 1 When the measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y and the display format is COMPLEX Key operation Meas more 1 3 more 2 3 COMPLEX Z Y Format COMPLEX
381. m on 0 6 0 95 0 8 1 5 40Hz 100Hz 800Hz Q 1MHz 15MHz 110MHz SMR 50mk x 100 SMR 100m x 100 b 40Hz 100Hz 110MHz f Frequency MHz A HP 4294A front panel 4 terminal pair port no extension B 7 mm one port with HP 42942A C Probe 3 5 mm port with HP 42941A For accuracy at probe tip add the following error factors typical Yo 2xfx0 1uS Zs 20MQ 4294a0e009 Chapter 10 339 Figure 10 4 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics Examples of Calculated Impedance Measurement Accuracy Impedance Measurement Accuracy at Four terminal Pair Port of Agilent 4294A s Front Panel Oscillator Level 0 5 Vrms 10k 100k Frequency Hz 4294a0e097 340 Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics Figure 10 5 Impedance Measurement Accuracy at 7 mm Port of 42942A Terminal Adapter Connected to the Agilent 4294A Oscillator Level 0 5 Vrms 10k 100k Frequency Hz Chapter 10 341 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics Figure 10 6 Impedance Measurement Accuracy at 3 5 mm port of 42941A Impedance Probe Connected to the Agilent 4294A Oscillator Level 0 5 Vrms 41k 410k 100k Frequency Hz 342 Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Display Functions
382. m the main marker position to both ends on the trace You define the measurement parameter value of the cutoff points by selecting assuming that the measurement parameter value of the main marker position is MKRVAL MKRVAL 2 MKRVALx J2 MALLS or a user entered value fixed value For more information on the procedure of the definition refer to Define the cutoff point in trace bandwidth analysis on page 238 At the detected cutoff points the sub markers numbered 2 and 3 will be placed 236 Chapter 8 Table 8 2 Analysis and Processing of Result Analyze trace bandwidth Definitions of parameters in trace bandwidth analysis Parameter Definition Bandwidth Indicates the interval of sweep parameter values at two cutoff points width interval between sub markers 2 and 3 in Figure 8 15 This definition does not depend on the A marker mode Center Indicates a midpoint between the sweep parameter values at two cutoff points center sweep parameter value at the position of sub marker 1 in Figure 8 15 It serves as a relative value with reference to the fixed A marker only when the fixed A marker is present Indicates value Q obtained from two cutoff points Center Width Peak Indicates the measurement parameter value at the position of the main marker marker 0 However it indicates a relative value with reference to the fixed A marker only when the fixed A marker is presen
383. marker position Marker based monitoring works using the same mechanism as but provides level values in higher resolution more digits than real time monitoring described in Monitoring the Test Signal Level on a Real time Basis on page 189 Although marker based level monitoring uses separate display fields for Traces A and B it does not depend on the active trace and provides the same level value regardless of which trace is currently active You can use Trace A s display field to monitor the test signal voltage level while using Trace B s display field to monitor the test signal current level Also you can use the display field for Trace A or B to monitor either the dc voltage bias level or the marker based dc current bias level but not both For more information on marker based dc bias level monitoring refer to Monitoring the dc Bias Level on page 193 The Marker Statistics Trace Bandwidth Analysis field for each trace is used to display one of three types of information 1 the level value monitored at the marker position 2 the marker statistics and 3 the results of trace bandwidth analysis the parenthesized numbers denote the precedence among these information types when more than one of them are enabled at the same time Chapter 7 191 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Monitoring the Test Signal Level AC Figure 7 26 Using the marker based monitoring feature to simultaneously display voltag
384. ment pressing these keys toggles your selections Softkey Label Fixture OPEN Compensation OPEN on OFF Off OPEN ON off On Softkey Label Fixture SHORT Compensation SHORT on OFF Off SHORT ON off On Softkey Label Fixture LOAD Compensation LOAD on OFF Off LOAD ON off On Defining the standard values for fixture compensation You can define standard values of OPEN SHORT and LOAD for fixture compensation 152 Chapter 6 Figure 6 9 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Calibration Fixture Compensation Figure 6 9 shows the circuit models of the fixture compensation kit used for the Agilent 4294A Circuit Models of Fixture Compensation Kit 6f gt R SR G S Le lt a b OPEN SHORT LOAD C6005047 Compensation Data Definition Each compensation standard value can be confirmed and changed as follows Press the Cal key to display the Calibration Menu Press the FIXTURE COMPEN key to display the Fixture Compensation Menu Press the DEFINE VALUE key to display the Compensation Data Definition Menu Select one of the compensation data definition keys OPEN CONDUCT G OPEN CAP C SHORT RESIST R SHORT INDUCT L LOAD RESIST R or LOAD INDUCT L to confirm or set the compensation data definition Key Stroke Equivalent parallel conductance value G of OPEN standard used for fixture compensation preset state 0 S Equivalent parallel capacitance value C of OPEN stan
385. ment accuracy of D Impedance Measurement Accuracy at Four terminal Pair Port Equation 10 1 shows the impedance measurement accuracy at the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A or at the measurement port of the 16048G 16048H Impedance Measurement Accuracy at four terminal pair port t Zs t E Ep iz t Yo Zx J x 100 Zx Where Ep Ep Epgw Eposc Ep Yo Yor Kgw KYosc X Yonc Yo S Zs Zs KgwX Kzosc X Zs Q Yo Ep Zs see Figure 10 3 on page 339 Eposc at oscillator level gt 500 mV 0 03 x 100 _ 1 Ea mV 100 at oscillator level gt 250 mV 500 lt 500 mV ee Cag 1 at oscillator level gt 125 mV 25 lt 250 mV 0 03 x Ga 1 at oscillator level gt 64 mV 125 lt 125 mV 0 03 x S 1 at oscillator level lt 64 mV f 64 1 008 Epgw 332 Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics Ky ose at oscillator level gt 500 mV 1000 at oscillator level lt 500 mV 500 Vinv Kose at oscillator level gt 500 mV 2 at oscillator level gt 250 mV 500 lt 500 mV Vinv at oscillator level gt 125 mV 250 lt 250 mV Vay at oscillator level gt 64mV 125 lt 125 mV Vav at oscillator level lt 64 mV 64 Vin Epgw at measurement BW 5 0 at measurement BW 4 frequency 50 kHz 0 03 frequency
386. menu Press the BIAS MON key to display the Bias Monitor menu To set up dc bias level monitoring press one of the following keys To Press Turn off de bias level monitoring OFF 194 Chapter 7 Step 5 NOTE Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 NOTE Step 10 NOTE Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Monitoring the dc Bias Level To Press Monitor the dc bias voltage level VOLT Monitor the dc bias current level CURRENT If the sweep cycle is currently in the hold state specify the number of sweep cycles see Specifying Sweep Times and Stopping Sweep on page 114 and then start testing the DUT by specifying the trigger source see Selecting a Method to Start Measurement Trigger Source on page 111 Alternatively you can use the continuous sweep mode by implementing a free run trigger Marker based level monitoring takes effect when you start a new sweep cycle after turning on the dc bias level monitor feature Press the Utility key to display the Utility menu The main marker appears on the trace if it is not already displayed Press the LEVEL MON key to display the Level Monitor menu Traces A and B are each associated with a field called Marker Statistics Trace Bandwidth Analysis that is used to display the dc bias level monitored at the marker position when the corresponding trace is active To activate Trace A or B press the appropriate key To activate Press
387. mes the execution of the program from the line next to the line current line N A that caused the program to pause Run Executes a program from its first line N A Pause After executing the line current line at the press of this key causes the N A execution of the program to pause Stop After executing the line current line at the press of this key aborts the N A execution of the program You cannot resume the execution of the program from the aborted line Edit gt Enters into the program edit mode and displays Table B 78 IBASIC edit N A Editor menu on page 404 In the program edit mode regardless of the setting in Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 the entire screen is set to the HP Instrument BASIC screen and the program list is displayed ON KEY LABELS Displays key labels defined using the ON KEY command in an HP Instrument N A 402 Appendix B Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the System key Table B 75 HP Instrument BASIC IBASIC menu 1 3 Key operation System IBASIC Softkey Function GPIB command more 1 3 Displays Table B 76 HP Instrument BASIC IBASIC menu 2 3 on page 403 N A Table B 76 HP Instrument BASIC IBASIC menu 2 3 Key operation System IBASIC more 1 3 Softkey Function GPIB command CAT Enters CAT in the HP Instrument BASIC command line From he
388. mory trace array data saved in the data part part of trace A TRACE A amp FORMAT LOG lt Frequency _ Memory Trace Real _ Memory Trace Imag 4 00000000000e 01_2 055326e 02_0 000000e 00 2 24493714300e 06 2 716875e 02_0 000000e 00 4 48983428600e406 5 639762e 02_0 000000e 00 Symbols in the table Linefeed _ Tab Table 8 16 shows the contents of the saved memory trace array Table 8 16 Contents of the memory trace array Setup and data array Description name TRACE A Type of trace FORMAT LOG Setup of display format Frequency Measurement frequency points Memory Trace Real Memory trace array real part Memory Trace Imag Memory trace array imaginary part Contents of the data part when saving all data items of the trace data Table 8 17 is an example of data when specifying saving all the four data items of the data trace data array memory array data trace array and memory trace array on the data save contents selection menu The four data arrays are saved as shown in Table 8 17 Table 8 17 Example of the trace data saved in the data part part of trace A TRACE A FORMAT LOG lt Frequency _ Data Real _ Data Imag _ Memory Real _ Memory Imag _ Data Trace Real _ Data Trace Imag _ Memory Trace Real _ Memory Trace Imag lt 4 00000000000e 01_1 976390e 02_5 641327e 03_1 976390e 02_5 641327e 03_2 055326e 02 _0 000000e 00_2 0
389. n Softkey label Selected sweep direction DIRECTION UP Upward from sweep start value to sweep stop value DIRECTION DOWN Downward from sweep stop value to sweep start value Setting the sweep direction is applied commonly to traces A and B Chapter 5 99 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Setting Measurement Conditions Manual Sweep Measurement at a Specified Point Manual Sweep Measurement at a Specified Point In the normal sweep mode the Agilent 4294A performs measurement by automatically changing the measurement point in response to triggering When the set of measurements performed is as many as the number of points this is regarded as one sweep On the other hand in the manual sweep mode the Agilent 4294A does not automatically change measurement points sweep and the measurement at a single point specified by the user is regarded as one sweep Since the measurement point can be arbitrarily specified by the user this function can be called a user defined manual sweep The Agilent 4294A will continue measurement sweep at the same point unless it is changed by the user Follow the steps below to execute the manual sweep Press the Sweep key to display the sweep menu Press the MANUAL SWP on OFF key to turn the manual sweep function ON This changes the softkey label to MANUAL SWP ON off At the same time the current measurement point 1 for manual sweep and sweep parameter value for the point a
390. n You can set the offset of the sweep parameter value and that of the measurement parameter value for the entire limit line set in the limit line table When the horizontal axis represents a sweep parameter axis and the vertical axis represents a measurement parameter axis these offsets allow the entire limit line to move in the vertical and horizontal directions For example this function allows the limit line to be set according to the characteristics of a particular sample to be used for other samples with different characteristics or with different measurement parameter values Press the System key to display the System menu Press the LIMIT TEST key to display the Limit Test menu Press the LIMIT LINE OFFSET key to display the Limit Line Offset menu Press the SWP PARAM OFFSET key to display the current sweep parameter offset value for the limit line in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the sweep parameter offset value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 Jand and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value 264 Chapier 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Set a limit to the trace and make pass fail evaluation Figure 8 29 Limit line movement by o
391. n Returns to Table B 114 Copy destination filename Dest File menu on page N A 423 1 The selection of the mass storage device is set independently in each of the following menus this menu Table B 79 IBASIC mass storage Mass Storage menu on page 405 and Table B 81 Mass storage Store Device menu on page 406 However there is only a single set of mass storage devices for all menu selections 424 Appendix B Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Recall key Softkeys displayed by pressing the Recall key Table B 116 Recall Select File menu Recall Softkey Function GPIB command filename This key loads the specified state file and uses the instrument configuration N A states stored in the file including the internal data array If a softkey label is a directory name is located at the end of the name pressing the key changes the current directory to the label s directory and files or subdirectories under the directory are displayed as softkey labels Pressing the directory name moves the current directory to the higher level directory filename Has the same function as above N A filename Has the same function as above N A filename Has the same function as above N A PREV FILES Displays the previous page of the filename list displayed as softkey labels N A described above NEXT FILES Displays the
392. n extension STA DAT TXT to a file name It also occurs when you attempt to execute re save of a graphics file without adding an extension TIF Invalid separator Appendix C 435 151 131 132 124 250 88 105 258 Error messages Invalid string data The parser syntax analysis program expects a separator but a character other than a separator is sent For example although should be used to separate two sent program messages such as MEAS IRIM FMT LOGY the semicolon for separating the program messages is missing as MEAS IRIM FMT LOGY Invalid string data Character string data is expected but the given string data are invalid for some reason Refer to IEEE488 2 7 7 5 2 For example the END message is received before the end quotation mark character appears Invalid suffix The suffix does not meet the syntax defined in IEEE488 2 7 7 3 2 or is inappropriate for the Agilent 4294A L LIST SWEEP ONLY When a sweep type other than the list sweep is specified you attempt to execute a command to specify all segments entire sweep range as the search range setting SEARNG FULL or a command to specify a certain segment as the search target SEGMNUM lt value gt and as a result the command is ignored Before setting the search range for the list sweep specify the list sweep as the sweep type command SWPT LIST LIST TABLE EMPTY OR INSUFFICIENT TABL
393. n page RESD 416 418 Appendix B Key Definitions Softkeys displayed by pressing the Save key Softkeys displayed by pressing the Save key Table B 105 Save Save menu Key operation Save Softkey Function GPIB command STATE gt Selects storage of the configuration states and internal data array of the Agilent SAVDSTA lt string gt 4294A and displays Table B 106 Filename entry File Name menu on page 419 DATA gt Selects storage of the internal data array of the Agilent 4294A and displays Table N A B 107 Data save Save Data menu on page 420 GRAPHICS gt Selects storage of the displayed screen in TIFF format and displays Table B 106 SAVDTIF lt string gt Filename entry File Name menu on page 419 It is stored in the colors selected in Table B 99 Copy configuration Copy Setup menu 1 2 on page 415 The softkeys are also stored RE SAVE FILE gt Displays Table B 111 File selection Select File menu on page 422 RESAVD lt string gt POWER ON CONFIG gt Displays Table B 109 Power on configuration save Save config menu on SAVPSTA page 421 FILE UTILITIES gt Displays Table B 110 File utility File Utility menu on page 421 N A STORE DEV gt Displays Table B 81 Mass storage Store Device menu on page 406 In N A of the softkey label the currently selected mass storage is displayed flexi
394. n to a procedure practice or condition that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or death to personnel This Caution sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice or condition that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product This Note sign denotes important information It calls attention to a procedure practice or condition that is essential for the user to understand Certification Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institution s calibration facility or by the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members IMPORTANT Warranty This Agilent Technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period corresponding to the individual warranty periods of its component products Instruments are warranted for a period of one year Fixtures and adapters are warranted for a period of 90 days During the warranty period Agilent Technologies will at its option either repair or replace products that prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be return
395. nagement Functions Checking the Firmware Version Checking the Firmware Version You can check the version of the installed firmware a built in program to control the Agilent 4294A by either of the following two methods Checking by Key Operation Press the System key to display the System menu Press the DIAGNOSTIC TEST key to display the Self Diagnosis menu Press the FIRMWARE REVISION key This operation displays the model number firmware version and firmware date amp time at the top of the set parameter value entry field in the upper left area of the screen Checking by Powering On Again Power on the Agilent 4294A again At power on the model number firmware version firmware date and copyright information are displayed on the screen Chapter 9 319 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Step 5 Step 1 Step 2 Setting Using Control and Management Functions Performing Self Diagnosis of the Agilent 4294A Performing Self Diagnosis of the Agilent 4294A The Agilent 4294A has a built in self test function to confirm whether it is operating normally This self diagnosis consists of three test groups internal tests external tests and display tests This section describes how to automatically execute the internal tests in a batch process that does not need special tools and is easy to perform For more information on each internal test and the external tests a
396. nd display tests refer to the Service Manual English When executing the self diagnosis Svc appears in the instrument status area in the left most area of the screen to indicate that the Agilent 4294A is in service mode status If you measure a DUT in this service mode status you cannot obtain a correct measurement result that meets the specifications After completion of the self diagnosis be sure to press the Preset key or cycle power and then check that the Svc display is no longer displayed before performing any measurement Performing the Internal Tests in a Batch Process Follow these steps to automatically perform all of the internal tests in a batch process Press the System key to display the System menu Press the DIAGNOSTIC TEST key to display the Self Diagnosis menu At this time in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen the currently selected test item is displayed together with DIAGNOSTIC TEST Press the INTERNAL TEST key to select test number 0 All internal tests In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen DIAGNOSTIC TEST 0 ALL INTERNAL is displayed Press the RUN TEST key to automatically start executing all of the internal tests While the self diagnosis is being executed at the top of the set parameter value field the current test item that is being executed if an error occurs as the test result its description is displa
397. nd PEN Sets the pen number for the trace of the list sweep segment specified by the SCOL pointer gt There are six graphics pens that have different colors See Table B 24 Item color modification Color Item menu 2 3 on page 369 or Table B 25 Item color modification Color Item menu 3 3 on page 369 to modify each pen color CLEAR LIST gt Displays Table B 52 List deletion Clear List menu on page 385 CLEL done Stores the edited list sweep table and returns to Table B 43 Sweep Sweep EDITDONE menu on page 381 cancel Cancels editing of the list sweep table and returns to Table B 43 Sweep N A Sweep menu on page 381 Table B 48 Segment edit Edit Segment menu 1 3 Key operation Sweep EDIT LIST EDIT Sweep EDIT LIST ADD sweep List Sweep menu on page 382 Softkey Function GPIB command START Sets the sweep start frequency of the list sweep segment STAR lt value gt STOP Sets the sweep stop frequency of the list sweep segment STOP lt value gt CENTER Sets the sweep center frequency of the list sweep segment CENT lt value gt SPAN Sets the sweep frequency span of the list sweep segment SPAN lt value gt NUMBER OF POINTS Sets the number of points in the list sweep segment Specify a value between 2 POIN lt value gt and 201 as the number of sweep points per segment Note that the maximum number of points in all segments
398. nd yes Starts the initialization of the mass storage disk specified with the STORE N A DEV key in Table B 110 File utility File Utility menu on page 421 Executing the initialization of the mass storage disk deletes all files on the disk When the initialization is completed returns to Table B 110 File utility File Utility menu on page 421 cancel Cancels the initialization of the mass storage disk and returns to Table B 110 N A File utility File Utility menu on page 421 Table B 114 Copy destination filename Dest File menu Key operation Save FILE UTILITIES COPY FILE filename Softkey Function GPIB command SELECT LETTER Enters a character indicated by T on the screen at the position of the cursor _ on the filename entry line N A SPACE Enters a space at the position of the cursor _ on the filename entry line N A BACK SPACE Moves the cursor _ on the filename entry line to the left and deletes the character at that position N A CLEAR NAME Deletes all entered characters on the filename entry line N A DEST DEV gt Displays Table B 115 Copy destination device Dest Device menu on page 423 In of the softkey label the currently selected mass storage is displayed flexible disk drive FLOPPY volatile memory disk MEMORY or nonvolatile memory disk flash memory FLASH
399. new sweeping starts immediately after step 2 above is performed and sweeping is put into the stopping state after a single sweep ends This means that only pressing the SINGLE key will allow you to perform a single sweep Sweep by specified times Press the Trigger key to display the trigger menu Press the NUMBER OF GROUPS key This will display the current value for the number of sweeps Sweep groups to be swept out of the specified number of sweeps in the parameter settings located in the upper left area of the screen Use the numeric keys in the ENTRY block 0 to 9 to input a new value for the number of sweeping times and then press the x1 key The number of sweeping times described above cannot be entered with the rotary knob O or step key TW Use the method selected in Selecting a Method to Start Measurement Trigger Source on page 111 to trigger When the triggered single sweep ends sweeping is put into the 114 Chapter5 NOTE NOTE Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Setting Measurement Conditions Specifying Sweep Times and Stopping Sweep stopping hold state No further sweeping can be triggered after it is stopped When the internal trigger free run is selected in Selecting a Method to Start Measurement Trigger Source on page 111 new sweeping starts immediately after step 3 above is performed and sweeping is put into the stopping state after sweeping is repeated
400. ng Files The Agilent 4294A provides three types of data storage device floppy disk drive volatile memory disk and nonvolatile memory disk flash memory This section describes how to manage data files with these devices For how to save and recall internal data refer to Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data on page 270 Creating a Directory The file management in the storage devices of the Agilent 4294A is based on the hierarchical tree structure used for the file systems of conventional personal computers Follow these steps to create a joint in the tree structure called a directory To create a directory on a floppy disk insert the disk into the floppy disk drive Press the Save key to display the Save menu Press the FILE UTILITIES key to display the File Utilities menu In of the STORE DEV key s softkey label the currently selected storage device is displayed Softkey label Selected storage device STORE DEV FLOPPY Floppy disk drive STORE DEV MEMORY Volatile memory disk STORE DEV FLASH Nonvolatile memory disk flash memory To create a directory on the currently selected storage device proceed to Step 6 To create a directory on a storage device other than the currently selected one press the STORE DEV key to display the Mass Storage menu Select the storage device on which you want to create a directory Storage device Key operation Floppy disk drive FLOPPY Volatile
401. ng the Search key Table B 68 Trace bandwidth analysis definition Widths Def menu Key operation Search WIDTHS DEF MENU Softkey Function GPIB command MKRVALAV2 l MKRVAL V2 MKRVAL2 FIXED VALUE Uses the value obtained by dividing the measurement parameter value at the main marker on the current active trace A or B by V2 as the value of the cutoff point for trace bandwidth search WIDVTYPE DIVS2 Uses the value obtained by multiplying the measurement parameter value at the main marker on the current active trace A or B by V2 as the value of the cutoff point for trace bandwidth analysis WIDVTYPE MULS2 Uses the value obtained by dividing the measurement parameter value at the main marker on the current active trace A or B by 2 as the value of the cutoff point for trace bandwidth analysis WIDVTYPE DIV2 Directly enters the cutoff point for trace bandwidth analysis WIDVTYPE FIX and WIDFVAL lt value gt SEARCH IN When the trace bandwidth analysis function is on searches for two left and right cutoff points on the trace inwardly relative to the currently displayed cutoff points and displays the parameters of the trace bandwidth analysis for the first detected cutoff points Executing this key does not change the peak values If two new cutoff points are not detected TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND is displayed in the upper left area of the screen WIDSIN SEAR
402. ng the 42942A Terminal Adapter 7 mm port or the 42941A Impedance Probe 3 5 mm port Source Characteristics Frequency Range 40 Hz to 110 MHz Resolution 1 mHz Accuracy without Option 1D5 20 ppm at 23 5 C 40 ppm at 0 to 55 C with Option 1D5 0 13 ppm at 0 to 55 C Voltage Signal Level Range 5 mVrms to 1 Vrms Resolution 1 mV Accuracy 324 Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics at four terminal pair port of 10 0 05 x f 1 mV at 23 5 C the 4294A or 7 mm port of the 42942A at measurement port of the 15 0 1 xf 1 mV at 23 5 C 42941A 16048G H NOTE f frequency MHz These characteristics apply when an OPEN is connected to each port Test signal level should be lt 0 5 Vrms when the measured impedance is lt 50 Q Beyond a temperature of 23 5 C the test signal level setting accuracy decreases to half the value described Current Signal Level Range 200 uArms to 20 mArms Resolution 20 WA Accuracy at four terminal pair port of the 4294A at lt 15 MHz 10 50 WA 10 0 2 x f2 50 uA at 23 5 C typical at gt 15 MHz 10 0 3 x f 50 uA at 23 5 C typical at 7 mm port of the 42942A at lt 5 MHz 10 50 uA 10 1x f7 50 uA at 23 5 C typic
403. nge e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value Press the Stop key This will display the current setting for the sweep stop value in the parameter settings area in the upper left part of the screen Use the keys or the rotary knob in the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the sweep stop e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value Setting sweep range with marker The sweep start value sweep stop value and sweep center value are set to the value indicated by the main marker on the trace Also the sweep span value can be set to the delta value between the main marker and A marker Specify the active trace the trace for setting as the trace having the main marker that you want to use for setting a sweep range Active trace Key stroke Trace A A Trace B B Move the main marker to the point you want to use as a new sweep start value sweep stop value or sweep center value The main marker can be moved in either of the following ways e Press the Marker key to display the current sweep parameter value showing the current main maker s position in the parameter settings area in the upper left part of the screen Then use the keys in the ENTRY block to move the main marker to
404. nitoring of the test signal level refer to Monitoring the Test Signal Level AC on page 189 The Marker Statistics Trace Bandwidth Analysis field for each trace is used to display one of three types of information 1 the level value monitored at the marker position 2 the marker statistics and 3 the results of trace bandwidth analysis the parenthesized numbers denote the precedence among these information types when more than one of them are enabled at the same time Using marker feature to determine dc bias current and test signal voltage levels A Cp SCALE 168 pF div REF 468 pF 89 182 pF B Q TOP 16 kU BOTTOM 166 U 1 5667 kU 7 k i5 Volt ve i Epl CMP Hid I5 Volt Deana au ite goss aes e eaa a a ETE TOE i ERI mon DC 85 57606 uA DC BIAS ON VAC 67 787 mvolt IAC 9 2243 uA IDC 130 uA START Volt CH 1 MHz OSC 56 mVolt STOP 16 Volt 4294a0j044 196 Chapter 7 ee Step 1 NOTE Step 2 Step 3 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Selecting the Phase Unit Selecting the Phase Unit When you are performing phase based measurement you can specify whether to use degrees or radian as the phase unit applied to the scaling and marker features Activate the trace for which you want to set the phase unit To activate Press Trace A A Trace B B To set the phase unit your parameter must be either IZI 0 IYI 0 or COMPLEX Z Y You should a
405. nments for HP Instrument BASIC Figure 7 31 Entire screen assigned to analyzer functions A IZ 5 ka BOTTOM 20 n B Bz TOP SCALE 20 div REF G wr IDC OFF VAC TAC CENTER 168 MHz OSC 566 mvolt SPAN 20 kHz 4294a0j047 Figure 7 32 Upper half assigned to analyzer functionality and lower half to HP Instrument BASIC A IZI TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 20 4 vac TAC _VFIDE OFF CENTER 166 MHz OSC 500 mvolt SPAN 26 kHz 50 ASSIGN Hp4294a TO 717 60 END IF 70 s0 OUTPUT Hp4294a TRGS INT 90 OUTPUT Hp4294a SING 100 PRINT Waiting 110 OUTPUT Hp4294a OPC 120 ENTER Hp4294a Butf 130 PRINT Sweep Complete 140 END 4294a0j048 Chapter 7 203 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Configuring the Screen Assignments for HP Instrument BASIC Figure 7 33 Entire screen assigned to HP Instrument BASIC 10 DIM Buff 9 20 IF SYSTEM SYSTEM ID HP42944 THEN 30 ASSIGN Hp4294a TO 800 40 ELSE 50 ASSIGN Hp4294a TO 717 60 END IF 70 80 OUTPUT Hp4294a TRGS INT 90 OUTPUT Hp4294a SING 100 PRINT Waiting 110 OUTPUT Hp4294a KOPC 120 ENTER Hp4294a But 130 PRINT Sweep Complete 140 END 4294a0j049 Figure 7 34 Three status lines displayed for HP Instrument BASIC A IZI TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 20 4 B Bz SCALE 26 div REF B WAC TAC i i VIDE OFF CENTER 168 MHz OSC 566 mvolt SPAN 26 kHz Name FILENAME 4294a0j050 204 Chapter 7 Step 1 Step 2 S
406. not use a user defined calibration kit Connect a test fixture to the 7 mm port of the 42942A Terminal Adapter See the operation manual of each test fixture for the appropriate connection setup Perform the fixture compensation at the device contacts electrodes of the fixture See Fixture Compensation on page 151 for the fixture compensation procedure When an exclusive test fixture is connected to the 7 mm port of a 42942A that is also connected to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A port extension compensation is not required 140 Chapter 6 Figure 6 5 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Calibration E Calibration When the 7 mm Port of the 42942A is Extended E Calibration When the 7 mm Port of the 42942A is Extended Perform the following calibration when the 7 mm port of a 42942A connected to the Agilent 4294A is extended with a one port configuration and the device is connected to the cable s end with a minimal connection Calibration When the 7 mm Port of the 42942A is Extended SER nana 55 oo foal ox nf tpt amp HOO0 AF SSS nas im ca lf nl fi a al 42942A Terminal Adapter Port Extension Compensation When user Calibration is not performed Cable Extension Port Ext
407. ntenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Addresses are provided at the back of this manual Typeface Conventions Bold Boldface type is used when a term is defined For example icons are symbols Italic Italic type is used for emphasis and for titles of manuals and other publications Hardkey Indicates a hardkey labeled Hardkey Softkey Indicates a softkey labeled Softkey Hardkey Softkey1 Softkey2 Indicates keystrokes Hardkey Softkey1 Softkey2 Agilent 4294A Documentation Map The following manuals are available for the Agilent 4294A Operation Manual Agilent P N 04294 900x0 Most of the basic information necessary for using the Agilent 4294A is provided in this manual It describes installation preparation measurement operation including calibration performances specifications key definitions and error messages For GP IB programming see the Programming Manual together with HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook Programming Manual Agilent P N 04294 900x1 The Programming Manual shows how to write and use BASIC program to control the Agilent 4294A and describes how HP Instrument BASIC works with the analyzer HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook Agilent P N E2083 90005 The HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook introduces you
408. ntensity affects the readability of softkey labels thus the operability of the Agilent 4294A Take care not to set the background intensity to an excessively high value The factory default setting of the background intensity is 0 Customizing the Color of Each Screen Item You can customize the display color of each screen item textual or graphical element Press the Display key to display the first page of the Display menu Press the more 1 2 key to move to the second page of the Display menu Press the MODIFY COLOR key to display the Modify Color menu Press the MODIFY ITEM COLOR key to display the first page of the Modify Item Color menu Select the item s you want to customize by pressing the appropriate key To customize Press Data trace and scale setting reference line for TRC A DATA Trace A Memory trace scale setting reference line and TRC A MEM LIMIT LINE limit line for Trace A Data trace and scale setting reference line for TRC B DATA Trace B Memory trace scale setting reference line and TRC B MEM LIMIT LINE limit line for Trace B Graph grid lines GRATICLULE Warning messages more 1 3 WARNING Textual items not contained in a graph suchas more 1 3 TEXT MARKER an equivalent circuit diagram or a list sweep table as well as softkey labels and markers A V Text displayed in the HP Instrument BASIC more 1 3 IBASIC area Pen 1 more 1 3 PEN 1 1 of the graphic drawing pen set 4 208 Ch
409. ntents of the memory array Setup and data array Description name TRACE A Type of trace FORMAT LOG Setup of display format Frequency Measurement frequency points Memory Real Memory array real part Memory Imag Memory array imaginary part Contents of the data part when saving the data trace array Table 8 13 is an example of the data part when specifying saving the data trace array Table 8 13 Example of the data trace array data saved in the data part part of trace A TRACE A amp FORMAT LOG lt Frequency Data Trace Real _ Data Trace Imag lt 4 00000000000e 01_2 055326e 02_0 000000e 00 2 244937 14300e 06_2 716875e 02_0 000000e 00 lt 4 48983428600e 06_5 639762e 02_0 000000e 00 Symbols in the table Linefeed _ Tab Table 8 14 shows the contents of the saved data trace array Table 8 14 Contents of the data trace array Setup and data array Description name TRACE A Type of trace FORMAT LOG Setup of display format Frequency Measurement frequency points Data Trace Real Data trace array real part Data Trace Imag Data trace array imaginary part Contents of the data part when saving the memory trace array Chapter 8 281 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data Table 8 15 is an example of the data part when specifying saving the memory trace array Table 8 15 Example of the me
410. nters MSI in the HP Instrument BASIC command line2 The character N A entry cursor is located below the second From here use the external keyboard to enter a directory name and press the Enter key The current directory changes to the specified directory return Returns to Table B 76 HP Instrument BASIC IBASIC menu 2 3 on page N A 1 The selection of the mass storage device is set independently in each of the following menus this menu Table B 81 Mass stor age Store Device menu on page 406 and Table B 115 Copy destination device Dest Device menu on page 423 How ever there is only a single set of mass storage devices for all menu selections 2 Before displaying the result in the command line you must select the BASIC STATUS key HALF INSTR HALF BASIC key or ALL BASIC key in Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 MSI is the abbreviation of MASS STRAGE IS Table B 80 Key operation IBASIC command name Command Name menu System IBASIC more 1 3 more 2 3 COMMAND ENTRY Softkey Function GPIB command SELECT LETTER Selects a character indicated by 1 on the screen and enters it N A SPACE Enters a space N A BACK SPACE Deletes the character last entered N A Appendix B 405 Table B 80 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the System key IBASIC command name Command Name
411. nu Press the LIMIT TEST on OFF key to turn execute the limit line test The set limit line will appear on the screen and the result of the limit line test will be displayed for each sweep PASS denotes acceptance while FAIL indicates rejection Softkey label Limit line test state LIMIT TEST ON off ON execute LIMIT TEST on OFF OFF don t execute Limit line test function ON example of acceptance by test A IZI TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 24 9 CMP Hid B 8z SCALE 20 efdiv REF aa aaa aes VA CENTER 106 MHz OSC 500 mvolt SPAN 26 kHz 4294a0j096 262 Chapier 8 Figure 8 27 NOTE Step 4 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Set a limit to the trace and make pass fail evaluation Limit line test function ON example of rejection by test A IZI TOP 5 ke BOTTOM 24 9 B z SCALE 26 efdiv REF ga VAC IAC VFIDE CENTER iff MHz OSC 568 mvolt SPAN 26 kHz 4294a0j097 When the limit line test is turned on the test result pass fail is output as a PASS FAIL signal through the 24 bit I O port of the rear panel Operate the BEEP FAIL on OFF or BEEP FAIL ON off key to activate a beep sound in the event that the limit line test indicates failure Softkey label Beep sound when rejected BEEP FAIL ON off ON beeps BEEP FAIL on OFF OFF doesn t beep The limit line table can be edited with the limit line test function turned on
412. o 149 occurs during the syntax analysis of a character data element Character data not allowed A character data element that does not violate the standard is received where the Agilent 4294A does not accept any character data element For example a parameter must be enclosed with double quotation marks but they are missing Character data too long The length of the character data element exceeds 12 characters Refer to TEEE488 2 7 7 1 4 Command error A comprehensive syntax error occurs for which the Agilent 4294A cannot detect further details of the error This error code simply indicates the occurrence of a command error that is defined in IEEE488 2 11 5 1 1 4 COMMAND IGNORED SEGMENT NOT DONE YET During the editing of a segment in the list sweep table or limit line table an inappropriate edit command EDIT LIML EDITLIST LIMCLEL LIMSEDI LIMSADD LIMSDEL SLEL SEDI SADD SEGM is sent and as a result the command is ignored If necessary execute SDON command to finish the editing of a list sweep segment or LIMSDON command to finish the editing of a limit segment to finish the editing of the segment and then perform the setting CURRENT EDITING SEGMENT SCRATCHED During the editing of a segment in the list sweep table or limit line table a key or command not related to edit of the table is executed and the segment being edited becomes invalid To avoid this press the done key in the segments menu
413. oe ae Ae aa He WE eee 2804 Creating a Directory gt Soa we ADA ee eG A ek BP ee OE oe oe OA Copying a Files Gm aoina Ae a AA wk Bow Be now ae dew oe Boe ee we a a BOO Deleting a File or Directory ete nga fae dee ate tht a Glee Gea tobe GS de ae 2 A309 Initializing a Recording Medium 1 ee ee ee ee ee ee 2 310 Setting Checking the GP IB p e n da dete ah EBLZ Switching between the System Conitroliee Mode and Addressable aly Mode kade end Lote Sle Setting Checking the GP IB address 2 2 ee ee ee ee ee 312 Setting Checking the LAN a 2 ee ee ee ee ee ee 314 Setting Checking the IP Address 2 ee ee ee ee es B14 Setting Checking the Gateway Address 2 2 2 ee ee ee ee ee ee S15 Setting Checking the Subnet Mask 2 2 ee ee ee ee ee ee SDT Checking the MAC Address 2 1 1 1 ee ee ee ee a 318 Checking the Firmware Version ao 6 6 ee a ee ee eee BIO Checking by Key Operation 2 0 0 0 0 cece eee ene e ence Y 319 Checking by Powering On Again 0 0 ec E O AA ent ene eae 319 Performing Self Diagnosis of the Agilent 4294A 22 320 Performing the Internal Tests in a Batch Process 1 0 00 eee eee eee 320 Contents Checking the Result of Each Test 2 0 0 ccc cece cnet 320 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics orrot rae t ta ie EE Bead E A dees gate grb an RL Aen eth 324 Measurement Parameter 2 1 we ee EA
414. of Measurement Results Customizing Intensity and Color Settings for Screen Display Customizing Intensity and Color Settings for Screen Display The Agilent 4294A allows you to customize the intensity and color settings applied to the items displayed on the screen The settings covered in this section are not affected when you initialize the Agilent 4294A by pressing the Preset key or turning the power off and back on Setting the Foreground Intensity To adjust the intensity of the text and graphics displayed on the screen follow these steps Press the Display key to display the first page of the Display menu Press the more 1 2 key the softkey displayed at the bottom to move to the second page of the Display menu Press the MODIFY COLOR key the 4th softkey from the top to display the Modify Color menu Press the INTENSITY key the softkey displayed at the top The Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen indicates the currently applied foreground intensity factor relative to the maximum intensity 100 means the highest intensity Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the foreground intensity factor relative to the maximum intensity e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TN to set the desired value The foreground in
415. oftkey Function GPIB command CAL on OFF Toggles on stores and off does not store storage of the calibration coefficient SAVCAL ONIOFF array DATA on OFF Toggles on stores and off does not store storage of the data array SAVDAT ONIOFF MEMORY on OFF Toggles on stores and off does not store storage of the memory array SAVMEM ONIOFF TRACE DATA ON off Toggles on stores and off does not store storage of the trace array SAVDTRC ONIOFF TRACE MEM ON off Toggles on stores and off does not store storage of the memory trace array SAVMTRC ONIOFF return Returns to Table B 107 Data save Save Data menu on page 420 N A 420 Appendix B Key Definitions Softkeys displayed by pressing the Save key Table B 109 Power on configuration save Save config menu Key operation Save POWER ON CONFIG Softkey Function GPIB command yes Stores the current configuration of the Agilent 4294A as the configuration at N A power on power on configuration Also returns to Table B 105 Save Save menu on page 419 cancel Cancels the storage of the power on configuration and returns to Table B 105 N A Save Save menu on page 419 Table B 110 File utility File Utility menu Key operation Save FILE UTILITIES Softkey Function GPIB command PURGE FILE gt Searches the mass storage specified
416. og or List Sweep Figure 5 4 Linear sweep A IZI TOP 5600 ka BOTTOM 18 4 B 8z SCALE 36 fdiv REF 8 WAC f zan START 4 Hz OSC 500 mVolt STOP 116 MHz 4294a0j010 Figure 5 5 Log logarithm sweep A Z TOP S500 ka BOTTOM 18 4 B z SCALE 36 div REF ge cnp WAC f START 4 Hz OSC 506 mVvolt STOP 118 MHz 4294a0j011 88 Chapter5 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting Sweep Range Setting Sweep Range Sweep range can be set by specifying either start and stop values or center and span values The measurement range can be set to trace A and trace B in common It is not necessary to select an active trace or to verify the current selection before setting the range Setting by start and stop values Press the Start key This will display the current setting for sweep start value in the parameter settings area located in the upper left part of the screen Use the keys or the rotary knob in the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the sweep start e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value Press the Stop key This will display the current setting for t
417. ogether couple on or for each of them separately couple off SCAC ONIOFF 1 When the measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y and the display format is POLAR Key operation Meas more 1 3 more 2 3 COMPLEX Z Y Format POLAR Appendix B 373 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Bw Avg key Softkeys displayed by pressing the Bw Avg key Table B 32 Measurement bandwidth averaging Bw Average menu Key operation Bw Avg Softkey Function GPIB command BANDWIDTH gt Displays Table B 33 Measurement bandwidth Bandwidth configuration menu on page 374 In the currently selected measurement bandwidth is displayed N A AVERAGING RESTART Resets the sweep to sweep averaging function so that the sweep count starts from CP at the next sweep The sweep count of the sweep to sweep averaging is displayed in the upper left area of the screen AVERREST AVERAGING on OFF For both A and B traces toggles on and off the averaging sweep to sweep averaging function that based on the sweep data obtained as many times as the specified count executes averaging and displays the result When the averaging function is on based on an exponential average of consecutive sweeps weighted by an averaging factor specified by the user with the AVERAGING FACTOR key each data point vector value is calculated and the data is displayed The numeric value displayed b
418. ompensation data acquisition is again required 1 See List of fixed calibration compensation frequency points on page 156 The calibration compensation data point selection set by the COMP POINT key is common to user calibration and fixture compensation You cannot set the selection for either one of them independently When the selection of calibration compensation data points is changed after completing user calibration or fixture compensation the obtained user calibration or fixture compensation data become invalid Therefore do not change the selection of the calibration compensation data points after completing user calibration or fixture compensation Chapter 6 155 Table 6 3 Calibration Selecting Calibration Compensation Data Points List of fixed calibration compensation frequency points When the fixed frequency points for user calibration and fixture compensation are selected softkey label COMP POINT FIXED calibration compensation is performed at the frequency points listed in Table 6 3 Fixed Calibration Compensation Points 100 points in Hz 40 45 55 70 91 130 195 320 600 1k 2 1k 4k 9 5k 21k 40k 96k 130k 170k 230k 275k 320k 400k 510k 630k 750k 800k 900k 1M 1 1M 1 1M 1 6M 1 9M 2 3M 2 6M 3M 3M 3 4M 3 8M 4 2M 4 6M 5M 5M 6M 7M 8 5M 10M 11 5M 13M 14M 15M 15M 16M 18M 20M 20M 22M 24M 26M 28M 30M 32M 34M 36M 38M 40M 42M 44M 46M
419. omplex Plane 00 ccc 172 Scaling the Active Trace for a Polar Chart 02 0 eee ce eee eee 175 Selecting the Target Trace Type Data or Memory 0 0 cece eee eee 177 Enabling or Disabling Coupled Scaling Mode 0 00 eee eee eee 178 Trace based Comparison and Calculation 0 0 00 eee cence ene nee 179 Identifying Differences between Data and Memory Traces through Comparison or Calculation 179 Subtracting an Offset Value speso net genet tenn Fea ee eh he ee ee be ee 184 Superimposing Multiple Traces 0 0 cee erer 185 Comparing traces using the list sweep function 2 0 0 0 eee cee eee eee 186 Monitoring the Test Signal Level AC 2 0 0 cence eee eee 189 12 Contents Monitoring the Test Signal Level on a Real time Basis 0 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 189 Using the Marker Feature to Determine the Test Signal Level 0 0 0005 190 Monitoring the dc Bias Level 0 6 c0 bee koe ae CHR eS SSR ESR eA Eee eas 193 Monitoring the dc Bias Level on a Real time Basis 0 0 eee 193 Using the Marker Feature to Determine the dc Bias Level 0 00 0 0 0 e eee ee eee 194 Selecting the Phase Uniti cs 53 areor e eta ee nde Gees ee eee Dee ea eee kee 197 Displaying Phase Values without Wrapping at 180 2 eee eee ee 198 Hiding the Non active Trace 0 2 cece nent eben eens 199 Splitting the Graphe lt i s scsi eas Seis
420. on the screen in Table B 22 Display color modification Modify Color menu on page 368 DPI Sets the resolution in DPI dot inch of the printer used You can specify the DPI lt value gt resolution within a range of 75 600 dpi TOP MARGIN Sets the margin at the top of printed forms in inches You can specify the margin TMARG lt value gt within a range of 0 5 inches in steps of 0 1 inch LFT MARGIN Sets the margin at the left side of printed forms in inches You can specify the LMARG lt value gt margin within a range of 0 5 inches in steps of 0 1 inch more 1 2 Displays Table B 100 Copy configuration Copy Setup menu 2 2 on page N A 416 return Returns to Table B 98 Copy Copy menu on page 415 N A 1 Print colors may differ from those displayed on the screen due to the ink used by your printer The background in printing is always set to white Appendix B 415 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Copy key Table B 100 Copy configuration Copy Setup menu 2 2 Key operation Copy SETUP more 1 2 Softkey Function GPIB command LANDSCAPE on OFF Toggles on and off the print mode for using forms in the horizontal orientation landscape If your printer does not support landscape orientation this setting is invalid LANDSCAPE ONIOFF FORM FEED ON off Toggles on and off the function form feed to automatically feed ej
421. ons 6 INSTRUMENT STATE Block Provides keys for configuring basic instrument settings that are not directly related to Chapter 3 47 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display Front Panel measurement or analysis System key Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you control and manage the entire instrument You can also set up the limit line test function Local key Pressing this key switches the Agilent 4294A from remote mode in which it is controlled by an external controller to local mode in which it accepts keystrokes from its front panel While the instrument is in remote mode the Rmt LED above this key is lit This key also provides access to a softkey menu that lets you configure the GP IB and LAN settings Preset key Initializes the Agilent 4294A to its preset state No softkey menu is displayed after you put the instrument into the preset state by pressing this key but you can display a softkey menu by pressing one of the hardkeys associated with softkey menus Copy key Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you control how to output the screen contents to the printer Save key Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you save such information as the current settings measurement data and screen contents to the storage device of the Agilent 4294A Recall key Provides access to a softkey menu that lets you recall load a state file from the storage device of the Agilent 4294A to restore
422. orage device selection using System IBASIC more 1 3 MASS STORE is applicable when using the storage devices of the Agilent 4294A through the HP Instrument BASIC function It is different from the storage device selection using the STORE DEV key However the storage devices themselves are the same Step 4 Press the return key to return to the Recall menu The selected storage device is displayed in the box of the key label of the STORE DEV key Softkey label Selected storage device STORE DEV FLOPPY Floppy disk drive STORE DEV MEMORY Volatile memory disk STORE DEV FLASH Non volatile memory disk flash memory The first through fourth softkey labels in the Recall menu serve as the file names and the directory name lists first four items in alphabetical order when there are four or more files or directories read from the selected storage device Step 5 When the file to be recalled is not displayed as a softkey label use the following method to indicate the file as a softkey label e Use the softkey of the File Select menu to scroll the file directory list of the softkey label Function Key operation Displays the previous page of the list PREV FILES Displays the next page of the list NEXT FILES e To move the directory press the softkey of the corresponding directory name Function Key operation Goes to the directory to display the file and Directory name directory names located at that p
423. ording to Table 8 3 on page 250 using keys A B C D and E Press the return key to go back to the Equivalent Circuit Analysis menu Press the DEFINE PARAMETERS key to display the Equivalent Circuit Parameter Definition menu Use the R1 C1 L1 and CO keys to select the equivalent circuit parameter where the numerical value is to be entered Key operation Key operation Resistance of R1 of selected equivalent circuit R1 Capacitance of C1 of selected equivalent circuit C1 Inductance of L1 of selected equivalent circuit L1 Capacitance of CO when the equivalent circuit E is selected co The current set value of the equivalent circuit parameter is displayed in the set parameter 252 Chapter 8 Figure 8 21 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Calculate the equivalent circuit parameter and simulate the frequency characteristics value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the parameter value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 Jand and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value Repeat Steps 9 and 10 to set all required equivalent circuit parameters Press the SIMULATE F CHRST key to simulate frequency characteristics
424. orking with a local area network refer to the Programming Manual 5 Internal Reference Output Connects to the external reference input terminal of another instrument to phase lock it to the Agilent 4294A 6 External Program RUN CONT Input Allows you to input a TTL compatible signal that triggers the RUN or CONTINUE command for an HP Instrument BASIC program When the signal shows a rising or falling edge between the LOW and HIGH states then the command is triggered For more information on the input signal conditions specific to this connector refer to Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics on page 323 7 8 bit I O Port Provides a data communications interface with an external device such as a handler on a production line This port supports 4 bit data for input and 8 bit data for output 8 Time Base Adjuster for Option 1D5 This adjuster is used to fine tune the operating frequency of the Agilent 4294A when it is equipped with Option 1D5 High Stability Frequency Reference This is intended for service center use only Do not attempt to adjust the operating frequency yourself 9 Mini DIN Keyboard Port A PS 2 port intended for connecting a 101 key English keyboard You can use a keyboard to facilitate entry operations such as creating and executing HP Instrument Basic programs or entering display titles This port only supports a 101 key English keyboard with a PS 2 connector Do
425. orrection and fixture compensation features share the same correction point settings You cannot set correction points specific to a single feature Averaging status Avg Indicates that the sweep to sweep averaging feature is on blank Indicates that the sweep to sweep averaging feature is off Averaging counter Positive integer When the sweep to sweep averaging feature is on this counter indicates how many times the current trace has been subjected to sweep to sweep averaging After you have started sweep to sweep averaging the counter shows 1 upon the Ist sweep cycle 2 upon the 2nd cycle and so on until it reaches the maximum number of averaging cycles To view a trace subjected to your specified number of averaging cycles you must wait for the instrument to repeat the sweep cycles until the counter reaches that number Data trace definition D M Indicates that the currently displayed data trace represents the result of subtracting the memory trace data from the measurement data D M Indicates that the currently displayed data trace represents the result of dividing the measurement data by the memory trace data D M Indicates that the currently displayed data trace represents the result of DATA MEM u 100 where DATA is the measurement data and MEM is the memory trace data the following operation O Indicates that the currently displayed data trace represents the result of subtracting the offset valu
426. osition Chapter 8 289 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data Function Key operation Goes to the next higher order directory and displays the file and directory name located at that position NOTE The directory name displayed as the softkey label is followed by V Step 6 Use the softkey to recall the file and start recalling NOTE You cannot recall files saved in text ASCII format with extension TXT for use on the Agilent 4294A 290 Chapter 8 Analysis and Processing of Result Print the measurement results and internal data with a printer Print the measurement results and internal data with a printer Connect a printer to the printer board located on the rear panel of the Agilent 4294A This allows you to print a graphic representation of the measurement result a list of the measurements and a list of setting statuses For the printer to be used see Table 8 19 Table 8 19 Available Printers for the Agilent 4294A Printer Black amp White Fixed Color Image Color 4 L HP DeskJet 340J HP DeskJet 505 HP DeskJet 506C HP DeskJet 694C HP DeskJet 850C HP DeskJet 880C HP DeskJet 895Cxi HP DeskJet 1200 da Me Ee se e OE A ALa A a HP DeskJet 1600CM Set the print form color resolution and how to handle the paper Before starting to printing set the color resolution margins and landscape portrait orientation fo
427. ot be executed because the format type of the mass storage is not DOS DISPLAY BUFFER IS FULL Executing the DRAW or MOVE command in HP Instrument BASIC fills the Agilent 4294A s display buffer to its capacity Further write to the display buffer is impossible 432 Appendix C 194 200 123 178 170 257 256 143 85 86 Error messages EEPROM WRITE FAIL E EEPROM WRITE FAIL A write error is detected in the memory EEPROM to store the OPEN SHORT and LOAD data for the four terminal pair extension setting Contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office or the company you purchased this instrument from Execution error A comprehensive execution error occurs and the Agilent 4294A cannot detect further details of the error This error code simply indicates the occurrence of an execution error defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 Exponent too large The absolute value of the exponent exceeds 32 000 Refer to IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 Expression data not allowed An equation data element was received at where the 4294A did not accept any equation data elements Expression error An error not described by error numbers from 171 to 179 occurs during the syntax analysis of equation data F FILE NAME ERROR There is an error in the filename and as a result the command is not executed correctly This message is displayed for example when you attempt to copy a file using the same filename F
428. otary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TW to set the desired value This setting allows a new upper limit or middle value to be written for the upper value middle value string at the stop point on the line of the segment being edited in the limit line table Instead of directly entering the stop value of the segment according to steps 16 and 17 follow the procedure below 1 Press the Entry Off key Chapter 8 259 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 NOTE Step 21 Analysis and Processing of Result Set a limit to the trace and make pass fail evaluation 2 Move the main marker to the position of the segment stop value using the rotary knob O or the step keys T 3 Key operations of more 1 3 more 2 3 MKR AE VALUE STOP allow the measurement parameter value at the stop point of the trace to be substituted into the limit range middle value After setting in this order press the more 3 3 more 3 1 keys to go back to the Segment Edit menu 2 3 After the limit range is initially set by the upper value press the LOWER LIMIT key If it is set by the middle value press the DELTA LIMIT key The lower limit of the limit range at the stop point or limit width is displayed in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the lower value or limit differential ranges of upper limit
429. ou have turned on or off the dc bias level feature that setting is applied to both Chapter 7 193 Figure 7 27 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Monitoring the dc Bias Level Traces A and B Monitoring dc bias level with manual sweep enabled TOP 26 2 BOTTOM 166 ma Rs SCALE 168 mafdiv REF 368 me DC BIAS ON VAC IAC IDC 558 uA START 4 Hz OSC 500 mVvolt STOP 110 MHz 4294a0j043 Using the Marker Feature to Determine the dc Bias Level During the dc bias sweep you can use the main marker to determine the dc bias level voltage or amperage at your desired point on the trace Once you have turned on the de bias level monitor feature the Agilent 4294A preserves the dc bias level monitored for each measuring point on the trace during the sweep cycle This allows you to identify the dc bias level monitored for each measuring point even with the sweep cycle in the hold state If your sweep parameter is frequency or signal source level rather than dc bias level the dc bias level monitored at the first measuring point continues to be displayed in the dc Voltage Current Bias Monitor field for all subsequent measuring points because this level remains constant throughout a non bias sweep cycle Start applying dc bias For more information refer to Setting and Applying dc Bias on page 107 Press the Display key to display the Display
430. p 5 Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the year as a 4 digit number e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value Year can be set to an integer ranging from 1900 through 2099 Press the done key to save the month day year data set in Steps 5 through 10 in the Agilent 4294A and to return to the Internal Clock menu When the done key is pressed the entered value is checked for whether it is valid as an actual date If invalid the CAUTION INVALID DATE message appears In this case set the correct date When you want to cancel the setting of the date press the cancel key instead of the done key The previous date setting remains without changes Setting Checking the Time Press the System key to display the System menu Press the CLOCK key to display the Internal Clock menu Press the TIME key to display the Time Configuration menu Press the HOUR key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen a number indicating the currently set hour is displayed Below it the currently set time hour minute second is displayed in a smaller size When you press the TIME key in Step 3 the same display as when you press the HOUR key 300 Chapter 9 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7
431. p 5 Press the REFERENCE VALUE key The Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen indicates the reference value currently in effect that is the value of the measurement parameter that corresponds to the current reference line position Step 6 Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the reference value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value Chapter 7 167 Figure 7 8 NOTE Step 7 Step 8 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Manual Scale Setting for measurements other than COMPLEX Z Y Setting the reference value Ar L B Q on oud om mo eeo inca mm con 3 ee REFERENCE VALUE EktRef Hid VAC IAC gt gt START 44 Hz OSC 588 molt 4294a0j027 Alternatively when you have the main marker displayed on the trace you can press the MKR REFERENCE key to use the value at the marker position as the reference value Thus you can change the trace scale by placing the reference line at the position indicated by the main marker The MKR REFERENCE key is also accessible from the Marker gt menu which is displayed when you press the Marker gt key Press the SCALE DIV key The Parameter Setting
432. p 8 NOTE Step 9 NOTE Step 1 the names of the files and directories under it Moves to the parent directory and displays the _ names of the files and directories under it Press the softkey corresponding to the file or directory you want to delete to display the File Deletion Confirmation menu The File Deletion Confirmation menu will not appear if there are any files or directories under the directory you want to delete even if you press the softkey of the directory name Instead the current directory is changed to the directory you specified and the files and directories under it are displayed To delete the directory first delete all the files and directories under it Press the yes key to execute deleting the file or directory To cancel the deletion press the cancel key In either case the screen returns to the File Utilities menu Initializing a Recording Medium Recording media used by the storage devices of the Agilent 4294A can be initialized formatted by following these steps Initializing a recording medium deletes all data including filenames and directory names currently stored in the medium Press the Save key to display the Save menu 310 Chapter 9 Table 9 19 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 NOTE Setting Using Control and Management Functions Managing Files Press the FILE UTILITIES key to display the File Utilities menu Press the STORE DEV
433. parameters MEAS CPR return Returns to Table B 7 Measurement parameter Measurement menu 1 3 on N A page 361 362 Appendix B Table B 11 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Format key Softkeys displayed by pressing the Format key Format Format menu 1 Softkey LIN LOG Format Function GPIB command Selects the linear scale as the vertical axis Y axis for the graph FMT LINY Selects the log logarithm scale as the vertical axis Y axis for the graph FMT LOGY PHASE UNIT Toggles the phase display unit between degree DEG and radian RAD each time this key is pressed PHAU DEGIRAD EXP PHASE on OFF Toggles on and off the phase expansion display function each time this key is pressed ON off in the softkey label indicates ON state on OFF OFF state EXPP ONIOFF 1 When the measurement parameter is not COMPLEX Z Y Table B 12 Format Format menu 2 Key operation Format Softkey Function GPIB command COMPLEX Selects the complex plane to display the graph This plane has a grid scale whose FMT COMP horizontal axis is the actual axis and whose vertical axis is an imaginary axis POLAR Selects the polar coordinates to display the graph Complex parameters are FMT POLA displayed in an absolute value scale distance from the origin and a phase scale counterclockwise phase angle
434. phase more 1 3 Y 6 Equivalent parallel conductance Equivalent parallel susceptance more 1 3 G B Equivalent parallel inductance Equivalent parallel conductance more 1 3 Lp G Equivalent parallel inductance Q value more 1 3 Lp Q Equivalent parallel capacitance Equivalent parallel conductance more 1 3 Cp G Equivalent parallel capacitance Q value more 1 3 Cp Q Equivalent parallel capacitance Dissipation factor more 1 3 Cp D Impedance complex value Admittance complex value more 1 3 more 2 3 COMPLEX Z Y Absolute impedance value Equivalent series inductance more 1 3 more 2 3 Z Ls Absolute impedance value Equivalent series capacitance more 1 3 more 2 3 Z Cs Absolute impedance value Equivalent parallel inductance more 1 3 more 2 3 Z Lp Absolute impedance value Equivalent parallel capacitance more 1 3 more 2 3 Z Cp Absolute impedance value Equivalent series resistance more 1 3 more 2 3 other Z Rs Absolute impedance value Q value more 1 3 more 2 3 other Z Q Absolute impedance value Dissipation factor more 1 3 more 2 3 other Z D Equivalent parallel inductance Equivalent parallel resistance more 1 3 more 2 3 other Lp Rp Equivalent parallel capacitance Equivalent parallel resistance more 1 3 more 2 3 other
435. pical measurement use it is recommended that you execute the OPEN and SHORT compensation functions 36 Chapter 2 Learning Operation Basics Carrying Out Measurement and Viewing Results Carrying Out Measurement and Viewing Results Connect the DUT Step 1 Increase the distance between the HIGH and LOW electrodes of the Agilent 16047E by turning their fastening screws counterclockwise Step 2 Fit the DUT s lead wires between the HIGH and LOW electrodes Step 3 Turn the fastening screws of the HIGH and LOW electrodes to secure the DUT s lead wires Figure 2 4 Connecting the DUT HIGH Low 42V Peak Max Output 16047e0e0302 Chapter 2 37 Figure 2 5 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 Step 2 Learning Operation Basics Carrying Out Measurement and Viewing Results Measurement results displayed just after connecting the DUT A 100 kafdiv RE 588 ka B z 36 diy REF Be vach IAC VIDE START 168 Hz OSC 500 molt STOP 168 MHz 4294a0e092 Apply the Logarithmic Format to the Vertical Axis for Z Make sure that Trace A is selected as the active trace Trace A is active by default in the preset state Press the Format key to display the Display Format menu Press the LOG key to make the graph s vertical axis logarithmic Apply the Linear Format to the Vertical Axis for 0 Press the B key to activate Trace B Make sure that the graph s vertical axis is in the
436. played at the top of the table add edit segments using the EDIT key or ADD key LIMSEGM lt value gt EDIT gt For the segment indicated by the current pointer enters into the edit mode In the segment edit mode the menu changes to Table B 84 Segment edit Edit Limit menu 1 3 on page 407 If there is no segment in the limit line table EMPTY is displayed at the top of the table a preset segment is added as substitution and the edit mode is invoked LIMSEDI DELETE Deletes the segment indicated by the current pointer gt LIMSDEL ADD gt Inserts a segment whose contents are the same as the segment indicated by the current pointer gt after the segment and enters the segment edit mode In the segment edit mode the menu changes to Table B 84 Segment edit Edit Limit menu 1 3 on page 407 If there is no segment in the limit line table EMPTY is displayed at the top of the table a preset segment is added as substitution and the edit mode is invoked LIMSADD CLEAR LIST gt Displays Table B 87 List deletion Clear List menu on page 410 LIMCLEL done Finishes the editing of the limit line table replaces the table before the editing with the new table and stores it Also returns to Table B 82 Limit test Limit Test menu on page 406 LIMEDONE cancel Cancels the editing of the limit line table and returns to Table B 82 Lim
437. pressed 1 Factory default settings For how to change this setting refer to Customizing the Color of Each Screen Item on page 208 These features add flexibility to your testing task for example on the same screen you can compare the data and memory traces with each other or simultaneously display the results of a calculation as shown by the data and memory traces Identifying Differences between Data and Memory Traces through Comparison or Calculation Activate the trace for which you want to perform calculation or comparison between the two trace types To activate Press Trace A A Trace B B Press the Display key to display the Display menu Press the DEF TRACE key to display the Trace Definition menu Press the DATA key to have the data trace directly store and display the measurement data Note that DATA is selected by default in the preset state Start testing the DUT so that the data trace displays the results for the steps necessary to perform such a measurement refer to the appropriate chapters in this guide You will store this measurement data into the memory trace later in this procedure Chapter 7 179 NOTE Figure 7 16 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 NOTE Step 9 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Trace based Comparison and Calculation At this time you may want to hold stop the sweep cycle for the data trace by pressing the HOLD key in the Trigger m
438. quivalent circuit parameter based on the measurement result trace according to the following steps Measure the sample using the frequency as the sweep parameter If frequency is not selected as the sweep parameter equivalent circuit analysis calculation of equivalent circuit parameter and simulation of frequency characteristics is disabled On the other hand equivalent circuit analysis is enabled regardless of which measurement parameter is selected Press the Display key to display the Display menu Press the more 1 2 key to display the second page of the Display menu Press the EQUIV CKT key to display the Equivalent Circuit Analysis menu Press the CKT on OFF key to turn on the equivalent circuit diagram display function The equivalent circuit diagram instead of the measurement trace is shown on the screen This will enable you to check the equivalent circuit to be selected in the next step Note that equivalent circuit analysis is enabled without having to turn on this display Chapter 8 249 Figure 8 19 Table 8 3 Analysis and Processing of Result Calculate the equivalent circuit parameter and simulate the frequency characteristics 4294a0j064 SELECTED Equivalent circuit diagram display EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT MODEL co LI C Step 6 Press the SELECT CIRCUIT key to display the Equivalent Circuit Select menu Step 7 Select the equivalent circuit with key A B C D or E
439. r analysis Selecting target trace data or memory for marker analysis The Agilent 4294A provides the data trace and memory trace for both trace A and trace B which you can use to display measured data Note that in the preset setting the target for the analysis using the maker is the data trace all operations such as moving the marker and displaying data are applied to the data trace This is because the target trace for marker analysis is the data trace in the preset setting Only when the memory trace is displayed on the screen can you select the target trace for marker analysis by following these steps Activate the trace you want to analyze Active Trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Press the Marker key to display the Marker menu Press the MKR ON key to select the marker analysis target trace pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey label State of marker coupling function MKR ON DATA Data trace MKR ON MEMORY Memory trace If the memory trace for the active trace in marker analysis trace A or trace B is not displayed the target trace is automatically set to the data trace You cannot change this setting For how to use the memory trace refer to Trace based Comparison and Calculation on page 179 244 Chapter 8 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Analysis and Processing of Result Selecting the sweep parameter value of the marker display as time from start or relaxation time Sel
440. r display by pressing the 94 Chapter 5 Figure 5 10 Setting Measurement Conditions Using Time as Sweep Parameter Zero Span Sweep Utility MKR X AXIS TIME keys Sweep parameters other than frequency can be selected in Step 3 In such a case the fixed value for the signal source is reflected in the selected parameter in Steps 5 and 6 Settings for signal sources other than the fixed value in Steps 5 and 6 can be made in the signal source menu which can be accessed by pressing the Source key The zero span sweep can also be achieved with the Start and Stop keys to specify the sweep Start value and sweep stop value as the same value Sweep span value 20 kHz VAC IAC VIDE CENTER 99 998462936 MHz OSC 500 mYolt SPAN 28 kHz 4294a0j014 Chapter 5 95 Setting Measurement Conditions Using Time as Sweep Parameter Zero Span Sweep Figure 5 11 Sweep span value 0 Hz zero span sweep A IZI TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 20 9 B 6z SCALE 36 div REF gs VAC IAC VFIBC CENTER 99 998463936 MHz OSC 506 mvolt SP 4294a0j015 96 Chapter 5 ee Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Figure 5 12 Setting Measurement Conditions Setting Number of Points NOP Setting Number of Points NOP Press Sweep to display the sweep menu Press the NUMBER OF POINTS key This will display the current setting for number of points in the parameter settings area in the upper left part of th
441. r the paper automatic form feed as well as the softkey time printing by following these steps Step 1 Press the Copy key to display the Copy menu Step 2 Press the SETUP key to display the Copy Setup menu Step 3 Specify the print color Function Key operation Monochrome printing B amp W Preset default color FIXED COLOR Printing in colors as close as possible to those IMAGE COLOR on screen l 1 The printing color may differ from that on the screen owing to the limitations of the ink of your printer For the setup procedures for color on the screen see Customizing Intensity and Color Settings for Screen Display on page 207 Chapter 8 291 NOTE Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Step 6 Step 7 NOTE Step 8 Step 9 NOTE Step 10 Analysis and Processing of Result Print the measurement results and internal data with a printer The background during printing is always set to white Press the DPI key to display the current print resolution dots per inch in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the resolution DPI e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the unit key x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value DPI can be set to an integer ranging from 75 through 6
442. r to the left of cursor _ in the text entry line and move the cursor back one space CLEAR TITLE Delete all characters from the text entry line When you have finished entering a new title into the text entry line press done or x1 to save the new title The new title appears in the title field in the upper left area of the screen Before you save a new title you can cancel your entry by pressing the cancel key Chapter 7 205 Figure 7 35 NOTE Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Adding a Title to the Measurement Screen Adding a title to measurement screen A IZI TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 20 2 B z SCALE 26 fdiy REF B SAMPLE 201 aoe IDC OFF VAC IAC vie START 99 99 MHz OSC 500 mVvolt STOP 168 81 MHz 4294a0j051 As a more convenient alternative if your Agilent 4294A is equipped with an external keyboard you can enter a new title through the keyboard When you finished entering a new title just press the Enter key on the keyboard to save the title If you press the cancel key to cancel your entry any existing title remains in the title field To delete the existing title from the title field activate the trace associated with the title and then use the keystroke sequence Display more 1 2 TITLE CLEAR TITLE done 206 Chapter 7 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Setting Up the Display
443. rameters and press the Enter key The line numbers of the program currently in the program workshops are renumbered LIST N A Enters LIST in the HP Instrument BASIC command line From here use the external keyboard to enter required parameters and press the Enter key The list of the program currently in the program workshops is displayed on the HP Instrument BASIC screen2 COMMAND ENTRY gt Displays Table B 80 IBASIC command name Command Name menu on N A page 405 CLEAR I O Cancels the execution of the command for I O input output that is being executed N A RESET LABELS Initializes HP Instrument BASIC BASIC Reset N A more 3 3 Displays Table B 75 HP Instrument BASIC IBASIC menu 1 3 on page N A 402 1 Before displaying the result in the command line you must select the BASIC STATUS key HALF INSTR HALF BASIC key or ALL BASIC key in Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 2 Before displaying the result on the HP Instrument BASIC screen you must select the HALF INSTR HALF BASIC key or the ALL BASIC key in Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 Table B 78 IBASIC edit Editor menu Key operation System IBASIC Edit Softkey Function GPIB command ASSIGN Hp4294 Inserts ASSIGN Hp4294 TO 800 at the position of the current cursor N A 404 Appendix B Tabl
444. re use the external keyboard to enter required parameters and press the Enter key The list of the contents files of the specified mass storage directory is displayed in the HP Instrument BASIC screen N A SAVE Enters SAVE in the HP Instrument BASIC command line The character entry cursor is located below the second From here use the external keyboard to enter required parameters filename and so on and press the Enter key The SAVE command is executed and the program is stored using the entered filename The SAVE command stores programs in the ASCII format If the same filename exists on the disk 257 FILE NAME ERROR occurs and the program cannot be stored N A RE SAVE Enters RE SAVE in the HP Instrument BASIC command line The character entry cursor is located below the second From here use the keyboard to enter required parameters filename and so on and press the Enter key The RE SAVE command is executed for the specified file and the program is stored using the entered filename The RE SAVE command stores programs in ASCII format Even if there is a file having the same filename on the disk the RE SAVE command causes no error alert and overwrites the file with new data N A GET Enters GET in the HP Instrument BASIC command line The character entry cursor is located below the second From here use the keyboard to enter required parameters f
445. re displayed in the parameter settings area located in the upper left of the screen Use the keys or the rotary knob in the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the measurement point any integer value from to the number of points e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press the x1 key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value Instead of directly setting the measurement point by using the keys or the rotary knob in the ENTRY block it can be set by moving the main marker to your desired point for the manual sweep and pressing the Marker gt MKR gt MANUAL SWP keys This operation can assign the manual sweep point to the location of the main marker and is effective before activating the manual sweep When you turn the sweep function ON and specify a measurement point no measurement is performed at the point as long as the sweep mode is disabled or the trigger is not generated The number of points can be commonly set to traces A and B 100 Chapter5 Setting Measurement Conditions Manual Sweep Measurement at a Specified Point Figure 5 14 Manual Sweep A IZI TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 20 B 8z SCALE 36 fdiv REF 8 seas er eer PEE i APNE poea TT nacnaulaaena sean aiid EEEE VHE _ IAC VFIDC CENTER 168 MHz OSC 566 mvolt SPAN 280 kHz 4294a0j018 Chapter 5 101
446. rement parameter values that correspond to the current marker position for Traces A and B 4 Menu Title Field This field shows the name of the current softkey menu which consists of up to 8 softkey labels Chapter 3 53 Table 3 1 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display ltems Displayed on the LCD 5 Softkey Label Area Shows the labels that are in the current context associated with the softkeys on the right hand side Table 3 1 lists the types of softkey options and their functions Types of softkey options and their functions Type of softkey option Function Two or more softkey labels joined with vertical bars You can select one of these options The currently selected softkey label is underlined Softkey label immediately followed by a gt symbol Pressing the softkey displays a softkey sub menu associated with a specific function Softkey label followed by ON off or on OFF Pressing the corresponding softkey turns on off the function in a toggle fashion The softkey label is followed by ON off when the function is on and on OFF when the function is off Softkey label immediately followed by J The brackets enclose text that describes the current setting of the associated function If the function has two alternative settings pressing the softkey toggles between the settings If the function has three or more alternative settings the label is usu
447. rent value or it exceeds the set voltage limit or current limit If a DUT needs time to stabilize after dc bias is applied specify the point delay If necessary change the voltage limit value or the current limit value DCBIAS LEVEL MONITOR NOT VALID When the dc bias level monitor is not on you attempt to execute the command to turn on the marker dc voltage level monitor or the marker dc current level monitor MKRMON DCV or MKRMON DCD and as a result the command is ignored Before turning on the marker dc voltage level monitor or the marker dc current level monitor turn on the corresponding dc bias level monitor command BMON VOLT or BMON CURR DCBIAS OVERLOAD When the dc bias is applied dc current that exceeds the setting of the dc bias range lt 1mA lt 10mA or lt 100mA is supplied from the bias source or the overcurrent limit circuit of the dc bias source takes effect Increase the setting of the dc bias range or decrease the level of the applied dc bias DELTA MARKER OFF When the delta marker is not displayed you attempt to execute a function that needs the display of the delta marker and as a result the command is ignored For example when the delta marker is not displayed a command corresponding to the MKRD SPAN key MKRDSPAN is sent Before executing a function with the delta marker first display the delta marker command DMKR ON DEVICE TYPE IS NOT DOS The execution of write access to the mass storage cann
448. rget measurement You can use the target value search function to move the main marker in automatic mode to the point of the specified target measurement on the trace and to read the sweep parameter value at that point Activate the trace to be searched Active trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Press the Search key to display the Search menu If the main marker is not on the active trace the main marker appears at the position of the sweep center value on the trace Press the TARGET key which displays the current target value in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen At the same time the target menu also appears When the TARGET key is pressed the target value search is carried out based on the preset target value zero when preset and the main marker is moved to the point of the target measurement Accordingly once the target value is set the set target value can be searched only by pressing the TARGET key except when the Preset key is pressed Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a new target value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value When the value is set the target value is searched and the main marker moves to the
449. rical length meters The delay time PORTL lt value gt corresponding to the entered electrical length is displayed below the parameter entry line in smaller characters return Returns to Table B 39 User calibration User Cal menu on page 379 N A 380 Appendix B Table B 43 Key operation Key Definitions Softkeys displayed by pressing the Sweep key Softkeys displayed by pressing the Sweep key Sweep Sweep menu Sweep when the sweep type is not LIST LINEAR or LOG Enter an integer between 2 and 801 You set the number of points for list sweep in the list sweep table Softkey Function GPIB command PARAMETER gt Displays Table B 44 Sweep parameter Sweep Param menu on page 381 In N A of the softkey label the currently selected sweep parameter is displayed frequency sweep FREQ signal level sweep OLEV or dc bias sweep DCB NUMBER OF POINTS Sets the number of measurement points per sweep number of points NOP POIN lt value gt DIRECTION Switches the sweep direction between upward UP and downward DOWN The upward direction is the direction in which the sweep parameter value increases the downward direction is the direction in which the sweep parameter value decreases SWED UPIDOWN MANUAL SWP on OFF Toggles on and off the manual sweep function Immediately after pressing the MANUAL SWP on OFF key you can freely move to one of
450. rminal on the rear panel Chapter 5 113 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 4 Setting Measurement Conditions Specifying Sweep Times and Stopping Sweep Specifying Sweep Times and Stopping Sweep You can specify the number of times sweeping is actually executed upon occurrence of a trigger After sweeping is repeated the specified times the sweeping is stopped and no further sweeping is executed by any trigger that may follow You can also set the sweeping to unlimited times continuous sweep Sweeping by specified times and stopping a sweep are selected and executed by a sweep mode Pressing the Trigger key will display the following sweep modes Softkey label Sweep mode HOLD Stopping sweep SINGLE Single sweep NUMBER OF GROUPS Sweeping by specified times CONTINUOUS Sweeping unlimited times continuous sweep The operating instructions for each sweep mode are shown below Single sweep Press the Trigger key to display the trigger menu Press the SINGLE key once to select single sweep Use the method selected in Selecting a Method to Start Measurement Trigger Source on page 111 to trigger When the triggered single sweep ends sweeping is put into the stopping hold state No further sweeping can be triggered after it is stopped When the internal trigger free run is selected in Selecting a Method to Start Measurement Trigger Source on page 111
451. rn key to return to the Save menu The selected storage device is displayed in the box of the key label of the STORE DEV key Softkey label Selected storage device STORE DEV FLOPPY Floppy disk drive STORE DEV MEMORY Volatile memory disk STORE DEV FLASH Non volatile memory disk flash memory Step 5 Press the RE SAVE key Then the contents of the selected storage device are read and the File Select menu is displayed The first through fourth softkey labels from the top in the File Select menu serve as the file names and the directory name lists first four items in alphabetical order when there are four or more files or directories read from the selected storage device Step 6 When the file to be overwritten is not displayed as a softkey label use the following method to display the file as a softkey label e Use the softkey of the file select menu to scroll the file directory list of thee softkey label Function Key operation Displays the previous page of the list PREV FILES Displays the next page of the list NEXT FILES e To move the directory press the softkey of the corresponding directory name Function Key operation Goes to the directory to display the file and Directory name directory names located at that position Chapter 8 287 NOTE Step 7 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Step 1 Analysis and Processing of Result Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data
452. rray on off Memory trace array on off Graphics Surface screen at the time of saving V 1 vV always saving on off saving on off selection possible 2 The adapter setup data will not be lost even if you turn off the power or execute presetting with the Preset key The adapter setup data is maintained for each adapter selection For how to set up adapters adapter selection and adapter setup refer to Adapter Setting on page 67 NOTE Before saving the calibration data user calibration data array fixture compensation data array with the STATE save you must turn on enable each calibration function For how to turn on the user calibration functions refer to Turning User Calibration On Off on page 148 For how to turn on the fixture compensation function refer to Turning the fixture compensation on or off on page 152 Before saving the memory array or memory trace array with the STATE save or the DATA save you must save the data into the memory array and memory trace array with the DATA MEMORY key For more information on using the DATA MEMORY key to save data into the memory array and memory trace array refer to Trace based Comparison and Calculation on page 179 For the each saving step see Save the setting state calibration data and memory array State Save on page 271 Save the calibration data and trace data Data Save on page 273 and Save the display s
453. rt X or B COMPLEX Polar coordinates Absolute value IZI or IYI Phase 07 or Oy POLAR NOTE If you have selected the delta marker on the trace mode AMKR key in Placing the delta marker on the reference point with the main marker on page 217 you cannot set the measurement parameter value FIXED AMKR key or secondary measurement parameter value FIXED AMKR AUX VALUE key Step 5 Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the position parameter of the delta marker you have selected e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys NND to set the desired value Step 6 Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 to move the delta marker to the reference point NOTE You cannot use the automatic move search function of the delta marker alone to move to a point on the trace such as the maximum value minimum value target value peak and so on To move the delta marker to one of these points follow the step shown in Placing the delta marker on the reference point with the main marker on page 217 Displaying the main sub marker and reading the difference from the reference point After placing the delta marker at the reference point by following Placing the delta marker on the reference point with the main marker on page
454. rt of an IP address gateway address or subnet mask separated by Refer to corresponding periods higher level keys in Table B 94 Local Local menu on page 413 2nd Sets the 2nd part of an IP address gateway address or subnet mask separated by periods 3rd Sets the 3rd part of an IP address gateway address or subnet mask separated by periods 4th Sets the 4th part of an IP address gateway address or subnet mask separated by periods done Stores the configuration of the IP address gateway address or subnet mask N A Appendix B 413 Table B 95 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Local key LAN address LAN Address menu Local IP ADDRESS Local GATEWAY ADDRESS Local SUBNET MASK Softkey Function GPIB command cancel Cancels setting the IP address gateway address or subnet address specified with N A the above keys and returns to Table B 94 Local Local menu on page 413 Table B 96 Gateway address setting LAN Address menu Key operation Local GATEWAY ADDRESS Softkey Function GPIB command Ist Sets the Ist part of the gateway address separated by periods ADDRGW lt lst addr gt lt 2nd addr gt lt 3rd addr gt lt 4th addr gt 2nd Sets the 2nd part of the gateway address separated by periods 3rd Sets the 3rd part of the gateway address separated by periods 4th
455. s used the value of time relative to the position of the A marker is displayed MKRXUNIT TIME For the marker on the current active trace A or B selects the relief time 1 27F F measurement frequency as the value displayed in the X axis This function is available only when frequency has been selected as the sweep parameter If the A marker is used the value of the relief time relative to the position of the A marker is displayed MKRXUNIT RFREQ return Returns to Table B 71 Utility Utility menu on page 400 N A 400 Appendix B Table B 73 Key operation Level monitor Level Mon menu Utility LEVEL MON Key Definitions Softkeys displayed by pressing the Utility key Softkey Function GPIB command OFF AC V AC I DC V DC I Turns off the marker level monitor function Usual markers are displayed MKRMON OFF Displays the voltage value of the test signal at the marker position on the current active trace A or B in the upper right area of the screen Before selecting this function you must turn on the monitor display of the test signal level with the OSC LEVEL on OFF key in Table B 13 Display Display menu 1 2 on page 364 MKRMON ACV Displays the current value of the test signal at the marker position on the current active trace A or B in the upper right area of the screen Before selecting this function you must
456. s a pair of holes for securing the test accessory to the instrument INSTALLATION CATEGORY I To prevent failure do not apply dc voltage or current to the UNKNOWN terminal Special care must be taken with capacitors since they may be charged Be sure to connect the DUT to the UNKNOWN terminal or test fixture only after discharging them sufficiently 11 Built in 3 5 Inch Floppy Disk Drive Allows you to store and retrieve such data as measurement data instrument settings screen contents and HP Instrument BASIC programs This drive uses a 3 5 inch MS DOS format floppy disk of 1 44 MB capacity Chapter 3 49 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display Rear Panel Rear Panel Rear Panel 4294A1E005 1 External Reference Input Connector Allows you to connect an external frequency reference signal to the Agilent 4294A so that its internal signal is phase locked to the external frequency reference signal to achieve a more accurate frequency If Option 1D5 High Stability Frequency Reference is installed connect the supplied BNC m BNC m adapter between this connector and 2 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Only When an external frequency reference signal is input to this connector the Agilent 4294A s test signal is automatically phase locked to that re
457. s been evaluated as passing the test Take a measurement under the measurement conditions for setting the limit line and display the trace NOTE When creating a limit line table make sure that the setting meets the measurement conditions of conducting a limit line test The limit line table can be set without preparing actual samples and measuring them However setting it by observing the measurement waveform will make it easier to have an image of the limit line This will facilitate your setting work 256 Chapter 8 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Figure 8 24 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Analysis and Processing of Result Set a limit to the trace and make pass fail evaluation Activate the trace for testing the limit line Active Trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Press the Marker key to display the main marker on the trace The limit line table can be set without displaying the marker However the presence of a marker will be convenient for your work because it allows the numerical value on the trace to be read and the marker position to be used to enter the limit line set value Press the System key to display the System menu Press the LIMIT TEST key to display the Limit Test menu Press the EDIT LIMIT LINE key to invoke the limit line edit mode This also displays the Limit Line Edit menu Limit line edit mode 69 6989 z laa MHz Cpl
458. s below to set one of two ways to read trace data using the marker reading interpolated values between measurement points interpolation mode or reading measurement points only non interpolation mode Activate the trace whose value you want to read to which the setting is applied Active trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Press the Marker key to display the Marker menu Press the MKR key to select the marker interpolation mode or non interpolation mode pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey label Selected marker mode MKR CONT Interpolation mode you can read data between actual measurement points by interpolation calculation MKR DISCRETE Non interpolation mode you can read data only at actual measurement points In the marker non interpolation mode if you try to move the marker by entering a sweep parameter value with the numeric keys and the entered value is not equal to the value of an actual measurement point the marker moves to the nearest measurement point having a value larger than the entered value 222 Chapter 8 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Figure 8 6 Analysis and Processing of Result Search the maximum minimum measurements Search the maximum minimum measurements Activate the trace that you want to be searched Active trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Press the Search key to display the Search menu If the main marker is not on
459. s of resistors with high resistance value D Selects equivalent circuit D Equivalent circuit D is generally suitable for the EQUC CIRD equivalent circuit analysis of capacitors E Selects equivalent circuit E Equivalent circuit E is generally suitable for the EQUC CIRE equivalent circuit analysis of oscillators vibrators CALC PARMS Has the same function as the CALCULATE PARAMETERS key in Table B 18 CALECPARA Equivalent circuit analysis Equiv Circuit menu on page 366 SIMULATE F CHRST Has the same function as the SIMULATE F CHRST key in Table B 18 SIMFCHAR Equivalent circuit analysis Equiv Circuit menu on page 366 return Returns to Table B 18 Equivalent circuit analysis Equiv Circuit menu on N A page 366 Table B 20 Equivalent circuit parameter definition Define Param menu Key operation Display more 1 2 EQUIV CKT DEFINE PARAMETERS Softkey Function GPIB command RI Sets a value of equivalent circuit parameter R1 DEFECR lt value gt Cl Sets a value of equivalent circuit parameter C1 DEFECC1 lt value gt L1 Sets a value of equivalent circuit parameter L1 DEFECL 1 lt value gt co Sets a value of current equivalent circuit parameter CO You can set CO only DEFECCO lt value gt when equivalent circuit E has been selected in Table B 19 Equivalent circuit selection Select Circ menu on page 367 SIMULATE F CHRST Has the same function as the SIMULATE
460. s the SETUP key to display the Adapter Setup Menu Connect the Lcur and Lpot terminals on the 16048G or 16048H to the Hpot and Hcur terminals of the 100 Resister furnished with the Agilent 4294A Agilent Part Number 04294 61001 as shown in Figure 4 2 Other terminals should remain open Connecting 100 Resister Phase Compensation Data Measurement 04294 61001 100 Q RESISTOR T6048ghoj0301 Press the PHASE COMP key to start the phase compensation data measurement The traces on the LCD display do not change during the phase compensation data measurement When the phase compensation data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to PHASE COMP DONE Connect the Lcur Lpot Hpot and Hcur terminals on the 16048G or 16048H to the Lcur Lpot Hpot and Hcur terminals of the 100 Resister as shown in Figure 4 3 Chapter 4 71 Figure 4 3 Step 8 NOTE Step 9 NOTE NOTE Step 1 Preparation of Measurement Accessories Adapter Setting Connecting 100 Resister Load Data Measurement 04294 61001 100 RESISTOR 16048ghoj0302 Press the LOAD key to start the load data measurement When the load data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to LOAD DONE Press the done key to start calculating the adapter setup data from the measured phase compensation and load data The adapter setup data is automatically saved to the EEPROM nonvolatile memory in the Agilen
461. s your entry into effect Set the Measurement Bandwidth to 2 Press the Bw Avg key to display the Measurement Bandwidth Averaging menu Press the BANDWIDTH key to display the Measurement Bandwidth Setting menu Set the measurement bandwidth to 2 by pressing the 2 key 34 Chapter 2 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Learning Operation Basics Fixture Compensation Fixture Compensation Next you need to eliminate errors produced between the test fixture and the Agilent 4294A This process is called fixture compensation You can perform the process using three compensation functions OPEN SHORT and LOAD All calibration settings including those established through fixture compensation are applied to both Traces A and B You can execute each compensation function without specifying the active trace or checking the current state Perform Fixture Compensation for the Open Circuit State Press the Cal key to display the Calibration menu Press the FIXTURE COMPEN key to display the Fixture Compensation menu Make sure that the two test electrodes HIGH and LOW of the connected text fixture Agilent 16047E are open Be sure to fix the two electrodes in position by turning clockwise the fixture s two electrode fastening screws Press the OPEN key to measure the OPEN compensation data While the instrument is measuring the compensation data a message WAIT MEASURING STANDARD is displaye
462. scillator level or dc bias level for each segment you can observe the change in the characteristics In this case you would usually set the horizontal axis of the graph to the single span mode which is the frequency axis common to all segments For how to compare traces using the list sweep function refer to Comparing traces using the list sweep function on page 186 For the list sweep you can change the color of traces for each segment This function will help you to compare traces 116 Chapter5 Setting Measurement Conditions Sweeping Multiple Sweep Ranges with Different Conditions in a Single Action List Sweep Figure 5 16 A IZI TOP 5 ka BOTTOM 20 9 B az SCALE 20 fdiv REF goe VAC IAC gt VAID START 99 99 MHz OSC 566 mwolt STOP 100 160516 MHz 4 Measurement condition common Single Sweep gt 4294a0e102 Chapter 5 117 Figure 5 17 Setting Measurement Conditions Sweeping Multiple Sweep Ranges with Different Conditions in a Single Action List Sweep A Z TOP 5 ka BOTTOM B z SCALE 20 e diy REF VAC IAC V IDC saa START 99 99 MHz OSC 586 molt STOP 100 160516 MHz Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4 Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4 Single Sweep Measurement condition items that can be specified for each segment in the list sweep are Sweep range Number of points N
463. se width lps or above 3 OUTPUTI1 TTL level latch output 4 OUTPUT2 TTL level latch output 5 Output port AO TTL level latch output 6 Output port Al TTL level latch output 7 Output port A2 TTL level latch output 8 Output port A3 TTL level latch output 9 Output port A4 TTL level latch output 10 Output port A5 TTL level latch output 11 Output port A6 TTL level latch output 12 Output port A7 TTL level latch output 13 Output port BO TTL level latch output 14 Output port B1 TTL level latch output 15 Output port B2 TTL level latch output 16 Output port B3 TTL level latch output 17 Output port B4 TTL level latch output 18 Output port B5 TTL level latch output 19 Output port B6 TTL level latch output 20 Output port B7 TTL level latch output 346 Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Table 10 1 24 Bit I O Port Pin Assignment Basic Characteristics Pin No Signal Name Signal Standard 21 Input Output port CO TTL level latch output 22 Input Output port C1 TTL level latch output 23 Input Output port C2 TTL level latch output 24 Input Output port C3 TTL level latch output 25 Input Output port DO TTL level latch output 26 Input Output port D1 TTL level latch output 27 Input Output port D2 TTL level latch output 28 Input Output port D3 TTL level latch output 29 Port C status TTL level input mod
464. sired value O rotary knob You can adjust the current setting by turning this knob This method immediately updates the parameter value without requiring you to press a unit key When working with a particular configuration item you can also use the rotary knob to move the cursor horizontally T and J keys The step keys allow you to increment or decrement the step keys current setting This method immediately updates the p key 8 y up parameter value without requiring you to press a unit key Entry Off key This key switches the instrument from entry mode to normal operation mode with the name and current setting of the parameter no longer shown in the upper left area of the LCD display 46 Chapter 3 Back Space key 0 through 9 keys numeric keys with and keys G n M u k m x1 keys unit keys 5 MARKER Block Front Rear Panel and LCD Display Front Panel Deletes the character to the left of cursor and moves the cursor back one space If you make a mistake in entering a value through numeric keys you can use this key to correct your entry Use these keys to enter each numeral that makes up your entry Finally press a unit key to put your entered value into effect After entering your desired value through numeric keys press one of the unit keys to suffix the value with the specific unit Your entered value does not take effect until you press a unit key Each unit key except the x1 key r
465. st Sweep 0 00000 00 002 eee 124 Setting Measurement Accuracy Stability and Time 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 126 Setting measurement bandwidth 0 eee eee eee eee 126 Averaging between sweeps sweep to sweep averaging 0 eee eee eee eee 126 Averaging for each measurement point point averaging 0 0 cee eee eee eee eee 127 6 Calibration Selecting Appropriate Calibration Method 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 130 A Calibration When Using Direct Connection Type Test Fixture 0 00 0000000 133 B Calibration for Four Terminal Pair 1 m Extension 0 00 00 c cece teen eens 135 Fixture Compensation When the 16451B is Used 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 136 C Calibration for Four Terminal Pair 2 m Extension 0 0 0 c cece ee een eens 137 D Calibration When an Exclusive Fixture is Connected to the 42942A 0000 139 E Calibration When the 7 mm Port of the 42942A is Extended 00 00 00 e eee 141 F Calibration When a Probe Adapter is Connected to the 42941A 0 000 000000008 143 G Calibration When the 3 5 mm Port of the 42941A is Extended 000 145 User Calibrationiss 4 95 85 feds ate ted Sete bees Fite Mah Reb toes SRE ee eho ba eas 147 User Calibration Procedures 22 nc teas oiled eae Wied Coie he dds E AE S NAE EAR 147 Turning User Calibration On Off 0 0 cette een ene ene 148 Def
466. sweep averaging factor entered with the AVERAGING FACTOR key Perform the averaging factor setup as follows Press the Bw Avg key to display the measurement bandwidth averaging menu Press the AVERAGING FACTOR key to display the current setting for the sweep to sweep averaging in the parameter settings located in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the sweep to sweep averaging e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press the unit key G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TW to set the desired value The sweep to sweep averaging can be set to any natural number from to 256 Setting the sweep to sweep averaging to is equivalent to turning the averaging OFF Press the AVERAGING on OFF or AVERAGING ON off key to turn the sweep to sweep averaging ON or OFF pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey label Sweep to sweep averaging AVERAGING on OFF Off AVERAGING ON off On When the sweep to sweep averaging is turned ON the character Avg is displayed in the parameter settings located in the upper left area of the screen Below the character is also displayed the value of sweep to sweep averaging that has been performed for the trace The sweep to sweep averaging starts after turning it ON or pressing t
467. t e Press the step keys NND to set the desired value 212 Chapter 8 Figure 8 1 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Specify the sweep parameter value and read the value on the trace Values read on the trace by the main marker A Z TOP 1 Ma BOTTOM 160 a 3 60285 ko B B2 SCALE 36 fdiv REF Bo 103 49189 kHz VAC IAC gt VIBE START 4 Hz OSC 566 mvolt STOP 118 MHz 4294a0j053 When the marker movement is in non complementary mode when the softkey label displayed by pressing the Marker key indicates MKR DISCRETE the marker can move only the actual measuring point on the trace If you enter the sweep parameter value with the numeric keys to move the marker but the input value does not correspond to the actual measuring point then the marker will go to the measuring point closest to that input value When the marker movement is in complementary mode when the softkey label displayed by pressing the Marker key indicates MKR CONT automatic compensation is provided between the measuring points This allows the marker to be moved between the measuring points When the numeric keys are used to enter the sweep parameter value the marker can be moved to any desired position on the trace For how to set the maker interpolation non interpolation mode refer to Reading actual measurement points only reading interpolated values between measurement points on page 222 Chapter 8 21
468. t The traces on the LCD display do not change during the phase compensation data measurement When the phase compensation data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to PHASE COMP DONE With nothing connected to the 3 5 mm port press the OPEN key to start open data measurement Chapter 4 79 NOTE Step 8 Step 9 NOTE Step 10 Step 11 NOTE Step 12 NOTE Preparation of Measurement Accessories Adapter Setting When the load data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to OPEN DONE Connect the SHORT 0 Q HRM 504 to the 3 5 mm port the SHORT is furnished with the 42941A Impedance Probe Press the SHORT key to start the short data measurement When the short data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to SHORT DONE Remove the SHORT 0 Q HRM 504 from the 3 5 mm port of the 42941A Then connect the LOAD 50 Q HRM 601 to the 3 5 mm port the LOAD is furnished with the 42941A Impedance Probe Press the LOAD key to start the load data measurement When the load data measurement is completed the softkey label changes to LOAD DONE Press the done key to start calculating the adapter setup data from the measured phase compensation OPEN SHORT and LOAD data The adapter setup data is automatically saved to the EEPROM nonvolatile memory in the Agilent 4294A Press the cancel key to cancel the adapter setup process If the adapter
469. t e Press the step keys TW to set the desired value Press the PEAK DEF AY key to display the set value of the current peak AY in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a new peak DY value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value Define peak sharpness using a peak on the trace A peak on the trace can be used to define peak sharpness Activate the trace for which the peak sharpness is defined Active Trace Key operation Trace A A Trace B B Move the main marker to the peak used to define the peak sharpness Here the main marker can be moved to the target peak by a peak search according to Chapter 8 233 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 NOTE Analysis and Processing of Result Define the Peak Search the maximum minimum peak on page 228 It should be noted however that a definition must be set in advance by using the PEAK DEF AX key and PEAK DEF AY key to ensure that the target peak is searched To ensure that all peaks are detected perform peak search after setting the peak AY value to zero using the PEAK DEF AY Press the Search key to display the Search menu Press the PE
470. t When the main marker is moved to the peak by using the peak search function that peak is displayed at this position Indicates the length of the sweep parameter from the sweep center value to the cutoff point on the left However it indicates the length of the sweep parameter from the sweep parameter value of the fixed A marker to the cutoff point on the left only when the fixed A marker is present AR Indicates the length of the sweep parameter from the sweep center value to the cutoff point on the right However it indicates the length of the sweep parameter from the sweep parameter value of the fixed A marker to the cutoff point on the right only when the fixed A marker is present Chapter 8 237 Analysis and Processing of Result Analyze trace bandwidth Figure 8 15 Trace bandwidth analysis function different definition for each D marker mode Fixed A Marker Tracking A Marker Cutoff 2 3 Value l o Center Width ALF ARF Center frequency of sweep range Center frequency of sweep range Sweep parameter value of fixed A marker At Marker OFF At Tracking Z Marker At Fixed Z Marker 4294ape023 NOTE The cutoff value in Figure 8 15 indicates the set value when the fixed value FIXED VALUE key in the definition of the cutoff point is selected For the definition of the cutoff point see Define the cutoff point in trace bandwidth analysis
471. t 4294A Press the cancel key to cancel the adapter setup process If the adapter setup process is canceled the previously obtained data is saved as the available adapter setup data Adapter Setup Procedure for the 16334A Perform the adapter setup for the 16334A Tweezers Type Test Fixture in accordance with the following procedure Adapter setup should be performed at an ambient temperature as close as possible to the temperature in which the device measurement will actually be made If the ambient temperature for your measurement is outside the range of 5 C from the adapter setup temperature it is recommended that you perform adapter setup again at the appropriate temperature It takes a few minutes to complete each setup data measurement During each data measurement the message WAIT MEASURING ADJUSTMENT KIT is displayed in the instrument state area in the LCD s upper left side Make sure that the 16334A is correctly connected to the four terminal pair port of the 72 Chapter 4 NOTE Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 NOTE Step 7 Step 8 NOTE Step 9 NOTE NOTE Preparation of Measurement Accessories Adapter Setting Agilent 4294A The 16334A must be directly connected to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A If another accessory such as a cable or adapter is inserted between the 16334A and the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A the correct adapter setup
472. t impedance 25 Q nominal Vinon dc voltage bias monitor reading value mV I non de current bias monitor reading value mA Zq 9 3 at four terminal pair port of the 4294A adapter setup NONE Zq 2 0 at 3 5 mm port of the 42941A adapter setup 42941A Impedance Probe Zq 0 5 at 7 mm port of the 42942A adapter setup 42942A Terminal Adapter Zq 1 0 at measurement port of the 16048G adapter setup four terminal pair 1m Zq 1 5 at measurement port of the 16048H adapter setup four terminal pair 2m Chapter 10 327 Figure 10 1 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics Basic Characteristics dc Bias Range SPC 40V 25 OV 0A 20mA 100mA 4294a0e008 Sweep Characteristics Available sweep parameters Frequency signal voltage signal current dc bias voltage dc bias current Sweep types Linear log list zero span manual Manual sweep Available for all sweep types Sweep directions Up sweep down sweep Number of measurement points 2 to 801 List Sweep Available setup parameters for each segment Sweep frequency range number of measurement points signal level voltage or current dc bias voltage or current measurement bandwidth point averaging factor Number of segments 1 to 18 Sweep span types Segment span single span Delay time Types Point delay sweep delay Range 0 to 3
473. t side faces of the front panel frame Figure 1 6 on page 26 Attach the flanges 2 to the side faces with the supplied screws Remove all four legs from the bottom face by pulling up the tabs and sliding the legs out in the direction indicated by the arrows Mount the 4294A on the rack Option 1CP Rackmount amp Handle Kit Option 1CP includes two flanges and two handles along with their attachments Mounting the Agilent 4294A on a Rack with Handles Remove the adhesive backed trim strips 1 from the left and right side faces of the front panel frame Figure 1 6 on page 26 Attach the handles 3 and flanges 5 to the side faces with the supplied screws Remove all four legs from the bottom face by pulling up the tabs and sliding the legs out in the direction indicated by the arrows Mount the 4294A on the rack Chapter 1 27 NOTE Installation Environmental Requirements Environmental Requirements The Agilent 4294A is designed to operate under the following environmental conditions with the floppy disk drive operational For more information refer to Chapter 10 Specifications and Supplemental Performance Characteristics on page 323 Temperature 10 C to 40 C Humidity 15 to 80 relative humidity The Agilent 4294A must be protected from temperature extremes that could cause condensation within the instrument Ventilation Requirements To ensure adequate ventilation make sure that ther
474. t the expanded phase feature is enabled EXP PHASE on OFF Indicates that the expanded phase feature is disabled 198 Chapter 7 ee Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Hiding the Non active Trace Hiding the Non active Trace When the screen is not split into upper and lower halves see Splitting the Graph on page 200 Traces A and B appear on the same graph and may overlap each other making it difficult to examine the DUT s characteristics In this case you can optionally hide the non active trace Press the Display key to display the Display menu Press the HIDE INACT on OFF or HIDE INACT ON off key to hide or show the non active trace pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey Labels Description HIDE INACT ON off Indicates that the non active trace is hidden HIDE INACT on OFF Indicates that the non active trace is shown along with the active trace Once you have specified whether to hide or show the non active trace that setting is applied to both Traces A and B You can specify this setting without activating one of the traces or checking the current state When the screen is split into upper and lower halves see Splitting the Graph on page 200 you cannot hide the non active trace Chapter 7 199 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Splitting the Graph Splitting the Graph You can split the display into upper and lower halves so that
475. t to the selected segment and ADD enter edit mode Delete all segments of the list sweep table in CLEAR LIST yes cancel to cancel edit mode The number of segments that can be set in a list sweep table ranges from to 18 The number of points that can be set for a single segment is an integer ranging from 2 to 201 Up to 801 points can be set for each segment The sweep frequency range for each segment can be set with a combination of either sweep start value and sweep stop value or one of sweep center value and sweep span value Also after setting a sweep range with sweep start value and sweep stop value pressing the keys for setting sweep center span value will override the previous format of the sweep range for the list sweep table This also works in changing the other direction from center span to start stop setting values The sweep frequency range set for any segment can overlap with any range set for the other segments When appending a segment to the one that is selected the same values as those in the Chapter 5 123 Step 31 NOTE Figure 5 19 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 Step 2 Setting Measurement Conditions Sweeping Multiple Sweep Ranges with Different Conditions in a Single Action List Sweep previous segment are specified as initial values for the sweep start stop frequencies the same logic is applied to initial values for a sweep range specified with sweep center span frequencies Thus
476. t value e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M yJ k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value Alternatively when you have the main marker displayed on the trace you can set the offset to the value at the marker position through the keystroke sequence Marker gt MKR gt OFFSET To disable this feature enter zero as the offset value When the result of subtracting an offset value is displayed by the data trace the Instrument Status field on the measurement screen indicates O If you specify an offset value the data trace displays the result of subtracting the offset value from the specific type of data that corresponds to the display option you selected in step 9 of Identifying Differences between Data and Memory Traces through Comparison or Calculation on page 179 You cannot set an offset value if your measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y 184 Chapter 7 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Superimposing Multiple Traces Superimposing Multiple Traces In its preset state the Agilent 4294A plots a new trace while erasing the measuring points used for the last sweep cycle If you prefer you can configure the Agilent 4294A to plot a new trace without erasing any existing traces This feature is called trace superimpose Step 1
477. t voltage output of the dc bias operates OSC MENU gt Displays Table B 53 Source oscillator Source Osc menu on page 386 N A Table B 55 DC bias range DC Bias Range menu Key operation Source BIAS MENU MEAS RANGE Softkey Function GPIB command ImA Selects lt 1 mA less than 1 mA as the dc bias range DCRNG M1 386 Appendix B Table B 55 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Source key DC bias range DC Bias Range menu Source BIAS MENU MEAS RANGE Softkey Function GPIB command 10mA Selects lt 10 mA less than 10 mA as the dc bias range DCRNG M10 100mA Selects lt 100 mA less than 100 mA as the de bias range DCRNG M100 return Returns to Table B 54 DC bias Source Bias menu on page 386 N A 1 The dc bias range is set to optimize the dc level of the current that is inputted into the HP 4294A s impedance measurement cir cuit This setting affects the impedance measurement accuracy regardless of the selection of the dc bias mode or whether appli cation of the dc bias is turned on or off Usually you can obtain the highest impedance measurement accuracy by setting the smallest de bias range such that the DCBIAS OVERLOAD error number 137 error does not appear When first applying the dc bias set the dc bias range to 1 mA Then if an error occurs increase the range as n
478. tandard definition and other processes See Fixture Compensation When the 16451B is Used on page 136 for details When you complete the changes press the return key to return to the Fixture Compensation Menu Put the test fixture s device contacts in the OPEN state Refer to the operation manual furnished with each test fixture for more information on the OPEN state of the test fixture Generally the OPEN state can be made by connecting no device to the device contacts If the distance between the HIGH electrode and the LOW electrode can be adjusted for a test fixture keep the same distance as when the test device is inserted between the electrodes Press the OPEN key to start OPEN compensation data measurement During the compensation data measurement the message WAIT MEASURING STANDARD is displayed in the instrument state area of the LCD s upper left side When OPEN compensation data measurement is completed the softkey label OPEN on OFF if it is off changes to OPEN ON off Put the test fixture s device contacts in the SHORT state Refer to the operation manual furnished with each test fixture for more information on the SHORT state of the test fixture Generally the SHORT state can be made by connecting a high conductivity metal shorting bar to the device contacts or by shorting the HIGH electrode and LOW electrode directly Chapter 6 151 Step 8 Step 9 NOTE Step 10 Step 1 Step 2 Step
479. tary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value Press the Sweep key to display the sweep menu Press the TIME key to display the sweep time menu Press the SWEEP TIME key This will display the current setting for sweep time in the parameter settings area in the upper left part of the screen In other words this shows the current sweep span value in the time sweep Use the keys or the rotary knob in the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the sweep time sweep span e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys NND to set the desired value Sweep time sweep span value can be set up to 10 000 seconds approx 2 8 hours When using a marker immediately after setting the zero span sweep from the preset state the sweep parameter value shown by the marker in the parameter settings area in the upper left part of the screen is indicated by a measurement point number serial number s from 1 to the number of points for all measurement points At the same time an identical value entered with the Center key for all measurement points is indicated in the marker sweep parameter area in the upper right part of the screen This sweep parameter value can be converted into a time based value fo
480. tensity affects the readability of softkey labels thus the operability of the Agilent 4294A Take care not to set the foreground intensity to an excessively low value The factory default setting of the foreground intensity is 100 Adjusting the Background Intensity To adjust the intensity of the screen s background follow these steps Press the Display key to display the first page of the Display menu Press the more 1 2 key the softkey displayed at the bottom to move to the second page of the Display menu Press the MODIFY COLOR key the 4th softkey from the top to display the Modify Color menu Press the BACKGROUND INTENSITY key the second softkey displayed from the top The Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen indicates the currently applied background intensity factor relative to the white level 100 means the highest intensity Chapter 7 207 Step 5 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Customizing Intensity and Color Settings for Screen Display Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the background intensity factor relative to the maximum intensity e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value The background i
481. tep 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Adding a Title to the Measurement Screen Adding a Title to the Measurement Screen The measurement screen provides two title fields each corresponding to Trace A or B You can add descriptive text to these fields and your entered titles are displayed in the same color as the corresponding trace To add titles to the screen follow these steps Activate the trace for which you want to add a title To activate Press Trace A A Trace B B Press the Display key to display the first page of the Display menu Press the more 1 2 key to move to the second page of the Display menu Press the TITLE key to display the Title menu Enter your title into the text entry line using the following keys in any combination If the trace has an existing title you can edit that title in the text entry line Use To Step keys ty Scroll up or down the list of available characters displayed below the text entry line Rotary knob O Move the cursor A to the previous or next character in the character list SELECT LETTER or G n Copy the selected character from the character list to the cursor _ position in the text entry line Numeric keys 0 to 9 and Enter a value at the cursor _ position in the text entry line SPACE Insert a space at the cursor _ position in the text entry line BACK SPACE or Back Space Delete the characte
482. ter 8 255 Figure 8 23 Step 1 Analysis and Processing of Result Set a limit to the trace and make pass fail evaluation Set a limit to the trace and make pass fail evaluation Set a limit line a line to indicate the upper and lower limits of the trace to the data trace If the measurement is within the specified range it is evaluated as having passed the test If not it is evaluated as having failed the test PASS appears in the limit line test result field on the screen when accepted whereas FAIL appears if rejected Limit line test Segment 1 l Segment 2 l Segment 3 l Segment 4 l Segment 5 l s x x xe x 4 99 99 MHz 99 996 MHz i 100 004 MHz 100 007 MHz 100 01 MHz 99 999 MHz 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 I p 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 B 8z SCALE 26 ediy REF Be 2 90 amp 90 Test Result VAC gt i TAC VIDE sss CENTER 160 MHz OSC 588 mvolt SPAN 24 kHz NO START Hz UPP Low STOP Hz UPP Low 1 99 99M 50 p0 99 996M 50 90 2 99 9961 50 90 99 999M 90 50 3 99 999M 90 50 100 004M 90 50 4 100 004M 90 50 100 007M 50 90 5 gt 100 0071 50 90 100 011 50 30 Segment Segment Upper Lower Segment Upper Lower Number Start Limit Limit STOP Limit Limit Value for START for START Value for for STOP STOP 4294a0e100 Set the limit line Use the limit line table to set the limit line Out of the samples subjected to the limit line test select one standard sample that ha
483. the Agilent 4294A Check the power to the printer on line status paper and so on Otherwise the connected printer may not be supported For information on supported printers refer to the Options and accessories chapter Program currently running A program is running This message is displayed when you attempt to perform an operation that cannot be executed at the same time as a program is running For example this occurs when you attempt to delete a running program Program error Appendix C 439 112 286 285 430 400 410 420 440 350 111 Error messages Program mnemonic too long An error occurred in a downloaded program A program error other than 281 to 289 occurred Program mnemonic too long The length of the header exceeds 12 characters Refer to IEEE488 2 7 6 1 4 1 Program runtime error An error occurs while an HP Instrument BASIC program is being executed To obtain detailed information on the particular error use the ERRM or ERRM command of HP Instrument BASIC Program syntax error A program syntax error occurs in the downloaded program Q Query DEADLOCKED The current status causes a DEADLOCKED Query error Refer to IEEE488 2 6 3 1 7 This error occurs for example when both input and output buffers become full and the Agilent 4294A cannot continue processing Query error A comprehensive Query error occurs and the Agilent 4294A cannot detect further
484. the ENTRY block to set the pen number for the segment an integer between and 6 e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 1 to 6 and then press x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to enter the desired value There are six pens from number to number 6 which are set to different colors the color mapping can be changed Accordingly by assigning a different colored pen to each segment you can color code the traces on the screen to more easily identify each segment The factory setting of the graphic drawing pens are pen 1 white pen 2 red pen 3 yellow pen 4 green pen 5 cyan and pen 6 blue For how to reset the color of the pens refer to Customizing the Color of Each Screen Item on page 208 The pen number that is set for each segment is not displayed on the list sweep table To check the pen number use the SEGMENT key to specify a segment and press the PEN key Repeat steps 3 through 27 until you obtain all segments you need Use the editing functions below as necessary Editing function for list sweep table Key stroke Select a segment number current selection is SEGMENT enter using keys in ENTRY marked with gt to the left side of the segment block number SEG row Enter edit mode for the selected segment EDIT Delete the selected segment pressing the key DELETE will delete the segment without confirmation Append a segmen
485. the entered value Step 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set all of the required compensation data definitions 154 Chapter 6 Step 1 Step 2 Table 6 2 NOTE Calibration Selecting Calibration Compensation Data Points Selecting Calibration Compensation Data Points You can choose the type of frequency points to use in obtaining user calibration data and fixture compensation data as follows Press the Cal key to display the Calibration Menu Press the COMP POINT key to select the measurement points used for user calibration or those for fixture compensation pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey Label Calibration Compensation Points COMP POINT FIXED Obtain calibration compensation data at fixed frequency points covering the entire frequency range of the 4294A In device measurement user calibration or fixture compensation is applied to each measurement point by using interpolation Even if the measurement points are changed by altering the sweep setups you don t need to retake the calibration or compensation data COMP POINT USER Obtain calibration compensation data at the same frequency points as used in actual device measurement which are determined by the sweep setups Each set of calibration compensation data is applied to each measurement at the same point If measurement points are changed by altering the sweep setups calibration compensation data become invalid and calibration or c
486. the segment DCV lt value gt DC BIAS CURRENT Sets the de bias current of the segment DCI lt value gt more 2 3 Displays Table B 50 Segment edit Edit Segment menu 3 3 on page 384 N A done Stores the edited list sweep segment and returns to Table B 47 List sweep List SDON Sweep menu on page 382 cancel Cancels the editing of the list sweep segment and returns to Table B 47 List SQUI sweep List Sweep menu on page 382 Table B 50 Segment edit Edit Segment menu 3 3 Key operation Sweep EDIT LIST EDIT more 1 3 more 2 3 Sweep EDIT LIST ADD more 1 3 more 2 3 sweep List Sweep menu on page 382 Softkey Function GPIB command BANDWIDTH gt Displays Table B 33 Measurement bandwidth Bandwidth configuration N A menu on page 374 In of the softkey label the currently selected measurement bandwidth is displayed POINT AVG FACTOR Sets the point averaging factor for the segment averaging count performed for PAVERFACT lt value gt each measurement point Specify an integer between 1 and 256 MKR gt START Enters the frequency at the current marker position to the sweep start value of the MKRSTAR segment MKR gt STOP Enters the frequency at the current marker position to the sweep stop value of the MKRSTOP segment MKR gt CENTER Enters the frequency at the current marker position to the sweep center value of MKRCENT the segment
487. the specified sweep points 1 number of points with the rotary knob step keys a W or numeric entry keys and perform measurements at the point If the manual sweep function is set to on you can also enter sweep points 1 number of points with the sweep key MANS lt value gt span is a method to set the linear frequency axis as a horizontal axis whose left edge is the minimum frequency and whose right edge is the maximum frequency in the entire list sweep table On the other hand segment span is a method to set as the horizontal axis of the graph an axis in which the measurement points of each segment are equally positioned in the measurement order in the entire table from the left edge to right edge of the graph measurement number order axis If COMPLEX Z Y has been selected as measurement parameter there is no sweep parameter axis on the graph and therefore this configuration is invalid TIME gt Displays Table B 45 Sweep time Sweep Time menu on page 382 N A TYPE gt Displays Table B 46 Sweep type Sweep Type menu on page 382 In of N A the softkey label the currently selected sweep type is displayed linear sweep LINEAR log sweep LOG or list sweep LIST EDIT LIST gt Displays Table B 47 List sweep List Sweep menu on page 382 EDITLIST LIST SPAN Switches the list span configuration of the horizontal axis of the graph in list LISPAN sweep between sing
488. the test fixture perform the calibration procedure described below Calibration When an Exclusive Fixture is Connected to the 42942A afafa angs nnf a ea User Calibration 42942A When user defined Calibration Kit is used Terminal Adapter Test Fixture Meeren Fixture Compensation Device 4294a0e081 This calibration procedure is applied when the following Agilent test fixtures are connected to the 42942A s 7 mm port e 16092A Lead Chip component test fixture e 16093A Lead component test fixture e 16093B Lead component test fixture e 16191A Chip component test fixture e 16192A Chip component test fixture e 16193A Chip component test fixture e 16454A Magnetic material test fixture Make sure that the adapter selection is set to 42942A Terminal Adapter 7mm 42942A Chapter 6 139 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Calibration D Calibration When an Exclusive Fixture is Connected to the 42942A See Adapter Setting on page 67 for adapter selection When performing calibration for the 7 mm port of the 42942A with a user defined calibration kit be sure to use the proper calibration kit Refer to User Calibration on page 147 for the user calibration procedure User calibration is not required if you do
489. the upper limit of dc voltage for the segment in the parameter settings located in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the upper limit of dc voltage e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press the unit key G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value Press the MIN LIMIT VOLTAGE key This will display the current setting for the lower limit of dc voltage for the segment in the parameter settings located in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify a value for the lower limit of dc voltage e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press the unit key G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value When the dc bias applied to DUT exceeds the upper or lower voltage limit specified in the above procedure the error message dcBIAS CONSTANT OPERATION FAILED error number 138 will be displayed in the instrument message area in the upper left part of the screen The dc voltage limit values specified by the MAX LIMIT VOLTAGE or MIN LIMIT VOLTAGE key take effect when the dc bias mod
490. these steps to set check the internal clock s date date display format and time Setting Checking the Date Press the System key to display the System menu Press the CLOCK key to display the Internal Clock menu Press the DATE MODE key to select the date mode which determines the date s display format pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey label Date mode DATE MODE MM DD YY Selects 2 digit number for month 2 digit number for day 4 digit number for year as the date display format DATE MODE DD MM YY Selects 2 digit number for day 2 digit number for month 4 digit number for year as the date display format The date display format specified here is not applied to the dates in the file list displayed on the HP Instrument BASIC screen when the CAT command is executed Press the DATE key to display the Date Configuration menu Press the MONTH key In the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen a number indicating the currently set month is displayed Below it the currently set date year month and day is displayed in a smaller size with the date mode set in Step 3 When you press the DATE key in Step 4 the same display appears in the set parameter value field as when the MONTH key is pressed Therefore you do not actually need to press the MONTH key here You use the MONTH key when you want to change the month setting after executing Steps 7 through 10 Use the
491. this key you must store data into the memory trace DISP DATM For the current active trace A or B subtracts the data in the memory trace from the measured data stores the result into the data trace and displays it on the screen If this key is selected D M is displayed at the left edge of the screen in the same color as the trace DISP DMNM For the current active trace A or B executes the calculation of DATA MEM MEM x100 DATA measured data MEM memory trace data stores the result into the data trace and displays it on the screen If DELTA is selected D M is displayed at the left edge of the screen in the same color as the trace You can select this key only when the measurement parameter is not COMPLEX Z Y DISP DELP For the current active trace A or B divides the measured data by the memory trace data stores the result into the data trace and displays it on the screen If DATA MEM is selected D M is displayed at the left edge of the screen in the same color as the trace You can select this key only when the measurement parameter is COMPLEX Z Y DISP DDVM DATA MEMORY For both trace A and trace B stores the current measured data into the memory trace DATMEM return Returns to the display menu 1 N A 1 The factory default colors used to display traces of the state are as follows data trace A yellow data trace B blue memory
492. tion e A Calibration When Using Direct Connection Type Test Fixture on page 133 e B Calibration for Four Terminal Pair 1 m Extension on page 135 e C Calibration for Four Terminal Pair 2 m Extension on page 137 e D Calibration When an Exclusive Fixture is Connected to the 42942A on page 139 e E Calibration When the 7 mm Port of the 42942A is Extended on page 141 e F Calibration When a Probe Adapter is Connected to the 42941A on page 143 e G Calibration When the 3 5 mm Port of the 42941A is Extended on page 145 For the three calibration methods refer to the following sections e User Calibration on page 147 Port Extension Compensation on page 150 e Fixture Compensation on page 151 e Selecting Calibration Compensation Data Points on page 155 Chapter 6 131 Calibration Selecting Appropriate Calibration Method NOTE The user calibration data and fixture compensation data can be saved in the mass storage of the Agilent 4294A For details see Save and Recall the Agilent 4294A Internal Data on page 270 132 Chapter 6 Figure 6 1 Calibration A Calibration When Using Direct Connection Type Test Fixture A Calibration When Using Direct Connection Type Test Fixture This section describes the calibration procedures to follow when a direct connection type test fixture is connected to the four terminal pair port of the Agilent 4294A and a de
493. tion Clear List menu Key operation Sweep EDIT LIST CLEAR LIST Softkey Function GPIB command yes Deletes all contents of the currently edited list sweep table from the screen and returns to Table B 47 List sweep List Sweep menu on page 382 However even after all of the contents of the list sweep table have been deleted from the screen with this key you can reset the previously stored list sweep table by pressing the cancel key in Table B 47 List sweep List Sweep menu on page 382 without deleting its contents N A cancel Cancels the deletion of the list sweep table from the screen and returns to Table B 47 List sweep List Sweep menu on page 382 N A Appendix B 385 Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Source key Softkeys displayed by pressing the Source key Table B 53 Source oscillator Source Osc menu Key operation Source Softkey Function GPIB command FREQUENCY Sets the fixed oscillator frequency CW frequency when performing sweeps CWFREQ lt value gt with a parameter other than frequency LEVEL Sets the fixed oscillator level when performing sweeps with a parameter other POWE lt value gt than oscillator level OSC UNIT Selects voltage VOLT or current CURR as the unit of oscillator level POWMOD configuration The unit set here is applied to both fixed oscillator level and VOL
494. tion Color Item menu 3 3 Display more 1 2 MODIFY COLOR MODIFY ITEM COLOR more 1 3 more 2 3 page 368 Softkey Function GPIB command PEN 4 Selects PEN 4 as the display item that can be changed with the MODIFY COLO PEN4 COLOR key PEN 5 Selects PEN 5 as the display item that can be changed with the MODIFY COLO PENS COLOR key PEN 6 Selects PEN 6 as the display item that can be changed with the MODIFY COLO PEN6 COLOR key more 3 3 Displays Table B 23 Item color modification Color Item menu 1 3 on N A page 368 return Returns to Table B 22 Display color modification Modify Color menu on N A 1 These pens can be used to draw graphics by specifying them in HP Instrument BASIC programs Table B 26 Key operation Item color entry Color Item menu Display more 1 2 MODIFY COLOR MODIFY ITEM COLOR MODIFY COLOR Display more 1 2 MODIFY COLOR MODIFY ITEM COLOR more 1 3 MODIFY COLOR Display more 1 2 MODIFY COLOR MODIFY ITEM COLOR more 1 3 more 2 3 MODIFY COLOR Softkey Function GPIB command TINT Adjusts tint of the displayed items you have chosen from Table B 23 Item color modification Color Item menu 1 3 on page 368 Table B 24 Item color modification Color Item menu 2 3 on page 369 or Table B 25 Item color modification Color Item menu 3 3 on page 369 TINT lt value
495. tion pressing the key toggles your selection Softkey Label Port Extension Compensation EXTENSION ON off On make the port extension value valid for measurement EXTENSION on OFF Off make the port extension value invalid for measurement 150 Chapter 6 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Step 5 NOTE Step 6 Step 7 NOTE Calibration Fixture Compensation Fixture Compensation Fixture compensation procedure Perform the fixture compensation as follows Fixture compensation consists of three compensation data acquisition processes OPEN SHORT and LOAD but you do not need to obtain all three types of compensation data when you perform fixture compensation Each type of compensation data can be turned on or off independently for measurement For normal measurement it is recommended that you perform fixture OPEN compensation and fixture SHORT compensation Press the Cal key to display the Calibration Menu Select the calibration compensation data acquisition points in accordance with Selecting Calibration Compensation Data Points on page 155 Press the FIXTURE COMPEN key to display the Fixture Compensation Menu If required set user defined standard values in accordance with Defining the standard values for fixture compensation on page 152 When you perform fixture LOAD compensation for the 16451B Dielectric Test Fixture you need special setups and procedures for s
496. tkey Function GPIB command TITLE gt Displays Table B 17 Title menu on page 366 and waits for entry of a string TITL lt string gt The entered string is displayed in the title area of each active trace on the screen Up to 65 characters can be displayed EQUIV CKT gt Displays Table B 18 Equivalent circuit analysis Equiv Circuit menu on N A page 366 ALLOCATION gt Displays Table B 21 Display allocation Disp Alloc menu on page 367 N A MODIFY COLOR gt Displays Table B 22 Display color modification Modify Color menu on N A page 368 more 2 2 Displays Table B 13 Display Display menu 1 2 on page 364 N A 364 Appendix B Table B 15 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Display key Trace definition Define Trace menu Display DEF TRACE Softkey Function GPIB command DATA MEMORY DATA and MEMORY DATA MEM DELTA l DATA MEM For the current active trace A or B stores the measured data into the data trace without further calculation and displays it DISP DATA For the current active trace A or B displays the memory trace on the screen Before selecting this key you must store data into the memory trace DISP MEMO For the current active trace A or B stores the measured data into the data trace and displays both the data trace and the memory trace Before selecting
497. to Subtracting an Offset Value on page 184 Chapter 7 181 Figure 7 17 Figure 7 18 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Trace based Comparison and Calculation Measuring reference data for comparison with constant frequency of 50 MHz DC BIAS ON VeFTBC WAC FIDE START 1 Volt CH 50 MHz OSC 56 m olt STOP A Volt 4294a0j036 Comparing trace data by selecting DATA and MEMORY key WE CMP Sd 2 a re oe ee PEE SERES eres em EY DC BIAS ON VTEC WAC FIDE START 1 Volt CH SG MHz OSC 56 m olt STOP A Volt 4294a0j037 182 Chapter 7 Figure 7 19 Figure 7 20 NOTE Displaying differential from reference data by selecting DATA MEMORY key VAC 5TA 4294a0j038 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Trace based Comparison and Calculation Cr SCALE iGG pF div REF 300 pF G SCALE 166 mS div REF 500 ms EXtROF OOOO OOE DC BIAS ON TAC WID RT 18 Volt CH SG MHz OSC 50 m olt STOP Volt Displaying differential percentage from reference data by selecting DELTA key B YE CHF DM Hid VAC STA 4294a0j039 cp 16 div REF SCALE 40 x SCALE i166 mS div REF 500 ms DC BIAS ON ae IA Y IDC RT 16 wolt CH 56 MHz OSC 56 m volt STOP 6 volt When the result of a calculation is displayed on the data trace the Instrument Status area Chapter 7 183 Step 1 St
498. trace A green memory trace B brown You can change the colors of the traces by using the keys in Table B 23 Item color modifica tion Color Item menu 1 3 on page 368 Table B 16 Key operation Bias Monitor Bias Monitor menu Display BIAS MON Softkey Function GPIB command OFF Turns off the de bias monitor display BMON OFF VOLT Monitors the de bias voltage value and displays it in the lower right area of the BMON VOLT l screen CURRENT Monitors the dc bias current value and displays it in the lower right area of the BMON CURR screen return Returns to Table B 13 Display Display menu 1 2 on page 364 N A Appendix B 365 Table B 17 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Display key Title menu Display more 1 2 TITLE Softkey Function GPIB command SELECT LETTER Enters the character at the character selection cursor A which has been selected N A with the arrow keys N or H and the rotary knob at the position of the cursor _ on the string entry line and moves the cursor to the right by 1 character SPACE Enters a space at the position of the cursor _ on the string entry line and moves N A the cursor to the right by 1 character BACK SPACE Moves the cursor _ on the string entry line to the left by 1 character and deletes N A the character in that position CLEAR TITLE
499. ttempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present e DO NOT Substitute Parts or Modify the Instrument To avoid the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform unauthorized modifications to the instrument Return the instrument to an Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained in operational condition e Dangerous Procedure Warnings Warnings such as the example below precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed Dangerous voltage levels capable of causing death are present in this instrument Use extreme caution when handling testing or adjusting this instrument WARNING CAUTION NOTE phpo 2 Safety Symbols General definitions of safety symbols used on the instrument or in manuals are listed below Instruction Manual symbol the product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instrument manual Alternating current Direct current On Supply Off Supply In position of push button switch Out position of push button switch Frame or chassis terminal A connection to the frame chassis of the equipment which normally includes all exposed metal structure This warning sign denotes a hazard It calls attentio
500. turn on the monitor display of the test signal level with the OSC LEVEL on OFF key in Table B 13 Display Display menu 1 2 on page 364 MKRMON ACI Displays the voltage value of the dc bias at the marker position on the current active trace A or B in the upper right area of the screen Before selecting this function you must select VOLT dc bias voltage value monitor in Table B 16 Bias Monitor Bias Monitor menu on page 365 MKRMON DCV Displays the current of the dc bias at the marker position on the current active trace A or B in the upper right area of the screen Before selecting this function you must select CURRENT dc bias current value monitor in Table B 16 Bias Monitor Bias Monitor menu on page 365 MKRMON DCI return Returns to Table B 71 Utility Utility menu on page 400 N A Appendix B 401 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the System key Softkeys displayed by pressing the System key Table B 74 System System menu System Softkey Function GPIB command IBASIC gt Displays Table B 75 HP Instrument BASIC IBASIC menu 1 3 on page 402 N A PROGRAM MENU gt Searches the mass storage specified with the STORE DEV key in Table B 111 File selection Select File menu on page 422 for program files and directories and displays Table B 111 File selection Se
501. ty is currently in search track mode and configured to detect the maximum value The main marker moves to the maximum value on the trace each time one sweep cycle is completed Min Indicates that the marker facility is currently in search track mode and configured to detect the minimum value The main marker moves to the minimum value on the trace each time one sweep cycle is completed Targ Indicates that the marker facility is currently in search track mode and configured to detect the specified target value The main marker moves to the target value on the trace each time one sweep cycle is Chapter 3 55 Front Rear Panel and LCD Display ltems Displayed on the LCD completed Peak Indicates that the marker facility is currently in search track mode and configured to detect the peak value The main marker moves to the peak value on the trace each time one sweep cycle is completed A marker mode AMkr Indicates that the marker facility is currently in default A marker mode In this mode the A marker keeps track of changes to the trace maintaining the same position in terms of the sweep parameter value FxdA Indicates that the marker facility is currently in fixed A marker mode In this mode the A marker is fixed at a certain point on the screen without reflecting any changes to the trace It remains in the same position in terms of both the sweep parameter and measurement parameter values TrkA Indicates that the marker facility
502. us 1 OFF causes sub marker 1 to appear at the SMKR1 ON current position of the main marker marker number 0 After that each time this key is pressed sub marker 1 moves to the position of the main marker at that time If in the on instead of OFF status of the softkey label the measurement parameter value and the sweep parameter value at the position of sub marker 1 are displayed This function enables you to read out the values of the sub marker easily without using the marker list function in Table B 71 Utility Utility menu on page 400 2 OFF For sub marker 2 executes the same operation as the above key for sub marker 1 SMKR2 ON 3 OFF For sub marker 3 executes the same operation as the above key for sub marker 1 SMKR3 ON 4 OFF For sub marker 4 executes the same operation as the above key for sub marker 1 SMKR4 ON 5 OFF For sub marker 5 executes the same operation as the above key for sub marker 1 SMKR5 ON 390 Appendix B Table B 59 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Marker key Sub marker configuration Set SMKR menu Marker SUB MKR Softkey Function GPIB command 6 OFF For sub marker 6 executes the same operation as the above key for sub marker 1 SMKR6 ON 7 OFF For sub marker 7 executes the same operation as the above key for sub marker 1 SMKR7 ON return Returns to Table B 58 Marker Marker menu on page
503. uting this key returns to Table B 35 Adapter configuration Adapter menu on page 376 ECALDON cancel Cancels the setup for the selected adapter and returns to Table B 35 Adapter configuration Adapter menu on page 376 Setup data previously executed is valid ECALQUI Appendix B 377 Table B 37 Key operation Key Definitions Sofikeys displayed by pressing the Cal key Fixture compensation Fixture Comp menu Cal FIXTURE COMPEN Softkey Function GPIB command OPEN on OFF Validates invalidates turns on off the OPEN correction of the fixture compensation for measurements If the measurement of the OPEN data using the OPEN key and the storage of the compensation coefficient have not been performed this key cannot be toggled on and off COMSTA ONIOFF SHORT on OFF Validates invalidates turns on off the SHORT correction of the fixture compensation for measurements If the measurement of the SHORT data using the SHORT key and the storage of the compensation coefficient have not been performed this key cannot be toggled on and off COMSTB ONIOFF LOAD on OFF Validates invalidates turns on off the LOAD correction of the fixture compensation for measurements If the measurement of the LOAD data using the LOAD key and the storage of the compensation coefficient have not been performed this key cannot be toggled on and off COMSTC ONIOFF OP
504. utoff points are searched for with respect to the two currently displayed cutoff points toward the inside on the sweep parameter axis and each parameter of trace bandwidth analysis is displayed for the cutoff point detected first Outer search two different cutoff points are searched for with respect to the two currently displayed cutoff points toward the outside on the sweep parameter axis and each parameter of trace bandwidth analysis is displayed for the cutoff point detected first SEARCH IN SEARCH OUT Press these softkeys several times if necessary to find the trace bandwidth analysis parameter at the target cutoff point Chapter 8 241 Analysis and Processing of Result Analyze trace bandwidth NOTE Cutoff point re search does not cause the main marker to move so it does not affect the peak value If the two cutoff points cannot be found by trace bandwidth analysis the message TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND will appear in the upper left area of the screen If a partial search range is specified by following Specify partial search range on page 267 trace bandwidth analysis will be executed within that range Even if the trace bandwidth analysis function is turned off the marker used for analysis will not disappear from the screen To hide all markers turn them off by pressing Marker MKR ON off and the appropriate key operation 242 Chapter 8 Figure 8 17 Step 1 Step 2 Analysis and Processing
505. ve Trace for a COMPLEX Z Y Graph impedance P REFERENCE Y Y oR A VAC IAC YID CENTER 1 MHz OSC 588 molt SPAN 26 kHz 4294a0j032 Step 7 Press the SCALE DIV key The Parameter Setting field in the upper left area of the screen indicates the scale per division currently in effect For a complex plane both the vertical and horizontal axes use the same scale per division Step 8 Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the scale per division e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and and then press one of the unit keys G n M y k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TID to set the desired value 174 Chapter 7 Figure 7 14 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Setting Up the Display of Measurement Results Manually Scaling the Active Trace for a COMPLEX Z Y Graph Setting the scale per division for a complex plane for measuring complex impedance VAC IAC YID CENTER 188 MHz OSC 586 mVolt SPAN 2 kHz 4294a0j033 Scaling the Active Trace for a Polar Chart When your graph is a polar chart you can scale the active trace by specifying the full scale value that is the distance from the origin to the outermost circle Activate the trace you want to manually scale To activate Press Trace A A Trace B B Press the
506. vice is connected to the test fixture contacts Calibration When Direct Connection Type Test Fixture is Used Ber nmaa oog Togoa annaa F a HOOF 3 Hbjea eaca ob eo o50e Direct Connection Type Test Fixture Device 4294a0e078 Direct connection type test fixtures include e 16034E Chip component test fixture e 16034G Chip component test fixture e 16034H Chip component test fixture e 16044A Chip component test fixture e 16047A Lead component test fixture e 16047C Lead component test fixture e 16047D Lead component test fixture e 16047E Lead component test fixture e 16314A Balanced Unbalanced 4 Terminal Converter Although the following test fixtures have cables their calibration must be performed in the same way as a direct connection type test fixture e 16065A External DC Bias Fixture e 16089A Kelvin Clip Lead Chapter 6 133 Calibration A Calibration When Using Direct Connection Type Test Fixture e 16089B Kelvin Clip Lead e 16089C Kelvin Clip Lead e 16089D Alligator Clip Lead e 16089E Kelvin Clip Lead Step 1 Make sure that the adapter selection is set to No Adapter NONE See Adapter Setting on page 67 for adapter selection Step 2 Perform the fixture compensation
507. wise Connecting the Agilent 16047E Test Fixture LA rei ros xe 4 ore nator eO a Peek Out 16047e0j0102 a E Li HIGH NOTE Reverse the above procedure when removing the Agilent 16047E Test Fixture Chapter 2 31 NOTE Learning Operation Basics Preparing for a Measurement Turn ON the Power Press the power switch to turn on the power to the Agilent 4294A The Agilent 4294A performs a power on self test During the self test the model name firmware revision number date options copyright notice and other information appear on the LCD When the self test is completed the measurement screen appears on the LCD Set the Adapter Type to NONE Use the keystroke sequence Cal ADAPTER NONE to configure the Agilent 4294A to operate without an adapter This option must be selected when the Agilent 4294A is connected to a direct coupling type test fixture such as the Agilent 16047E With the adapter type set to NONE the Instrument Status area on the measurement screen does not display the EX1 EX2 7mm and PRB indicators When you use the Agilent 4294A for actual applications you may want to use an adapter such as a 7 mm conversion adapt
508. xample when you attempt to specify an invalid value for the LOAD correction reference value or the LOAD correction data values that are not finite when converted to R X form impedance values If this error occurs the command is ignored This error also occurs when you attempt to specify an invalid LOAD correction reference value from the front panel keys Parameter not allowed The number of parameters is larger than that the command requires For example though the POIN command requires one parameter such as POIN 101 two parameters are added as POIN 101 1 PERCENT FORMAT NOT SELECTED When the percent format is not selected as the display format you attempt to select delta as the data operation setting you send the MATH DELP command If you want to select delta as the data operation setting the percent format command FMT PERC must be selected as the display format PHASE LOCK LOOP UNLOCKED Anomalies in the Agilent 4294A s internal circuit are detected phase lock loop is not locked The instrument needs adjustment or repair Contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office or the company you purchased this instrument from POWER ON TEST FAILED In the power on self test an instrument fault is detected Contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office or the company you purchased this instrument from PRINTER not on not connected out of paper The printer does not respond to commands from
509. xtension compensation can be performed when 42942A Terminal Adapter 7mm 42942A or 42941A Impedance Probe PROBE 42941A is chosen in adapter selection Perform the port extension compensation as follows Press the Cal key to display the Calibration Menu Press the PORT EXTENSION key to display the Port Extension Menu Press one of the keys below to set the port extension value Port Extension Value and Unit Key Stroke Set port extension value in delay time VALUE TIME Set port extension value in electrical length VALUE LENGTH The current port extension value is displayed in the setting parameter area of the LCD s upper left side Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the port extension value e Enter the desired value with the numerical keys 0 through 9 and then press one of the unit keys G n M u k m or x1 e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys T VJ to set the desired value You can set the port extension value in either electrical length or delay time When the port extension value is set by one of these keys the value is converted to the other unit and displayed on the bottom line of the setting parameter area in small letters You can also see the converted value in the setting parameter area by pressing the other key Press the EXTENSION on OFF key to turn on the port extension compensa
510. y start measurement by pressing the MANUAL key This indicator appears after you have used the keystroke sequence Trigger SOURCE MANUAL bus Indicates that the instrument is waiting for a measurement trigger command to be input through GP IB or from a LAN This indicator appears after you have used the keystroke sequence Trigger SOURCE HP IB LAN 18 Equivalent Circuit Parameters Field This field shows the equivalent circuit parameter values after you have used the keystroke sequence Display more 1 2 EQUIV CKT PARAMETERS on OFF To use this field to view the parameter values you can first either apply the equivalent circuit analysis feature to calculate the parameter values from the trace representing the mesured frequency characteristics or enter the equivalent parameter values for simulating frequency characteristics 19 External Reference Input Status Field When a reference signal is input to the external reference input terminal on the rear panel this field shows ExtRef even if the instrument is not phase locked The indicator disappears when the reference signal stops 20 Parameter Setting Instrument Message Field When you press a key to set a particular parameter for example the Start to set the sweep Start value this field shows the current setting When you are changing the current setting the field also serves as the place to enter the new value through the ENTRY block keys In addition
511. y the Save menu Press the FILE UTILITIES key to display the File Utilities menu In of the STORE DEV key s softkey label the currently selected storage device is displayed Softkey label Selected storage device STORE DEV FLOPPY Floppy disk drive STORE DEV MEMORY Volatile memory disk STORE DEV FLASH Nonvolatile memory disk flash memory To delete a file or directory on the currently selected storage device proceed to Step 6 To delete a file or directory on a storage device other than the currently selected one press the STORE DEV key to display the Mass Storage menu Chapter 9 309 Managing Files Setting Using Control and Management Functions Step 5 Select the storage device from which you want to delete a file or directory Storage device Key operation Floppy disk drive Volatile memory disk Nonvolatile memory disk flash memory FLOPPY MEMORY FLASH MEMORY Pressing one of the above keys returns the display to the File Utilities menu Step 6 Press the PURGE FILE key to display the File Selection menu Step 7 Use the following softkeys to display the file or directory you want to delete as a softkey label Function Key operation Displays the previous page of the file directory list Displays the next page of the file directory list Moves to the specified directory and displays PREV FILES NEXT FILES Directory name Table 9 17 Table 9 18 Ste
512. yed in a smaller size Execution of all of the internal tests takes approximately one and a half minutes When all the internal tests are completed the test result PASS or FAIL is displayed at the right of DIAGNOSTIC TEST 0 ALL INTERNAL in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen If the test fails the Agilent 4294A may be at fault Contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office or the company you purchased the instrument from Checking the Result of Each Test You can check the result of each executed test after the batch execution of the internal tests Press the System key to display the System menu Press the DIAGNOSTIC TEST key to display the Self Diagnosis menu At this time the 320 Chapter 9 Step 3 NOTE Setting Using Control and Management Functions Performing Self Diagnosis of the Agilent 4294A currently selected test item is displayed in the set parameter value field in the upper left area of the screen Use the keys or rotary knob of the ENTRY block in one of the following ways to specify the test number for the item whose result you want to check e Enter the desired value with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the x1 unit key e Turn the rotary knob O until the desired value is set e Press the step keys TIN to set the desired value The desired test result is displayed at the right of the test number and test item in the set parameter

Impedance Analyzer - Agilent 4294A Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents